FB-MultiPier v5.6.

0
FB-MultiPier Features

Multiple Pier Modeling

Unique piers
Each pier can have an entire different set of properties, including: pier geometry, pile
group size, soil strata, loads, etc. Each pier can also have its own elevation. Up to 99
piers can be easily generated to rapidly layout an entire bridge. The 2D Bridge window
shows the bridge layout in plan and the 3D Bridge window shows the 3D visualization
of the bridge.

Pier rotation
Each pier can have a rotation about the vertical (Z) axis. This is ideal for modeling skew
bridges and radial piers on curved alignments.

Bridge superstructure
The bridge superstructure is incorporated into the model using an equivalent beam that
connects the centerline of two piers. The bearing connections at the pier supports can be
released, constrained, or user-defined using a custom load-displacement curve.

Two rows of bearing locations

Two independent lines of bearings accommodate the transfer of load from the bridge
superstructure to the piers. Because the bearings are offset from the center of the pier
cap, any pier cap torque induced from unequal spans is automatically included.

Wind Load Generation

Wind loads can be automatically generated for the bridge superstructure. The resulting
loads are applied to the bearings at each pier, more specifically to the bearing locations
of the transfer beam. These are based upon tributary areas and are redistributed during
analysis if the superstructure is continuous.
Dynamic Pier Analysis

Time step integration

Time history load functions and ground acceleration records can be applied to the
model. Different time step integration methods are available as well as a variety of ana-
lysis control parameters. Concentrated masses and dampers can be added to the model
to simulate added mass and energy dissipation effects.

Modal analysis
The modal analysis option performs a frequency analysis of the model. Both frequencies
and mode shapes are provided as output results.

Dynamic soil modeling

Soil gap modeling is available to model energy dissipation due to hysteretic damping.
Cyclic degradation parameters are also available to modify the lateral soil response dur-
ing dynamic loading.

Animated results
The 3D model displacement results can be animated for a time step integration analysis.
Animation results can be played and paused and a slider bar is provided for selectively
viewing individual time step results.

Time-Displacement plots
The displacement results for any model node can be plotted over time.

Seismic database
Ground acceleration records and response spectrums are provided for notable earth-
quakes.
1 Program Menus

1. File Menu
2. View Menu
3. Control Menu
4. Help Menu
5. About FB-MultiPier

1.1 File Menu

The File menu handles problem creation, file access, printing, and exiting the program.

Figure: 1.1.a File Menu Options

1.2 View Menu

The View menu controls the appearance of the toolbar at the top of the screen and the
status bar at the bottom of the screen.

Figure: 1.2.a View Menu Options

1.3 Control Menu

The Control menu allows the user to access the output data from the program, log file
options, project settings, program settings, and control the appearance of the fonts used
in the dialogs, graphics, and plots.

Figure: 1.3.a Control Menu Options

The Program Settings option will open the Program Settings Dialog with options for
memory settings.
1.4 Help Menu

The Help menu provides access to the Help Manual. There are two different Help
Manual formats: the Browser Format, and the PDF Format. If the Browser Format is selec-
ted, then an online version of the Help manual will open in the default browser.

The "About FB-MultiPier" option is provided to list the version number of the program
and current system settings. Access the license update wizard using "Update Software
License".

Figure: 1.4.a Help Menu Options

Help About Tutorial

1.5 About FB-MultiPier

The "About FB-MultiPier" dialog displays the following information :

l Version number
l Expiration date
l License type
l Number of seats
l License file path
l Physical RAM
l Drive Space
Figure: 1.5.a About FB-MultiPier
2 Model Data Pages

1. New Project/Model Page

2. Analysis Settings Page
3. Design Specs. Page
4. Dynamics Page
5. Lateral Stability Page
6. Pile Cap Page
7. Pile Page
8. Soil Page
9. Pier Page
10. Wall Structure Page
11. Extra Members Page
12. Load Page
13. Spring Page
14. Concentrated Mass/Damper Page
15. Retained Soil Page
16. Bridge Page

2.1 New Project/Model Page

Select a new model type in the "Select New Model Type" window, or change an existing
one in the "Model Data" window.
 Figure: 2.1.a New Model Page

Choose from the following model types:

1. Pier
2. Pile and Cap
3. Pile
4. High Mast Lighting/Sign
5. Retaining Wall
6. Sound Wall
7. Stiffness (Pile and Cap)
8. Pile Bent
9. Column
10. Bridge
11. One Pier Two Span
Select the unit type (English or SI) in the "Select New Model Type" window.

2.1.1 Pier Model

Figure: 2.1.b Pier Model

Select this option to begin a typical pier model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.2 Pile and Cap Model

Figure: 2.1.c Pile and Cap Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile and cap model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.3 Pile Model

Figure: 2.1.d Pile Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.4 High Mast Lighting/Sign Model

Figure: 2.1.e High Mast Lighting/Sign Model

Select this option to begin a typical high mast lighting/sign model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page. .

2.1.5 Retaining Wall Model

Figure: 2.1.f Retaining Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical retaining wall model.

Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.6 Sound Wall Model

Figure: 2.1.g Sound Wall Model

Select this option to begin a typical sound wall model.

Note: With this option, the Pier page becomes the Wall Structure page.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.7 Stiffness Model

Figure: 2.1.h Stiffness Model

Select this option to begin a typical stiffness model. As an alternative to the stiffness
model type, the equivalent stiffness can be calculated for any pier, pile bent, pile and
cap, or single pile model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.8 Pile Bent Model

Figure: 2.1.i Pile Bent Model

Select this option to begin a typical pile bent model.

Note: With this option, the Pier Page becomes the Bent Cap page.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.9 Column

Figure: 2.1.j Column Model

Select this option to begin a typical column model.

The “Column” model type allows for the convenient analysis/design of a single struc-
tural (frame) member. The column ends are supported by springs, and the engineer
may adjust the spring stiffnesses to simulate the actual end support conditions. A spring
value equal to zero eliminates that support. External forces and self weight may be
applied to all nodes on the column.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.10 Bridge Model

Figure: 2.1.k Bridge Model

Select this option to begin a typical bridge (multiple piers) model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.1.11 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model

Figure: 2.1.l One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Model

Select this option to begin the OPTS model.

For a complete list of model types go to the Model Page.

2.2 Analysis Settings Page

 Figure: 2.2.a Analysis Settings Page

Pile/Pier Behavior allows "Linear - Gross", "Linear" or "Nonlinear" material behavior,

which in turn, allow for input of "Gross" or detailed cross section descriptions.

The Soil Behavior option "Include Soil" is enabled by default and incorporates nonlinear
soil resistance into the model. Unchecking this option removes the soil and requires the
user to enter pile tip spring stiffness to restrain the model.

Print control options determine what information is printed in the output file.

Choose options in the following categories:

1. Pile/Pier Behavior
2. Section Properties
3. Iteration Control
4. Analysis Type
5. Soil Behavior
6. Interaction Diagram Phi Factor
7. Design Specification Options
8. Stiffness Options
9. Print Control
2.2.1 Pile/Pier Behavior

The setting for "Linear - Gross", "Linear", or "Nonlinear" behavior can be assigned inde-
pendently for:
- All pile/shaft elements;
- All pier column/pier cap/extra member elements.

"Linear - Gross" Behavior:

• Cross section input consists of "Gross" properties such as "Area", "Intertia About
2 Axis", and moduli.
• Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.
• Deflections do not cause secondary moments; no P-delta moments (moments of
the axial force times the displacements of one end of element to another).

"Linear" Behavior:
• Cross section input consists of detailed descriptions of dimensions and relative
positions.
• Assumes the behavior is purely linear elastic.
• Deflections do not cause secondary moments; no P-delta moments (moments of
the axial force times the displacements of one end of element to another).

"Nonlinear" Behavior:
• Cross section input consists of detailed descriptions of dimensions and relative
positions.
• Uses input or default stress strain curves which are integrated over the cross-sec-
tion of the piles/pier components.
• Uses P-delta moments (moments of the axial force times the displacements of
one end of element to another). Furthermore, since the user subdivides the pile/pier
members into a number of sub-elements, the P-y moments (moments of axial force
times internal displacements within members due to bending) are also modeled.

Note: When "Nonlinear" behavior is selected, the text output results for an analysis
may include the warning that 'The concrete in at least one element of this section has
cracked'. This message indicates that AT LEAST one of the elements in the model that
utilize nonlinear behavior have developed concrete tensile strains in excess of the crack-
ing strain. However, this warning message does NOT indicate that all elements in the
model have undergone cracking. These messages are printed to the analysis log file and
text output file. For the text output file prints, the warning is issued within the regions
specific to each load case (or load combination, time step).

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.2 Section Properties

The option for "Transformed Section" properties is available within the "Section Prop-
erties" region of the Analysis Settings page. This option is used when "Linear" behavior
is selected, and NOT used if only "Linear - Gross" and/or "Nonlinear" behavior is selec-
ted.

Figure: 2.2.b Transformed Section properties option in Analysis Settings page

Note: If "Linear" behavior is selected, and the "Transformed Section" checkbox is

NOT checked, then cross section properties used in analysis for linear sections will
NOT be transformed.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.3 Iteration Control

Enter the maximum number of iterations that analysis will run before it determines that
the solution will not converge.

Note: If a small value is entered, the solution may not converge, because it has not
been given the chance to finish the calculations. On the other hand, if a very large value
is entered, the analysis may take a long time.

A typical value for the number of iterations is 100.

Enter the tolerance between successive iterations that the analysis must reach before
providing a solution.

Note: The user-input convergence tolerance is used by the engine to sweep through
every node in the model. For each iteration, an out-of-balance force for every nodal
degree-of-freedom is calculated and compared to the convergence tolerance. During
this sweep, the maximum out-of-balance force is cataloged. If, after completing the
sweep for the entire model, the maximum magnitude out-of-balance force is found to
be less than the convergence tolerance, then the engine decides that a solution has been
reached. Otherwise, the system stiffness is updated, and the next iteration cycle begins.
Because, for each iteration and nodal degree-of-freedom, the out-of-balance force is dir-
ectly compared to the convergence tolerance, it is important to select an input con-
vergence tolerance that is small relative to the smallest (meaningful) computed nodal
reaction force.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.4 Analysis Type

The Analysis Page offers two types of analysis:

1. Static
2. Dynamic

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.5 Soil Behavior

Check "Include Soil" to include soil in the analysis. If "Include Soil" is unchecked, then
enter the stiffness at the tip of the pile.

Figure: 2.2.c Soil Behavior Options

Several advanced soil behavior options are also available, and can be accessed by open-
ing the Additional Options dialog.

Figure: 2.2.d Soil Behavior - Advanced Options

Check "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" to activate soil rotational resistance
about the 2 and 3 axes. This feature is detailed in 12.4 Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rota-
tion, and may be useful when modeling large-diameter foundation members.

Note: The "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" feature is recommended
ONLY for use with drilled shaft axial models.

Check "Exclude Skin Friction for Embedded Casings" to exclude t-z resistance for embed-
ded portions of concrete piles or shafts that contain casings.

Check "Disable Georgiadis Layer Corrections" to disable layer corrections that are oth-
erwise carried out during analysis in forming p-y soil resistance curves in layered soil
profiles (Georgiadis 1983).

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.6 Interaction Diagram Phi Factor

Select from the following Interaction Diagram Phi Factor options.

1. AASHTO - program uses AASHTO phi factors
2. AREMA - program uses AREMA phi factors
3. User-defined phi - user can enter custom phi factors for Flexure and Axial behaviors

see Interaction Diagrams for more details.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.7 Design Specification Options

Check "Auto-generation of Load Combinations" to enable the Design Specs. page, which
in turn allows for generation of AASHTO (LRFD), AASHTO (LFD), or AREMA load com-
binations.

When converting an existing model to a model that makes use of the Design Spe-
cifications features, the existing load cases will be deleted so that new design spe-
cification load cases can be added. To add design specification load cases and assign a
load type to each load case, navigate to the "Load Case Manager" on the "Design Specs."
page.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.8 Stiffness Options

Stiffness option is available for pier, pile bent, pile and cap, and pile models. Input or
graphically select the node of interest. Please see "16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation"
for more details.

Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.2.9 Print Control

Select the type of output to be printed to an output file from the following:

1. Pile Displacements
2. Pile Element Forces
3. Pile Properties
4. Pier Displacements
5. Pier Element Forces
6. Pier Properties
7. Soil Response Forces
8. Soil Data per Layer
9. Soil Data per Pile Node
10. Soil Resistance Curves
11. Unbalanced Forces
12. Bridge Span Element Displacements
13. Bridge Span Element Forces
14. Bridge Span Properties
15. Bridge Span Temperature Loads
16. Cap Stresses and Moments
17. Stress-Strain Curve Data
18. Spring Forces
19. Interaction Data
20. Coordinates
21. XML Data Printing – Creates XML output file that can be used to extract FB-
MultiPier data. See FB-MultiPier XML Specification documentation.

Note: Anytime XML Data Printing is enabled, the Pile Element Forces, Pier Prop-
erties, Pier Element Forces, and Coordinates flags will also be treated as enabled.
Return to the Analysis Settings Page.

2.3 Design Specs. Page

The Design Specs. page can be used to generate load combinations in accordance with
the desired set of design specifications.

Note: The "Auto-generation of Load Combinations" option in the Design Spe-

cifications Options section of the Analysis Settings Page must be selected for this Page
to be accessible.

Figure: 2.3.a Design Specs. Page

Select the Load combinations that will be used in the analysis using the following:
 1. Design Approach
2. Load Generation
3. Load Case Manager
4. Edit Load Factors Table
5. Wind Load Generator
6. AASHTO (LRFD) Temperature Load Generator
7. Load Combination Preview Table
8. Limit States
9. AASHTO Vertical Wind Pressure Loads
10. AASHTO Fatigue Limit States
2.3.1 Design Approach

Select between the following Design Approaches.

1. AASHTO - Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method.
2. AASHTO - Load Factor Design (LFD) method.
3. AREMA - Load Factor Design (LFD) and Service Load Design (SLD).

Limit States will be updated depending on this selection.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.2 Load Generation

For a given Design Approach, the option is available to include self weight and/or buoy-
ancy cases.

For AASHTO (LRFD), self weight is included in the "DC" case and buoyancy is included in
the "WA" case.
For AASHTO (LFD), self weight is included in the "D" case and buoyancy is included in
the "B" case.
For AREMA, self weight is included in the "D" case and buoyancy is included in the "B"
case.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.3 Load Case Manager

The Load Case Manager manages the type and number of load cases in the model.
Changes made with this manager apply to every substructure.

Figure: 2.3.b Load Case Manager Dialog

To add a new load case, select a load case from the "Available Types" list. Then click the
"Add" ( << ) button. This will add the selected load case to the "Defined Load Cases" list.
To remove a defined load case, select a load case from the "Defined Load Cases" list.
Then click the "Remove" ( >> ) button.

To change the number of load cases for a particular load type, select a load case from
the "Defined Load Cases" list. Load case types which can be defined as multiple
instances are followed by parentheses and a number. Example: click on Live Load (1).
The "spinner" box located below the "Defined Load Cases" list will then update. The
engineer can then update the number in the "spinner" box and thereby modify the num-
ber of live load instances. Updates to the "spinner" box will correspondingly change the
number of load case instances for the currently selected load type in the "Defined Load
Cases" list, where between 1 and 25 instances can be defined.

Note: Certain load case types are grouped together. Namely: "Veh. Braking" and
"Impact" load types are grouped with "Live Load". Changing the number of instances for
"Live Load" will automatically change the number of instances for "Veh. Braking" and
"Impact".

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.4 Edit Load Factors Table

Load Factors can be edited by clicking on the "Edit Load Factors" button. Edit the indi-
vidual load factors in the table, or reset the values to the default values.

1. When using AASHTO (LRFD) Design Approach:

Default Load Factors from the table (and utilized in FB-MultiPier unless manually over-
ridden) are taken from AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 8th Edition, 2017, by
the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington,
D.C.

Figure: 2.3.c Maximum Load Factor Table using 'AASHTO (LRFD)' Design Approach.
The minimum Load Factor Table using AASHTO (LRFD) is not editable.

Figure: 2.3.d Minimum Load Factor Table using 'AASHTO (LRFD)' Design Approach.

2. When using 'AASHTO (LFD)' Design Approach:

Default Load Factors from the table (and utilized in FB-MultiPier unless manually over-
ridden) are taken from AASHTO LFD Standard Specifications for Highway Bridge, 17th
Edition, 2012, by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Offi-
cials, Washington, D.C. When using 'AASHTO (LFD)' , Gamma (load factor) is multiplied
by each coefficient in the corresponding group. These products can be seen in the 'Load
Preview Combination' dialog. For example, Dead Load (D) has a default value of 1.00. It
is multiplied by the GROUP-I Gamma value 1.3. Thus, the Load Preview Combination dia-
log displays the value 1.3 (1.00 * 1.3 = 1.3). This is the value used in the analysis.

Figure: 2.3.e Load Factor Table using 'AASHTO (LFD)' Design Approach.

3. When using 'AREMA' Design Approach:

Default Load Factors from the table (and utilized in FB-MultiPier unless manually over-
ridden) are taken from AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, 2018, by the American
Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association. When using 'AREMA', a
Gamma value (load factor) is multiplied by each coefficient in the corresponding group.
These products can be seen in the Load Preview Combination dialog. For example, Dead
Load (D) has a default value of 1.00. It is multiplied by the LFD-GROUP-I Gamma value
of 1.3. Thus, the Load Preview Combination dialog displays the value 1.3 (1.00 * 1.3 =
1.3). This is the value used in the analysis.

Figure: 2.3.f Load Factor Table using 'AREMA' Design Approach.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.5 Wind Load Generator

This feature facilitates generation of wind loads using 'AASHTO (LRFD)' design
approach.

Click "Generate Wind Load Cases" to convert the wind load to loads at the bearing loc-
ations and automatically create wind load cases. Depending on the model type you will
see one of the following dialog boxes.

This dialog appears for the Pier, Pile Bent, and One Pier Two Span model types.
 Figure: 2.3.g Wind Load Generation Dialog

The following dialog appears for the Bridge model type.

Figure: 2.3.h Bridge Wind Load Generation Dialog

A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The
equations used in the wind load generation are found here.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.6 AASHTO (LRFD) Temperature Load Generator

This feature is only available for AASHTO (LRFD) design approach.

Force effects due to superimposed temperature deformations can be automatically cal-

culated when TU, and/or TG load cases are defined. The temperature and superstructure
cross-section details can be entered on Bridge page → Edit Span → Section Properties
and Temperatures.

Figure: 2.3.i Temperature Load Generation Dialog

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.7 Load Combination Preview Table

The Load Combination Preview table catalogs all load types and load factors associated
with each load combination.

Figure: 2.3.jLoad Combination Preview Table

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.8 Limit States

Select the limit states to include in the analysis.

Note: For the AASHTO (LRFD) feature, the program does not display (or analyze) a
load combination unless the load types expected in that combination are defined. For
example, for AASHTO (LRFD), the STRENGTH-III load combination will not be considered
until a dead load type (DC) and a wind load type (WS) are defined. Dead, live, and wind
load types are considered mandatory to generate load combinations. All other load
types are optional. Check the load combination preview in the Design Specs. Page to con-
firm the generation of specific load combinations.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.9 AASHTO Vertical Wind Pressure Load

The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Spec. requires a vertical wind force to be considered in
Limit States Strength III and Service IV.
To facilitate this requirement, FB-MultiPier program enables users to include two sep-
arate load cases, i.e., VP (vertical pressure) and VR (vertical pressure for a reversed load
case), only for Strength III and Service IV.

Note: VR appears if and only if “Reversible Loads” is selected in the “Limit States to
Check” found on the Design Specs. page.

Figure: 2.3.k AASHTO Load Combination.

 Figure: 2.3.l Wind Load Generator.

These VP and VR load cases are only combined with WS1 (first wind-on-structure load
case). In such cases, if the Wind Load Generator is utilized, then the engineer should
assign a wind angle of 0.0 in association with WS1.

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.3.10 AASHTO Fatigue Limit States

Live load cases of Fatigue Limit States represent the load effects due to fatigue loading
and all the other limit states of which live load combinations are related to the normal
vehicular use of the bridge should be analyzed separately.

Difference between Fatigue Limit States I and II

The load factors for Fatigue I are of greater magnitude than those for Fatigue II. These
differences represent cumulative load effects associated with “infinite” and “finite”
fatigue loading cycles, respectively.

Note: The AASHTO spec. states that only the load cases of LL, IM, and CE are to be
included in Fatigue I and II.

Load Cases of LL, IM, CE, BR, PL, and LS

When assigning LL, the program will automatically create load cases for IM and BR.
These loads are typically assumed to coexist and are dependent upon one another. For
example, if LL is the result of two lanes being loaded, then BR will also be the result of
two lanes being loaded and so forth. If the bridge deck is curved then the user has the
option to assign Centrifugal Forces (CE) that also correspond to each LL case in a
sequential order.
Pedestrian Loading (PL), if used, is typically assumed to be a constant loading applied to
the bearings near the side walk positions and for this reason only one load case is
provided for PL. Very often in practice it is assumed that traffic may be positioned over
sidewalks.
Live Load Surcharge (LS) is typically a vehicular loading applied to the ground surface of
backfill being supported by a retaining wall. FB-MultiPier has a special model case
“Retaining Wall” that allows for this type of loading.
See the following AASHTO Spec. sections for additional details:
LL 3.6
PL 3.6
IM 3.6
CE 3.6
BR 3.6
LS 3.11

Return to the Design Specs. Page.

2.4 Dynamics Page

Figure: 2.4.a Dynamics Page - Time Step Integration

 Figure: 2.4.b Dynamics Page - Modal Response

The Dynamics Page provides various options for controlling a dynamic analysis.

Analysis Type
Two dynamic analysis types are available.

1. Time Step Integration - Uses implicit integration to solve for results at every time
step.
2. Modal Response Analysis – Applies static loads and then performs a response
spectrum analysis using the equilibrium (deformed) position. Performs a CQC of
the modal analysis results.

Note: Modal analysis requires the user to select the number of modes to use in the
analysis. For a Modal Response Spectrum analysis, enter the number of modes to con-
sider and the damping level used for the response spectrum. Then, check the modal
contribution factors in the printed output file to ensure that at least 90% of the struc-
ture mass is participating in the response.
Check "Dynamic Analysis Types" for more details.

Advanced Options
Relatively more advanced dynamic analysis options may be activated from within the
“Dynamics – Advanced” dialog (Figure: 2.4.c).

For "Time Step Integration" analysis, the Lumped Mass formulation (as opposed to con-
sistent mass formulation) can be enabled. Further, concrete and steel hysteresis options
are available. Additional details regarding hysteresis modeling are provided in: "Struc-
tural Material Hysteresis".

When multiple-support excitation analysis is being conducted, either a series (default) or

parallel p-y element configuration can be modeled. Also, for instances where the series
formulation is used, a Linear Threshold parameter can be input, where this parameter is
expressed as a percentage of p-ultimate (unique to each soil p-y spring). If the p-y
spring force exceeds this threshold, then the p-y element dashpot is temporarily dis-
engaged.

For “Time Step Integration” and “Modal Analysis”, the Rayleigh Damping Factors can be
automatically computed based on two modes of interest and a specified level of critical
damping. Further, the population of Rayleigh Damping Factors can be specified for any
of the Pier, Pile, or Soil portions of the model.

For “Modal Response” analysis, two options are available:

1. The engineer can elect to halt the analysis after the Eigen analysis has completed.
2. The CQC3 combination rule can be used in combining the direction-dependent res-
ults.
 Figure: 2.4.c Dynamics - Advanced

Time Stepping Parameters

Three types of time stepping options are available.

1. Average acceleration (Newmark).

2. Linear acceleration (Newmark).
3. Wilson-Theta.

Enter a constant value for the time step and the number of time steps to consider in the
analysis.

Dynamic Relaxation
The Dynamic Relaxation feature is utilized to initialize the system in equilibrium with per-
manent (static) loading, while minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the
presence of permanent loads. For more details, see "Dynamic Relaxation".
The reported analysis results do not include the effect of static loads (i.e. self weight).
Adding the static results and response spectrum results may not be conservative and is
left to engineering judgment.

Global Damping
Two types of damping input are available.

1. For Time Step Integration, Rayleigh damping can be specified. The damping is pro-
portional to the mass and stiffness. Factors can be entered for the pier, piles, and
soil. Note that if the ‘Damping’ checkbox is checked, but the mass and stiffness
damping coefficients for the Soil are both defined as ‘0.0’, then radiation damping
will be applied to embedded nodes in the model. See "Dynamic Soil Properties"
for additional details about radiation damping
2. For Modal Response, modal analysis damping can be specified. Enter the damping
level as a percentage of critical damping.

Check "Damping" for more details.

Soil Mass
Soil mass can be automatically incorporated into the system mass matrices. In this con-
text, the 'Percentage' is used to determine the mass of the soil that is attributed to the
translation degrees-of-freedom for each subsurface node in the model. The 'Percentage'
input is taken relative to the pile diameter (or equivalent diameter) at each subsurface
node.
For example, a 'Percentage' input value of 10% would correspond to masses of soil
extending 10% beyond the diameters (or equivalent diameters) of all pile cross sections.
The corresponding soil masses contained within the 10% regions would be accounted
for in the system mass matrices.
Note that if non-zero values are supplied to the 'Rayleigh Damping Factors' pertaining
to 'Soil', then the soil masses will also be automatically accounted for in the system
damping matrices.

Mass
Consistent (distributed) mass is used in FB-MultiPier.

Load Functions/Spectral Acceleration

The various load function and spectrum input options are described in "Time Functions".

Dynamics Print Options

"Node List" feature is available for single substructure models that use dynamic time his-
tory analysis. The nodes supplied to this table will correspond to the generation of three
separate text output files for each node, as follows: displacement time history, velocity
time history, and acceleration time history.

Figure: 2.4.d Dynamics Print Node List Dialog

2.5 Lateral Stability Page

Pushover
Click on the "Run Pushover Analysis" checkbox to activate the pushover analysis mode,
detailed here.

Minimum Pile Tip Embedment

Click on the "Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment" checkbox to activate the pile tip
embedment analysis mode, detailed here. Note that this feature can be utilized sim-
ultaneously with the "Pushover" analysis feature.

Proximity to Collapse
Click on the "Proximity to Collapse" button to build up definitions of potential collapse
mechanisms, as detailed here.
Figure: 2.5.a Lateral Stability Page
2.5.1 Pushover Analysis

Click on the "Run Pushover Analysis" checkbox to activate the pushover analysis mode.
Two load cases must be defined: 1) The first load case is used to apply permanent loads
that will not be incremented (e.g., self weight); and, 2) The second load case is used to
specify loads that will be incremented.

Input Options
The following inputs are needed for making use of the Pushover analysis feature:

1. Enter the number of pushover steps. This is the number of times that the incremental
loads from load case 2 will be compounded on top of the permanent loads from load
case 1.
2. The load increment factor multiplies the loads in the second load case to create an
accumulating load that is applied until convergence cannot be achieved, or the number
of steps is completed. For example, a load increment factor of 1.0 would add 100% of
the original load to each incremental load case. If the original load increment was 10
kips, then the second load increment would be 20 kips, and the third load increment 30
kips, and so forth for the number of load steps. The failure load is printed to the output
file when a load is reached that cannot converge to a solution.
 Figure: 2.5.b Lateral Stability Page with Pushover analysis controls

Return to the Lateral Stability Page.

2.5.2 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis

Minimum Pile Tip Embedment (MPTE) analysis facilitates automated assessment of lat-
eral stability and determination of minimum pile tip embedment lengths, and is avail-
able for all model types that contain soil.

The process involves running a series of trial embedments, each involving incremental
model changes relative to a designated base model, and cataloging design-pertinent res-
ults (pile lateral displacements, pile axial forces) across the analysis set. Results obtained
from MPTE are useful in determining the embedment at which a structure begins to
become laterally unstable under an arbitrary set of loads or load cases, and can be
accessed via the Design Tables window, by clicking the "Minimum Pile Tip Embedment"
button within the Full Tables window-region.
 Figure: 2.5.c Lateral Stability Page with Minimum Pile Tip Embedment controls

Input Options
The following inputs are needed for making use of the MPTE feature:

1. Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis – check this checkbox to invoke the MPTE
feature set. When this checkbox is not checked, all other MPTE controls on the Lateral
Stability Page will be unavailable.
2. The MPTE feature can be carried out for a substructure (Pier, Pile Bent) of interest
from Bridge and/or OPTS models. If the model type is Bridge, then select the sub-
structure of interest from the pulldown list.
3. Model Embedment Length – the pile embedment length for each pile that is used in
the first analysis. This field is not editable, but rather calculated from the current model
dataset. Note that the "current" model is designated as the starting point (or "base"
model) from which all other trial embedment lengths stem. As a convenience and ref-
erence point, the Model Embedment Length is displayed on the Lateral Stability Page in
a read only text box. The displayed value is the pile length embedded within soil, which
is a function of the soil elevations input on the Soil Page and the pile segment lengths
input from cross section dialogs within the Pile Page.
4. Final Embedment Length – The pile embedment length used in the final analysis. This
length can be either greater than or less than the "base" Model Embedment Length. A
Final Embedment length that is less than the "base" Model Embedment length will cause
the pile to shorten over the series of trial embedment analyses. A Final Embedment
length that is greater than the "base" Model Embedment length will cause the pile to
lengthen over the series of trial embedment analyses.
5. Number of Trial Embedments – The number of trial embedments that will be ana-
lyzed between the "base" model embedment length and Final Embedment Length
(inclusive). For example, if the Number of Trial Embedments is six (6), then a total of six
analyses will be conducted, where each analysis operates on a model of unique pile
embedment length.

Feature Guidelines
The following guidelines should be considered when employing the MPTE feature:

1. Final Embedment length must be such that the pile tip falls within an existing soil
layer.
2. Final Embedment length must be greater than zero (0).
3. Final Embedment length cannot be equal to the "base" Model Embedment Length.
4. Frame element lengths within embedded pile portions of the "base" model are held
constant (as much as possible) as the program progresses through each trial embed-
ment. In so doing, the number of embedded nodes on each pile may differ from the
"base" model, increasing as the pile embedment length increases, and decreasing as the
pile embedment length decreases.
5. The minimum number of embedded nodes per pile is five (5), and the maximum num-
ber of embedded nodes per pile is two hundred (200). If the MPTE input causes these
node count requirements to be violated, the MPTE analysis will not run. Adjustment of
the number of embedded nodes per pile is handled on the Pile Page. It may also be
necessary to adjust the Final Embedment Length on the Lateral Stability Page so as to
remain compliant with the aforementioned node count requirements.
6. The recommended input for Number of Trial Embedments is between six (6) and
thirty (30). Six (6) is thought to be a reasonable minimum in order to begin to observe
design-relevant trends among plotted results. Thirty (30) is thought to be a reasonable
maximum at which the time it takes to run an analysis is balanced by the resolution of
the plotted data points not significantly improving the ability to see the trend.

Step-by-Step Guide
The following is a step-by-step guide for making use of the MPTE analysis feature:

1. Build or load an existing model, which will be automatically designated as the "base"
model.
2. By default, MPTE is not enabled. To enable the feature, click the Model Data → Lateral
Stability → "Run Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Analysis" checkbox.
3. Enter the Final Embedment Length. An individual analysis will be automatically per-
formed for the number of steps (trial embedments) between the "base" Model Embed-
ment Length and the Final Embedment Length (inclusive).
4. Enter the Number of Trial Embedments. This defines the previously mentioned num-
ber of steps (trial embedments) from "base" model embedment to final embedment.
Ultimately, this input value dictates the total number of analyses that will be conducted.
5. Click the Run Analysis toolbar button on the main toolbar. During the iterative ana-
lysis, the Analysis dialog’s title bar indicates the trial embedment being analyzed.
 Figure: 2.5.d Analysis window display during analysis of MPTE models

Return to the Lateral Stability Page.

2.5.3 Proximity to Collapse

Proximity to Collapse can be calculated for any substructure as a quantitative measure

of how close the substructure is to undergoing collapse. More specifically, the proximity
to collapse is measured as a value between 0.0 and 1.0 that indicates how close a sub-
structure is to developing a critical number of plastic hinges (D/C ratios equal to or
greater than 1.0) along a given load path. Additional details of this concept, illustrative
schematics of collapse mechanisms, and example calculations are provided here.

A measure of how near a laterally loaded substructure is to undergoing collapse can be

quantified through collective evaluation of D/C ratios along members that make up a
given load path. For lateral loads such as those due to vessel collision, two load paths
are pertinent: downward through the piles, or upward through the pier columns. The
Proximity to Collapse dialog 2.5.3 ) facilitates generation of collapse mechanisms that
are to be monitored during analysis. The dialog is divided into three regions: 1) A col-
lection of controls within the Mechanism Creation Method region; 2) A table containing
general parameters for each collapse mechanism; and, 3) A table containing a detailed
listing of elements making up each mechanism.

Defining Collapse Mechanisms using the Generator

Collapse Mechanisms can be defined using the Generator or Custom methods. The
Mechanism Creation Method region allows for selection of the Generator or Custom
mode, and also contains the Add, Delete, Replace, Insert, and Update Table controls.
These controls can be used to parametrically build up Mechanism definitions.

When in "Generator" mode, the controls shown in Figure: 2.5.e are enabled. Mech-
anisms can be created and/or modified using the following steps:

To create a new mechanism using the Generator, the following steps can be taken:
1. Select "New" from the Mechanism pulldown.
2. Select Pile or Column from the Member Type pulldown.
3. Select the member (or all members) from the Member pulldown.
4. Input the First Element Position and Last Element Position to specify a consecutive
group of elements along the member(s). Note that the topmost element of a member
corresponds to position "1", and the nth element from the top corresponds to position
"n".
5. Input the number of simultaneous plastic hinges (up to 10) that would be necessary
to produce collapse for the Mechanism.
6. Click the Add button.

As an alternative to Step 6, the Delete button will delete whichever row is selected in the
topmost table, and delete the corresponding rows of element listings in the bottom
table. The Replace button will replace any existing mechanism (in both the top and bot-
tom tables) with a mechanism defined by the current selections in the pulldown lists,
and the current input values of First Element Position and Last Element Position. The
Insert button will introduce a new mechanism between any two existing mechanisms.
 Figure: 2.5.e Proximity to Collapse dialog when in Generator mode

Defining Custom Collapse Mechanisms

When in "Custom" mode, the controls shown in Figure: 2.5.f are enabled. Mechanisms
can be created and/or modified using the following steps:

To create a new mechanism when in Custom mode, the following steps can be taken:
1. Click the Add button.
2. Input the number of Element Groups (the number of members along which a con-
secutive set of elements is to be defined).
3. Input the number of Elements Per Group.
4. Input the number of simultaneous plastic hinges (up to 10) that would be necessary
to produce collapse for the Mechanism.
5. Click the Update Table button to update the bottom table (the detailed element list-
ings for the Mechanism).

As an alternative to Step 1, the Delete button will delete whichever row is selected in the
topmost table, and delete the corresponding rows of element listings in the bottom
table. The Insert button will introduce a new mechanism between any two existing mech-
anisms.

Also, when in Custom mode, the Element Number column in the bottom table can dir-
ectly edited. Alternatively, entries in the Element Number column can be updated by
graphically selecting an element of interest from within the 3D View window.
Figure: 2.5.f Proximity to Collapse dialog when in Custom mode
The elements making up a given collapse mechanism will be highlighted within the 3D
View window. As shown below, highlighting of all elements within the Mechanism (top
table) and customized highlighting of the detailed element listings (bottom table) can
also be controlled using the checkboxes in the far right columns of both tables.
Figure: 2.5.g Proximity to Collapse dialog Mechanism and element highlighting options

Scope of Input
The Proximity to Collapse feature allows for the definition of up to 50 Mechanisms asso-
ciated with relevant load paths through piles, or separately, pier columns. A collection of
consecutive pile elements or column elements along a pile or column member is
referred to as an Element Group. A Mechanism may be comprised of up to 50 Element
Groups. For a given Mechanism, each Element Group must contain the same number of
consecutive elements, where at least 1 element must be defined for each Element
Group.

Computed Results
For each Mechanism defined, the controlling (maximum) value of proximity to collapse
(between 0.0 and 1.0) is computed and reported at the bottom of the text output
(.out) file. The corresponding Load Case (or Load Combination, or Time Step) is also
reported.

Return to the Lateral Stability Page.

2.6 Pile Cap Page

 Figure: 2.6.a Pile Cap Page.

The number of piles in the Xp and Yp directions is used to create a grid for positioning
the piles. Piles not shown at a grid position are labeled as missing.

Enter data for the pile cap in the following fields:

Mesh Generation
Enter the number of grid points in the Xp and Yp directions. The program will prompt
you to choose whether you want to place piles at all new grid points or not.
Note: For modeling hammerhead configurations (non-redundant foundations) using
the "Pier" model type, please ensure that the pile cap grid size is set to 1x1.

For the constant and variable spacing options Click "Grid Spacing Table". This will open
the "Grid Spacing Table".

Elevations
Pile Cap elevation – this is the elevation at the centerline of the pile cap.
Top of Layer 1 (Soil Set 1) - This is a read-only display of the elevation at the top of the
soil set that is currently selected in the Soil Edit Window. It can be used on the Pile Cap
Page as a reference when inputting the Pile Cap elevation.

Pile Cap Properties

Enter the following properties for the pile cap:
1. Young’s Modulus
2. Poisson’s Ratio
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight

Pile Cap Dimensions

Xp-dir dimension – this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the Xp
direction. This measurement does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is
the sum of all grid spacings in the Xp direction.
Yp-dir dimension – this is a read-only display of the current pile cap grid size in the Yp
direction. This measurement does not account for any removed pile cap elements. It is
the sum of all grid spacings in the Yp direction.

Soil-Cap Interaction
Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap "Vertical Bearing Resistance" feature. User
can input custom vertical bearing springs using "Custom" button. Note that the Bearing
Resistance feature can only be utilized if the mid-surface of the pile cap is at or below
the elevation at the top of soil layer 1 (i.e. for embedded pile cap).

Additional soil weight (soil load) is applied on the top of pile cap, when the soil elevation
is higher than the elevation of the physical top of pile cap. This soil load is calculated
using the user specified "Unit Weight of Soil on Cap".
2.6.1 Grid Spacing Table

If constant spacing is selected, then only the "Constant Spacing" text box is editable.

Enter the variable spacing in both directions in the tables.

Otherwise, if variable spacing is selected, then the "Constant Spacing" text box is "grayed
out".

Figure: 2.6.b Grid Spacing Table

Return to the Pile Cap Page.
2.6.2 Vertical Bearing Resistance

Check the checkbox to activate the pile cap Vertical Bearing Resistance feature. When
activated, FB-MultiPier assigns vertical soil springs to each of the nodes in the pile cap.
The Bearing Resistance feature can only be utilized if the mid-surface of the pile cap is at
or below the elevation at the top of soil layer 1 (i.e. for embedded pile cap). Note that
any number of soil sets can be applied to the cap elements for the purposes of using the
Bearing Resistance feature.

Based on bearing pressure vs displacement curves for each vertical soil spring, vertical
reaction forces are calculated for a given vertical displacement. Note that vertical
springs are active at all cap nodes that do not correspond to pile head nodes. In par-
ticular, this process is driven by the current vertical pressure acting at a given pile cap
node, and the corresponding tributary bearing area associated with that pile cap node:

Eqn: 2.6.A
where,
F is the vertical pressure at a pile cap node for a given vertical displacement
Z is the vertical displacement inducing the pressure at the pile cap node
K is the subgrade modulus of soil at the mid-surface of pile cap
Qu is the ultimate bearing resistance of the soil at the mid-surface of pile cap

Note that the vertical pile cap bearing springs only act in compression.

Subgrade modulus (K) provides the initial slope of the bearing pressure versus dis-
placement curve, whereas the ultimate bearing resistance (Qu ) provides the curve
asymptote. Subgrade modulus (K) and ultimate bearing resistance (Qu ) values are cal-
culated as described below.
For Sand:
a) Subgrade modulus (K) –
For sand, subgrade modulus is directly input from within the Soil Page.

b) Bearing capacity (Qu ) -

The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Sand (ϕ ≠ 0 and c = 0) is calculated by the
general bearing capacity equation, Eqn: 2.6.B, by Meyerhof (1963)

Eqn: 2.6.B

For zero cohesion (c = 0) Qu becomes:

Eqn: 2.6.C
where,
Nc, Nq and Nɣ are bearing capacity factors (Table 1)
Sc, Sq and Sɣ are shape factors (Table 1)
Dc, Dq and Dɣ are depth factors (Table 1)

Table 1
Factors (ϕ > 0) Values

Nc

Nq

Nɣ

Sc
Sq and Sɣ

Dc

Dq and Dɣ

ϕ is angle of internal friction (rad), and is equal to zero for cohesive soils.
ɣ is total unit weight of sand
σ’v is effective vertical stress at the mid-surface of the pile cap.
B is width of pile cap
L is length of pile cap
z is vertical distance of mid-surface of pile cap from the ground surface.

For Clay:
a) Subgrade modulus (K) –
For clay, subgrade modulus is selected from the table (Reese, 1984) below, based on the
directly input value of undrained shear strength (Cu):

Cohesive Soil Very

Unit Soft Medium Stiff Hard
Properties Stiff
(Cu, 250 - 500 - 1000 - 2000 - 4000 -
Shear Strength
psf) 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Subgrade Mod-
ulus (k,
30 100 500 1000 2000
(Static Load- pci)
ing)
Subgrade Mod-
ulus (k,
- - 200 400 800
(Cyclic Load- pci)
ing)
b) Bearing capacity (Qu ) -
The ultimate bearing capacity for pile caps in Clay (ϕ = 0 and c ≠ 0) is calculated by the
general bearing capacity equation, Eqn: 2.6.D, by Meyerhof (1963)

Eqn: 2.6.D

For zero internal friction angle (ϕ = 0) bearing factor Nɣ is zero. Accordingly, Qu

becomes:

Eqn: 2.6.E
where,
Nc, Nq and Nɣ are bearing capacity factors (Table 2)
Sc, Sq and Sɣ are shape factors (Table 2)
Dc, Dq and Dɣ are depth factors (Table 2)

Table 2
Factors (ϕ = 0) Values
Nc Nc = 5.14
Nq Nq = 1
Nɣ Nɣ = 0
Sc Sc = 1 + 0.2·(B/L)
Sq and Sɣ Sq = Sɣ = 1
Dc Dc = 1 + 0.2·(z/B)
Dq and Dɣ Dq = Dɣ = 1

Note: No bearing springs are automatically generated for Limestone or Custom P-Y
lateral soil types (see custom bearing curve options for these scenarios).
Return to the Pile Cap Page.
2.6.3 Custom Vertical Bearing Springs

Check the checkbox "Vert. Bearing Resistance" to activate the pile cap Vertical Bearing
Resistance feature. When activated, FB-MultiPier assigns vertical soil springs to each of
the nodes in the pile cap except the pile head nodes. For a given soil set that encom-
passes the midplane of the pile cap, a custom pressure versus vertical displacement
curve can be defined by checking the 'Use Custom Curve' checkbox, and supplying val-
ues within the table. Additionally, the ultimate bearing pressure associated with the cus-
tom curve can be defined. This input value is included among the text output to facilitate
comparisons between the ultimate bearing pressure and the maximum computed bear-
ing pressure.
Figure: 2.6.c Custom Pressure vs Displacement Curve dialog.
The soil spring data must begin at the origin (0,0).

Note: No bearing springs are generated at the pile head nodes.

Return to the Pile Cap Page.

2.7 Pile Page

Enter data for the pile in the following fields:

1. Pile Section Description

2. Pile to Cap Connection
3. Pile Length Data
4. Pile Top Rigidization
5. Pile Type and Batter Data
Figure: 2.7.a Pile Page
2.7.1 Pile Section Description

A different edit dialog appears depending upon the "Pile Behavior" option selected on
the Analysis Settings page.

If "Linear - Gross" is selected and the "Edit" button is clicked, then the Gross Pile Prop-
erties dialog will appear. Note that gross section properties can only be specified in asso-
ciation with linear behavior. Further, D/C ratios are not computed for members defined
using gross properties, and only values of 0.0 are listed among the analysis results.

If the "Pile Behavior" option selected on the Analysis Settings page is "Linear" or "Non-
linear", then the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties dialog will appear. For linear analysis,
the program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed cross section descrip-
tions.

Return to the Pile Page.

2.7.1.1 Gross Cross Section Pile Properties

 Figure: 2.7.b Gross Pile Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.
Modify the properties of a gross cross section in the following fields:

Pile Type Info

Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each
pile. → Pile Sets Tutorial
Use Pile Segment List to Add and remove pile segments of the selected pile type.

Database Section Selection

If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined
set of cross-sections.
In the Gross Pile Properties page, there is only one option (Linear Pile) when you click
on the "Retrieve Section" button.
If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current
cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To Data-
base" button. The user can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Sec-
tion" button

Section Type
Select a cross section type from the following:
1. Circular Pile
2. Square Pile
3. H-Pile
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selec-
ted.

Segment Dimensions
Enter the following data for the dimensions of the segment:
1. Length
2. Area
3. Diameter — Only available for a circular pile
4. Width — Only available for a square pile
5. Depth — Only available for a square pile
6. [Unit] Weight
Note: except Length, other options are only available if the "Customize Current Sec-
tion" option is selected.

Section Properties
Enter the following data for the dimensions of the segment:
1. Inertia 2 Axis—The moment of inertia about the 2-axis
2. Inertia 3 Axis—The moment of inertia about the 3-axis
3. Torsional Inertia
4. Young’s Modulus
5. Shear Modulus
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selec-
ted.

Return to Pile Section Description page.

2.7.1.2 Full Cross-Section Pile Properties

 Figure: 2.7.c Full Cross Section Properties Dialog

Modify all of the properties of a pile cross section in the following fields:

Pile Type Info

Add and remove pile sets (types). This allows the user to use different pile types for each
pile. -> Pile Sets Tutorial
Use Pile Segment List to Add and remove pile segments of the selected pile type.

Database Section Selection

If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined
set of cross-sections.
When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:

Figure: 2.7.d Pile Database Options

If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current
cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To Data-
base" button. The user can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Sec-
tion" button

Section Type
Select a cross section type from the following:
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of
cross section selected.
1. Circular Pile
2. Rectangular Pile
3. H-Pile
4. Pipe Pile
5. Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Database Section" option is selec-
ted.

Section Constitutive Properties

Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain
Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain"
buttons will yield different windows.
Note: when using "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option the user should input the
elastic modulus (ksi) using material properties panel on the "Detailed Cross Section" dia-
log.

Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Length
 2. Width (w)
3. Depth (h)
4. Unit Weight
H-Pile:
1. Length
2. Unit Weight
Pipe Pile / Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled):
1. Length
2. Diameter (d)
3. Thickness
4. Unit Weight

Detailed Cross Section

By clicking the "Detailed Cross Section" button, one can edit the bar groups and material
properties of the cross section in a table format. Select a segment from the "Section List"
and a pile set from the "Pile Type" list to edit. Pile members have unique local (1-2-
3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting
internal forces for elements of members.
 Figure: 2.7.e Detailed Cross Section Table

Return to Pile Section Description page.

Circular Section Properties
 Figure: 2.7.f Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.
Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.

Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the Cas-
ing Thickness.

Figure: 2.7.g Casing Thickness

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the void diameter of the Hollow Section.
 Figure: 2.7.h Circular Void Diameter

H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" checkbox. Click "Edit H-Sec-
tion" to enter the H-Section depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.

Figure: 2.7.i Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.

Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2. Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3. Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular). For Circular group, input a Group
Diameter. For Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis)
and staring coordinates. Bars are uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite
corner in the specified orientation.
5. Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6. Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..

Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)

1.  Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2.  Enter the cover thickness.
3.  Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4.  Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5.  Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.

For both methods:

Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group.
If prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Confined Concrete
The Confined Concrete dialog can be access by clicking the Confined Concrete button.
 Figure: 2.7.j Confined Concrete dialog

If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "Unconfined" for no con-
finement or "Shear Reinforcement" for confinement of cross section portions that fall
within the diameter of the outermost reinforcement group.

If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "Unconfined"
for no confinement, "Shear Reinforcement and Casing", or “Shear Reinforcement and
Confine-Only Casing” for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the cas-
ing diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity
calculations are illustrated below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for
additional details concerning the constitutive relationships used for each cross section
component.
 Figure: 2.7.k Confined Concrete Options

Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "Unconfined" option is selected.

 2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement" can only be selected when no
casing is modeled for the cross section.
3. A non-zero casing thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to
enable the "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” confinement options.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.

Rectangular Section Properties

 Figure: 2.7.l Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.
Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.
If the cross section contains taper, then define the four corner bars individually. For
example, the upper left bar could be defined in 'Group 1'. The upper right bar could be
defined in 'Group 2'. The lower left bar could be defined in 'Group 3'. The lower right
bar could be defined in 'Group 4'.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the diameter for a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of
the Hollow Section.

Figure: 2.7.m Rectangular Void Data

H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" checkbox. Click "Edit H-Sec-
tion" to enter the H-Section depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.
 Figure: 2.7.n Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.

Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2. Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3. Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular). For Circular group, input a Group
Diameter. For Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis)
and staring coordinates. Bars are uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite
corner in the specified orientation.
5. Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6. Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..

Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)

1.  Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2.  Enter the cover thickness.
3.  Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4.  Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5.  Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.

For both methods:

Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group.
If prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.

H-Pile Properties

Figure: 2.7.o H-Pile Cross Section Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.

Enter the properties of the H-Pile in the following fields:

Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-pile in the text
boxes.

Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-pile (web horizontal or web vertical).

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties page.

Pipe Pile Properties

Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section Dimen-
sion" Panel.
Concrete is not included in this cross section. (f’c and Ec are set to zero.)

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties page.

Pipe Pile (Concrete Filled)

Enter a section length, diameter, shell thickness, and unit weight in the "Section Dimen-
sions" Panel.
Concrete is included in this cross section. To set the section constitutive properties for
concrete and steel, click the "Edit Properties" button.
For more information on inputting data for the pipe pile (concrete filled) section, see the
"circular section" type.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties page.

Section Constitutive Properties

Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain
Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain"
buttons will yield different windows.

Default Stress/Strain Curve

Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual mater-
ial properties, if the "Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Prop-
erties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in
the text boxes.
 Figure: 2.7.p Default Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve

The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined
Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked. First
choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material
in the table. Click the "Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.

Note: when making use of the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option, the engin-
eer should input the elastic modulus for constituent materials of the pile cross section
using the "Detailed Cross Section" button located in the "Full Cross-Section Pile Prop-
erties" dialog. For pier members, the "Detailed Cross Section" button is located within
the "Full Cross-Section Pier Properties" dialog.

Figure: 2.7.q User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Material Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress
Strain Curve", or "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-
strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by select-
ing that material from the options at the top.

Figure: 2.7.r Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties

 Figure: 2.7.s Stress-Strain Properties Table.

Note: Extrapolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those
provided in the stress-strain curve.

Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.
2.7.2 Pile to Cap Connection

Either a "Pinned" or "Fixed" pile to cap connection can be specified.

If the pile-top rigidization feature is utilized, then the pin will be shifted to the bot-
tommost pile node (of each pile) that falls within the rigidization length.

Return to the Pile Page.

2.7.3 Pile Length Data

Depending on the relative positioning of piles within the surrouding soil medium, some
or all portions of a given pile may be located below the ground surface elevation. In this
context, any portions of piles that lie above the ground surface elevation are referred to
as free lengths. Portions of piles that lie below the ground surface elevation are referred
to as embedded lengths. Likewise, for modeling purposes, nodes along piles are divided
into two categories: free length, embedded.

Figure: 2.7.t Free Length of Pile Above Soil

The number of free length and embedded nodes assigned to a given pile can be input
from within the Pile Nodes dialog. Note that, across a given substructure model, all piles
must possess the same total number of nodes, with an upper limit (per pile) of 200
nodes.
 Figure: 2.7.uPile Nodes dialog

"Free Length Nodes" - Enter the number of nodes in the pile free length above the soil
(when the pile is not fully embedded).

"Embedded Nodes" - Enter the number of nodes in the pile embedded below the soil
(below ground level).

Pile length data, and in particular, the length of a given pile segment is independent of
element discretization (the number of free length and embedded nodes). For any ele-
ments that contain a mixture of two or more pile segments, the associated element prop-
erties are determined on a tributary-length basis during analysis.

The Tip Elevation on the "Pile Page" is not editable. It is a function of the pile cap elev-
ation, which is assigned on the "Pile Cap Page", and the pile length, which is assigned on
the pile cross section dialog. For example, if the pile cap elevation is 0, and the pile
length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be -50'. If the pile cap elevation is 100', and the
pile length is 50', the pile tip elevation would be +50'. To change the 'Tip Elevation', click
the "Edit Cross Section" button on the "Pile Page" and change the length(s) of the pile
segment(s).
Return to the Pile Page.
2.7.4 Pile Top Rigidization

Thick shell elements are used to model pile caps in FB-MultiPier. For instances where
substructures contain relatively thick (or rigid) pile caps, it may be warranted to rigidize
the top portion of piles for some non-zero distance beneath the pile cap midplane.
When a non-zero value is input for the Rigidization Length, amplified constitutive prop-
erties are assigned to all pile elements that fall within the top pile portion during ana-
lysis (up to the input value of Rigidized Length). Specifically, properties such as moduli,
ultimate compressive strengths, and yield strengths are scaled by a factor of 10,000 for
elements that fall at or within the Rigidization Length. For simplicity, and only within
rigidized pile lengths, cross section components such as prestressing and confinement
are ignored.
 Figure: 2.7.v Pile Top Rigidization Options

Note: Only pile node elevations (i.e., Zp coordinate values) are considered when
determining if a given pile element falls within the rigidized length.

When pinned (as opposed to fixed) pile head fixity conditions are specified, the j-end
node of the bottommost element that falls at or within the rigidization length will be not
be permitted to transfer internal moments. In addition, only those elements that are posi-
tioned entirely within the rigidized length will be displayed using thickened lines in the
UI 3D View windows.

For rigidized portions of piles that are embedded in soil, an option is available to apply
(or not apply) soil resistance forces to the associated pile nodes. Importantly, soil prop-
erties within these regions are not modified, so as not to unduly influence calculations
associated Georgiadis layer corrections.

Figure: 2.7.w Pile Top Rigidization Options

Note: The input options for Rigidized Length and Exclude Soil Resistance do not affect
pile mesh discretization (i.e., the nodal spacings of pile elements). The engineer should
take care to ensure that nodal spacings of pile elements are defined at desired locations
by setting the number of free length and/or embedded pile nodes. Meshing guidelines
are further discussed here.

Note: Analysis will not be permitted via the User Interface unless (for each Pile
Type) a Pile Segment is defined such that it has a bottom elevation in alignment with the
Rigidization Length. For batch mode, this need is not enforced, and so, the engineer
should ensure that appropriate Pile Segment defintions are given prior to running the
analysis.

Return to the Pile Page.

2.7.5 Pile Type and Batter Data

The Pile Type and Batter Data frame has the following features:
1. Pile – use the up and down arrows of this Pile spin control to select a pile. The selec-
ted pile’s cross sections display in the list box immediately under the Pile spin control,
and an image of the pile cross section displays on the right side of the Pile page. In this
example, the cross section is a 24” square pile.

Figure: 2.7.x Pile Type Batter Data section.

If the selected pile has multiple cross sections, the selected cross section (highlighted in
blue) will display. The selected pile also highlights (in dark red) in the Pile Plan View win-
dow.
 Figure: 2.7.y Pile Plan View Window.

2. Pile Type – use this combo box to assign a Pile Type to the currently selected pile. The
currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional
Pile Types can be defined by entering the cross section dialogs, by clicking the “Edit” but-
ton on the Pile Page. In this example, Pile Type 2 has been selected for Pile 1. Unlike Pile
Type 1, which is a 24” square cross section, Pile Type 2 is a 36” round cross section.
 Figure: 2.7.z Pile Type Batter Data Circular.

The applied Pile Type is immediately reflected in the Pile Plan View window.

Figure: 2.7.aa Pile Plan View Window Circular Pile.

3. Soil Set – use this combo box to assign a soil set to the currently selected pile. The cur-
rently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the Pile spin control. Additional
Soil Sets can be defined on the Soil Page, by selecting the “Add Set” menu item inside
the “Soil Set” combo box. In this example, soil set 2 has been selected for Pile 1. One soil
set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to the same
pile type, but the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.

Figure: 2.7.ab Pile Type Batter Data Soil Set.

The applied soil set is immediately reflected in the Pile Plan View window (see Figure:
2.7.ac). To view this Soil Set change in the Pile Plan View window, the window must be in
“Assign Soil Sets to Piles” mode.
 Figure: 2.7.ac Pile Plan View Window Soil Set Assigned.

4. Batter – use the X Batter and Y Batter input boxes to enter batter information for the
currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is the pile number that displays in the
Pile spin control. In this example, an X Batter of 0.1 has been input, and a Y Batter of 0.1
has been input.
 Figure: 2.7.ad Pile Type Batter Data Batter Applied

The applied batter immediately is reflected in the Pile Plan View window.

Figure: 2.7.ae Pile Plan View Window Batter Pile 3.

Return to the Pile Page.

2.8 Soil Page

Edit the soil with the following options:

1. Soil Layer Data

2. Soil Layer Models
a. Additional Soil Properties ("Edit")
b. Printable Soil Graph ("Plot")
c. Pile Group Factors ("Group")
d. Soil Table ("Table")
3. Soil Importing and Exporting
4. Soil Strength Criteria
5. Elevations
 Figure: 2.8.a Soil Page

Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.

For this soil selected, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the option
(Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:
The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog.

The"Plot" button will activate the "Printable Soil Graph" dialog which allows the user to
view and print the various soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the selec-
ted options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).

The "Group" button will activate the "Pile Group Factors" dialog to specify for the soil
model. The user can specify the P-Multipliers.

The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This
feature allows the user to view/modify multiple soil sets and layers at the same time
and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Structure Interaction" for details on the
soil properties.
The "Soil Importing and Exporting" can be done using the "Import" and "Export" buttons.

For static analysis, the "Cycling Loading" in the "Soil Strength Criteria" panel can be only
activated for "Cohesive" soil type.
2.8.1 Soil Layer Data

Create a new soil set or select an existing one from the "Soil Set" drop-down list. The
selected soil set in the "Soil Set" combo box is displayed in the "Soil Edit" window below
the "Soil Page", along with the currently selected pile. This pile selection is made in the
"Pile Plan View" window OR in the "Pile Page". In "Soil Edit" window, the pile nodes in
soil can be clicked to view the soil curves. However, if the selected soil set is not
assigned to the selected pile, the pile nodes will not draw.

One soil set must be defined for each pile type. More than one soil set can be applied to
the same pile type, but the same soil set cannot be applied to more than one pile type.

When adding a new soil set to the model, the soil set is not automatically applied to a
pile grid point. To assign the soil set to piles, visit the "Pile Page" OR the "Pile Edit" win-
dow. For more information on the integration between the selected pile and the selected
soil set, see "Soil-Structure Interaction".

Create a new soil layer or select an existing one from the "Soil Layer" drop-down list.

Select the type of soil from the following options in the "Soil Type" drop-down list:
1. Cohesionless
2. Cohesive
3. Rock

Then from the "Soil Layer Models" panel, select the Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip (only
for soil layer containing pile tip) layer models for each soil layer

Enter the unit weight for the current soil layer in the "Unit Weight" text box.
Note: The unit weight is the total unit weight of the soil. The program will auto-
matically subtract the unit weight of water to get the effective unit weight

Return to the Soil Page.

2.8.2 Soil Layer Models

Choose Soil Set, Soil Layer and a Soil Type.

Select the layer models for each soil layer:

1. Lateral
2. Axial
3. Torsional
4. Tip (only for soil layer containing pile tip)

Depending on the Soil Type selected, FB-MultiPier has the following built-in lateral, axial,
torsional and tip Soil Models. The user can select one of the soil models from the drop-
down lists.

1. Lateral
A. Cohesionless
i. Sand (O'Neill)
ii. Sand (Reese)
iii. Sand (API)
iv. Liquefied Sand (Rollins)
v. Hybrid Liquefied Sand (Franke and Rollins)
vi. Piedmont Residual
vii. C-Phi
viii. Linear (Subgrade)
ix. Custom P-Y
B. Cohesive
i. Clay (O'Neill)
ii. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
iii. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
iv. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
v. Clay (API)
 vi. Loess
vii. Piedmont Residual
viii. C-Phi
ix. Linear (Subgrade)
x. Custom P-Y
C. Rock
i. Limestone (McVay)
ii. Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled
iii. Weak Rock (Reese)
iv. Strong Rock
v. Massive Rock
vi. Sand (O'Neill)
vii. Sand (Reese)
viii. Sand (API)
ix. Clay (O'Neill)
x. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
xi. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
xii. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
xiii. Clay (API)
xiv. Linear (Subgrade)
xv. Custom P-Y
2. Axial
A. Cohesionless
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Sand
iii. Driven Pile Sand (API)
iv. Custom T-Z
B. Cohesive
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft Clay
iii. Driven Pile Clay (API)
iv. Custom T-Z
 C. Rock
i. Driven Pile
ii. Drilled Shaft IGM
iii. Drilled Shaft Limestone (McVay)
iv. Custom T-Z
3. Torsional
A. Hyperbolic
B. Custom T-θ
4. Tip
A. Driven Pile (McVay)
B. Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
C. Drilled Shaft Sand
D. Driven Pile Sand (API)
E. Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)
F. Drilled Shaft Clay
G. Driven Pile Clay (API)
H. Drilled Shaft IGM
I. Custom Q-Z

For a selected soil type, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of the options
(Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the button explained below:

The "Edit" button will activate "Additional Soil Properties" dialog. Clicking the "Dynamic
Properties " button will open the Soil Dynamics Dialog which will allow the user to input
additional soil properties that pertain only to dynamic type analysis. 

The"Plot" button will activate the "Soil Resistance Plots" dialog which allows the user to
view and print the various soil curves (load vs. deflection graph) based upon the selec-
ted options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip).

The "Group" button will activate the "Advanced Soil Data" dialog to specify for the soil
model. The user can specify the P-Multipliers.
The "Table" button will activate the "Soil Table" dialog for entering soil properties. This
feature allows the user to view/modify multiple soil sets and layers and the same time
and quickly enter properties for each. See "Soil-Structure Interaction" for details on the
soil properties.

When using a custom soil curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of
the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button.

The "Specify Top and Bottom Layer Props" checkbox allows you to enter different soil
properties at the top and bottom of each layer. The values will be interpolated across the
layer.

Return to the Soil Page.

2.8.2.1 Additional Soil Properties

One can edit the Soil properties by selecting one of the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional
or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button. This will open the "Additional Soil Properties"
dialog below.
 Figure: 2.8.b Additional Soil Properties Dialog

Clicking the "Dynamic Properties" button on "Additional Soil Properties" dialog will
open the "Dynamics Soil Properties" dialog which will allow the user to input additional
soil properties that pertain only to dynamic type analysis. Please refer to "Dynamics Soil
Properties" section for more details. This option will only be available in dynamic type
analysis. These properties are for lateral behavior only.
 Figure: 2.8.c Dynamic Soil Properties Dialog

When using a Custom P-Y curve, one can enter/edit the properties by selecting one of
the options (Lateral, Axial, Torsional or Tip) and then clicking the "Edit" button. For
example, the custom P-Y curve is shown below.

Note: Specific to Custom P-Y curves, if no value is supplied for Pu, then the maximum
value of "p" from the user-defined curve will be assigned as Pu.
 Figure: 2.8.d Custom Soil Properties Dialog

The "Import Data" button retrieves custom curves data from a text (.txt) file, and replaces
the current curve data in the table.
"Table PDF" button will save the Custom P-Y curve table in a PDF format. The "Save to
File" button saves the Custom P-Y curve data from the table to a text (.txt) file, in the
format below.

Number of Curve Points in File

XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue
XValue YValue

Return to the Soil Layer Models page.

2.8.2.2 Soil Resistance Plots

The ‘Plot’ button on the Soil page actives the Soil Resistance Plots Dialog which allows
users to plot the different types of load vs. deflection curves for multiple nodes of a pile.
All plot types (P-Y, T-Z, T-θ, Q-Z) may be viewed (one at a time) by changing the selected
Plot Type radio button.

1. P-Y (Lateral) - Plots the lateral reaction per unit length vs. lateral deflection
2. T-Z (Axial) - Plots the axial stress vs. axial displacement
3. T-θ (Torsional) - Plots torsional stress vs. rotational displacement
4. Q-Z (Tip) - Plots the tip force vs. tip displacement
 Figure: 2.8.e Soil Resistance Plots dialog

The properties of the selected Soil Layer are displayed on the right hand side for easy ref-
erence, and the exact plot values for the plot are displayed in a table below this. Each dis-
played plot and its corresponding data table may be printed or saved.

The Soil Set may be changed and will affect both the Soil Layers and Piles settings avail-
able. The only available Soil Layers will be those that exist in the selected Soil Set. Only
Piles currently in the selected Soil Set will be available and will control the nodes (elev-
ations) available for display.

The elevations available are based on the selected Soil Layer and the location of nodes
with in the selected pile. Elevations are listed from top down and will include the top of
layer, all the nodes within the layer and then the bottom of layer. Each selection displays
both the node number and elevation of the selection. Once these selections are com-
pleted press the ‘Update Plot’ button to show the new plot and table data.

Soil Plot Tutorial

Return to the Soil Layer Models page.

2.8.2.3 Pile Group Factors

The Pile Group Factors dialog allows for input of p-multipliers and axial group factors.

P-Multipliers
The following input options are available for making use of p-multipliers:

1. Use Custom P-Multipliers

- User defined P-Multipliers.
2. Use 3D P-Multipliers
- Auto generated assuming 3D pile spacing (D is the diameter of pile). Check "Group
Interaction" for more details.
3. Use 5D P-Multipliers
- Auto generated assuming 5D pile spacing (D is the diameter of pile). Check "Group
Interaction" for more details.
4. Use P-Multipliers all equal to 1
- All the P-Multipliers are set equal to 1.0.
5. Use program-generated P-Multipliers
- The p-multipliers are calculated during the analysis using the methodology for
"skewed" piles described in Ch. 15 of n Reese et al. (2006). Note that this option is
only intended for use when embedded pile node displacements are intended to devi-
ate substantially from the Xp or Yp directions.
An option is also available to explicitly define unique P-Multipliers for motions in the
+Xp and -Xp directions.
- Only available for "Pile Bent" models

Axial Group Factors

Axial Group Factors can be specified for skin (compression), uplift (tension), and tip
(end-bearing compression) phenomena. When different values are supplied for the skin
and uplift factors, the uplift factor will be applied to the ordinates of t-z curves for those
embedded nodes that undergo uplift.

Figure: 2.8.f Pile Group Factors Dialog

Return to the Soil Layer Models page.

2.8.2.4 Soil Table

The Soil Table feature is a series of five property pages used to input and display soil
data in tabular form. All available program soil data can be created and input using the
Soil Table. The Soil Table feature was developed at the request of engineers to facilitate
tabulated review of soil data for a particular soil model (lateral, axial, torsional, and tip)
across all soil layers in a soil set in one program window.
To launch the Soil Table, click the ‘Table’ button on the ‘Soil’ page (Figure: 2.8.g).

Figure: 2.8.g Soil page ‘Table’ button to launch Soil Table

The Soil Table opens with the Global page selected by default. The tabs to select the
desired page are located in the top left of the Soil Table interface (see Figure: 2.8.h). The
page options are as follows: Global, Lateral, Axial, Torsional and Tip.

Figure: 2.8.h Soil Table tabs

The Global page features two tables.

The Soil Set Table (Figure: 2.8.i) is used to input the following data:
• Number of soil sets
• Number of soil layers per soil set
• Water table elevation per soil set
• Cyclic loading per soil set
• SPT data per soil set
Soil sets can also be added (created) by clicking the ‘Add Set’ button in ‘Soil Set’ table
column of the Soil Set Table.
Soil sets can be deleted by clicking the ‘Delete’ button in the ‘Delete Soil Set’ table
column of the Soil Set Table.
 Figure: 2.8.i Soil Set Table on Global page

The Soil Layer Table is used to input various data per soil layer (Figure: 2.8.j), including
the following:
• Soil Type
• Top of Layer Elevation
• Bottom of Layer Elevation
• Lateral Soil Model
• Axial Soil Model
• Torsional Soil Model
• Tip Model
• Unit Weight
• Top and Bottom flag
The Top and Bottom flag dictates whether soil properties apply to the entire layer or
where distinct properties can be input for the top and bottom of each layer.
Soil layers can be added by clicking the ‘Add Layer’ button in the ‘Soil Layer’ table
column of the Soil Layer Table.
Soil layers can be deleted by clicking the ‘Delete’ button in the ‘Delete Layer’ table
column of the Soil Layer Table.
 Figure: 2.8.j Soil Layer Table on Global page

The Lateral Model Table on the Lateral Page is used to input various per layer lateral
properties (Figure: 2.8.k). These properties include the following:
• Internal Friction Angle
• Subgrade Modulus
• Mass Modulus
• Stiffness Constant
• Undrained Shear Strength
• Major Principal Strain at 50%
• Major Principal Strain at 100%
• Average Undrained Shear Strength
• Unconfined Compressive Strength
• RQD
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Lateral
Model for a given layer.
 Figure: 2.8.k Lateral Model Table on Lateral page

The Axial Model Table on the Axial Page is used to input various per layer axial prop-
erties (Figure: 2.8.l). These properties include the following:
• Internal Friction Angle
• Shear Modulus
• Poisson’s Ratio
• Undrained Shear Strength
• Unconfined Compressive Strength
• Mass Modulus
• Modulus Ratio
• Surface (type)
• Split Tensile Strength
• Shaft Concrete Unit Weight
• Slump
• Ultimate Unit Skin Friction
• Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Axial
Model for a given layer.
 Figure: 2.8.l Axial Model Table on Axial page

The Torsional Model Table on the Torsional Page is used to input various per layer tor-
sional properties (Figure: 2.8.m). These properties include the following:
• Internal Friction Angle
• Undrained Shear Strength
• Shear Modulus
• Torsional Shear
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Torsional
Model for a given layer.
 Figure: 2.8.m Torsional Model Table on Torsional page

The Tip Model Table on the Tip Page is used to input various set tip properties for the tip
layer in each soil set (Figure: 2.8.n). One tip model can be specified per soil set. These
properties include the following:
• Internal Friction Angle
• Shear Modulus
• Poisson’s Ratio
• Axial Bearing Failure
• Uncorrected SPT
• Undrained Shear Strength
• IGM Mass Modulus
• Ultimate Unit End Bearing
• End Condition
• Displacement Exponent
• Maximum Tip Resistance
• Critical Displacement
• Relative Density Exponent
• Major Principal Strain at 50%
The accessibility of the various input fields is dictated by the currently selected Tip
Model for a given soil set.

Figure: 2.8.n Tip Model Table on Tip page

Additional features in the Soil Table

Soil curves can be viewed from within the Soil Table. Each of the four model pages (Lat-
eral, Axial, Torisonal, and Tip) has a ‘Plot’ column in its respective table. Clicking the
‘Plot’ button will launch the Soil Resistance Plots dialog (Figure: 2.8.o and Figure: 2.8.p).
Figure: 2.8.o Lateral page with Plot button
 Figure: 2.8.p Soil Resistance Plots dialog showing P-Y (lateral) curves

For any active tab, Soil Table data can be exported to Excel and PDF formats. By default
the export option is ‘Excel’ (Figure: 2.8.q and Figure: 2.8.r).
 Figure: 2.8.q Excel (export) button

Figure: 2.8.r Torsional Model Data exported to Excel

To change the export option to ‘PDF’, visit the ‘Program Settings’ dialog via the ‘Control’
menu.
To facilitate viewing more data rows in the Soil Table, click the ‘Expand Table’ button at
the bottom of the Soil Table window (Figure: 2.8.s). This increases the height of the Soil
Table window, allowing more rows of data (e.g. soil layers) to be viewed without ver-
tically scrolling. When the Soil Table has been expanded, the text on the ‘Expand Table’
button will change to ‘Reduce Table’. Clicking the ‘Reduce Table’ button restores the Soil
Table to its default window size.
 Figure: 2.8.s Expand Table option

Soil Table Tutorial

Return to the Soil Layer Models page.

2.8.3 Soil Importing and Exporting

The “Import” button imports soil data from two types of files: a) FB-MultiPier input file
(.in), and b) soil data text files (.txt) that have been created via the “Export” button. Import-
ing soil will completely replace all existing soil data (all soil layers, all soil sets) with the
imported soil. The soil set assignments (to piles) will not be adjusted during the import
process. Thus it is a good idea to inspect the soil set assignments after using the
“Import” feature to ensure the desired soil sets are assigned to the appropriate piles. It is
also recommended to check the position of the pile tips within each imported soil set, to
ensure the tip layers are as expected.

The “Export” button saves the existing soil data (all soil layers, all soil sets) to a soil data
text file (.txt). This text file contains two headers: a) SOIL header, and b) CONTROL
header. The SOIL header in the soil data text file is identical in format to the SOIL header
saved in an FB-MultiPier input file. The CONTROL header is an abridged version of the
CONTROL header saved in the FB-MultiPier input file, containing two blank lines fol-
lowed by a third line containing the version number of the FB-MultiPier software which
was used to save the soil text file. The soil data text file must be of this described format
to be importable.

Return to the Soil Page.

2.8.4 SPT Profile Data

A profile of SPT blow counts versus elevation can be input for each soil set. This dialog
can be accessed by navigating to the 'Soil' page, and clicking the 'Edit SPT' button. For
any soil set that contains an SPT versus elevation profile, the internal friction angles for
cohesionless layers within that soil set will be automatically calculated. Note that the pro-
gram corrects for overburden of the SPT blow counts during analysis.

Figure: 2.8.t SPT Data Dialog

Return to the Soil Page.

2.8.5 Elevations

Enter the elevation of the water table, and the top and bottom elevation of each layer.
Note: Changes made to soil layer elevations AFTER extra members have been applied
to the model may cause extra members to shift position. The explanation 'Extra Member
Positioning with Respect to Model Changes' describes this further.

Return to the Soil Page.

2.9 Pier Page

The 'Edit Cross Section' button allows for the selection and editing of structural com-
ponents.
To specify bearing locations, check the bearing location box, then click the Bearing Loca-
tions button to specify the bearing locations. Bearing locations must be specified before
applying loads in association with Design Specifications features.
To specify tapered sections, check the taper box and specify the number of uniform sec-
tions.

This page is also the Wall Structure page for the Retaining Wall and Sound Wall options,
and the Bent Cap page for the Pile Bent option.

Edit the pier properties with the following options:

1. Pier Geometry
2. Pier Section Description
3. Taper Data
Figure: 2.9.a Pier Page
2.9.1 Pier Geometry

Enter the height of the pier, the cantilever length, the column spacing, the column offset,
and the number of pier columns.
Enter the number of column nodes, cantilever nodes, and beam nodes.
Choose to specify Bearing Locations for the pier.
Flooded columns may be checked if column sections are voided.

Figure: 2.9.b Pier Node Spacing Diagram

 Figure: 2.9.c Pier Cap Slope

Return to the Pier Page.

2.9.1.1 Bearing Locations

Bearing spacing can be input as either Uniform or Variable.

If the current model is a single pier (or bent) model, then the Bearing Layout options will
be visible. This allows for selection of one or two rows of bearings. If the model type is a
Bridge model then the number of bearing rows can also be specified on the Bridge
Page.

Enter the number of Bearing Locations, the Column Offset of the starting bearing loc-
ation, and the spacing(s) between bearing locations. If more than one bearing row is
present, then the Bearing Offset must also be entered (each of these terms are identified
in a schematic that is embedded in the dialog).

To prevent issues with pier (or bent) cap node generation when bearings are present, a
nodal merging (or coincidencing) tolerance can also be specified, where the default
value is 1.0E-06 ft (or 1.0E-06 m). In this context, "merge" indicates that if, during cap
node generation, two nodes would be positioned at a distance apart from one another
that is less than the tolerance value, then the two nodes would be replaced with a single
node. If warnings are encountered regarding prohibitively small elements lengths, then
increasing this tolerance (e.g., to 0.01 ft) typically resolves the warning without requiring
any direct model adjustments. Alternative strategies for troubleshooting cap node gen-
eration issues are discussed here.

Figure: 2.9.d Bearing Location Dialog

Return to the Pier Geometry page

2.9.1.2 Bearing Rotation Angle

The user may rotate the Pier and/or Bearing Pads on the Bridge Page. The rotation of
the bearings is independent to that of the Substructure rotation and is only available for
the Bridge Models.

Figure: 2.9.e Bearing Angle

2.9.2 Pier Section Description

A different edit dialog appears depending upon the "Pier Behavior" option selected on
the Analysis Settings page.

If "Linear - Gross" is selected and the "Edit" button is clicked, then the Gross Section Pier
Properties dialog will appear. Note that gross section properties can only be specified in
association with linear behavior. Further, D/C ratios are not computed for members
defined using gross properties, and only values of 0.0 are listed among the analysis res-
ults.

If the "Pier Behavior" option selected on the Analysis Settings page is "Linear" or "Non-
linear", the Full Cross Section Pier Properties dialog will appear. For linear analysis, the
program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed cross section descriptions.

By clicking "Table View" the "Pier Cross Section Table" appears. In the "Pier Cross Sec-
tion Table" the user can enter or view most of the cross-section data for column and
Pier cap in one table.

Return to the Pier Page.

2.9.2.1 Gross Section Pier Properties

 Figure: 2.9.a Gross Section Pier Properties

Column and Pier Cap members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp
axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of
members.

Modify the properties of a linear pier cross section in the following fields:
Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.

Figure: 2.9.b Component Taper End Point Locations

Database Section Selection

If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined
set of cross-sections.
In the Gross Pier Properties page, there is only one option (Linear 36" new round con-
crete) when you click on the "Retrieve Section" button.
If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current
cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To Data-
base" button. The user can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Sec-
tion" button.
Section Data
Enter the area and the unit weight of the section.

Taper Cantilever Properties

Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.

Figure: 2.9.c Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties

Section Properties
Enter the following data for the dimensions of the segment:
1. Inertia 2 Axis—The moment of inertia about the 2-axis
2. Inertia 3 Axis—The moment of inertia about the 3-axis
3. Torsional Inertia
4. Young’s Modulus
5. Shear Modulus
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selec-
ted.

Return to the Pier Section Description page.

2.9.2.2 Full Cross Section Pier Properties

 Figure: 2.9.d Full Cross Section Pier Properties Dialog

Modify all of the properties of a Pier cross section in the following fields:

Pier Component
Select the pier component to edit, or add and remove components.
 Figure: 2.9.e Component Taper End Point Locations

Database Section Selection

If the "Use Database Section" option is selected, the user can select from a predefined
set of cross-sections.
When you click on the "Retrieve Section" button, there are the following options:
 Figure: 2.9.f Pier Cross Section Options

If the "Customize Current Section" option is selected, the user can customize the current
cross section.
Furthermore, the user can also save custom cross sections by clicking the "Add To Data-
base" button. The user can also delete the Database section by clicking the "Delete Sec-
tion" button.

Section Type
Select a cross section type from the following:
The "Edit Section Contents" button yields different windows depending upon the type of
cross section selected.
1. Circular Section
2. Rectangular Section
3. H-Section
4. Bullet Section
Note: this option is only available if the "Customize Current Section" option is selec-
ted.

Section Constitutive Properties

Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain
Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain"
buttons will yield different windows.
Note: when using "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option the user should input the
elastic modulus using material properties panel on the "Detailed Cross Section" dialog.

Section Dimensions
The fields in which one can enter data depend upon the type of cross section selected.
Circular Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Unit Weight
Rectangular Section:
1. Width (w)
2. Depth (h)
3. Unit Weight
H-Section:
1. Unit Weight
Bullet Section:
1. Diameter (d)
2. Width (w)
3. Unit Weight

Parabolic Taper Cantilever Properties

Enter the depths for a cantilever with a parabolic taper.

Figure: 2.9.g Cantilever Parabolic Taper Properties

Detailed Cross Section
By clicking the "Detailed Cross Section" button, one can edit the bar groups and material
properties of the cross section in a table format. Select a segment from the "Section List"
to edit.

Column and Pier Cap members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp
axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of
members.
 Figure: 2.9.h Detailed Cross Section Table

Return to the Pier Section Description page.

Circular Section Properties
 Figure: 2.9.i Circular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.

Enter the data for a Full Circular cross section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.
For the type of Shear Reinforcement, the user can select either spiral or tied.

Casing
Casing can be added by checking "Casing" checkbox. Click "Edit Casing" to enter the Cas-
ing Thickness.

Figure: 2.9.j Casing Thickness

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the void diameter of the Hollow Section.
 Figure: 2.9.k Circular Void Diameter

H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" checkbox. Click "Edit H-Sec-
tion" to enter the H-Section depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.

Figure: 2.9.l Circular Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.

Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2. Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3. Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular). For Circular group, input a Group
Diameter. For Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis)
and staring coordinates. Bars are uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite
corner in the specified orientation.
5. Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6. Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..

Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)

1.  Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2.  Enter the cover thickness.
3.  Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4.  Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5.  Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.

For both methods:

Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group.
If prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Confined Concrete
The Confined Concrete dialog can be access by clicking the Confined Concrete button.
 Figure: 2.9.m Confined Concrete dialog

If no casing is modeled for the cross section, choose between "Unconfined" for no con-
finement or "Shear Reinforcement" for confinement of cross section portions that fall
within the diameter of the outermost reinforcement group.

If a casing (i.e., jacket) is modeled for the cross section, choose between "Unconfined"
for no confinement, "Shear Reinforcement and Casing", or “Shear Reinforcement and
Confine-Only Casing” for confinement of cross section portions that fall within the cas-
ing diameter. Those portions of the cross section that are used for demand and capacity
calculations are illustrated below. Refer to the "Confined Concrete Model" section for
additional details concerning the constitutive relationships used for each cross section
component.
 Figure: 2.9.n Confined Concrete Options

Note: 1. Confinement is not utilized if the "Unconfined" option is selected.

 2. The confinement option "Shear Reinforcement" can only be selected when no
casing is modeled for the cross section.
3. A non-zero casing thickness must be entered in the "Edit Casing" dialog to
enable the "Shear Reinforcement and Casing" or “Shear Reinforcement and Confine-
Only Casing” confinement options.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.

Rectangular Section Properties

 Figure: 2.9.o Rectangular Cross Section Properties Dialog

Pile members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp axes. The local
axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of members.
Enter the properties for a Full Rectangular cross section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.
If the cross section contains taper, then define the four corner bars individually. For
example, the upper left bar could be defined in 'Group 1'. The upper right bar could be
defined in 'Group 2'. The lower left bar could be defined in 'Group 3'. The lower right
bar could be defined in 'Group 4'.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Hollow Section
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the diameter for a circular void, or the length and width for a rectangular void of
the Hollow Section.

Figure: 2.9.p Rectangular Void Data

H-Section
Embedded H-Section can be added by checking "H-Section" checkbox. Click "Edit H-Sec-
tion" to enter the H-Section depth, web thickness, width, and flange thickness.
 Figure: 2.9.q Embedded H-Section Dialog

Allocation Methods
There are two methods for entering bar group data; Custom and Percentage.

Custom:
1. Select or add a Bar Group in the Bar Groups list box.
2. Select a Longitudinal Reinforcement type (Mild or Prestressed).
3. Assign a number of bars in the group and a bar area.
4. Select a Bar Group shape (Circular of Rectangular). For Circular group, input a Group
Diameter. For Rectangular group, select an orientation (parallel to the 2 axis or 3 axis)
and staring coordinates. Bars are uniformly spaced fro staring coordinate to opposite
corner in the specified orientation.
5. Click the Generate Layout button to apply bar group to cross section.
6. Repeat steps 1-4 to add more groups of bars/strands..

Percentage: (Percentage Steel Tutorial)

1.  Enter a Bar Area Reinforcement (% of the cross section area that is steel)
2.  Enter the cover thickness.
3.  Enter the Minimum Spacing (minimum distance between two steel bars).
4.  Click the Generate Layout button to display the available bar options.
5.  Select a bar layout from the Layout list, and click the OK button.

For both methods:

Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group.
If prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.

H-Section Properties

Figure: 2.9.r H-Section Cross Section Properties Dialog

Column and Pier Cap members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp
axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of
members.

Enter the properties of the H-Section in the following fields:

Section Dimension
Enter the depth, width, web thickness, and flange thickness of the H-Section in the text
boxes.

Section Orientation
Select the orientation of the H-Section (web horizontal or web vertical).

Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.

Bullet Section Properties

 Figure: 2.9.s Bullet Cross Section Properties Dialog

Column and Pier Cap members have unique local (1-2-3) axes relative to the Xp-Yp-Zp
axes. The local axes (1-2-3) are utilized when reporting internal forces for elements of
members.

Edit the properties of a bullet section in the following fields:

Edit Bar Groups

Add or remove rebar groups to or from the cross section.
Note: The bar group data must be entered using one of the Allocation Methods.
Cross Section Orientation
Select whether the cross section is oriented in the horizontal direction or the vertical dir-
ection.

Longitudinal Reinforcement
Choose between Mild steel or Prestressed for the type of steel in the bar groups. If
Prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Void Data
Hollow Section can be added by checking "Hollow Section" checkbox. Click "Edit Void" to
enter the diameter for a bullet void, or the length and width for a rectangular void.

Figure: 2.9.t Bullet Void Dialog

Allocation Methods
Enter the number of bars in the group in the "Bars in Group" text box and the total area
of bar group in the 'Bar Area' text box.
If the "Parallel" bar group orientation is selected, enter the coordinates of the bar group
in the "Start 2 Coord" and "Start 3 Coord" text boxes. These are the starting coordinates
of the bar group. The "Parallel" groups are parallel to the straight edges of the bullet
cross section.
If the "Circular End" bar group orientation is selected, enter the group diameter in the
"Group Diameter" text box. The "Circular End" bar groups are positioned in the semi-
circular ends of the bullet cross section.
Choose between mild steel or prestressed for the type of steel in the group. If
prestressed is chosen, then enter the prestress after losses.

Return to the Full Cross Section Pier Properties page.

Section Constitutive Properties

Choose between a "Default Stress Strain Curve" option and a "User-Defined Stress Strain
Curve" option.
Depending upon the stress-strain selection, the "Edit Properties" and "Plot Stress Strain"
buttons will yield different windows.

Default Stress/Strain Curve

Depending upon the type of cross section chosen, the user can edit the individual mater-
ial properties, if the "Default Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Prop-
erties" button is clicked.
First choose a material type on the left, and then enter the properties for that material in
the text boxes.
 Figure: 2.9.u Default Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

User-Defined Stress/Strain Curve

The user can edit the stress-strain data of the materials present, if the "User-Defined
Stress Strain Curve" option is selected, and the "Edit Properties" button is clicked. First
choose a material type on the left, and then enter the stress-strain data for that material
in the table. Click the "Clear" button to clear the table of the current curve values.

Note: when making use of the "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" option, the engin-
eer should input the elastic modulus for constituent materials of the pile cross section
using the "Detailed Cross Section" button located in the "Full Cross-Section Pile Prop-
erties" dialog. For pier members, the "Detailed Cross Section" button is located within
the "Full Cross-Section Pier Properties" dialog.

Figure: 2.9.v User-Defined Material Stress/Strain Properties Dialog

Material Stress-Strain Plot
If the "Plot Stress Strain" button is clicked, or the "Plot" button in the "Default Stress
Strain Curve", or "User-Defined Stress Strain Curve" window is clicked, then a stress-
strain plot will appear.
One can view the stress-strain plot for each material present in the problem, by select-
ing that material from the options at the top.

Figure: 2.9.w Graph of Material Stress/Strain Properties

 Figure: 2.9.x Stress-Strain Properties Table.

Note: Extrapolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those
provided in the stress-strain curve.

Return to the Full Cross-Section Pile Properties or Full Cross Section Pier Properties
page.

2.9.2.3 Pier Cross Section Table

The Pier Cross Section Table allows the user to enter and view most pier cross section
data in a single table. This makes double checking the data very easy. Each table column
represents one cross section. The properties available in the table depend upon the
cross section shape, behavior, type of steel, etc. For example, a round cross section
would only have the 'Diameter' dimension enabled, and not the 'Width' and 'Depth'
dimensions.

Tips for Using the Table:

1. If 'Material Properties' fields are not enabled, this is most likely due to a lack of steel
reinforcement in the cross section. Steel must be present in order to enable these fields.
To do so, click the 'Edit Steel' button in the 'Reinforcement' field, and enter steel data as
necessary. Then return to the table and the necessary material property fields will be
enabled.
2. To taper a cross section, check the appropriate 'Taper' checkbox. This will create
another column in the table, so that cross section data can be entered for each end of
the pier component. Example: column bottom, column top.
3. To create custom Stress/Strain Curves, select "Custom Stress/Strain" in the 'Material
Properties' field. Then click the 'Custom Curves' button in the 'Custom Curves' field.
Figure: 2.9.y Pier Cross Section Table Linear
Figure: 2.9.z Pier Cross Section Table NonLinear
Return to the Pier Section Description section.
2.9.3 Taper Data

Choose to apply a taper to the pier column, pier cap beam, and the pier cap cantilever.

Also, select whether the cantilever taper is linear or parabolic.

Figure: 2.9.aa Pier Taper End Point Locations

For more detailed explanation, see the Taper Modeling page.

Return to the Pier Page.

2.10 Wall Structure Page

The Wall Structure page is only active for the Retaining Wall model type.

By clicking "Table View" the "Pier Cross Section Table" appears. In the "Pier Cross Sec-
tion Table" the user can enter or view most of the cross-section data for the Wall within
a single table.

Figure: 2.10.a Wall Structure Page

Enter the wall height (it must be taller than the retained layer thickness). Note that the
base of the wall and the bottom of the retained soil layer are located at the centerline
elevation of the pile cap.

Enter the “wall offset”. This is the +x global distance from the edge of the pile cap (foot-
ing) to the wall location.
Upon clicking "Edit", a unique dialog appears depending upon the "Behavior" option
selected on the Analysis Settings page.

If "Linear - Gross" behavior is selected on the Analysis Settings page and the "Edit" but-
ton is clicked, then the Gross Section Wall Properties dialog will appear. If
"Gross" properties are specified, then a linear analysis approach is utilized for wall mem-
bers.

Otherwise, the Full Cross Section Wall Properties dialog will appear. When detailed com-
ponent properties are input non-linear analysis is an option and linear analysis also. For
linear analysis, the program calculates linear elastic properties from the detailed cross
section descriptions.

By clicking the "Table View" in Edit Cross section panel, opens the "Wall Cross Section
Table". In the "Wall Cross Section Table", the user can enter or view the most of the
cross-section data for Wall in one table.

2.11 Extra Members Page

 Figure: 2.11.a Extra Members Page

Additional members (extra members) can be added to connect nodes in the model. To
create cross sections for use in extra member elements, click the "Edit Cross Sections"
button. This launches the cross sectional windows on which one or more cross sections
can be defined. Once defined, these cross sections can be applied to extra member ele-
ments.

To create the extra member elements, click the "Add Element" button. This will add a
blank row in the table, in which to enter extra member data. Each extra member element
must be assigned an I-Node and J-Node value. The I-Node and J-Node values can be
typed directly into the table cells, or graphically selected in the 3D View window. Cus-
tom end fixity conditions can be defined by entering the "Extra Member Custom End Fix-
ity" dialog (accessed by clicking the 'Custom Fixity' button). Any end fixity definitions
that are defined can then be assigned within the 'End Condition' column of the table.
Note that the 'Fix-Fix', 'I-Node Pin', 'J-Node Pin', and 'Pin-Pin' are also available within
the 'End Condition' column of the table.
The cross section of any currently selected extra member is rendered directly on the X-
Members Page. To apply a cross section to an extra member element, click the drop
down cell in the 'Cross Section' column of the table. This will display a list of available
extra member cross sections. The cross section type for extra members ("Gross Prop-
erties" or "Full Cross Section") is dictated by the "Pier Behavior" selection on the Analysis
Settings page. For example, if "Pier Behavior" has been selected as "Linear - Gross", then
extra member cross sections are defined using "Gross" properties.

Changes made in the model AFTER extra members have been applied may cause extra
members to shift position. The explanation "Extra Member Positioning with Respect to
Model Changes" describes this further .

Note: Extra members are not available in the following models: Pile and Cap, Pile, Stiff-
ness, Column.
2.11.1 Extra Member Custom End Fixity

Custom end releases can be specified for the element-local rotational degrees of free-
dom at the I-Node and J-Node ends of extra member elements The end fixity process
operates at the element-local level, and so, three columns are available for release at the
I-Node end (R1, R2, and R3), and three columns are available for the J-Node end (R1,
R2, R3). The definition of a custom end fixity condition consists of populating one or
more rows within the ‘End Fixity’ table with values of ‘0’ (release) or ‘1’ (do not release).

After defining one or more custom end fixity definitions within the ‘End Fixity’ table of
this dialog, the custom end fixity condition(s) can be assigned to one or more extra mem-
ber elements on the ‘X-Members’ page. Note that one custom end fixity definition can
be assigned to multiple elements, as the end fixity only dictates which rotational degrees
of freedom are to be released. Also, note that a maximum of sixty rows can be stored.

Figure: 2.11.b Extra Member Custom End Fixity dialog

To add rows within the table of End Fixity definitions, specify the desired number of
rows to be added and click the 'Add Rows' button. This will add the new rows to the bot-
tom of the table.

To delete rows within the table of End Fixity definitions, highlight the number of rows
targeted for removal, and then click the ‘Delete Rows’ button.
Return to the Extra Members Page.

2.12 Load Page

To add a load at a node of interest:

1. Graphically select that node in the 3D View window, or directly input the node num-
ber.
2. Then click the right 'Add' button to add the load to the node.
3. Enter load values for the 6 degrees of freedom.

Additional load cases can be added by clicking the left 'Add' button.
The 'Table' button shows a table of the loads for the selected load case.
If the preload option is selected (which would allow one to apply DL or other "built in"
loads to the pier structure) such loading is applied by the software before the transfer
beam is engaged. These built in loads, as is often the case with Segmental Bridges,
would thus exist in addition to any other loads being applied.

The self-weight and buoyant load factors are used to set the contribution of self-weight
and buoyancy for each load case. These are used for for static analyses. When Design
Specifications features are used, then these loads are defined via the Design Specs. page.
In particular, self weight is included by adding a dead load type case and buoyancy is
included by adding a buoyancy type case.

Edit the loads in the following areas:

1. Load Case
2. Buoyancy
3. Applied Nodal Loads
4. Loads
 5. Load Table
6. Design Specifications Load Table
7. Distributed Load Dialog
8. Load Case Generator
9. Edit Functions
10. Vessel Collision

In static analysis mode, the Load Page layout is:

Figure: 2.12.a Load Page Static Analysis Load

Click the "PreLoad" button to launch the "PreLoad" dialog. On the "PreLoad" dialog, in
the table, select (check) the checkbox in the "Include PreLoad" column for each desired
load case. PreLoad will be applied to each of the selected load cases. Preload is typically
used to model construction loads.
 Figure: 2.12.b PreLoad

Check "Prescribed Displacement" to apply a displacement (rather than a load) to a node.

Loads and Displacements can not be applied at the same node in the same load case.

When design specifications features are utilized to generate load combinations (e.g.,
AASHTO (LRFD)), the Load Page layout is:
 Figure: 2.12.c Load Page in AASHTO Analysis Mode

When Bearing load locations contain ‘L’ and ‘R’, these designations indicate the left and
right bearing row, respectively.

In dynamics analysis mode the Load Page layout is:

 Figure: 2.12.d Load Page in Dynamic Analysis Mode

Nodal loads are marked as either static (S), or dynamic (D). Clicking on the S or D letter
toggles the load type from static to dynamic, and vice versa. For dynamic load types, the
load function number can be specified in the degree of freedom direction. A unique load
function can be applied to each degree of freedom. The load function can be specified
using the "Edit Functions" button on "Load" page.

Click the "Table" button to edit both static and dynamic loads.

Click the "Thermal Load" button to launch the "Thermal Load Cases" dialog. This dialog
is only available for static analysis of bridge models (when the AASHTO (LRFD) feature
is made use of, thermal loading is applied explicitly in the TU and TG load cases). Also,
the "Thermal Load Cases" dialog cannot be accessed until detailed superstructure cross-
section and temperature data are defined. Navigate to "Bridge" Page -> "Edit Span" ->
"Section Properties and Temperatures" to supply detailed superstructure cross-section
and temperature data.
 Figure: 2.12.e Thermal Load Cases

The table on the ‘Thermal Load Cases’ dialog displays one row per load case. Use the
checkboxes in the "Include Thermal Loadings" table column to apply thermal loading to
the desired load cases.
2.12.1 Load Case

Select a load case to view, modify, add, or remove new load cases.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.2 Buoyancy

The buoyant force on the bridge substructure that is submerged, i.e., below the water
table, is automatically computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is input, or if buoy-
ancy is activated (checked on) from the Design Specs. page. The computation includes
piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of the pile cap is accounted for, where the
volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be used to determine the buoyant force
acting on the pile cap. A convenient way to check buoyancy and self-weight calculations
is to include only these loads, run the program, and then view the "Sum of Total Soil
Spring Loads", Z direction in the output file.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.3 Applied Nodal Loads

Select the node to which a load is applied. Add and delete a nodal load.

Alternatively, click the Table button to edit the loads in a table format.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.4 Loads

Select whether or not preload conditions (e.g., construction loads, shoring) are present.
For the preload scenario, equilibrium loads are found due to application of loads
defined in the preload load case. Then, after equilibrium is established, the analysis uses
the equilibrium conditions to calculate the solution for the load cases.
Note that preloading can be applied (or not) for any load case of interest.

Enter point loads in the Xp, Yp, and Zp directions, and moments about the Xp, Yp, and Zp
axes.

Also, enter factors for self-weight and buoyancy. Note that self-weight corrections are
made for overlaps between:
1) Pile portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness;
2) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pile cap thickness; and,
3) Pier column portions that lie within the physical pier cap thickness.

Check ‘Applied Displacement’ to specify a displacement rather than a load for a node.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.5 Load Table

Edit the loads in the table by selecting a text field to edit.

Alter the table with the following options:

1. Update and Sort
Click the "Update and Sort" button to refresh the table.

2. Table Edit Options

Insert and delete rows to and from the table.

The "Load Table" is used to define nodal loads in a table-style format. Static and
dynamic loads are separated into two separate tables that can be toggled using the
"Table Format" options.

Dynamic Analysis Type

Static as well as Dynamic load cases can be viewed while in Dynamic analysis mode.
Enter the nodes and any applicable load function for each nodal degree of freedom.
 Figure: 2.12.f Load Table in Dynamic Analysis Mode

Static Loads
Enter the load case, node, and load values.
 Figure: 2.12.g Load Table in Static Analysis Mode

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.6 Design Specifications Load Table

Loads can be edited in tabular form using the loads table. When the Design Spe-
cifications features are used (e.g., AASHTO (LRFD)), any number of nodal loads can be
added or removed for each type of load (e.g., Components and Attachments). Load
types cannot be added from within this dialog, nor can all the nodal loads under a given
load type be removed. To add a load case, navigate to Design Specs. -> Load Case Man-
ager.

Figure: 2.12.h Design Specifications Load Table

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.7 Distributed Load Dialog

For a selected Load Case, the Distributed Load dialog helps to convert constant, uniform,
and linear load distribution types along an element length into nodal loads.
 Figure: 2.12.i Distributed Load dialog

Select the member of interest from the following members (structural component) of
the pier using the 'Member' drop-down menu:
1. Pile
2. Pile Cap
3. Column
4. Pier Cap

The ‘3D View’ window (right side in the main program window) displays the nodes for
the selected structural member.

The user can also highlight an individual pile or pier column of interest using the ‘High-
light Member’ drop-down menu. For example, when the user selects ‘Pile 1’ from the
‘Highlight Member’ drop-down menu, Pile 1 in the ‘3D View’ window will then be high-
lighted. This feature facilitates location of a given pile or pier column of interest.

Select one of the following load distribution options from the ‘Load Types’ drop-down
menu.
1. Constant
2. Uniform
3. Linear

The ‘Constant’ load distribution option generates identical loads. The ‘Uniform’ load dis-
tribution option generates loading based on tributary length. The ‘Linear’ load dis-
tribution option generates loading based on the interpolation between the starting and
ending nodes’ load magnitudes and tributary length.

In the table, the starting and ending node numbers can be input for the element lengths
over which the distributed load is to be applied. The node numbers can be directly input
in the table, or the node numbers can be graphically selected by clicking nodes in the
‘3D View’ window. After selecting the nodes over which the distributed load will act,
input the Xp, Yp, and Zp components of the distributed load or moment in the table.
 Note: Nodes can only be selected from among the nodes displayed in the ‘3D View’
window, and the selected nodes should be located along a straight line. For example, if
pile nodes are selected, both selected nodes must be on the same pile; if column nodes
are selected, both selected nodes must be on the same column; if pile cap nodes are
selected, both nodes must be in the same pile cap grid row or grid column.

The ‘Clear Load Generation Table’ button will clear all contents from the table.

Clicking the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ button will generate nodal
loading on selected nodes using the distribution option, load magnitude entered, and
the tributary length.

The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button is active only for Pile and Column
members. Clicking the ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button for the selected pile
member will generate equivalent loads on all ‘Other Member’ piles having the same pile
type, batter conditions and soil set. Similarly, clicking the ‘Generate Load On Other Mem-
bers’ button for the selected column member will generate equivalent loads on all
‘Other member’ columns having similar height. For example, a pier model consist of
two pile types (Pile Type 1, and Pile Type 2) with similar batter condition and soil set. If
nodes on the pile consisting of Pile Type 1 is selected, then the ‘Other Members’ are all
other pile consisting of Pile Type 1.

Note: The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ button will NOT generate loads on
the selected pile’s nodes, but rather on the ‘Other Members’ of the selected pile/column
(if present) in the model.

Each time the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ or ‘Generate Load On
Other Members’ button is clicked, the generated load is displayed in the ‘Generated
Load’ table.

The generated loads will be applied to the model only after the user clicks the ‘OK’ but-
ton. Clicking the ‘Cancel’ button will not apply any of the loads generated as part of
using the ‘Distributed Load’ dialog.
Please refer to the step-by-step guide for further details on how to use the Distributed
Load dialog.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.8 Load Case Generator

The "Load Case Generator" dialog can be used to add nodal forces from two or more
load cases. It can also be used to factor the nodal forces from a particular load case.

Figure: 2.12.j Load Case Generator dialog

The user needs to specify the load factors and use "Include" column to include the load
case to be combined. Click the "Generate Load Case" to add the new combined load
case. The new load case generated can subsequently be used in combination process
again. When finished, Click OK to include all the new load cases to the model.

Return to the Load Page.

2.12.9 Edit Load Functions

The Edit Load Functions dialog is used to define one or more load functions for a
dynamic analysis.

Figure: 2.12.k Edit Load Function Dialog

The "Select a Load Function" box contains the list of all defined load functions.

Click "Add" or "Delete" button to create a new load function, or delete an existing load
function, respectively. When the Applied Acceleration vs. Time (All Nodes) option is
specified on the "Dynamic" page, only one load function can be defined and is auto-
matically applied to the entire model.

Click the "Import" button to retrieve an existing load function from a text file. Predefined
load functions have the following extensions:
".dlf" Load vs. Time
".acc" Acceleration (ground) vs. Time
".spt" Acceleration vs. Period (response spectrum)
The format of the text file should contain paired data (time, load), (time, acceleration), or
(period, acceleration). The file can have between one and four pairs per line (maximum
80 characters per line).

The "Load Function Edit Table" displays the paired values used in the load function.
Rows can be inserted or deleted as needed. The "Update Table" button sorts the values
according to increasing time. You can drag and drop a range of data points from a
spreadsheet directly into the table. "Table PDF" displays the load function table in a pdf.
The user may print it or save it for record keeping.
Figure: 2.12.l Load Function Edit Table Dialog
2.12.10 Vessel Collision Dialog

For a given impact location, the associated vessel collision parameters can be defined
using the “Vessel Collision” dialog.

Figure: 2.12.m Vessel Collision dialog

Impact parameters pertaining to the vessel itself include Vessel Weight and Vessel Velo-
city. Maximum separation time is the parameter which allows for the analysis to ter-
minate after collision has occurred and the vessel and impact location have became
separated for the selected amount of time. The Vessel Velocity is used by FB-MultiPier in
automatically determining the vessel orientation (i.e., the orientation of the impact load
that is generated as part of the analysis). Accordingly, activation of the respective degree
(s) of freedom (DOF) dynamic loading flags in the “Loads” page, are automatically
handled by FB-MultiPier. Please refer to Section 6.4.2 for more details.

Regarding the geometry (width, shape) of the contacted interface, the associated para-
meters can be defined as part of the Impact Conditions input, namely, Collision Type
and Collision Width. Four options are available under the Collision Type drop-down list:
Collision on Flat Surface, Collision on Round Surface, User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve,
and User-Defined General Curve. The selected Collision Type dictates the shape of the
vessel bow force-deformation relationship, which can be either elastic, perfectly-plastic
or of arbitrary shape (if the User-Defined General Curve option is selected). After select-
ing the Collision Type the Collision Width may also be input (note that this parameter is
not required if either the User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve or the User-Defined General
Curve options are selected). The Collision Width is the width of the structural com-
ponent that is directly impinged upon by the vessel, and this parameter dictates the max-
imum vessel bow force that can be generated. Correspondingly, the Vessel Bow Force-
Deformation Relationship is automatically computed for the Collision on Flat Surface
and Collision on Round Surface options, in accordance with Getter and Consolazio
(2011).

Note that the “Wide View” check box allows for viewing the force-deformation curve
over a wider abscissa range.
Figure: 2.12.n Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
deformation (Getter and Consolazio 2011)
User can input 'User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve', Or 'User-Defined General Curve'. For
'User-Defined Elastic-Plastic Curve', input the Yield Load and Crush Depth. For 'User-
Defined General Curve' enter the Crush Depth at Yield, the Loading and Unloading
Curves.

Figure: 2.12.o Load Function Edit Table

Return to the Load Page.

2.13 Springs Page

 Figure: 2.13.a Spring Page

To add a spring to the substructure, graphically select a node in the 3D View window, or
directly input a node number. Then, click the 'Add' button to add the node to the "Spring
Node List". Enter spring stiffness values for the 6 degrees of freedom and use the check
boxes from the "Apply to Load Case" list to apply the springs to selected load case(s).
For models that make use of Design Specifications features, the springs can be enabled
or disabled for each Load Combination.

Edit the springs in the following areas:

1. Spring Stiffness
Enter the stiffness for each Xp, Yp, and Zp translation spring, and for each Xp, Yp, and Zp
rotational spring.

2. Spring Nodes List

As discussed above, click on a node in the 3D view window or select a node using the
text box and click the "Add" button to add a node to the "Spring Node List".
Also, use the "Del" button to delete a node from the list.

2.14 Mass/Damper Page

The Mass/Damper Page provides the capability of applying concentrated masses or

dampers to any pier node. To apply a concentrated mass or damper, click on the node in
the 3D View window and then click the "Add" button to place the node in the node list.
Concentrated mass values can be entered without concentrated damper values, and vice
versa. Concentrated damper values can only be entered if "Damping" is enabled in the
Dynamics Page.

Figure: 2.14.a Mass/Damper Page

Concentrated Mass/Dampers in 3D View Window

All concentrated masses and dampers are shown. Dampers are shown as a green dash-
pot. Masses are shown as a gray sphere.
 Figure: 2.14.b Concentrated Mass and Damper in 3D View (Thin Element Mode)

2.15 Retained Soil Page

 Figure: 2.15.a Retained Soil

Enter the data for the retaining wall in the following fields:

Soil Layer
Select a soil layer to edit from the drop down menu, or add and remove a soil layer.

Wall and Layer Geometry

The wall, retaining the soil, is modeled as a cantilever (column) element. Enter Retaining
wall and soil layer parameters for each layer.
Each layer will cause a horizontal pressure to be applied to the wall in the –X global dir-
ection.
Each layer is divided into a number of sub-layers. A minimum of 10 sub-layers is recom-
mended for each layer.
The weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a distributed ver-
tical load acting on the footing.
Soil Layer Data
“At-Rest” OR "Active" OR "Passive" soil forces are calculated for cohesionless soil only.
Choose between "Pressure at Rest", "Passive Case", or the "Active Case" options, and
then click the Layer Data button to specify the data.

The horizontal earth pressure will be calculated depending on "At-Rest", "Active", or

"Passive" conditions considered. FB-MultiPier uses the Coulombs’ earth pressure theory
for active and passive earth pressure case.
The horizontal earth pressure is calculated as:
1. At-Rest Case:

2. Active Case:

3. Passive Case:

where,
Po, Pa, and Pp – are at-rest, active, and passive horizontal earth pressure respectively.
Pv – vertical earth pressure.
Ko, Ka, and Kp – are at-rest, active, and passive coefficient of earth pressure respectively.

The coefficients of earth pressure are calculated as:

1. At-Rest Case:

2. Active Case:
3. Passive Case:

where,
θ – Inclination of the wall face on the back side
φ – Internal angle of friction
δ – Friction between back of wall face and backfill soil
β – Angle of sloping backfill

Wall Load Data

Select the case number and click "Surcharge".

Retaining Wall Explanation

 Figure: 2.15.b Retaining Wall Explanation

Note: 1. The Weight of the retained soil is accounted for during the analysis as a dis-
tributed vertical load acting on the footing.
2. Bouyancy effects on the pile cap take into consideration the Soil Water Table.
However, if a positive value is supplied for the Ground Water Height, then the
Ground Water Height will govern the pile cap bouyancy force calculations.
2.15.1 Retaining Wall Soil Layer Data

Enter the following properties of the retained soil layer:

1. Cohesion
2. Soil Angle of Friction
3. Soil-Wall Angle Friction
4. Unit Weight of Soil
5. Saturated Unit Weight of Soil

Return to the Retaining Page.

2.15.2 Surcharge

Depending upon the type of surcharge selected, different parameters will be required.
Click on the load case you want to associate the surcharge with using "Applicable Load
Cases" box.

Figure: 2.15.c No Surcharge

Figure: 2.15.d Uniform Surcharge
Figure: 2.15.e Line Load
 Figure: 2.15.f Strip Load

Return to the Retaining Page.

2.16 Bridge Page

For a bridge model, the Bridge Page is used to generate and modify substructures (pier
foundations) and superstructures (bridge spans).
 Figure: 2.16.a Bridge Page (Bridge model)

Substructure
Select a substructure from the Substructure list, "Add" to add a new substructure, "Del"
to remove the currently selected substructure, "Replace" to replace the substructure, or
"Insert" to insert a new substructure.
 Figure: 2.16.b Add Substructure Dialog

Figure: 2.16.c Replace Substructure Dialog

 Figure: 2.16.d Insert Substructure Dialog

For the Add Substructure, Replace Substructure, or Insert Substructure, engineers may
choose from any substructure within the current model. Also, the Default Pier, Default
Bent, or an imported substructure may be selected.  The selected substructure prop-
erties will be used for the newly created, inserted, or replaced substructure.

The Model Type can be either a General Pier or Pile Bent model. Both models are cap-
able of having bearing locations, which are essential for connecting the substructures
using bridge spans.

Global Coordinates for Substructure Origins

The Global X Coord and Global Y Coord are used to layout each substructure in the
bridge model. The origin of each pier substructure is positioned at the corner of the
respective pile cap. For pile bent substructures, the origin is located at the head of the
respective Pile 1.
Rotation Angles
The Pier Rotation Angle specifies a pier rotation about the vertical Z-axis. The pier rota-
tion is specified as clockwise positive in the FB-MultiPier coordinate system and is typ-
ically used to model skew or radial piers on a curved alignment. The Bearing Angle
(rotation of the bearings) is independent of that of the Pier Rotation and is measured
about the vertical Z-axis.

Bearing Rows
Select the number of Bearing Rows and specify if the span should be continuous. Spe-
cific boundary conditions can be selected and customized by clicking the Edit Supports
button.

Superstructure
Select a Span to edit from the span combo box. The "C/C Length" indicates the span
length from the center bearing line of one pier to the center bearing line of the next pier.
Click the "Edit Span" button to edit the span section properties.

One Pier Two Span (OPTS)

For OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where you can add the
OPTS Data.
Figure: 2.16.e Bridge Page (OPTS model)
2.16.1 Edit Supports

Custom bearing connections can be specified by selecting a boundary condition from

the combo box. Boundary conditions can be Released (free to move), Constrained (pre-
vented from movement), or Custom (user-defined load-displacement curve).

There are two versions of this dialog that are displayed based on the number of bearing
rows requested.

Single Row:

Figure: 2.16.f Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Single Row

Two Rows: Left and Right Rows are specified

 Figure: 2.16.g Custom Bearing Connection Dialog for Two Rows

Custom load-displacement curves

Click the "Edit Custom Bearings" button to define custom load-displacement curves for
the bearings. These curves can be applied to any of the six degrees of freedom for a
bearing connection. A maximum of 20 values can be used to define a custom bearing
load-displacement relationship. Values should be entered from smallest to largest dis-
placement. Click the "Add" button to add a new load-displacement curve. Click the "Del"
button to remove an existing load-displacement curve. Click the "Update Plot" button to
refresh the load-displacement plot.
If unsymmetrical curve behavior is desired, then caution should be exercised when defin-
ing the quadrants of the custom bearing curves. For example, if no uplift forces are to be
modeled for vertical translations at the bearing locations, then a curve with only nom-
inal stiffness should be supplied for negative displacements and negative forces. Fur-
ther, representative load-deformation input should be supplied for positive
displacements and positive loads.
 Figure: 2.16.h Custom Bearing Data Dialog

Return to the Bridge Page.

2.16.2 Edit Span

The Bridge Span Properties allows for specification of the geometry, cross sections, tem-
perature loading, and span end-conditions for each span in a bridge model.

Figure: 2.16.i Bridge Span Properties Dialog

A unique number of span nodes can be defined for each span: input the desired number
of 'Superstructure Beam Nodes' in the 'Nodal Coordinates' region of the dialog.
Span coordinates can be generated automatically by the program, in which case a
straight line of frame elements will connect one substructure to the next. Alternatively,
custom span coordinates (global X, Y, Z) can be defined for the nodes making up each
span. This latter modeling approach can be initiated by navigating to the 'Nodal Coordin-
ates' region of the dialog and:

1. Inputting the desired number of 'Superstructure Beam Nodes'.

2. Selecting the 'Custom' radio button.
3. Entering the 'Table'.
4. Supplying the global X, Y, and Z coordinates for each node.

Note:
1. The first and final two rows of coordinates within the ‘Span Coordinates’ dialog
are not editable, as these coordinates are necessary to position the span left-end and
right-end vertical link elements.
2. For OPTS models, the Begin Height is not input for Span 1, nor is the End Height
input for Span 2. Instead, the span outermost extents are dictated by the Span End
Local Coordinates.
 Figure: 2.16.j Span Coordinates Dialog

After the span coordinates have been defined, the Transformed Section Properties for
the bridge superstructure can be input. There are two methods to do this. Method 1 is to
click 'Table' within the 'Cross Section' region of the dialog, and directly input Area, I2, I3,
J, E, G, and Unit Weight. Method 2 is to click the ‘Section Properties and Temperatures’
button, and have the program compute these properties based on explicitly input girder
and slab section properties on the ‘Section Properties’ dialog. The program uses these
properties to model frame elments with equivalent gross properties (i.e., a spine model)
that span between the two adjacent substructures. The Begin Height and End Height
parameters are used to offset the beam from the center of gravity of the pier cap to the
center of gravity of the span.

Section Area is the entire span area in the transverse direction, including girders, road-
way, and parapets. Transverse Area is the span profile area for wind load on the struc-
ture application (usually computed as: [girder depth + roadway depth + parapet depth]
x span length).
 Note: Begin Height and End Height are measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to
c.g. of the bridge span. Live Load Height is measured from the c.g. of the pier cap to
the c.g. of the Live Load (i.e. at 6 ft above the roadway per AASHTO).

Span End Conditions are set independently for each end of the span. Different end con-
ditions may exist based on the construction; FB-MultiPier can simulate these conditions
by assigning various properties to the Transfer Beam.

l Stiff – scaled (amplified) properties relative to the superstructure.

l Soft – unscaled properties relative to the superstructure.
l Custom – user defined custom properties.

Figure: 2.16.k Span Properties Table Dialog

The Span Properties Table displays section properties for each element along the bridge
section. Spans are divided into elements as dictated by the span coordinates. The 3D
Bridge Window will show each element’s size in proportion to the inertia 3 axis.

The ‘Copy’ button near the top of the Bridge Span Properties dialog launches the ‘Span
Copy’ dialog. This feature is intended only for use when the Base Span contains Default
generation of span Nodal Coordinates. The ‘Span Copy’ dialog is used to copy all span
properties between spans. This includes all properties in the Span Section Properties
frame and Span Profile Properties frame on the ‘Bridge Span Properties’ dialog, all
girder and slab data on the ‘Section Properties’ dialog, and all temperature data on the
’Temperatures’ dialog. To use the span copying feature, select a base span in the ‘Base
Span’ combo box and a target span in the ‘Target Span’ combo box. Then click the ‘Copy
Span’ button. The base span is the span from which properties will be copied, and the
target span is the span to which the base span’s properties will be copied. Select the ‘Mir-
ror’ checkbox prior to clicking the ‘Copy Span’ button to mirror the base span’s prop-
erties in the target span. Mirroring is of particular use when the ‘Variable’ section
properties option is selected on the ‘Bridge Span Properties’ dialog, as variable prop-
erties allow for per-element span input. Mirroring the span properties will copy the span
properties from the first element of the base span into the last element of the target
span; the second element in the base span will be copied into the second to last element
in the target span, and so forth, making the target span a mirror of the base span. Fig-
ure: 2.16.millustrates the mirror feature. Note that span two is a mirror image of span
one.

Figure: 2.16.l 3D Bridge View

 Figure: 2.16.m Span Copy

Return to the Bridge Page.

2.16.3 Span End Condition

Span end conditions can either be automatically calculated by the program, or altern-
atively, the end conditions can be specified on the Bridge Span Properties dialog. In par-
ticular, each of the transfer beam, vertical link, and (if applicable) continuity link
properties can be input.

Clicking on "Transfer Beam" will open the Transfer Beam properties dialog and one can
select stiff (default), soft, or custom properties.

Figure: 2.16.n Transfer Beam Properties

Clicking on "Vertical Link" button will open the Vertical Link properties dialog and one
can select stiff (default) or custom properties.
 Figure: 2.16.o Vertical Link Properties

Clicking on "Continuity Element" will open the Continuity Element at Right End of Span
properties dialog and one can select default or custom properties.
 Figure: 2.16.p Span Continuity Element Properties

Return to the Bridge Page.

2.16.4 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Data Dialog

Figure: 2.16.q shows the OPTS data dialog for the default OPTS Model type in FB-
MultiPier. Please refer to Section 6.3 for step-by-step instructions related to building
OPTS models in FB-MultiPier.

Figure: 2.16.q “OPTS Data” dialog

Local Spring Coordinates

Please refer to the diagram on the OPTS Data dialog for the location of the local coordin-
ate axes. Enter the coordinates corresponding to the locations of the span end springs.
Span End Boundary Spring and Span End Lumped Mass
Figure: 2.16.q shows the default spring stiffnesses and span mass values provided in the
default OPTS model type. Please refer to Section 6.3.1 for step-by-step details of mod-
eling using OPTS default model type.

The following scenarios can be used to update the span end spring stiffnesses and span
mass values:

1. The span end spring stiffnesses and span mass values can be automatically gen-
erated when OPTS model is generated from a multiple-pier Bridge Model. Refer
to Section 6.3.3 for details.
2. User can manually calculate span end spring stiffnesses and mass values depend-
ing on the bridge model. For more information on how to calculate the span end
spring stiffnesses and mass values, refer to section 6.3.3 .
3. The user can modify the span end spring stiffness and mass values by using
“Import Spring/Mass Data” button in the OPTS Data dialog. The spring stiffnesses
and mass values can be imported from an “.opt” file after clicking on the “Import
Spring/Mass Data” button. The imported values will then display in the “Span
End Boundary Spring” table and the “Span End Lumped Mass” text box.
The “.opt” file can be created using either of the following 2 scenarios:
a. The “.opt” file is created when the analysis to convert a bridge model to an
OPTS model occurs (Refer to Section 6.3.2 ). The “.opt” file is automatically
placed in a special folder called “OPTS_Formation” when the conversion
from a bridge to an OPTS model occurs. This “OPTS_Formation” folder is
located in the same directory as the bridge file that was converted to an
OPTS model. NOTE: In this scenario, all creation and processing of the .opt
file is automatically handled by FB-MultiPier.
b. It is also possible to manually create the “.opt” file without running the ana-
lysis. To do so, follow the “.opt” file format (as described in the spring and
mass headers in the Help Manual) and manually type the values.

Return to the Bridge Page.

3 Model View Window

1. Soil Edit Window

2. Pile Plan View Window
3. 2D Bridge View
4. 3D View Window
5. 3D Bridge Window
6. Mouse Controls

3.1 Soil Edit Window

"Right Click" in the Soil Edit window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:

1. 2D View Control
a. See Mouse Controls
2. Pick Layer — Allows the user to pick a layer
3. Copy Layer—Replace properties of selected layer with those of layer selected from
submenu
4. Add Layer — Add a new soil layer to the model
5. Split Layer — Split the current layer in to two layers
6. Remove Layer — Delete the selected layer from the model
7. Thin Pile/Wall Elements — Show pile and wall as thin elements
8. Thin Pile Cap Elements - Show pile cap as thin elements
9. Reset View
 Figure: 3.1.a Soil Edit Window

A partially embedded pile is displayed above. Nodes in the free length are displayed as
silver and nodes embedded in the soil are displayed as brown. Only the embedded (i.e.,
brown) nodes are clickable, and selecting one will bring up the Printable Soil Graph dia-
log, showing the soil curve for the selected node. Please see Printable Soil Graph for
more details.

3.2 Pile Plan View Window

"Right Click" in the Pile Plan View window to bring up the view edit menu with the fol-
lowing options:

1. 2D View Control
a. See Mouse Controls
 2. Pile Selection
3. Add/Remove Piles — Click on a grid point/pile to add or remove a pile. *
4. Add Piles (Drag Box)
5. Remove Piles (Drag Box)
6. Copy Pile Properties — Click on a pile to copy properties from the highlighted pile. *
7. Assign Pile Types to Piles — Assign a Pile Type to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
8. Assign Soil Sets to Piles — Assign a Soil Set to a Pile by clicking on this Grid. *
9. Assign Uniform Soil Sets to Piles — Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time.
10. Scale Pile Drawing — Click to Scale Piles larger or smaller for better view.
11. Add/Remove Cap — Click on a portion of the pile cap to remove it.
12. Add Cap (Drag Box)
13. Remove Cap (Drag Box)
14. Edit Cap Thickness — Click on a portion of the pile cap to edit the Cap Thickness.
15. Custom Grid Spacing — Click on a spacing "element" to edit the Spacing.
16. Assign Soil Sets to Cap — Click to Assign a Soil Set to a Pile Cap element by clicking
on this Grid
17. Assign Uniform Soil Set to Cap — Click to change all of the Soil Sets at one time.
18. P-Multipliers — Allows the user to view the P-Multipliers in the Pile Plan View win-
dow (to view go to the Soil Page and click the Group button).
19. Numbering — Allows the user to view the pile numbers.
20. Show Soil Set — Show or hide soil sets at grid point locations where piles are
defined.
21. Show Soil Set Numbering at All Grid Points
22. Drag Box Shape — Select either rectangle or ellipse. Note that holding down Shift
while drawing the Drag Box will snap to either a square (if rectangular) or circle (if
elliptical).
23. Reset View — Returns the view back to the default.

*This action will change the currently selected pile. The currently selected pile is the pile
that is displayed on the 'Pile Page' and in the 'Soil Edit' window. In the 'Soil Edit' window,
the currently selected pile is displayed along with its assigned soil set. For more
information on the integration between the selected pile and the selected soil set, click
here.

Figure: 3.2.a Pile Plan View Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

3.2.1 Assign Pile Types to Piles

This feature is used to assign Pile Types to grid locations. A “Pile Type” consists of one or
more cross sections used within a single pile. Access this feature via the “Assign Pile
Type to Piles” menu option in the Pile Plan View window. By default, Pile Type 1 will be
selected.

Figure: 3.2.b Assign Pile Types to Piles.

To choose a different pile, change the selected Pile Type (Figure: 3.2.c). Notice that the
list of cross sections associated with this pile type displays, and that the cross section
drawing is updated. In this example, Pile Type 2 consists of 1 cross section, a 36” Drilled
Shaft.
 Figure: 3.2.c Assign Pile Types to Piles Circular.

To apply this selected Pile Type in the model, click a grid location in the Pile Plan View
window, such as pile 1.
 Figure: 3.2.d Pile Plan View window Pile Grid.

Notice that Pile Type 2 is now applied to this grid location, replacing Pile Type 1.

Figure: 3.2.e Pile Grid with type 2 circular pile shown.

Additional grid points can be clicked to apply this Pile Type.

Figure: 3.2.f Pile Grid with several type 2 circular piles shown.

Additional Notes:
1. Pile Types are created on the Gross Pile Properties Dialog and the Full Cross-Section
Pile Properties Dialog.

Return to the Pile Plan View page.

3.2.2 Edit Cap Thickness

To edit cap thickness right click in the Pile Plan View window and select Edit Cap Thick-
ness. The pile cap elements will turn gray.

Figure: 3.2.g Select Edit Cap Thickness

You can then left click and select each cap element:

Enter the "first" thickness of the cap (not the actual thickness), which allows the user to
simulate different types of connections—very thin for a more pin-like connection, or
thick for a more rigid connection.

Enter the "second" thickness of the cap, which is the actual thickness to simulate the
weight of the cap.
 Figure: 3.2.h Enter Element Thickness

Return to the Pile Plan View page.

3.2.3 Custom Grid Spacing

Enter the spacing of the row/column selected.

Alternatively, edit the grid spacing in a table format by pressing the Grid Spacing Table
button.

Figure: 3.2.i Custom Grid Spacing Dialog

Add a new row or column at the mid point of the column or row selected by pressing
the "Split Row/Column" button, or delete a row or column by pressing the "Delete
Row/Column" button.

Return to the Pile Plan View page.

3.2.4 Grid Spacing Table

Refer to "Grid Spacing Table".

Return to the Pile Plan View page.

3.3 2D Bridge View

Figure: 3.3.a Bridge Plan View Window

The current pier can be selected by clicking on the desired pier in the window.

Selecting a set of bearing locations depicted in the window will bring up the Custom
Bearing Connection dialog for the appropriate pier structure.
Selecting the span between piers brings up the Bridge Span Property dialog.

3.4 3D View Window

"Right Click" in the 3D View window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:

1. 3D View Control
a. See Mouse Controls
2. Node Selection
3. Element Selection – Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain dia-
logs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
4. Add/Remove Pier Cap Element
a. Click on pier cap element to remove or to add it back to model after it has
been removed.
5. Piles – show or hide the piles in this window
6. Caps – show or hide the pile cap
7. Nodes – Hide or show the various types of model nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Bearing Nodes
c. Pier Cap Nodes
d. Cantilever Nodes
e. Column Nodes
 f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
8. Node Numbering
9. Element Numbering
a. Structure Elements
b. Pile Elements
c. Pile Cap Elements
10. Pier – show or hide the pier structure
11. Loads – show or hide the loads
12. Springs – show or hide the springs
13. Dampers – show or hide the dampers (for models using dynamic analysis)
14. Masses – show or hide the masses (for models using dynamic analysis)
15. Soil – show or hide the soil
16. Show Soil Set – show or hide the soil sets
17. Retained Soil – show or hide the retained soil (for retaining wall models)
18. Axes (Local) – show or hide the local axis
19. Axes (Global) – show or hide the global axis
20. Pier Data – show or hide the pier global coordinates
21. Thin Elements – display the model in thin element mode
22. XZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the XZ plane
23. YZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the YZ plane
24. Reset View – restore the model view to the default rotation, zoom, and tilt
Figure: 3.4.a 3D View Window
3.4.1 Element Dialog

The 'Element Data Dialog' is a quick way to reference the properties of any pier element,
pile element or extra member element in the model. To launch the dialog, right-click in
the 3D View window. This will launch the window's popup menu. Make sure the window
is in 'Thin Elements' mode (this menu item should have a checkmark next to it). Then
select the menu item 'Element Selection'. Then click an element in the model. The dialog
will display, showing the element's data, including element number, location in the
model, dimensional data, and material properties. To change the selected element,
simply click another element.

Figure: 3.4.b Element Data Dialog

3.5 3D Bridge View

"Right Click" in the 3D View window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:

1. 3D Mouse Control
a. See Mouse Controls
2. Piles – show or hide the piles in this window
3. Caps – show or hide the pile cap
4. Nodes – Hide or show the various types of model nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Bearing Nodes
c. Pier Cap Nodes
d. Cantilever Nodes
e. Column Nodes
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
5. Node Numbering
6. Pier – show or hide the pier structure
7. Slab and Girders (Not available yet)
8. Loads – show or hide the loads
9. Springs – show or hide the springs
10. Dampers – show or hide the dampers (for models using dynamic analysis)
11. Masses – show or hide the masses (for models using dynamic analysis)
12. Soil – show or hide the soil
13. Show Soil Set – show or hide the soil sets per substructure
14. Axes (Local) – show or hide the local axis
15. Axes (Global) – show or hide the global axis
16. Pier Data – show or hide the pier global coordinates
17. Thin Elements – display the model in thin element mode
18. XZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the XZ plane
19. YZ Plane View – show the model as rotated in the YZ plane
20. Reset View – restore the model view to the default rotation, zoom, and tilt

Figure: 3.5.a 3D Bridge View Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

3.6 Mouse Controls

The below listing of mouse controls applies to program 2D and 3D windows that imple-
ment a View Control mouse action mode.

2D Windows
Soil Edit
Pile Plan View (Edit)
Pile Plan View (Results)
Bridge Plan View
Span Cross Section Plot

2D Mouse Controls
Left Mouse Button Down functionality (works while in View Control mode only):
[Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Ctrl] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Zoom model

Middle Mouse Button functionality (works in any mouse action mode):

[Middle Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Mouse Wheel] = Zoom model

Note that 2D windows do not use the [Shift] modifier

3D Windows
3D View
3D Bridge View
Pier Element Selection
Pier Member Selection
Pile Element Selection
3D Results

3D Mouse Controls
Left Mouse Button Down functionality (works while in View Control mode only):
[Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Rotate model
[Shift] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Ctrl] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Zoom model

Middle Mouse Button functionality (works in any mouse action mode):

[Middle Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Pan model
[Shift] + [Left Mouse Button] + [Drag] = Rotate model
[Mouse Wheel] = Zoom model
4 Program Results

1. Pile Results
2. Pier/Bent Results
3. Pile Interaction Diagrams
4. Pier Interaction Diagrams
5. 3D Results
6. XML Report Generator

4.1 Pile Results

Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:

1. Pile Selection
2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
5. Accounting for Signs of Internal Forces
4.1.1 Pile Plan View - Pile Selection

"Right Click" in the Pile Selection window to bring up the view edit menu with the fol-
lowing options.

1. View Control
2. Select Pile
3. Select Piles (Drag Box)
4. Deselect Piles (Drag Box)
5. Drag Box Shape — Select either rectangle or ellipse. Note that holding down Shift
while drawing the Drag Box will snap to either a square (if rectangular) or circle (if ellipt-
ical).
6. Reset View

Select the piles to view in the Graphs.

 Figure: 4.1.a Pile Plan View - Pile Selection Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

Return to the Pile Results page.

4.1.2 Plot Display Control

Figure: 4.1.b Plot Display Control Dialog

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:

Member Forces:
Shear 2 (kips)
Shear 3 (kips)
Moment 3 (kip-ft)
Moment 2 (kip-ft)
Axial (kips)
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil Forces (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Vertical Zp (kips)
Soil Lateral Xp (kips)
Soil Lateral Yp (kips)
Soil Torsional (kip-ft)
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Lateral X (in)
Lateral Y (in)
Rotation About X (in)
Rotation About Y (in)
Click the ‘Force’ combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the ‘Max’ and
‘Min’ edit boxes, among the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This win-
dow shows the elevation and pile number of the maximum and minimum values of the
selected piles.

Click the ‘Current Load Case’ radio button to display force curves for the load case that
is currently selected in the ‘Load Case’ control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all
currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap / bent cap. The maximum and min-
imum values for the force currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box will display in the
‘Max’ and ‘Min’ edit boxes. These maximum and minimum values are determined from
the currently selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.

Click the ‘Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to auto-
matically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.

Click the ‘Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to auto-
matically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.

Click the ‘Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases’ radio button to auto-
matically select all piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM or
MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only curves that display in the plot windows
when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.

Click the ‘Max D/C For Limit State’ radio button, and select a limit state in the accom-
panying combo box, to view the maximum load combination for the selected limit state.
Click the ‘Redraw Curves’ button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button
should be clicked after changing which forces are selected among the various force
checkboxes.

For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum
member force, location, and corresponding time step.

Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.

Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.1.3 Graphs

Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pile Selection view or Pier
Member Selection view.

Figure: 4.1.c Pile Results Graphs

Right click a selected graph and select the option ‘Printable Graph' to open the printable
graph dialog.

Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.1.4 Printable Forces Dialog

This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pile
Results Page or Pier/Bent Results Page.

Figure: 4.1.d Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Separate Columns)

 Figure: 4.1.e Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Same Column)

This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the
Pile or Pier Results Forces dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form
at each node along the member.

Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve col-
ors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.

Table Options:
- Toggle the I/J Nodal Data in Same or Separate Columns.
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.

Excel/PDF:
- Prints the graph and table contents in Excel or PDF format.

*If more than one pile/column is graphed, the member with the maximum value will be
displayed in the graph title. For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are identical to the colors used on the Pile/Pier
Forces Dialog. 

Printable Forces Tutorial

Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.1.5 Accounting for Signs of Member Internal Forces

As is common to 3D finite element analysis software, considerations are made in FB-

MultiPier to facilitate physically discernible presentation of computed member (frame-
element) internal forces. For some portions of the program output, no adjustments are
made with respect to the sign of computed internal forces, so as to adhere to the estab-
lished element-local directions. However, in the more design-oriented program UI win-
dows, adjustments are made to bring about adherence to concepts such as the
"designer sign convention" (an example is given below).

The program output sections listed below present the internal force quantities obtained
from analysis without any adjustment to signs:
- Text output file (.out)
- XML output file (.xml)
- Interaction diagram plots
- 3D Results Window

The more design-oriented results locations in the program make use of internal-force
sign adjustments to facilitate plotting of force profiles (or tabulation of excerpted
results) that follow the designer sign convention:
- Pile Force windows
- Pier/Bent Force windows
- Design Tables

An example for plotting of pile internal forces is “flipping” the sign of j-node 3-axis
moments for the purpose of plotting 3-axis moments in the Pile Force windows. Like-
wise, the i-end shear force signs are "flipped" for plotting pile internal forces.

Consider the frame shown below, which consists of two fixed-base columns (15 ft tall;
elastic modulus of 4415 ksi; moment of inertia of 8748 in4) and an effectively rigid
beam. The mid-span of the effectively rigid beam is subjected to a load of 10 kips, res-
ulting in the shear and moment diagrams also displayed below.
 Figure: 4.1.f Schematic of frame configuration

A corresponding FB-MultiPier (pile-and-cap) model is shown below, where the “beam”

(an effectively rigid pile cap) spans along the Xp-direction, and a 10-kip load is applied
at the “beam” midspan, oriented in the positive Xp-direction. Note that the positive Xp-
axis corresponds to the positive pile-local 2-axis. The computed shear and moment pro-
files are also shown below, and are presented with respect to the pile-local axes. As an
artifact of the positive 2-axis aligning with the positive Xp-axis, the shear profiles are
reported as positive. Further, the computed results from FB-MultiPier match those repor-
ted above.
 Figure: 4.1.g Schematic of frame with 10 kip loading

An additional, corresponding FB-MultiPier (pile-and-cap) model is shown below, where

the “beam” (an effectively rigid pile cap) spans along the Yp-direction, and a 10-kip load
is applied at the “beam” midspan, oriented in the positive Yp-direction. Note that the
positive Yp-axis corresponds to the negative pile-local 3-axis. The computed shear and
moment profiles are shown below, and are presented with respect to the pile-local axes.
As an artifact of the negative 3-axis aligning with the positive Yp-axis, the shear profiles
are reported as negative. Taking into account the relative orientations of the Yp and 3-
axes, the computed results from FB-MultiPier match those reported above.
 Figure: 4.1.h Schematic of frame with 10 kip loading

Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2 Pier Results

Use the following windows to view the results of the analysis:

1. Pier Member Selection

2. Plot Display Control
3. Graphs
4. Printable Forces Dialog
4.2.1 Pier Member Selection

"Right Click" in the Pier Member Selection window to bring up the view edit menu with
the following options.

1. 3D View Control
2. Member Selection
3. Nodes
4. Reset View

Select the piers to view in the Graphs.

 Figure: 4.2.a Pier Member Selection Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

Return to the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.2 Plot Display Control

Figure: 4.2.b Plot Display Control Dialog

Choose the type of data to be displayed in the graphs:

Member Forces:
Shear 2 (kips)
Shear 3 (kips)
Moment 3 (kip-ft)
Moment 2 (kip-ft)
Axial (kips)
Demand/Capacity Ratio
Soil Forces (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Soil Vertical Zp (kips)
Soil Lateral Xp (kips)
Soil Lateral Yp (kips)
Soil Torsional (kip-ft)
Displacement (Not Available for Pier/Bent Results):
Lateral X (in)
Lateral Y (in)
Rotation About X (in)
Rotation About Y (in)
Click the ‘Force’ combo box to view the maximum and minimum data in the ‘Max’ and
‘Min’ edit boxes, among the currently drawn curves of this selected force type. This win-
dow shows the elevation and pile number of the maximum and minimum values of the
selected piles.

Click the ‘Current Load Case’ radio button to display force curves for the load case that
is currently selected in the ‘Load Case’ control on the toolbar. Curves will display for all
currently selected piles, columns, or the pier cap / bent cap. The maximum and min-
imum values for the force currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box will display in the
‘Max’ and ‘Min’ edit boxes. These maximum and minimum values are determined from
the currently selected piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap.

Click the ‘Max for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to auto-
matically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MAXIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MAXIMUM force, at the specified load case.

Click the ‘Min for Selected Force, with Corresponding Forces’ radio button to auto-
matically select the pile, column, or pier cap / bent cap in which the MINIMUM force
occurs (of the force type currently selected in the ‘Force’ combo box), across all load
cases. The corresponding forces will also be drawn for this pile, column or pier cap /
bent cap that contains the MINIMUM force, at the specified load case.

Click the ‘Max and Min For All Forces Across All Load Cases’ radio button to auto-
matically select all piles, columns, or pier cap / bent cap that possess a MAXIMUM or
MINIMUM value across all load cases. The only curves that display in the plot windows
when this option is selected are the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM values.

Click the ‘Max D/C For Limit State’ radio button, and select a limit state in the accom-
panying combo box, to view the maximum load combination for the selected limit state.
Click the ‘Redraw Curves’ button to update the drawing in the plot windows. This button
should be clicked after changing which forces are selected among the various force
checkboxes.

For a time step analysis, select a member force combo box item to display the maximum
member force, location, and corresponding time step.

Click on one of the plot windows to display the maximum and minimum values.

Return to the Pile Results or the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.3 Graphs

Graphs are plotted corresponding to the colored piles on the Pile Selection view or Pier
Member Selection view.

Figure: 4.2.c Pile Results Graphs

Right click a selected graph and select the option ‘Printable Graph' to open the printable
graph dialog.

Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.4 Printable Forces Dialog

This dialog is reached by right clicking in any plot window that contains data on the Pile
Results Page or Pier/Bent Results Page.

Figure: 4.2.d Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Separate Columns)

 Figure: 4.2.e Printable Forces Dialog (I/J Nodal Data in Same Column)

This dialog displays the forces plots of each pile/column/pier cap that is selected on the
Pile or Pier Results Forces dialog, as well as a table listing of the forces in numeric form
at each node along the member.

Graph Options:
- Customize: customize the appearance of the graph, i.e. change the font size, curve col-
ors, graph range, etc.
- Save as Bitmap: save the graph (not the entire dialog) as a bitmap (.bmp) file.

Table Options:
- Toggle the I/J Nodal Data in Same or Separate Columns.
- Save Data: saves the table data to a text file.

Excel/PDF:
- Prints the graph and table contents in Excel or PDF format.

*If more than one pile/column is graphed, the member with the maximum value will be
displayed in the graph title. For example, (max at Pile 1).
**The colors used to plot the curves are identical to the colors used on the Pile/Pier
Forces Dialog. 

Printable Forces Tutorial

Return to the Pile Results or Pier/Bent Results page.

4.2.5 Accounting for Signs of Member Internal Forces

As is common to 3D finite element analysis software, considerations are made in FB-

MultiPier to facilitate physically discernible presentation of computed member (frame-
element) internal forces. For some portions of the program output, no adjustments are
made with respect to the sign of computed internal forces, so as to adhere to the estab-
lished element-local directions. However, in the more design-oriented program UI win-
dows, adjustments are made to bring about adherence to concepts such as the
"designer sign convention" (e.g., associating positive bending with tension on the bot-
tom face of a pier cap).

The program output sections listed below present the internal force quantities obtained
from analysis without any adjustment to signs:
- Text output file (.out)
- XML output file (.xml)
- Interaction diagram plots
- 3D Results Window

The more design-oriented results locations in the program make use of internal-force
sign adjustments to facilitate plotting of force profiles (or tabulation of excerpted
results) that follow the designer sign convention:
- Pile Force windows
- Pier/Bent Force windows
- Design Tables

An illustrative case and additional discussion is provided here.

Return to the Pier/Bent Results page.

4.3 Pile Interaction

Clicking the "Pile Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can
select the type of interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)

Type of Pile Interaction Diagram:

1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
2. Uniaxial Moment..2 Axis
3. Uniaxial Moment..3 Axis

Please see "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.

Elements can be selected using:

1. Element Selection Mode (Thin) - Select the element (from "Pile Element Selection" win-
dow) to display on the interaction diagram.
4.3.1 Pile Element Selection

Select the pile element from the model to view its interaction diagram.

Figure: 4.3.a Pile Element Selection Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

Return to the Pile Interaction page.
4.3.2 Pile Interaction Diagram

"Right Click" in the Pile Interaction window to bring up the view edit menu with the fol-
lowing options:

1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the
interaction diagram title

View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.

 Figure: 4.3.b Pile Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pile Interaction page.

4.3.2.1 View Data Table

The Data Table shows a list of all points along a Pile Interaction Diagram curve. To dis-
play the table, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.

Figure: 4.3.c Data Table Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pile Interaction Diagrams page.

4.3.2.2 View Data Points

To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will
launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will dis-
play along the Interaction Diagram.
 Figure: 4.3.d Data Points Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pile Interaction Diagrams page.

4.3.2.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This
will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point
Numbers' will display along the Interaction Diagram.

Figure: 4.3.e Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pile Interaction Diagrams page.

4.4 Pier Interaction

Clicking the "Pier Interaction" on the menu opens a drop down list where the user can
select the type of interaction diagram to view AND selection mode (Thick/Thin)

Type of Pier Interaction Diagram:

1. Biaxial Moment Interaction
2. Uniaxial Moment..2 Axis
3. Uniaxial Moment..3 Axis

Please see "Interaction Diagrams" for more information.

Select the element (from "Pier Element Selection" window) to display on the interaction
diagram.
4.4.1 Pier Element Selection

Select the pier element from the model to view its interaction diagram.

Figure: 4.4.a Pier Component Element Selection Window

Zoom Feature Tutorial

Return to the Pier Interaction page.
4.4.2 Pier Interaction Diagram

"Right Click" in the Pier Interaction window to bring up the edit menu with the following
options:

1. Data Table
2. Data Points
3. Data Numbering
4. Show Points Notes - Displays a note stating "(right- click for point table)" under the
interaction diagram title.

View the interaction diagram for the selected segment.

 Figure: 4.4.b Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pier Interaction page.

4.4.2.1 View Data Table

The Data Table shows a list of all points along a Pier Interaction Diagram curve. To dis-
play the table, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will launch a popup
menu. Then select the 'Data Table' menu item.

Figure: 4.4.c Data Table Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pier Interaction Diagrams page.

4.4.2.2 View Data Points

To display the Data Points, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This will
launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Points' menu item. The Data Points will dis-
play along the Interaction Diagram..
 Figure: 4.4.d Data Points Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pier Interaction Diagrams page.

4.4.2.3 View Data Point Numbering

To display the Data Point Numbering, right click in the Interaction Diagram window. This
will launch a popup menu. Then select the 'Data Numbering' menu item. The 'Data Point
Numbers' will display along the Interaction Diagram.

Figure: 4.4.e Data Point Numbers Interaction Diagram

Return to the Pier Interaction Diagrams page.

4.5 3D Results

View the three-dimensional results of the analysis using the following windows:

1. 3D Display Control
2. 3D Results Window
4.5.1 3D Display Control

Control and view the display data numerically in the following fields:

1. Display Control
2. Contours Dialog
3. Max Min Forces Dialog
4. Node Displacement
5. Results Plotting
 Figure: 4.5.a 3D Display Control Window

Return to the 3D Results page.

4.5.1.1 Display Control

Select the output to view in the Display Window from the following:

1. Displaced Shape — Shows a displaced wire-frame model

2. Contours Dialog — Distinguishes high displacement areas and high stress con-
centration
3. Pier Max and Min Forces — Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a. Displacement X
b. Displacement Y
c. Displacement Z
d. Rotation About X
e. Rotation About Y
f. Shear 2
g. Shear 3
h. Moment 2
i. Moment 3
j. Axial
k. D/C Ratio
l. Allow Multiple Forces – see Max Min Forces Dialog
4. Pile Max and Min Forces — Highlights Max and Min locations of selected stress
a. Displacement X
b. Displacement Y
c. Displacement Z
d. Rotation About X
e. Rotation About Y
f. Shear 2
g. Shear 3
h. Moment 2
i. Moment 3
j. Axial
k. D/C Ratio
l. Soil Axial
m. Soil Torsional
 n. Soil Lateral X
o. Soil Lateral Y
p. Allow Multiple Forces – see Max Min Forces Dialog
5. Mode Shape — Eigenvectors used in modal analysis

Return to the 3D Display Control page.

4.5.1.2 Contours Dialog

This option is accessed via the following:

- Click 3D Results on the menu -> In "3D Display Control" window -> "Display Control"
panel.
- Select the "Contours" on the Display Control panel to open the Contours Dialog (Fig-
ure: 4.5.b).
 Figure: 4.5.b Contours Dialog

Select the Contour Type "Stress" or "Displacement".

For Stress Contour, select one of the following Stress Types:
a. M1
b. M2
 c. M12
d. S13
e. S23
f. S1
g. S2
h. S12

Check "Custom Range" to launch the "Custom Range for Stress Contours" dialog, to spe-
cify the range for the selected type of Stress Contour.

Figure: 4.5.c Custom Range for Stress Contours

For Displacement Contour—select one of the following Displacement Types:

a. X Translation
b. Y Translation
c. Z Translation
d. X Rotation
e. Y Rotation
f. Z Rotation

Return to the 3D Display Control page.

4.5.1.3 Max Min Forces Dialog

This option is accessed via the following:

- Click 3D Results on the menu -> In "3D Display Control" window -> "Display Control"
panel
- Select the "Pier Max and Min Forces" or "Pile Max and Min Forces" on the Display Con-
trol panel and select the desired force.
- If "Allow Multiple Forces" is selected, the Max and Min Forces dialog will display.

* if more than one force is selected, each element that contains a maximum or minimum
force will be highlighted in the 3D Results Window.
** if a single element contains both the max and the min force (common when all forces
of a certain type are 0.00), the text "MaxMin" will display next to that element.
*** if a single element contains more than one maximum force (or more than one min-
imum force), the element's color will match the selected force that is closest to the bot-
tom of the "Max and Min Forces" dialog.  For example, an element contained the
maximum Shear2 force, and the maximum Axial force, the element would be colored to
match the Axial force.
 Figure: 4.5.d Max and Min Forces Dialog for Piles (Left) and Piers (Right)

Max Min Tutorial

Return to the 3D Display Control page.

4.5.1.4 Nodal Displacement

View the data for a node in the following areas:

1. Node Number — Select the node to view.

2. Scale Factor — Select the scale factor for the displaced shape.
3. Translation (Global) — Displays the translation in the X, Y, Z directions of the selected
node as a result of the loading.
4. Rotation (Global) — Displays the rotation about the X, Y, Z directions of the selected
node as a result of the loading.
5. Nodal Coordinates (Global) — Displays X, Y, Z coordinates of the selected node prior
to loading.

Return to the 3D Display Control page.

4.5.1.5 Results Plotting (Dynamic Results)

The "Results Plotting" section handles the graphical display of dynamic results. The "Res-
ults Time Plot" allows the user to see the variation of displacement with time for a selec-
ted node.

There are two types of results plots:

1. Displacement vs. Time. This includes graphs for X Translation, Y Translation, and Z
Translation.
2. Rotation vs. Time. This includes X Rotation, Y Rotation, and Z Rotation.

Select the node you want to plot the results for. Then use the "Results Plotting" combo
box to select the desired graph. Then click the "Plot" button.
 Figure: 4.5.e Results Time Plot Dialog

Dynamic Animation is a toolbar option that allows the user to animate the displaced
model when a dynamic analysis has been run using Time Step Integration. Click the Play
button on the left to begin animation. Click the Pause button on the right to pause the
animation. The "Select Time Step" slider control between the Play button and Pause but-
ton will move, as the time steps are cycled thru. The displaced model will be drawn in
the 3D Results window, corresponding to the current time step shown on the "Select
Time Step" slider and the "Time Step" edit box. The displacement values for the currently
selected node on the 3D Display Control dialog will match the time step that is currently
being drawn in the 3D Results window. The time that corresponds to the currently
drawn time step will display in the "Time" edit box. The speed with which the animation
draws is dictated by the "Animation Speed" control. The maximum (fastest) speed is 25,
the minimum speed is 1, and the default speed is 24. To view the model for a specific
time step, ensure the animation is paused (by clicking the Pause button). Then, use the
"Select Time Step" slider to select a time step. The model will draw in the 3D Results win-
dow for the selected time step, and the displacements for the selected node will be
shown in the 3D Display Control dialog.
 Figure: 4.5.f Dynamic Results Animation Control Dialog

Return to the 3D Display Control page.

4.5.2 3D Results Window

View the results of the analysis. Elements that have a demand/capacity (D/C) ratio
exceeding 1.0 are shown with a red (highlight) marker.

"Right Click" in the 3D Result window to bring up the view edit menu with the following
options:

1. 3D View Control
a. Hold the left mouse button down and drag to rotate the view
b. Hold the left mouse button and the shift key down and drag to pan the view
c. Hold the Control key and the left mouse button down to enable zooming
i. With the key and button pressed down move forward to zoom in
ii. With the key and button pressed down move backward to zoom out
Zoom Feature Tutorial
2. Node Selection – Allows the user to select items in the view to edit in certain dialogs
a. Pick end nodes in the extra members dialog
b. Pick the loaded nodes in the load dialog
c. Pick the node to apply springs to in the spring dialog
d. View the coordinates of the node in most dialogs
3. Element Selection – Allows the user to view result forces for selected element.
4. Nodal Displacements
5. Nodal Displacements Plot
6. Nodal Results Export
7. Element Forces
8. Pile Cap Force Plot
9. Bridge Span Force Plot
10. Nodes
a. All Nodes
b. Transfer Beam Nodes - (Left Row and Right Row)
c. Bearing Nodes - (Left Row and Right Row)
d. Pier Cap / Column Nodes
e. Cantilever Nodes
f. Pile Cap Nodes
g. Pile Nodes
11. Node Numbering
12. Material Property Numbering
13. Element Numbering
a. Connector Elements
b. Structure Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Pile Cap Elements
14. Element Highlighting
a. Connector Elements
b. Bearing Connector Elements
c. Pile Elements
d. Column Elements
e. Pile Cap Elements
f. Pier Cap / Bent Cap
15. Axes (Local)
16. Axes (Global)
17. Pier Data
18. Plastic Hinge Zones
a. None
b. Undisplaced Only
 c. Displaced Only
d. Undisplaced and Displaced
19. Undisplaced Model
20. Bridge View – Display the full bridge structure
21. Reset View – Return the view back to the default setting

Return to the 3D Results page.

4.5.2.1 Nodal Displacements Plot

This feature plots displacements and rotations for any node, across all load cases (load
combinations, time steps). Access this via the “Nodal Displacements Plot” menu item in
the 3D Results Window. After selecting this menu item, left-click any node in the model
to launch the plot window.
 Figure: 4.5.a Nodal Displacement Plot.

By default, Displacement X is the selected data type for which a curve is generated. To
change the data type, choose from one of the five data type radio buttons inside the
Data Type frame. These include Displacement X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rota-
tion About X, and Rotation About Y. The plotted data can also be viewed in tabular form
by clicking the “Show Table” button, in the bottom right corner of this dialog.
 Figure: 4.5.b Nodal Displacement Plot Table.

Other features on this dialog include the following:

1. Show Curve Line - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When this feature is
selected (checked), the curve line is drawn. When it is not selected (unchecked), the
curve line is not drawn.
 Figure: 4.5.c Nodal Displacement Plot Points.

2. Show Point Values - This is a tool to help view the plotted data. When selected
(checked), the displacement (or rotation) values display next to their corresponding
point.
 Figure: 4.5.d Nodal Displacement Plot Point Values. 

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.5.2.2 Nodal Results Export

This feature saves results data to a text file, for any pile node or structure node, across
all load cases (load combinations, times steps). For structure nodes, the File Types (data
types) are as follows (see Figure: 4.5.e): Displacement X, Displacement Y, Displacement
Z, Rotation About X, Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, and
D/C Ratio.
 Figure: 4.5.e Nodal Results Export.

For pile nodes, the File Types (data types) are as follows (see Figure: 4.5.f): Displacement
X, Displacement Y, Displacement Z, Rotation About X, Rotation About Y, Shear 2, Shear 3,
Moment 2, Moment 3, Axial, D/C Ratio, Soil Lateral X, Soil Lateral Y, Soil Axial, and Soil
Torsional.
 Figure: 4.5.f Nodal Results Data Piles.

By default, no File Types are selected when the dialog is opened. File Types can either be
selected individually, by clicking (checking) the desired File Type checkbox, or by clicking
the “Select All” button, which selects (checks) all File Types (see Figure: 4.5.g). This but-
ton can also be used to deselect all selected File Types (when the button text reads
“Deselect All”).
 Figure: 4.5.g Nodal Results Data Piles. 

To save the data to a file(s), click the “Save to File” button. It is important to note that
only one data type is saved per file. This makes the data more easily portable to other
applications. For example, displacement X data is saved in one file, displacement Y data
is saved in another file, etc. The default file name has the following format: “NodeXI_
DataType.txt”, where “X” is the selected node number, and I is the selected Node Type
(either I or J). An example of this file name format for all available File Types using node
119 as an I node, is as follows:
Node119I_DisplX.txt,
Node119I_DisplX txt,
Node119I_DisplY txt,
Node119I_DisplZ txt,
Node119I_RotX txt,
Node119I_RotY txt,
Node119I_Shear2 txt,
Node119I_Shear3 txt,
Node119I_Moment2 txt,
Node119I_Moment3 txt,
Node119I_Axial txt,
Node119I_DCRatio txt,
Node119I_SoilLatX txt,
Node119I_SoilLatY txt,
Node119I_SoilAxial txt,
Node119I_SoilTors txt.

By default, these files are saved at the same location as the input file. The contents of
each file can easily be copied into another application for further use, such as EXCEL. The
format of the text file is shown below. Each line in the file contains the load case and its
corresponding value (displacement, rotation, force, etc). The number of lines in the file
equals the number of load cases / load combinations / time steps (this particular
example has 5 load cases):
1 0.0225
2 0.0667
3 0.1385
4 0.2604
5 0.5097

Other features on this dialog include the following:

1. Node Type - Many nodes in the model occupy both an I node position on one ele-
ment, and a J node position on an adjacent element. The I node and J node buttons are
used to specify which of these node types is desired for the currently selected node.
(Some exceptions to a node being both an I node and a J node would be pile tip nodes
and cantilever tip nodes).
2. Element Type - Pier Cap nodes that are positioned at the top of a column exist as both
a pier cap element node and a column element node. Thus a choice must be made as to
which element type the selected node’s forces are desired. The same is true for pile head
nodes in Pile Bent models, which exist as both a pile element node and a bent cap ele-
ment node.

Additional Notes:
1. This feature is not currently available for Pile Cap nodes. Pile Head nodes are NOT con-
sidered pile cap nodes; they are pile nodes, and thus can be used with this dialog.
2. The Soil Axial forces saved by this dialog do NOT include the Pile Tip Spring Force, as
shown in the output (.out) file in the “Near Field Soil Resistance” section.

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.5.2.3 Element Forces

This option is accessed via the following: 

- Right click in the 3D Results Window, and select "Element Forces".
- Then click on any pile or pier element in the 3D Results Window. (Pile cap elements
and bridge span elements are not included in this feature).
- The selected element will become highlighted, and the dialog will launch, displaying all
relevant forces in the selected element.

"Export" button will print to EXCEL the forces for a given (selected) element (at both the I
and j node) for EVERY load case.
 Figure: 4.5.h Element Forces Dialog showing Column forces

*Element # (in Column) is the 1-based index of the element within the column, begin-
ning at the column base.
**Element # (in Pile) is the 1-based index of the element within the pile, at the pile head.
***Element # (in Model) is the 1-based index of the element in the model. This element
number can be referenced in the .out file.

Element Forces Tutorial

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.5.2.4 Pile Cap Force Plot

Figure: 4.5.i "Pile Cap Forces" dialog.

This feature helps to quantify the governing forces and moment values on the pile cap,
which in turn, can be used for determining pile cap reinforcement layouts. The “Pile Cap
Forces” dialog generates the maximum and minimum moment (about Xp or Yp) and
maximum magnitude shear (parallel to Zp) along the selected nodes on the pile cap
across all load cases. Importantly, positive bending moments correspond to tension on
the bottom face of the pile cap elements. The dialog also provides, per unit length, max-
imum and minimum moment plots along the selected nodes.

Use of the “Pile Cap Forces” feature generally proceeds as follows:

1) Open and run an analysis with a model that contains a pile grid size of 2x2 or greater
(e.g., the default General Pier model).

2) Click the “3D Results” button on the top toolbar, and right-click within the “3D Res-
ults” window. Then select the “Pile Cap Forces” option from the popup menu (Figure:
4.5.i).

3) Left-click on a node of interest in the “3D Results” window to select it. Press and hold
the ‘Ctrl’ key to select any number of additional nodes along a pile cap gridline. Altern-
atively, to automatically select all nodes along a gridline, check the “End Point Nodal
Selection” checkbox on the “Pile Cap Forces” dialog. Then, left-click on the first node of
interest and (while holding the ‘Ctrl’ key) left-click on the last node on the gridline. To
ensure meaningful results, please refrain from skipping any nodes along the gridline
while making multiple-node selections.

4) Select the desired moment (about Xp or Yp) (e.g., as shown for the pier model in Fig-
ure: 4.5.j). The maximum and minimum moments in the desired direction can be found
across all load cases (or load combinations), or for a selected individual load case (com-
bination). The current load case (combination) can be changed using the “Load Case”
edit box on the program toolbar. Note that selection of Xp is associated with use of M2
and selection of Yp is associated with M2.

5) Select the desired option from the "Moment" the pulldown list. The options are "Pos-
itive-moment (Bot.)", "About Xp [or Yp]", or "Negative-moment (Top)". For the "Neg-
ative-moment (Top)" selection, cross-moments (M12, see Plate Element) are added to
the M1 or M2 moments, where the maximum value of M12 used for this purpose is 0.0.
For the "Positive-moment (Bot.)" selection, cross-moments are added to the M1 or M2
moments, where the minimum value of M12 used for this purpose is 0.0.

Note: The pulldown list items “Positive-moment (Bot.)” and “Negative-moment (Top)”
lead to estimates of the moment capacities associated, respectively, with placement of
bottom and top steel along the currently selected line of nodes and about the selected
bending direction. This approach is adopted from MacGregor and Wight (2005). The
signs of moments generated using the Pile Cap Forces feature are such that positive
moment values contribute to tension in the bottoms of shell elements, while negative
moment values contribute to tension in the tops of shell elements.

6) Click the “Generate” button to display the maximum and minimum moment plots.
Absolute maximum shear parallel to Zp is also calculated along the axis on which the
moments (Xp or Yp) are acting (Figure: 4.5.j).
 Figure: 4.5.j Maximum and minimum moment (about Xp) plots along the gridline at
the base of columns of the default general pier.

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.5.2.5 Bridge Span Force Plot

The ‘Bridge Span Force Plot’ menu item launches the ‘Bridge Span Force Plot’ dialog (Fig-
ure: 4.5.k). This feature is only available for bridge (multiple pier) models, when the
‘Bridge View’ menu item is also selected on the ‘3D Results’ popup menu. This dialog
works in conjunction with the ‘3D Results’ window, as selections made on this dialog
are drawn correspondingly in the ‘3D Results’ window. The bridge span is used to rep-
resent the 0-axis, with positive force values drawn above the span, and negative force
values drawn below the span (Figure: 4.5.l). The maximum and minimum values are
given on the plot for the currently selected force type. A light blue shading is used to
indicate positive force values, and a red shading used to indicate negative force values.

Figure: 4.5.k Bridge Span Force Plot

 Figure: 4.5.l Span Force Plot

The ‘Span’ combo is used to specify the desired span for which to view force plots. This
combo box also includes an ‘All Spans’ option at the bottom of the list. Choose the ‘All
Spans’ option to simultaneously view the currently selected force plot for all spans in
the model.

The ‘Force’ combo is used to specify the type of force plot. Force options are as follows:
Axial, Shear 2, Shear 3, Moment 3, and Moment 2.

The ‘Scale Plot’ edit box and spin control are used to scale the size of the plot area. This
does not affect the results data. It simply makes the size of plot area bigger or smaller,
and thus can be useful in managing the amount of window space used for the plot area
when a particular model uses a very large or very small area. Thus, scaling would make
the plot easier to read in these extreme cases.
The ‘Show Piers’ checkbox is used to show or hide the piers in the ‘3D Results’ window.
Hiding the piers can help visually isolate the force plots, making them easier to see.

Figure: 4.5.m demonstrates the force plot in the ‘3D Results’ window, when the ‘Show
Piers’ checkbox is not selected.

Figure: 4.5.m Span Force Plot (bridge piers not shown).

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.5.2.6 Material Property Numbering

The Material Property Numbering option shows the material property numbers of all
pier, pile, and connector elements. To display numbering, right click in the 3D Results
Window. This will launch a popup menu. Then select the "Material Property Numbering"
option. Because the pile and pier elements use separate numbering systems, it is pos-
sible that pile and pier elements can share the same property numbers. This is despite
the fact that the pile and pier elements have different cross sections. To view the specific
properties of these elements, consult the "Stage 1" region of the text output (.out) file.
 Figure: 4.5.n Material Property Numbering

Return to the 3D Results Window page.

4.6 XML Report Generator

Accessing the report generator
When you run an analysis in FB-MultiPier an XML output file is generated. The report
generator takes this XML file as an input and generates and HTML report from the data.
This report includes data tables, interaction diagrams, and cross section diagrams. To
use the XML Report Generator you need to check the “XML Data Printing” option under
the “Print Control” on the Analysis page to generate the .XML file.

Figure: 4.6.a XML Data Printing

There are two ways to access the report generator. First you can open it by clicking the
XML report icon in the FB-MultiPier user interface. This will open the report generator
with the XML file of your most recent analysis loaded by default.

Figure: 4.6.b XML report icon

The report generator also exists as a standalone application. The default path to the
executable is “C:\Program Files (x86)\BSI\ ReportGenerator.exe”. The icon for the stan-
dalone application is the same as the XML report icon.
Running the report generator
If you run “ReportGenerator.exe” directly then you will be presented with a splash
screen. This indicates that no XML file has been loaded. Click the “Load XML File” button,
located at the top left of the application window, to load an XML file. A file dialog box
will appear for you to select an XML file.

By default, FB-MultiPier places the XML file in the same location as the input file you
used to run the analysis.

Figure: 4.6.c The report generator application window without an XML file loaded.

Report options
After you have selected an XML file you will be presented with a form to select report
options. By default, the only option selected for the report is “Project Information”. The
path to the XML file is indicated at the top of the application window. This path can be
selected and copied.
 Figure: 4.6.d Report generator with an XML file loaded.

Each structure has its own report options. The report options for the substructures can
be found under the “Substructure” tab. The report options for the superstructures can be
found under the “Superstructure” tab. You can select an individual sub-
structure/superstructure by clicking on its label in the list-box located at the left-hand
side of the application window.

Additional report options for a can be shown by clicking on the text “Click to expand
report options” link. If information you expect to see isn’t being presented in the report,
check to make sure that the appropriate additional report options are selected. Ensure
that the desired print flags on the Analysis Settings page have been checked prior to run-
ning the analysis.
 Figure: 4.6.e Additional report options

Selecting the “Apply selection to all substructures” checkbox will cause your selections
to be toggled for all substructures in the current document. When you switch from the
substructure tab to the superstructure tab the “Apply selection to all substructures”
checkbox will become “Apply selection to all superstructures” checkbox and vice versa.

Clicking on the “All” link for a given substructure/superstructure will cause all report
options for that structure to be selected. Similarly selecting the “None” link for a given
substructure/superstructure will cause all report options for that structure to be deselec-
ted. If you want all options for all substructures/superstructures to be selected then
select “Apply selection to all substructures/superstructures” check box and then click the
“All” link.
Dynamics Files

Figure: 4.6.f Time step spinner

If the analysis type was set to “Dynamic” then there will be a “Time step” spinner at the
top of the application window. This spinner selects which time step to use when gen-
erating the report. The time step must be a positive integer less than or equal to the max-
imum time step that was specified on the Dynamics page. You can change the time step
by clicking on the up/down arrows. You can also change the time step by typing a num-
ber into the text field. If you type a number outside of the existing range of timesteps the
application will change it to the closest valid time step with an error message.

Figure: 4.6.g The Dynamics page in FB-MultiPier where the number of time steps is spe-
cified.

Generating a Report
Once you have selected your report options you can generate the report by clicking
“Generate Report” at the bottom right of the application window. The application will
indicate that it is “Busy…” while the report is being generated; during this time a new
report cannot be generated. The generation of the report can take several seconds or
minutes depending on the size of the XML file and the data that you have selected to
include in the report. Once the report has been generated it will be opened in your
default browser window. If you want to view the report in a different web browser, you
will need to open “Report.htm” directly or change your default browser.

A folder containing the html report will be generated in the same directory as the XML
file. If the name of the XML file is “[name].XML” then the folder containing the report will
have the name “[name]_XML_Report”. Inside this folder you will find “Report.htm” which
can be opened to view the report. To share the report, send a copy of this folder to the
other party.

Figure: 4.6.h An example report

5 Design Tables

The Design Table Generator is shown in Figure: 5.6.i.

Figure: 5.6.i  Design Table Generator

The design tables represent a summary of the pertinent force results required for the
design of the bridge pier(s) modeled. Various tables and a full report are available for
convenient review and are suitable for reporting results to clients. Controlling forces
and load cases are identified, as well as structural element identification and location in
the structure. For the pier cap, design force envelopes are plotted for convenient review
and checking.

1. Load Case Options

2. Report Options
3. Condensed Tables
4. Pier Cap Envelopes
5. Extended Tables
6. Full Tables
7. User Walkthrough

Note: Internal forces for frame elements are reported with consideration of element
local coordinates (1-2-3), relative to the substructure coordinate system (Xp-Yp-Zp). To
facilitate adherence to designer sign convention (e.g., positive bending defined as ten-
sion along the bottom face of a horizontal pier cap beam) adjustments to the signs of
select internal forces are carried out prior to display in certain program results screens
(including the Design Tables). Details regarding sign adjustment of select internal forces
for design-oriented tabulation and force-profile plotting are given here.

5.1 Load Case Options

The load cases (or combinations, or time steps) of interest can be selected for the pur-
pose of generating Design Tables output.
 Figure: 5.1.a  Choose Load Cases dialog

5.2 Report Options

The “Design Load Table” can be viewed in three different file formats, namely, pdf, text
and excel spreadsheet document. The File Options can be viewed in the “Design Load
Table” dialog box as shown below. User can select a particular file format by clicking on
the respective radio-button.
 Figure: 5.2.a File options in Design tables

For “Pier Cap (Bent Cap) Shear Design” and “Pier Cap (Bent Cap) Moment Design”
tables, Excel file format has an extra worksheet showing the Coordinates of the points
on the Pier Cap where the shear and moment values are calculated. This is to facilitate
the user to prepare their own shear and moment envelopes.

Specific page footers can also be added to the “Design Load Table”. The options that can
be added (to the page footer) are Date and Time of the file creation, Version Number of
FBMP used to create the results, and Filename of the input (.in) file. The default file name
for the “Design Load Table” files will be the input (.in) filename followed by the title of
the respective table.

Note: ‘*.pdf’(Acrobat Reader required), ‘*.txt’(Notepad required) and ‘*.xlsx’

(Microsoft-Excel required).
5.3 Condensed Tables

1. Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

2. Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections
3. Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections
4. Piercap Shear Design
5. Piercap Moment Design
5.3.1 Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

Displays the maximum compression and maximum tension at every pile or shaft head
location. These results would typically be compared to pile/shaft capacities as presented
by the Geotechnical Engineer.

Figure: 5.3.a Maximum Axial Forces at Pile Heads

5.3.2 Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections

Displays the Max D/C ratio for every unique pile (or shaft) cross section and lists all 6
concurrent forces at these locations.
Note: The demand/capacity ratio is based on the strength axial-biaxial moment inter-
action and when the program is run with the non-linear structural option P-delta effects
are included in the demand forces for piles, columns and pier cap.

Figure: 5.3.b Maximum Demand Capacity Ratio for All Pile Sections

5.3.3 Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections

Similar as for piles above. Displays the Max D/C ratio for the columns. If the columns are
tapered this can include many different section locations.
Note: The longitudinal reinforcement in tapered columns is constant in area and bar
number.

Figure: 5.3.c Maximum Demand Capacity for All Column Sections

5.3.4 Piercap Shear Design

This table of force envelopes identifies the maximum vertical shear F22 and all con-
current forces in the pier cap at all critical sections: to left and right of every bearing loc-
ation, at face of supports and at centerline of supports. Note that bearings must be
specified.
Figure: 5.3.d Pier Cap Shear Design
5.3.5 Piercap Moment Design

Moment envelope of the M33 moments created by the F22 shear. The moments are
shown at centerline of all bearings and faces of supports and centerline of supports.

Figure: 5.3.e Piercap Moment Design

5.4 Piercap Envelopes

1. Moment Envelope
2. Shear Envelope
5.4.1 Moment Envelope

Figure: 5.4.a Moment Envelope

5.4.2 Shear Envelope

Figure: 5.4.b Shear Envelope

5.5 Extended Tables

1. Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

2. Maximum Forces for All Column Sections
3. Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections
5.5.1 Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

This table shows, in turn, the maximum and minimum forces for axial load, shear 2,
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Pile sec-
tions. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.

Figure: 5.5.a Maximum Forces for All Pile Sections

5.5.2 Maximum Forces for All Column Sections

This table shows, in turn, the maximum and minimum forces for axial load, shear 2,
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all column
sections. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.
Note: Currently there is only one column section unless the columns are tapered.

Figure: 5.5.b Maximum Forces for All Column Sections

5.5.3 Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections

This table shows, in turn, the maximum and minimum forces for axial load, shear 2,
shear 3, moment 2, moment 3, torque and Max Demand Capacity Ratio for all Extra
Members. All coexisting forces and demand capacity ratios are listed.
Note: Extra Members have only two nodes, one at each end.

Figure: 5.5.c Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Sections

5.6 Full Tables

1. Internal Forces at Pile Heads
2. Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Results
5.6.1 Internal Forces At Pile Heads

This full table option is available in Excel format, and allows for instant tabulation of
internal forces at the pile heads for each load case.

Figure: 5.6.a Internal Forces at Each Pile Head

5.6.2 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment Results

Minimum Pile Tip Embedment (MPTE) analysis facilitates assessment of lateral stability
and identification of design-relevant pile/shaft embedment lengths for deep foundation
systems. This feature is available for all model types that contain soil, and can be
enabled on the Lateral Stability page, and operates on a user-defined range of Trial
Embedment Lengths to compute a parametric set of lateral (or otherwise) responses.
The MPTE results dialog can be accessed via the Design Tables window, by clicking the
"Minimum Pile Tip Embedment" button within the Full Tables window-region.

Figure: 5.6.b Minimum Pile Tip Embedment results dialog

Results Display Options

The following display controls can be used to view and catalog MPTE analysis results:
1. Radio button selection of Load Case or Envelope - If the load case (combination) is
selected, then data will be generated for that load case (combination). Alternatively, an
envelope plot (across all load cases, combinations) can be generated. The rightmost pull-
down in the top portion of the dialog can be used to generate minimum or maximum
envelope values.
2. Load case selection – The load case (combination) of interest.
3. Plot pull-down list – The plot type of interest. Selection options include maximum Lat-
eral (resultant) Displacement, maximum Lateral X displacements, maximum Lateral Y dis-
placements, Maximum Axial Force, or Minimum Axial Force. Note that displacement
quantities are taken from pile head nodes while force quantities are taken from across
all pile nodes.
4. Plot – A visual plot of MPTE results data for the selected load case (combination) and
plot type.
5. Table – A table of MPTE results data for the selected load case (combination) and plot
type.

Step-by-Step Guide
The following is a step-by-step guide for viewing MPTE analysis results:

1. Click the Design Tables icon on the main toolbar in order to bring up the Design
Tables dialog.
2. If you plan to export the MPTE results data to EXCEL or PDF, then select the desired
output format from the Excel and PDF radio buttons. The default selection is Excel.
3. Click the button labeled "Minimum Pile Tip Embedment".
4. Use the controls on this dialog to: 1) Investigate various load case (load
combination) results; and, 2) Export results in the desired format (EXCEL, PDF).

Pile Element Length

In order to generate the characteristic asymptote in the MPTE plots, pile element lengths
should be comparable to the incremental length change from one trial embedment to
the next. For example, if 20 trial embedments are assessed for a pile embedded in the
range of 30 ft to 50 ft, then the element length would need to be approximately less
than or equal to (50 ft - 30 ft)/20 trials, or a pile element length of ~1 ft. These
considerations promote adequate element mesh density and consistent positioning of
p-y springs across the set of trial embedment models. Otherwise, there is a risk of lump-
ing artifacts from lack of mesh convergence and inconsistent placement of boundary
conditions (soil springs) into the plotted MPTE results summaries.

Directory Structure for MPTE Analyses

Conduction of MPTE analyses involves generation of several unique models: a "base"
model; and, one additional model for each Trial Embedment Length. Input and output
files associated with the "base" model are generated and stored in an ordinary manner.
In contrast, for each Trial Embedment Length, a unique set of input and output files are
created and stored within a corresponding sub-directory. These sub-directories are loc-
ated within the same directory as the "base" model input file. Because the "base" model
is designated as the first trial embedment, the convention for naming sub-directories fol-
lows the pattern "MPTE2", "MPTE3", etc. The contents of each sub-directory include an
input file describing the state of the model at that particular Trial Embedment Length as
well as the results files from that particular analysis.

5.7 User Walkthrough

The Design Tables are a series of tables that summarize analysis data for various parts
of the model for a particular force or demand capacity ratio, across all load cases or load
combinations. To access the Design Tables feature, run the analysis for a General Pier or
Pile Bent model. Then click the Design Tables button on the toolbar, as shown in Figure:
10.1.d.

The Design Tables Generator dialog will then be displayed, as shown in Figure: 5.7.a.
 Figure: 5.7.a Design Table Generator

Design tables can be displayed in three file formats: printable document format (.pdf),
text (.txt), and EXCEL spreadsheet (.xls). These formats are available in the “File Options”
frame, as shown in Figure: 5.7.b.
 Figure: 5.7.b Report Options frame.

To generate a design table, click one of the “Condensed Tables” buttons or one of the
“Extended Tables” buttons. The following is a list of the available tables:

1) Maximum Axial Forces at All Pile Heads – this table displays the maximum com-
pression and maximum tension forces at the pile head nodes, across all load cases. It is
used to compare to pile drive capacity.

2) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) – this table
displays the maximum demand capacity ratio for each pile property across all load
cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case.

3) Maximum Demand/Capacity Ratio For All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this
table displays the maximum demand capacity ratio for each column property across all
load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case.
4) Pier Cap Shear F22 Design – there are two sub tables of this type. The first table dis-
plays the maximum (+) shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the left
face, right face and centerline of supports. The second table displays the minimum (-)
shear forces at the left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right face and center-
line of supports.

5) Pier Cap M33 Moment Design – there are two sub tables of this type. The first table
displays the maximum (+) moment forces at the bearings and at the left face, right face
and centerline of supports. The second table displays the minimum (-) moment forces at
the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports.

6) Maximum Forces for All Pile Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the max-
imum and minimum axial force for each pile property across all load cases, and the cor-
responding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this process for the maximum
and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, maximum and minimum
Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum Torque.

7) Maximum Forces for All Column Properties (Cross Sections) - this table displays the
maximum and minimum axial force for each column property across all load cases, and
the corresponding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this process for the
maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, maximum and min-
imum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum and minimum
Torque.

8) Maximum Forces for All Extra Member Properties (Cross Sections) - this table dis-
plays the maximum and minimum axial force for each extra member property across all
load cases, and the corresponding forces in this load case. This table also repeats this
process for the maximum and minimum Shear 2, maximum and minimum Shear 3, max-
imum and minimum Moment 2, maximum and minimum Moment 3, and maximum
and minimum Torque.

To view the Piercap envelopes, click the “Piercap Envelope” button. The “Envelopes” dia-
log will be displayed, as shown in Figure: 5.7.c.
 Figure: 5.7.c Envelopes Dialog.

To choose a type of envelope plot, choose a plot type from the “Select Envelopes”
combo box, as shown in 5.7 . For static analysis, there are two plot types: F22 Shear
Envelope and M33 Moment Envelope. For models that make use of load combinations,
there are several plot types, including F22 Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service,
Extreme, as well as M33 Shear Envelopes for Strength, Service, Extreme, and Fatigue.
 Figure: 5.7.d Select Envelopes combo box.

The envelope plots report the maximum and minimum shear and moment data across
all load cases, for the following locations in the model: shear forces are reported at the
left and right of the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline of supports;
moment forces are reported at the bearings and at the left face, right face and centerline
of supports. The coordinate system used in the plot is the distance in the X direction
from the left tip of the pier cap (or bent cap, for pile bent models). This is illustrated in
Figure: 5.7.e. Note that the first coordinate shown is 2.500. This is directly under the left-
most column’s left face (Col 1 LF). This indicates that this column face is 2.5’ from the
left tip of the pier cap. Note that the last coordinate shown is 17.500. This is directly
under the rightmost column’s right face (Col 2 RF). This indicates that this column face
is 17.5’ from the left tip of the pier cap.
 Figure: 5.7.e Envelope plot orientation.

The “Show Columns” checkbox can be selected to draw the columns directly on the plot
window, to improve perspective, as shown in Figure: 5.7.f.
Figure: 5.7.f Envelope Plots with 'Show Columns' option selected.
6 General Modeling

General modeling guidelines are provided for the following aspects of the program:

1. Substructure
2. Superstructure
3. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling
4. Dynamic Vessel Collision Analysis

6.1 Substructure

The following topics are available to facilitate modeling of substructures:

1. Node Numbering
2. Pile Element Meshing
3. Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows
4. Buried Pile Cap
5. Column Connection to the Pile Cap
6. Taper Modeling
7. Extra Member Positioning
8. Distributed Loading
6.1.1 Node Numbering

The conventions for node numbering of substructure frame elements are shown in Fig-
ure: 6.1.a.
Note: These frame elements possess element local coordinates (1-2-3) that are taken
relative to the substructure coordinate system (Xp-Yp-Zp). Details regarding how this
affects reporting of results are given here.
 Figure: 6.1.a Node Numbering

The numbering scheme for the pile cap (thick) shell elements is as follows:
 1. Pile head nodes are assigned node numbers first.
2. Corner nodes of shell elements are assigned next.
1. The first corner node to be assigned a node is located along the Yp axis, at a
maximum distance from the substructure origin.
2. Shell element corner nodes are then assigned sequentially by traveling along
the Xp axis while holding Yp constant.
3. After all corner nodes are assigned, mid-side and center nodes are assigned, starting
along the Yp axis, at a maximum distance from the substructure origin.
1. Shell element mid-side nodes are assigned sequentially by traveling along the
Xp axis while holding Yp constant.
2. If any center nodes are encountered during step 3, then they are also assigned
a node number.

Note: If pile cap (thick) shell elements are removed, the removed element does not
affect the node number assignments.
6.1.2 Pile Element Meshing

Consider the pile and soil layering shown in Figure: 6.1.b. The pile contains two unique
cross sections, or pile segments, where the top 40 ft of pile consists of a concrete cir-
cular section, and the bottom 40 ft of pile consists of a steel-encased concrete section. In
addition, portions of the pile extend above the ground surface elevation (in the free
length) and portions of the pile are embedded in the layered soil profile. In turn, the soil
layering consists of three layers: two cohesionless layers, which encompass a cohesive
layer.

The model components described above pertain directly to the physical configuration of
the pile and soil layering. During analysis, the pile and soil properties are made use of in
assigning properties to the underlying (numerical) elements and nodes making up the
finite element model. Stated another way, prior to conducting an analysis, the physical
(pile dimensions, soil layer thicknesses) and numerical (elements, nodes) model entities
are maintained independent of one another. While this independence allows for engin-
eers to maintain high levels of flexibility during model development, it simultaneously
requires careful consideration to ensure proper finite element mesh discretization for
piles that contain multiple cross sections (segments) and for instances when piles are
embedded in layered soil profiles.

In particular, the following guidelines should be considered:

1. Pile element lengths should be equal to or less than the shortest pile segment length.
2. The end of each pile segment should coincide with a pile node.
3. Pile element lengths should be such that at least one embedded pile node falls within
each soil layer.
4. Additional considerations are also warranted for applications such as minimum pile
tip embedment.
Figure: 6.1.b Pile with multiple segments embedded in layered soil
6.1.3 Soil and Pile Integration in Program Windows

There are several program windows in which a pile or soil set can be selected. These win-
dows are the Soil Edit window, Pile Plan View window, Pile Page, and Soil Page. Regard-
less of which window the selections are made, the Soil Edit window will display the
currently selected pile within its assigned soil set. See Figure: 6.1.c ‘Pile 1’ is the selected
pile and ‘Soil Set 1’ is the selected soil set. The soil set number is displayed in the win-
dow’s title bar, and in the soil layer itself. The selected pile number is displayed in the
top left corner of the window, along with the pile type used in that pile.

Figure: 6.1.c Soil Edit Window

When the selected soil set is changed, the Soil Edit window will immediately update to
display this newly selected soil set. The following is a list of ways to set/change the selec-
ted soil set:
a) On the Soil Page, make a selection in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
 Figure: 6.1.d Soil Page (Soil Set combo box)

When this action is taken, if the currently selected pile uses the selected soil set, then the
pile will also display in the Soil Edit window, along with its nodes. Clicking on these
nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. However, if the cur-
rently selected pile does NOT use the selected soil set, then nodes will not be drawn on
the pile. This indicates the pile does not use the displayed soil set.
 Figure: 6.1.e Soil Edit Window

Note in this figure that ‘Pile 1’ is the selected pile, but ‘Soil Set 2’ is the selected soil set.
Because soil set 2 is NOT assigned to pile 1, the pile nodes are not drawn, and therefore
soil curves would not be generated for this pile-soil combination. It is common when
building up the a model, such as creating multiple soil sets one right after another, that
the Soil Edit window will not draw the pile nodes, because these newly created soil sets
have yet to be applied to any piles. Once the soil sets have been assigned to piles and a
pile selection is made, the pile nodes will be drawn.
b) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
 Figure: 6.1.f Pile Page (Soil Set combo box)

When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will also display in the Soil Edit win-
dow, along with its nodes. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Print-
able Soil Graph Dialog.
c) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Assign Soil Sets to Piles’ menu option.
 Figure: 6.1.g Pile Plan View Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)

Using this mode, soil sets are assigned to pile. After each soil set is assigned, it will dis-
play in the Soil Edit window, along with the pile that is located within the assigned soil
set in the pile grid. Note in Figure: 6.1.h that soil set 2 has just been applied to pile 5. The
Soil Edit window now displays ‘Pile 5’ and its assigned soil set, which is ‘Soil Set 2’.
Figure: 6.1.h Pile Plan View Window (Assign Soil Sets to Piles)
 Figure: 6.1.i Soil Edit Window

This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in
the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
When the selected pile is changed, the Soil Edit window will display it, along with the
pile’s assigned soil set. The following is list of ways to set/change the currently selected
pile:
a) On the Pile Page, make a selection in the ‘Pile’ edit box. See Figure: 6.1.f blue arrow.
When this action is taken, the currently selected pile will display in the Soil Edit window,
along with its nodes, as well as this pile’s assigned soil set. The assigned soil set for this
pile also is displayed on the Pile Page, in the ‘Soil Set’ combo box.
b) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Add/Remove Pile’ menu option.
 Figure: 6.1.j Pile Plan View Window (Add/Remove Piles)

When this action is taken, if a pile has just been added, then this pile will become the
selected pile. This selected pile will then be displayed in the Soil Edit window, along with
the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on
these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog. (If a pile has
just been removed using the ‘Add/Remove Pile’ option, then pile 1 will automatically
become the selected pile and display in the Soil Edit window, along with its assigned soil
set).
c) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Pile Data/Batter’ menu option.
 Figure: 6.1.k Pile Plan View Window (Pile Data/Batter)

When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will be displayed in the Soil
Edit window, along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes will
also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil
Graph Dialog. Note in Figure: 6.1.l that pile 3 has just been selected. It has thus become
highlighted in the Pile Plan View window. The Soil Edit window now displays ‘Pile 3’ and
its assigned soil set, which is ‘Soil Set 2’.
 Figure: 6.1.l Pile Plan View Window (Pile Data/Batter)

When this action is taken, the pile that has just been selected will then be displayed in
the Soil Edit window, along with the soil set that is assigned to that pile. This pile’s nodes
will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil curve in the Printable Soil
Graph Dialog.
e) In the Pile Plan View window, use the ‘Assign Soil Sets to Piles’ menu option. (See
6.1.3 ). When this action is taken, the soil set that has just been assigned will display in
the Soil Edit window, along with the pile that is located within the assigned soil set in the
pile grid. This pile’s nodes will also display. Clicking on these nodes will display the soil
curve in the Printable Soil Graph Dialog.
6.1.4 Buried Pile Cap

For the case where the pile cap is buried as shown in figure below, FB-Multipier will
automatically calculate dead load due to the soil weight applied to the pile cap and buoy-
ancy as indicated by the respective soil and water elevations defined by the engineer.

Note that the “self weight factor” and “buoyancy factor” will be applied to the soil above
the cap in the same way as it is applied to the structural and pile components. For
example (shown below for a static analysis), if both the “self weight” and “buoyancy”
factors are equal to one, then the program will calculate the weight of the structural and
pile components, the weight of the soil above the top surface of the pile cap, and the
effect of buoyancy.

Figure: 6.1.m Buried Pile Cap

When load combinations are being modeled, the program uses user-defined unit
weight of soil on “Soil on Cap” to generate uniformly-distributed loads and includes
them as addition to the self weight of the pile cap. For example, for use of the AASHTO
(LRFD) feature, although the load factors for the load case of DC (components and
attachments) are different from those for the load case of EV (vertical earth pressure),
the program would still apply the load factors of DC to the uniformly-distributed loads
of the soil weight applied to the pile cap. Therefore, the engineer would adjust the user-
defined unit weight of soil on “Soil on Cap” in order to consider the difference of the
load factors between the load cases of DC and EV.
6.1.5 Column Connection to the Pile Cap

In FB-MultiPier loads are transferred between pier columns and foundation members
(e.g., piles) via the pile cap. However, the pier column bases in FB-Multipier are modeled
so as to prevent the generation of unrealistic stress concentrations, as load is trans-
ferred from the pier column base into the pile cap nodes. Namely, internal forces that
develop in pier column bases are spread across four adjacent pile cap nodes, as shown
in the figure below. Accordingly, the propensity for numerical, fictitious stress con-
centrations is reduced.

The load-spreading process is carried out internally by the program: based on the
coordinates of the column base node, the four nodes adjacent to the base node are auto-
matically identified, and "connector" elements are defined between the four pile cap
nodes and the column base node. In this way, the load is distributed to the pile cap in
the form of a column "footprint". The connector elements that are created are "rigid" ele-
ments, where the connector element properties are automatically assigned relatively
large constitutive and geometric properties.

In particular, the connector element stiffnesses are proportional to the properties of the
columns, where the connector element stiffnesses are amplified (relatively) by a factor
of 10,000. Importantly, the weight of the connectors are maintained at nominal levels so
as not to unduly influence the system configuration. For pile-and-cap models that con-
tain stiffness nodes (i.e., where no pier columns are present), the connector element stiff-
nesses are assigned in proportion to the pile cap, where again, a stiffness amplification
factor of 10,000 is used. The end conditions at the connectors are defined so that there
is no moment transfer at the ends of the connectors. Therefore, the connectors facilitate
manifestation of column-end bending behavior without generating localized moments
at the connector-ends. Salient properties associated with the nodes that the "connector"
elements frame into are listed in the output file in the paragraph "PROPERTIES FOR
CONNECTOR ELEMENTS".
Figure: 6.1.n Column Connection to Pile Cap
6.1.6 Taper Modeling

FB-MultiPier allows for the modeling of tapered columns, pier caps and pier cantilever
elements (Figure: 6.1.o). The taper can be either linear or parabolic. The user is required
to enter the properties at the ends of each element (column, pier cap, pier cap can-
tilever) and also the number of sections in each element. The program then discretizes
each element into the number of specified sections and generates a series of elements
each of which having varying cross section properties to define the taper (Figure: 6.1.p).
The axis of the parent element remains the same (Figure: 6.1.q). During the analysis, the
analysis engine treats each of the sections as individual elements with the specified
material properties and the results are provided for each of them.

Figure: 6.1.o Solid View of Model

Figure: 6.1.p Engine Model Discretization (Solid View) based on taper input data

Figure: 6.1.q Engine Model (Thin View) of Structure

6.1.7 Extra Member Positioning

When modeling changes are made after an extra member has been applied, it is pos-
sible that the position of the extra member could be automatically adjusted by FB-
MultiPier. If and how the extra member is repositioned depends upon the type of mod-
eling change that has been made. There are two types of modeling changes that are rel-
evant to extra member positioning: a) changes to the total number of nodes in the
model, and b) changes that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the
total number of nodes in the model.

Changes to the total number of nodes in the model: There are numerous modeling
changes of this type. Some changes are obvious, such as changing the number of
column nodes, beam nodes, pile nodes, or free length nodes. Other changes that affect
the number of nodes are less explicit, such as changing the number of piles, eliminating
a free length, or converting from one bearing row to two bearing rows. When changes
of this type are made, FB-MultiPier attempts to retain the original position of the extra
member, by changing the extra member nodal assignments (ie, the node numbers used
for the extra member’s i-node and j-node). Specifically, the extra member’s previously
assigned i-node and j-node are replaced with the nodes that are now closest to the extra
member element’s original position. How much the extra member is shifted away from
its original position depends on how far away the closest nodes are to the extra mem-
ber’s original position. Figure: 6.1.r and Figure: 6.1.s illustrate an example of this (all pile
cap and pile nodes have been hidden in these figures to simplify the viewing of the
model). A user has applied an extra member to the structure between columns 1 and 2.
The user has assigned the extra member an i-node of 85 and a j-node of 95 (see Figure:
6.1.r).
 Figure: 6.1.r Extra Member is assigned to i-node 85 and j-node 95.

The user then manually adjusts the number of column nodes in the model (on the Pier
Page), changing the column node count from 3 nodes per column to 5 nodes per
column. This action changes the total number of nodes in the model, increasing the
node count by 4 (2 new nodes for each of the 2 columns). Because of this influx of 4
new nodes, the original extra member nodes 85 and 95 have been moved significantly
(see Figure: 6.1.s). Thus, FB-MultiPier, in an attempt to maintain the extra member
position in the model, reassigns two new nodes to the extra member, i-node 86 and j-
node 98. This is because node 86 is the closest node to the original position of node 85,
and node 98 is the closest node to the original position of node 95.

Figure: 6.1.s Column Node count has been increased, and i-node and j-node are reas-
signed.

Changes that require nodal positioning adjustments but do not affect the total number
of nodes in the model: There are numerous model changes of this type as well. For
example, changing the pile free length or cantilever length, changing the column height,
changing the pile length, etc. These types of changes do not create or delete nodes. FB-
MultiPier simply redistributes the existing nodes, thereby keeping the total number of
nodes constant. When this type of modeling change is completed, the extra member
maintains its nodal assignments. This means that the extra member’s position in the
model could change, because the extra member’s i-node and j-node could change pos-
ition. Figure: 6.1.t and Figure: 6.1.u illustrates an example of this. In this model, the pile
free length is 10’. The pile free length is the distance from the pile cap centerline to the
top of the soil. An extra member has been applied at the bottom of the free length, at an
elevation of -10’ (see Figure: 6.1.t). There are 6 free length nodes and 5 nodes in the soil.

Figure: 6.1.t Pile Free Length is 10’.

The model is then modified by a user. The user modifies the model by removing the top
soil layer. This soil layer had a top of layer elevation of -10’ and a bottom elevation of -
30’. Thus, removing the soil layer extends the pile free length down to an elevation of -
30’ (see Figure: 6.1.u). The free length nodes are then redistributed over the now-larger
free length. Note that the number of free length nodes has NOT changed, nor has the
number of nodes in the soil. There are still 6 free length nodes 5 nodes in the soil.
However, the element lengths have increased in the free length because these nodes
must now evenly divide a 30’ free length instead of the original 10’ free length. Con-
versely, the element lengths have decreased on the portion of the pile that is in the soil,
because the 5 soil nodes are now divided over a shorter portion of the pile. The extra
member’s i-node and j-node shift downward to an elevation of -30’ (the new elevation
at the bottom of the free length). Because the extra member maintains its i-node and j-
node assignments, the extra member also moves down to an elevation of -30’.

Figure: 6.1.u Pile Free Length is 30’.

When these types of modeling changes occur, it is advisable to double-check the extra
member positions to ensure they are desirable. Another alternative is to apply extra
members to the model only after all other modeling changes are complete. Doing so
ensures that neither the total number of nodes will change, nor will the existing nodes
need to be redistributed.
6.1.8 Step-by-step guide (Distributed Load dialog)

A convenient feature is available that facilitates generation and application of distributed

loads to FB-MultiPier models. Namely, the Distributed Load feature allows for the gen-
eration of constant value loads, uniform loads, or linearly varying loads, which can then
be applied to piles, pile caps, columns, and pier caps.

As a step-by-step demonstration of this feature, consider Figure: 6.1.v, which is a model

view of a single pile located in a stream bed. For this scenario, the horizontal load asso-
ciated with the stream is taken into consideration, and the distributed load generator is
used in creating and applying the loads to the model. For the remainder of this article,
the series of steps taken within the FB-MultiPier graphical user interface are listed to
showcase how such loads are generated and applied. Please refer to the “Distributed
Load” page for additional details about the graphical user interface components in the
Distributed Load dialog.

Step-by-step preliminaries: Consider a pier with nine driven piles, which are partially
embedded in the ground, and where free standing water is present above the ground
surface. Now, temporarily focus upon a single pile within the pier (Figure: 6.1.v), and
assume that the height of the water head above the ground surface is 30 ft and that the
pile diameter is 3 ft. The water is subject to a current, and therefore, horizontal loading
acts upon the pile as a function of height below the waterline (linearly varying from 0
kip/ft to 5.62 kips/ft at the ground surface). The Distributed Load dialog greatly facil-
itates creation and application of the linearly varying load on the pile nodes positioned
above the ground surface. Follow the steps below to apply the load using ‘Distributed
Load’ dialog.
 Figure: 6.1.v A single pile excerpted from the pier scenario, partially embedded in soil
and subjected to horizontal loading from water currents

Step 1: Open a model in FB-MultiPier and model the pier, ground surface, and water-
line.

Step 2: Click the ‘Distributed Load’ button on ‘Load’ page. This will open the dialog
shown in Figure: 6.1.w.
 Figure: 6.1.w Distributed Load dialog

Step 3: Within the ‘Distributed Load’ dialog, make sure that ‘Pile’ is selected from the
‘Member’ pull-down list and ‘Linear’ is selected from the ‘Load Types’ pull-down list.

Step 4: Within the ‘3D View’ window, select the starting node and ending node upon
which the uniform distributed loads are to be applied. Nodes 113 (starting) and 123
(ending) are selected in this scenario.

Step 5: Within the ‘Distributed Loads’ dialog, supply Xp load magnitudes at the starting
and ending nodes. The Xp starting load (per ft) is input as 0.0 kip/ft and the ending load
(per ft) is input as 5.62 kip/ft in this scenario.

Step 6: Click the ‘Generate Load On The Selected Member’ button. The load vectors will
then be seen in the ‘3D View’ window for the selected member. Note that FB-MultiPier
has generated these concentrated forces based on the uniform load magnitudes and the
model-specific nodal spacing.

Step 7: The ‘Generate Load On Other Members’ can then be selected , which for this
case, automatically assigns the same load group to the respective nodes along each of
the other piles in the pier model.

Step 8: Click ‘OK’ to apply the loads that have been generated.

6.2 Superstructure

The following topics are available to facilitate modeling of superstructures:

1. Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting
2. Span Length Calculation
6.2.1 Bearing Positioning Troubleshooting

When the user-inputted bearing spacings cannot be accommodated by FB-Multipier, the

following error message displays: "Error Generating Nodes for the Bearings."

Further, a warning may be issued at the onset of analysis. The specific cause of this type
of issue is most often the result of the close proximity of bearings in one row versus the
other row, such that an unacceptably small element would need to be created between
the two bearings.

Generally, increasing the pier (or bent) cap generation nodal coincidence tolerance
resolves this type of issue, while a detailed example is given below to help identify altern-
ative troubleshooting strategies.

The figure below illustrates “Bearing Spacing”, a term specifically defined as the user-
inputted spacing between bearings within the same row (i.e., bearings within the left
row or bearings within the right row). The figure also illustrates a case where the
column offset is zero in both rows, as the first bearing in both the left and right row are
aligned with the centerline of column 1.
 Figure: 6.2.a Bearing Positioning.

Given the following input data, the figure below illustrates a case where the “Error Gen-
erating Nodes for the Bearings” error message is caused by too small a distance
between bearings, thus creating an element length that is unacceptably small.
Pier Cap Length = 50.000 ft
Number of Left Row Bearings = 3
Number of Right Row Bearings = 4
Left Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 20.000 ft
Right Row Bearing Spacing, Uniform = 13.333 ft
Distance From First Bearing in Left Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 ft
Distance From First Bearing in Right Row to Leftmost column = 0.000 ft
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Left row = 0.000 ft, 20.000 ft, and 40.000 ft
Bearing Xp coordinates in the Right row = 0.000 ft, 13.333 ft, 26.666 ft, and 39.999 ft

Figure: 6.2.b Bearing Positioning Zoom.

The final bearings in the left and right rows do NOT have the same Xp coordinate.
Instead, these bearings are 0.001 ft apart. The bearing spacing of 0.001 ft would there-
fore create an element that could potentially (may or may not) introduce non-con-
vergence issues during analysis. One solution in this scenario is to shift the location of
the bearing in the right row, from an Xp coordinate of 39.999 ft to an Xp coordinate of
40.000 ft. This can be accomplished by using “Variable Spacing” for the right row of
bearings, and entering spacings as 13.333 ft, 13.333 ft, and 13.334 ft.
6.2.2 Span Length Calculation

Two examples are discussed in this article:

1. Example 1: A three pier configuration with mixed bearing rows.
2. Example 2: A bent-pier-bent configuration with mixed bearing rows.

Example 1

Figure: 6.2.c Bearing Offset Measured from the Centerline of the Pier Pile Cap to the
Centerline of the Bearings

In Figure: 6.2.c, y1, y2, y3 are local pier origins. Y Coordinate can be specified by the user
on the "Bridge Page".

Span length between two piers each with single row of bearings:
L = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2)
Span length between two piers (eg. Pier 2 and Pier 3) each with double row of bearings:
L = (y3 - y2) - (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) +
(Pier3's pile cap width / 2 - Pier3's bearing pad offset (left row))

Example y1 = 0ft; y2 = 60ft; y3 = 120ft; Pile caps = 16ft x 16ft; Bearing offset = 0.75ft.
Single row of bearings pier 1, double row bearing pier 2 and 3. So Span 1 Length is
given as:

L1 = (y2 - y1) - (Pier1's pile cap width / 2) + (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 - Pier2's bearing
pad offset (left row))
= (60ft - 0ft) - (16ft /2) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 59.3 ft

Span 2 Length is given as:

L2 = (Pier2's pile cap width / 2 + Pier2's bearing pad offset (right row)) + (Pier3's pile
cap width / 2 - Pier3's bearing pad offset (left row))
= (120ft - 60ft) - (16ft /2 + 0.75ft) + (16ft / 2 - 0.75ft) = 58.5 ft

Example 2
In the following, span length calculations are given for models containing mixed con-
figurations of bents and piers. In this example, two coordinate systems are pertinent: Xp,
Yp, and Zp coordinates, which are local to each substructure; and, X, Y, and Z, which are
global coordinates. For bent substructures, the substructure-local origin is positioned at
the pile head of Pile 1. For pier substructures, the substructure-local origin is positioned
at the pile cap corner, as indicated below. While pile head and pile cap elevations can be
selected on the “Bent Cap” and “Pile Cap” model data pages (for bents and piers, respect-
ively), the X and Y positioning of each substructure origin can be input on the "Bridge
Page".
 Figure: 6.2.d Bearing Offset Measured from the Centerline of the Pier Pile Cap to the
Centerline of the Bearings

As illustration, consider a three-substructure configuration: a bent containing a single

row of bearings; a pier containing two rows of bearings; and, a bent containing two
rows of bearings. These three units are referred to as Substructure 1 (bent), Substructure
2 (pier), and Substructure 3 (bent), respectively.

Given that the Xp, Yp, Zp origin for Substructure 1 at the head of Pile 1, and that the Xp,
Yp, Zp origin for Substructure 2 is at the pile cap corner, the span length between the
two substructures is:
L1 = Y2 - Y1 + Substructure 2 pile cap width / 2 - Substructure 2 bearing pad offset (left
row)

Further, the span length between Substructure 2 (a pier) and Substructure 3 (a bent),
each possessing two rows of bearings is:
L2 = Y3 - Y2 - Substructure 2 cap width / 2 - Substructure 2 bearing pad offset (right
row)) - (Substructure 3 bearing pad offset (left row))

For example:
Y1 = 0 ft; Y2 = 45 ft; Y3 = 100 ft; Substructure 2 pile cap longitudinal dimension = 16 ft;
Substructure 2 bearing offsets = 0.8 ft; Substructure 3 bearing offset =0.75 ft

Span 1 Length is:

L1 = 45 ft - 0 ft + 6 ft / 2 - 0.8 ft
L1 = 47.2 ft

Span 2 Length is:

L2 = 100 ft - 45 ft - 6 ft/2 - 0.8 ft - 0.75 ft
L2 = 50.45 ft

6.3 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling

The following guidelines are given to facilitate generation of One Pier Two Span (OPTS)
bridge models:
1. Default One Pier Two Span Model Type
2. Automatic Generation Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models
3. Automatic Span-End Spring Stiffness and Mass Data Calculation
6.3.1 Default One Pier Two Span Model Type

The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model using the New Model Type,
“One Pier Two Span”:

1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type”
dialog. The default OPTS model can be selected by clicking on "One Pier Two Span"
radio button, and then clicking OK.

Figure: 6.3.a “Select New Model Type” dialog

Figure: 6.3.b shows the 3D view of the default OPTS model.

 Figure: 6.3.b 3D-view of the default OPTS model

2. Navigate to the “Bridge Page”. Click the “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog for
viewing or updating the OPTS span-end springs and masses.
 Figure: 6.3.c Bridge Page with “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog

3. Figure: 6.3.d shows the "OPTS Data” dialog. The user can see the default spring stiff-
nesses placed at the ends of Span 1 and Span 2.
The default spring stiffnesses located at each end of the default OPTS model are gen-
erated so as to mimic Span 1, Span 2, and Pier 2 of the default FB-MultiPier bridge
model. For more information on how the spring stiffnesses and mass values were cal-
culated, refer to section 6.3.3 .
 Figure: 6.3.d “OPTS Data” dialog

4. In addition to updating the spring stiffness and mass values as discussed above, the
user can update the structural members in the pier and soil properties as needed.

5. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the
structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest
can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
6.3.2 Automatic Generation, Using Pre-Existing Bridge Models

In addition to opening the default One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model in FB-MultiPier, one
can also generate an OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier bridge model. Note
that multiple-pier bridge models must contain three or more piers in order to be con-
verted to OPTS models.

The following steps can be taken to form the OPTS model from an existing multiple-pier
bridge model:

1. Open any existing multiple-pier bridge model. Open FB-MultiPier program and Click
on icon  to open browsing window. Select and open the multiple-pier bridge model
of interest.
For this particular case we will open a default bridge model in FB-MultiPier. Open FB-
MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type” dialog. The
default bridge model can be selected by clicking on "Bridge (Multiple Piers)" radio but-
ton (Figure: 6.3.e). Click OK.
 Figure: 6.3.e “Select New Model Type” dialog

Figure: 6.3.f shows the 3D view of the default bridge model.

 Figure: 6.3.f 3D-view of the default bridge model

2. For demonstration purposes, Pier 2 will be selected to be used in the generation of an

OPTS model. Navigate to the Model Page and click on the “One Pier Two Span” radio
button.
 Figure: 6.3.g Selection of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) Model Type

3. A message will pop up asking if you want to save the current bridge model. Click Yes,
if you want to. Then, the OPTS conversion dialog presents a listing of all piers that are eli-
gible to be used in generating an OPTS model. Note that the end-most piers are not per-
mitted for conversion to OPTS models. For this demonstration, Pier 2 is selected from
the list.

Figure: 6.3.h Message for saving Bridge Model

 Figure: 6.3.i OPTS Conversion dialog

4. After selecting Pier 2, a special analysis is carried out to automatically calculate the
span end spring stiffnesses and mass values. The resulting OPTS model is automatically
saved as a stand-alone input file (with format: [Original FileName]_OPTS_Pier#.in). For
the present demonstration, the automatically generated file name is: “defaulte_OPTS_
Pier2.in”. Automatic generation of a stand-alone model input file prevents unintended
deletion/modification of the pre-existing bridge model. The spring stiffness and mass
values are calculated considering the adjacent pier properties and boundary conditions.
For more information on how to calculate the spring stiffnesses and mass values, refer
section 6.3.3 . Please refer to step 6 and 8 for instructions on how to view/edit these val-
ues.
 Figure: 6.3.j Special analysis for computing span end spring stiffnesses and mass val-
ues

5. The OPTS model generated, after the analysis, is as shown below in Figure: 6.3.k.
 Figure: 6.3.k OPTS model extracted from default bridge (multiple-pier) model

6. For the OPTS model, the “Bridge Page” has an additional option where you can
view/edit the OPTS Data. Click the “Edit” button to open "OPTS Data” dialog.
 Figure: 6.3.l Bridge Page

7. Figure: 6.3.m shows the "OPTS Data” dialog. The user can see the span end springs
stiffnesses placed at the ends of Span 1 and Span 2. These were generated by the pro-
gram during the analysis described in Step 4.
 Figure: 6.3.m “OPTS Data” dialog

8. The OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the analysis, the
structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest
can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
6.3.3 Automatic Span-End Spring Stiffness and Mass Data Cal-
culation (For One Pier Two Span Model)

Calculation of span end spring stiffness and mass data for OPTS model type in
FB-MultiPier:
When a One Pier Two Span (OPTS) model is extracted from a full bridge model, the
spring stiffness and mass data at the ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected
pier, are calculated automatically.

The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end spring
stiffnesses in OPTS model:
Consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of interest to be con-
verted to an OPTS model (In this case, Pier 3). As shown below, the program splits the
bridge into three distinct portions (Figure: 6.3.n).

Figure: 6.3.n Splitting the Bridge to form the OPTS model

An equivalent stiffness matrix is calculated, for left and right end bridge portions, as fol-
lows:

1. Isolate the extreme bridge portion (e.g., Left portion of bridge as shown in Figure:
6.3.o)
2. The node at which the bridge is split is the selected node of interest (Figure: 6.3.o).
The program calculates the flexibility matrix of the structure at the particular equi-
librium state, following general principles. To do that the program internally
 applies unit forces at the selected node of interest. The unit forces are applied suc-
cessively in all six possible directions (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz).
3. The displacements from each solution at the selected node comprise the columns
of the flexibility matrix (e.g., the displacements from the solution under the applic-
ation of the Fx unit load comprise the first column of the flexibility matrix).
4. After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse,
which constitutes the equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.

This calculated equivalent stiffness matrices, for both left and right portion of the bridge,
is applied to the respective span ends of the OPTS model as shown in Figure: 6.3.o.

Figure: 6.3.o Applying equivalent spring stiffnesses at the two span ends of OPTS
model.

The following is the process used by the analytical engine to form the span end mass
data in OPTS model:
As another example, consider a five pier bridge model as shown below. Select the pier of
interest to be converted to an OPTS model (In this case, Pier 3). Lumped masses are cal-
culated for half of the span to the left and right of the pier of interest as illustrated in Fig-
ure: 6.3.p.

Figure: 6.3.p Applying the lumped mass at the two span ends of OPTS model.

6.4 Dynamic Vessel Collision Analysis

The following topics are available to facilitate modeling of bridge structures subjected to
vessel collision loading:
1. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
2. Defining the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) Collision Scenario
3. Proximity to Collapse
4. CVIA-OPTS Case Study
6.4.1 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)

Modeling of vessel collision loads requires consideration of nonlinear structure-found-

ation response within a dynamic analysis regime, which can be quite cumbersome. The
Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module in FB-MultiPier enables engineers to ana-
lyze structural demands in a time-dependent step-by-step manner, and transforms a
practical bridge design application into a streamlined analysis tool. Below is a walk-
through for model development, and for making use of CVIA in FB-MultiPier:

1. Open FB-MultiPier, and click the “New” icon to open the “Select New Model Type”
dialog. Select the default General Pier by clicking on "Pier" radio button, and then click-
ing OK.

Figure: 6.4.a Open new model type

2. The CVIA feature is a dynamic analysis method. To enable use of CVIA, select the
“Dynamic” analysis option in the Analysis Type panel on the “Analysis” Page.

Figure: 6.4.b Select Dynamic analysis type

3. The warning message will pop-up saying All the load case data except load case one
will be lost. Click Yes.

Figure: 6.4.c Message warning about the loss of all load data except the load case one.

4. Dynamic analysis parameters are considered as shown in Figure: 6.4.d. On the

“Dynamics” Page, select the “Vessel Collision” dynamic loading option.
 Figure: 6.4.d Selecting vessel collision option in dynamic analysis

5. Selecting “Vessel Collision” will clear the existing load function data (for dynamic
loads). Click Yes.

Figure: 6.4.e Message warning about the loss of existing load function data

6. Navigate to the Load Page (Figure: 6.4.f), to apply the dynamic vessel collision load
 Figure: 6.4.f Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog

7. Click on the “Vessel Collision” button to open the “Vessel Collision” dialog (Figure:
6.4.g).
 Figure: 6.4.g “Vessel Collision” dialog

8. Within the “Vessel Collision” dialog enter the vessel weight and velocity components.
Additionally, select the collision type and the estimated collision width of the vessel that
will be engaged in the “Impact Conditions” panel. The Vessel Velocity is in the global X
and Y directions. To model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a force-deformation curve
can be automatically created (or user-defined, if so desired). In this example, the impact
parameters and conditions are selected as shown in Figure: 6.4.h. Note that the “Wide
View” check box allows for viewing the force-deformation curve over a wider abscissa
range.

Figure: 6.4.h Inputting Vessel-Collision conditions

Note that the vessel bow force-deformation curve is calculated in the “Vessel Collision”
dialog, in accordance with Figure: 6.4.i (Getter and Consolazio 2011). Additionally, note
that the applied vessel collision impact load-history is generated automatically during
CVIA analysis by the FB-MultiPier analytical engine. Alternatively stated, bridge pier
response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision impact load-his-
tory. If it is of interest, the load-history can be viewed upon completion of the analysis
(please refer to Step 10).
Figure: 6.4.i Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
deformation (Getter and Consolazio 2011)
9. Click OK at the bottom of the “Vessel Collision” dialog to return to the Load Page.
Within the “3D View” located to the right of the Load Page:
1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (Node 28);
2. Click the “Add” button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the
load type from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision will be generated and applied is auto-
matically determined, given the vessel velocity data previously defined above in Figure:
6.4.h. For more details, please refer to Section 6.4.2
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, all other applied nodal loads are treated as
static (S) loads. Along these lines, note that the Dynamic Relaxation feature is typically
activated and is utilized to initialize the system in equilibrium with permanent (static)
loading, while minimizing non-physical system vibrations due to the presence of per-
manent loads.

Figure: 6.4.j Applying the vessel collision load at the point of vessel impact

10. The CVIA model is ready to run. After carrying out the analysis, the user can check
structural demand/capacity ratios on pier components of interest.
11. The vessel impact load-history is generated by the analytical engine and stored in
the .VES file (Figure: 6.4.k) and is saved in the same folder as the input file. An excerpt of
the .VES file is shown in Figure: 6.4.l.

Figure: 6.4.k .VES file with impact load-history (for first 6 time steps only)

Figure: 6.4.l Vessel collision impact load-history

For a detailed case study for making use of the CVIA-OPTS features, please refer to Sec-
tion 6.4.4 .
6.4.2 Defining the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) Col-
lision Scenario

The following discussion assumes that the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis has already
been activated. If this is not the case, then please first refer to the step-by-step guide for
activating CVIA within FB-MultiPier models.

Navigate to the Load page to define the vessel collision scenario.

1. Select the node on the pier that corresponds to the impact location (e.g., Node 28 as
shown in Figure: 6.4.m);

2. Click the “Add” button on the Load Page to add the impact location to the load table;

3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle the
load type from static (S) to dynamic (D).

Figure: 6.4.m Defining the impact location (node)

4. Click on the “Vessel Collision” button to open the “Vessel Collision” dialog (Figure:
6.4.n).

Figure: 6.4.n “Vessel Collision” dialog

Within the “Vessel Collision” dialog, enter the vessel impact parameters and conditions.
For example, a Vessel Weight of 11,432 kips and (global) Vessel X Velocity of 10.5 ft/sec
is defined as shown in Figure: 6.4.o and Click OK.
 Figure: 6.4.o Inputting Vessel Collision conditions

One of the main advantages of using the CVIA feature is that it alleviates the burden of
having to determine the impact load-history prior to carrying out the analysis. Instead,
the impact load-history is computed automatically during the analysis, based on the ves-
sel collision scenario and the bridge-pier-soil characteristics. Alternatively stated, bridge
pier response is calculated simultaneous to calculation of the vessel collision force his-
tory. In this way, emphasis can remain on characterizing bridge response to vessel col-
lision loading, rather than on forming an appropriate impact load-history. However, in
case it is of interest, the impact load-history is printed to an ACSII file with extension
.VES, where this file is located in the same directory as all other analysis output.

As a further convenience to engineers wishing to make use of the CVIA feature, only the
initial vessel X and Y (global direction) velocity components (Figure: 6.4.o) need to be
specified to define the vessel orientation. Other orientation-related inputs, such as activ-
ation of the respective degree(s) of freedom (DOF) dynamic loading flags, are auto-
matically handled by FB-MultiPier. For example, as shown in Figure: 6.4.o, a non-zero
Vessel X Velocity is defined, and accordingly, FB-MultiPier automatically activates the “X
dir” DOF dynamic loading flag (Figure: 6.4.p).
 Figure: 6.4.p Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by
FB-MultiPier)

5. As further demonstration, consider a scenario where both (global) X and Y velocity

components are needed to define the vessel collision scenario. Accordingly, click on the
“Vessel Collision” button again, and within the “Vessel Collision” dialog, enter a non-
zero Vessel Y Velocity as shown in Figure: 6.4.q and Click OK.
 Figure: 6.4.q Adding Vessel Y Velocity

Consequently, the vessel initial velocity is now the resultant of two components, with
magnitudes in both the (global) X and Y directions. Given that non-zero values are
present for both the X and Y direction velocity components, FB-MultiPier automatically
activates the “X dir” and “Y dir” DOF dynamic loading flags (Figure: 6.4.r)
Figure: 6.4.r Flags to indicate loaded degree(s) of freedom (handled automatically by
FB-MultiPier)
6.4.3 Proximity to Collapse (Global D/C)

The Proximity to Collapse feature can be accessed from the Lateral Stability Page. As pro-
posed in Davidson et al. (2013), the proximity to collapse of a substructure can be quan-
tified in the form of a ratio varying between 0.0 and 1.0. Namely, the global demand-
capacity ratio (D/C) is a measure of the structural proximity to reaching a collapse mech-
anism, and is defined as:

Eqn: 6.4.A

where
m = number of members in a substructure unit associated with a given collapse mech-
anism;
n = number of hinges per member that are necessary to form the corresponding col-
lapse mechanism;
D/Cij = jth largest demand-capacity ratio (with consideration of bi-axial load-moment
interaction) along member i. Note that for extreme event loading, phi factors used in
generating bi-axial load-moment interaction diagrams are typically set to 1.0.

Note that the maximum value of D/Cij is limited to 1.0 for use in the global D/C equa-
tion. Further, if multiple collapse mechanisms are possible for a given lateral loading
scenario, then the maximum global D/C for all applicable collapse mechanisms is
retained for design purposes. This measure of collapse proximity makes use of member
internal forces, and therefore, failure states such as axial bearing capacity should be
checked separately.

The following figures illustrate possible collapse mechanisms (i.e., the simultaneous
formation of a sufficient number of plastic hinges along a load path) for various struc-
tural configurations. In the schematic portions of the illustrative figures, filled circular
dots represent possible hinge locations, but hinges could possibly form at any locations
between the circular dots. Also, for the schematics below, it is assumed that the soil is rel-
atively stiff at the ground surface elevation.

Figure: 6.4.s Example collapse mechanisms: a) Structural configuration; b) Collapse

mechanism for direct pier column impact m=1, n=3; c) Pier column collapse mechanism
m=2, n=2; d) Drilled shaft collapse mechanism m=2, n=2

Figure: 6.4.t Example collapse mechanisms: a) Structural configuration; b) Pier column

collapse mechanism m=2, n=2.
Figure: 6.4.u Example collapse mechanisms: a) Structural configuration; b) Pier column
collapse mechanism m=1, n=1; c) Drilled shaft collapse mechanism m=4, n=2

Figure: 6.4.v Example collapse mechanisms: a) Structural configuration; b) Lower pier

column collapse mechanism m=2, n=2; c) Upper pier column collapse mechanism m=2,
n=2; d) Driven pile collapse mechanism m=15, n=2

The following example demonstrates calculation of the proximity to collapse (D/Cglobal)

for a two-column pier with waterline footing and fifteen driven piles. For simplicity, only
the load path associated with the piles is considered. Correspondingly, the two max-
imum values of element-level D/C are cataloged from among the pile free-lengths in
computing D/Cglobal for this example.

The pier depicted below is subjected to a static load of 3,255 kips in the Xp-direction at
the center of the waterline pile cap.
 Figure: 6.4.w Structural configuration and corresponding FE model

Step 1: After running the analysis, the first step is to open the analysis results. Navigate
to “Control”-> “View Analysis Data”->” Text File”.
Step 2: For this particular collapse mechanism, it is necessary to catalog D/C values from
among the pile elements. The region within the text output file that lists the pile element
D/C values can be found by searching for the heading: “Analytical Force Results for each
Pile”.
Step 3: The maximum number of plastic hinges for a pile that can be developed for this
collapse mechanism is two (n=2), therefore to compute the global D/C, it is necessary to
extract the two largest values of D/C within the free-length of each pile. The element
D/C ratios are listed in the table below.
 Figure: 6.4.x Controlling values of element D/C ratios within the free-length of each
pile

Step 4: Calculate D/Cglobal:

Eqn: 6.4.B

and D/Cglobal = 0.58.

This outcome may be interpreted as: an applied lateral load of 3,255 kips engages the
pier such that the pier has reached 58% of global capacity to resist lateral loads with
respect to the pile-directed load path. Note that this example focused on a single col-
lapse mechanism, where in an actual design application, multiple collapse mechanisms
may be applicable.
6.4.4 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis - One Pier Two Span
(CVIA-OPTS) Case Study

Application of the Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module and One
Pier Two Span (OPTS) Modeling Technique for Dynamic Finite Element Ana-
lysis of Vessel-Bridge Collisions
In the following, an example is developed in a step-by-step manner using the Coupled
Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA) module and the One Pier Two Span (OPTS) modeling tech-
nique for an in-service bridge configuration. Collision between an aberrant barge and a
bridge pier is investigated, for which FB-MultiPier is showcased as a state-of-the-art
design-oriented bridge modeling tool for analyzing dynamic bridge response to vessel
collision loads. Namely, the SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge located in northwest Florida is
selected for this example. The SR-20 at Blountstown Bridge is 1.6 miles long and spans
the Apalachicola River in northwest Florida. Vessel navigation is permitted within a 150
ft channel. A six-span portion of the bridge is modeled in FB-MultiPier (Figure: 6.4.y),
with Pier 59 as the pier of interest (i.e., the impacted pier).

Figure: 6.4.y SR-20 at Blountstown FB-MultiPier bridge model

The structural configuration (geometry, material properties) of the bridge are based on
structural drawings, and soil-modeling parameters are evaluated from boring site data.
The input data are available upon request by current users. Given the site-specific model
input, the FB-MultiPier finite element (FE) model of Pier 59 is shown in Figure: 6.4.z. The
following walkthrough explains how to use the CVIA module to facilitate streamlined
vessel collision analysis of bridge-pier-soil systems.
 Figure: 6.4.z Finite element (FE) model of Pier 59

Subsequent to supplying all pier and soil properties, CVIA is performed using the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Select the “Dynamic” analysis option in the Analysis Type panel on the “Analysis” page
(Figure: 6.4.aa).
 Figure: 6.4.aa Select Dynamic analysis type

2. On the “Dynamics” page, select the “Vessel Collision” dynamic loading type. For this
example, Rayleigh damping parameters are specified (Figure: 6.4.ab) such that approx-
imately 5% of critical damping is achieved over the first five system vibration modes.
Also shown in Figure: 6.4.ab is the time step size (0.0025 sec). Note that, when no other
data are available, a time time-step size of 0.0025 sec is recommended for use of the
CVIA feature in FB-MultiPier. Additionally, when making use of the CVIA feature, the pro-
gram automatically halts the analysis after the vessel and impacted pier have separated
for a period equal to 2.25 sec.
 Figure: 6.4.ab Select the Vessel Collision option on the “Dynamics” page

3. Select Pier #3 and navigate to the “Load” page (Figure: 6.4.ac) to apply the dynamic
vessel collision load.
 Figure: 6.4.ac Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog

4. Open the “Vessel Collision” dialog by clicking on the “Vessel Collision” button.
 Figure: 6.4.ad “Vessel Collision” dialog

5. Enter the vessel-collision conditions and type of vessel in the “Vessel Collision” dialog.
The collision conditions include specification of the vessel weight and vessel velocity in
the global X and/or Y direction(s). To model the stiffness of the vessel bow, a force-
deformation curve can be automatically created (or user-defined, if so desired). For the
current demonstration, the vessel collision scenario is based on a static vessel collision
load of 2,550 kips on Pier 59 (as listed in the structural drawings). Using this static ves-
sel collision load and the empirical load determination equations given in the American
Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guide Specifications
and Commentary for Vessel Collision Design of Highway Bridges (AASHTO 2009), the
collision conditions shown in Figure: 6.4.ae are back-calculated.

Figure: 6.4.ae Define vessel collision conditions

Note that the barge bow force versus deformation curve is calculated in the “Vessel Col-
lision” dialog, in accordance with Figure: 6.4.af (Getter and Consolazio 2011). Addi-
tionally, note that the applied vessel collision impact load-history is generated
automatically during CVIA analysis. Alternatively stated, bridge response is calculated
simultaneous to calculation of the impact load-history. In this way, computed pier
response is coupled to elastic loading, crushing, unloading, and reloading of the vessel
bow. Please refer to Step 8 for instructions on accessing the computed impact load-his-
tory.
Figure: 6.4.af Flow chart with empirical equations for calculating barge bow force-
deformation (Getter and Consolazio 2011)
6. From the “Load” page, select the impact location (node), using “3D View” and the
“Load” page:
1. Select the node that best represents the impact location on Pier 59 (Node 12 in
this case).
2. Click the “Add” button to add the impact node to the Node Applied list.
3. Click on the letter 'S' just to the left of the newly added node number to toggle
the loading type at the impact location from static (S) to dynamic (D).
Note that the direction in which the vessel collision load will be generated and
applied is automatically determined, given the global X and Y components of initial ves-
sel velocity, which were previously input within the “Vessel Collision” dialog. For more
details, please refer to Section 6.4.2
Also, note that for vessel collision analysis, only a single impact location can be
defined throughout the model. All other applied nodal loads are considered to be static
(S) loads.

Figure: 6.4.ag Applying the vessel collision load at the point vessel impact

7. The model input necessary to make use of the CVIA feature is now complete, and the
dynamic vessel collision analysis is now ready to be carried out. Upon completion of the
analysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios on pier components of interest can be
checked in a manner consistent with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.

8. The vessel impact load-history is generated automatically by FB-MultiPier during the

analysis and stored in the .VES file (Figure: 6.4.ah). This file (the .VES file) is saved in the
same folder as the input file. The full impact load-history, excerpted from the .VES file
generated as part of the current example, is shown in Figure: 6.4.ai.

Figure: 6.4.ah First thirty lines of .VES file

 Figure: 6.4.ai Vessel collision impact force history

The impacted pier considered above (Pier 59 from the SR-20 bridge) is now used to cre-
ate an OPTS model. The OPTS modeling technique increases computational efficiency by
transforming the bridge model (multiple-pier, multiple-span model) to an equivalent
model with one pier and two spans. Concentrated spring stiffnesses and masses, con-
nected at the ends of the two retained spans, are used to represent the stiffness and iner-
tial resistance of the multiple-pier, multiple-span bridge model. The OPTS modeling
technique is intended to substantially reduce computational costs associated with con-
ducting implicit nonlinear dynamic analysis (e.g., CVIA) of bridge models while main-
taining accuracy to within an acceptable margin of error.

The following is a step-by-step guide for creating an OPTS model, which makes use of
the previously discussed SR-20 bridge model.
1. Open the SR-20 full bridge model in FB-MultiPier and navigate to the “Model” page
(Figure: 6.4.aj).
 Figure: 6.4.aj Open the Model Page

2. On the “Model” page, click on the “One Pier Two Span” model type (Figure: 6.4.ak).

Figure: 6.4.ak Select the of "One Pier Two Span" (OPTS) model type

3. When the “OPTS Conversion” dialog opens, select Pier 3 (which corresponds to Pier
59 of the SR-20 bridge), and click the “OK” button (Figure: 6.4.al).
 Figure: 6.4.al OPTS Conversion dialog

4. As part of the OPTS model formation, a special analysis is automatically carried out to
calculate the span end concentrated stiffness and mass values. The resulting OPTS
model is shown in Figure: 6.4.am.

Figure: 6.4.am OPTS model (with Pier 59), created from the SR-20 full bridge model
5. For the OPTS model, the Bridge Page has an additional option where engineers can
modify the stiffness and mass data at the model extents, if so desired. Such modi-
fications are made by navigating to the Bridge Page, and then clicking the “Edit” button
to open the "OPTS Data” dialog. Recall that the spring stiffness and mass data at the
ends of span 1 and span 2, relative to the selected pier, were calculated automatically,
and so, care should be taken if it is elected to modify these values. For more information
on how to calculate the spring stiffnesses and mass values please refer section 6.3.3 .

Figure: 6.4.an “OPTS Data” dialog

6. The CVIA-OPTS model is now fully prepared for analysis. After carrying out the ana-
lysis, the structural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of
interest can be cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.
Demonstration of Computational Robustness of the OPTS Modeling Approach
On an ordinary desktop PC*, the computational time required for carrying out CVIA
using the full bridge model is 40 min. In contrast, when using the same ordinary
desktop PC* to analyze the CVIA-OPTS model, only 0.5 min. are required. Figure: 6.4.ao
shows the resultant shear force in global X-direction at the base (Node 1 in Figure:
6.4.am) of the impacted column. The vessel collision impact-load history (Figure: 6.4.ai)
shows two slightly different stiffnesses during unloading from 1.34 sec. to 1.78 sec. Sim-
ilar behavior can be seen for resultant shear force at Node 1 in global X-direction (6.4.4
).
* The analysis was performed using Windows 7© desktop PC with specification of 16
GB of RAM and use of an Intel® Core™ i7 3.4 GHz processor.

Figure: 6.4.ao Resultant shear force in global X-direction at the base of the impacted
column (Node 1)

The maximum Demand/Capacity (D/C) ratio occurs at Node 148 (refer to Figure:
6.4.am). In Figure: 6.4.ap to Figure: 6.4.as, displacements and forces at Node 148 are
compared between the full- bridge and OPTS models. While the displacements are gen-
erally conservative among the OPTS model results, computed time-histories of axial
force, shear force, and moment show good agreement between both models. Such
agreement demonstrates the advantages of using the OPTS model over the full bridge
model when the user is interested in checking the response local to a given pier or pile
bent, while still capturing full bridge resistance. After carrying out the analysis, the struc-
tural demand/capacity ratios that develop across the pier components of interest can be
cataloged as with any other set of FB-MultiPier analysis results.

Figure: 6.4.ap Global X-Displacement at Node 148

Figure: 6.4.aq Resultant axial force at Node 148

Figure: 6.4.ar Resultant shear force in global X-direction at Node 148

Figure: 6.4.as Resultant moment about global Y-direction at Node 148

7 Bridge Span Modeling

1. Deck Modeling
2. Bridge Span Overview
3. Bridge Span Node Numbering
4. Span Length Calculation
5. Section Properties and Temperatures
6. Compute Transformed Section Properties
7. Section Properties Dialog
8. Vertical Link Properties
9. Transfer Beam Properties
10. Span Dead Load Staging
11. Bearing Properties
12. Pier Cap to Bearing, Rigid Link Properties
13. Bridge Wind Load Generator
14. Temperatures Dialog

7.1 Deck Modeling

There are six basic components employed to model the deck (superstructure) in FB-
MultiPier:

1. The span (deck) element is used to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck. This
is modeled as a series of linear frame elements (default = 10) with properties
specified by the user.
2. The Vertical Link transfers loads from the span (deck) to a transfer beam. The ver-
tical link is used to account for the eccentricity of the centerline of the bridge
deck relative to the centerline of the pier cap. Also, the vertical link properties
can be user defined, or automatically computed based on the span (deck) end
 properties.
3. The transfer Beam transfers load between the bearings and the vertical link. The
transfer Beam properties are either based on custom user input or are gen-
erated by the program based on the span end conditions.
4. The bearings are modeled as six springs to represent the response of the bear-
ing in all degrees of freedom. The spring properties are either based on custom
user input or are generated by the program based on the span end conditions.
5. The offset rigid links are used to model the offsets between the bearings to the
pier cap centerline. For piers that are modeled with two rows of bearings, the off-
set distance is user defined.
6. The continuity element is a linear frame element employed when the deck is con-
tinuous.

Figure: 7.1.a Deck Modeling Components

 Note: The deck is always linear elastic.

7.2 Bridge Span Overview

The deck of the bridge and its connection to the supporting pier is modeled with a com-
bination of elements shown in the Figure: 7.2.a below. The superstructure (Span) ele-
ment is modeled with a series of linear discrete elements. With either constant or
varying (tapered) cross sections. These element properties are input by the user, and are
intended to simulate the behavior of the bridge deck.

Since the span element is located at a distance from the bearings and essentially the pier
cap centerline, FB-MultiPier generates and uses a vertical rigid link element. This ele-
ment is required to be rigid and therefore FB-MultiPier internally assigns its properties.
These properties are calculated based on those of the span element to ensure the rigid-
ity of the vertical rigid link.
 Figure: 7.2.a Bridge Span Components

The transfer beam is used to connect the bearings to one another, and therefore, plays a
significant role in loads that travel between the superstructure and substructure inter-
face. The properties that are assigned to the transfer beam are such that they can sim-
ulate different span end conditions.

The bearing elements are used to simulate the response of the bearings on the pier cap
and possess six degrees of freedom at each end. Each degree of freedom can either be
‘constrained’, ‘released’ or defined using ‘custom’ properties. The ‘constrained’ con-
dition implies that the bearing will behave much like a rigid link for motions in the asso-
ciated degree of freedom. The ‘release’ condition simulates no resistance to motions in
the associated degree of freedom. Finally, the response of the bearing in a particular dir-
ection can be determined based on user-defined load displacement and/or moment-
rotation curves.

Span End Conditions

Span end conditions must be assigned at each span end. A variety of span end-con-
ditions can be simulated by assigning pre-defined or user-defined cross sectional prop-
erties to the Transfer Beam. The ‘Stiff’ condition assigns scaled (amplified) properties to
the Transfer Beam elements, so that the transfer beam behaves in an effectively rigid
manner. The ‘Soft’ condition makes use of unscaled properties to allow for a relatively
more flexible Transfer Beam. Additionally, 'Custom' properties can be assigned for the
Transfer Beam to simulate other conditions of interest.

Note: For any models containing spans, a special pre-analysis feature is available
(and enabled by default) for promoting uniformity of vertical bearing reactions due to
the self-weight of the superstructure.

7.3 Bridge Span Node Numbering

 Figure: 7.3.a Bridge Span Node Numbering

7.4 Span Length Calculation 

For Span Length Calculation, refer to: Span Length Calculation.

7.5 Section Properties and Temperatures

The "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog is available for bridge models only.
This dialog is used to access the "Section Properties" dialog and "Temperatures" dialog
for the currently selected span (this span number is displayed in the dialog’s title bar).
This dialog is also used to compute transformed section properties.

Figure: 7.5.a Section Properties and Temperatures dialog

The "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box must be checked (selected) to
compute transformed section properties. These properties are computed based on the
girder and slab dimensional and material property input on the "Section Properties" dia-
log. The computation of the transformed section properties occurs when the ‘OK’ button
is clicked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. The computed trans-
formed section properties are displayed on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, and
thus using this feature will replace the existing transformed section properties for the
currently selected span.

The "Section Properties" button launches the "Section Properties" dialog. This button is
only enabled when the "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box is checked
(selected).

The "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box is used to apply the temperature data
to the analysis. When this check box is checked, the "Temperatures" button becomes
enabled. The "Compute Transformed Section Properties" check box must be selected
(checked) to access the "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box.

The Temperatures button launches the "Temperatures" dialog. This button is only
enabled when the "Analysis for Temperature Effects" check box is checked (selected).

7.6 Compute Transformed Section Properties

The “Compute Transformed Section Properties” feature automatically calculates span ele-
ment transformed section properties based on data input on the “Section Properties” dia-
log.

Using the input values of slab and girder elastic moduli, this calculation feature determ-
ines the modular ratio (based on the elastic modulus of the slab), and then quantifies
transformed span element cross section properties. The as-quantified transformed sec-
tion properties include area, moments of inertia, and unit weight.

As illustration of the feature, consider Figure: 7.6.a. The span cross section shown con-
sists of a 656 in. wide by 9 in. thick concrete slab and four steel plate girders (Figure:
7.6.a). The four identical girders are collectively centered beneath the slab, and are
spaced horizontally at 13.5 ft.
 Figure: 7.6.a Cross-section Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)

The series of dialogs that are accessed in making use of the transformed section prop-
erties feature are described as follows. For any bridge model, navigate to the “Bridge”
page and click “Edit Span”. On 'Bridge Span Properties' click on “Section Properties and
Temperatures” (Figure: 7.6.d). Next, click the “Compute Transformed Section Properties”
checkbox to enable access to the “Section Properties” dialog (Figure: 7.6.b).
Figure: 7.6.b Section Properties and Temperatures Dialog
 Figure: 7.6.c Section Properties Dialog

Please see "Section Properties" dialog for instructions on inputting the cross section
data into FB-MultiPier (FBMP) and Click OK. Subsequent to populating the detailed span
section properties, and clicking “OK” on the “Section Properties and Temperatures” dia-
log, a notification will appear to confirm that the transformed section properties for the
span will indeed be overwritten.

Click the 'Table' on the 'Bridge Span Properties' dialog. Shown in Figure: 7.6.c is the
'Span Properties Table' dialog, are the transferred sectional details.
 Figure: 7.6.d Span Properties Table Dialog

As demonstration of this feature, assume that the steel girder components (flanges,
webs) from " Cross-section Dimensions (for clarity, only a single girder is displayed)"
are transformed to concrete components based on the modular ratio n, where n =
Egirder / Eslab = 29,000/3,625 = 8. Accordingly, the transformed section (in this scen-
ario) utilizes an elastic modulus value of 3,625 ksi. For the remainder of this discussion,
automated calculations of transformed section properties are compared to cor-
responding manual calculations.

The manually calculated transformed section properties are:

Transformed Cross Section Area:

Area of Single Steel Girder, As = (3.25 in*26 in+0.69 in*108 in + 3.25in *26in) = 243.52
in^2
Area of Concrete Slab, Ac = 9 in *656 in= 5904 in^2
Transformed Area, A = Ac + 4* As*n = 5904 in^2+ 4*243.52 in^2 *8 = 13696.64 in^2
The manual calculation of transformed area “A” matches the corresponding value gen-
erated using FBMP (Figure: 7.6.d).

Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 2 Axis (I2):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder,
Is2 = (3.25 * 26^3 /12) + (0.69 * 108^3 /12) + (3.25 * 26^3 /12) = 9,523.29 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab,
Ic2 = 9 * 656^3 /12 = 211,725.31 in^4
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I2 = (Is2) *n *4 + (Ic2) + 2 *(As)*n * (13.5 * 12/2)^2 + 2
*(As)*n* (13.5*12+13.5*12/2)^2
I2 = 467,667,612.5 in^4
The manual calculation of “I2” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).

Transformed Cross Section Moment of Inertia about 3 Axis (I3):

Moment of Inertia of Steel Girder about 3 Axis,
Is3 = (26 * 114.5^3 /12) - ((26-0.69) * 108^3 /12) = 595,491.96 in^4
Moment of Inertia of Concrete Slab about 3 Axis,
Ic3 = 656 * 9^3 /12 = 39,852 in^4
Centroid (from Girder Base): ybot = 83.867 in
Transformed Moment of Inertia, I3 = (Is3) *n *4 + (Ic3) + 4 *(As)*n * (ybot -114.5/2)^2
+ (Ac)*(119-ybot)^2
I3 = 31,903,875.69 in^4
The manual calculation of “I3” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).

Transformed Cross Section Torsional Inertia (J):

Note that the calculation of “J” is carried out using equations given in “Roark's Formulas
for Stress & Strain”, 7th Edition, Warren C. Young & Richard G. Budynas.
We know that, J = 1/3*b*t^3
For Transformed Cross-section
J = 1/3 * (656) * 9^3 + 1/3 * (26*n) * (3.25)^3 + 1/3 * (108) * (0.69*n)^3 + 1/3 *
(26*n) * (3.25)^3
J = 202,669 in^4
The manual calculation of “J” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).

Transformed Cross Section Unit weight:

Note that the unit weight of the transformed cross section is modified such that the
unit-length weight of the transformed section (i.e., the product of the transformed area
and unit weight) remains equal to the physical unit-length weight of the corresponding
span portion.
ɣTransformed * (Transformed Cross Section Area) = ɣs * (Steel Girder Area) + ɣc * (Con-
crete Slab Area)
ɣTransformed = [ɣs * (Steel Girder Area) + ɣc * (Concrete Slab Area)] / (Transformed
Cross Section Area)

= [ɣs * (As*4) + ɣc * (Ac)] / (A)

= [490pcf * (243.52 in^2 *4) + 150pcf * (5904 in^2)] / (13696.64 in^2)

= 99.506 pcf

The manual calculation of “ɣ” matches the corresponding value generated using FBMP
(Figure: 7.6.d).

7.7 Section Properties Dialog

The "Section Properties" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog
launches the "Section Properties" dialog (Figure: 7.7.a). This dialog is available for bridge
models only. This dialog is used to input dimensional and material property data for
girders and the slab, for each span in the model.
 Figure: 7.7.a Section Properties

The span for which data will be input is set on the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, and
displays in the title bar of the "Section Properties" dialog.

The "Type" drop-down list is used to specify the type of girder used on the selected
span. There are three girder types available: Steel, Concrete and Box. When changing the
selected girder type, default properties can be automatically assigned to the new girder
type selection.
The "Schematics" image displays the schematics of the dimensional inputs for each
girder type.
The "Uniform Shape" check box dictates whether all girders in the selected span are uni-
form. The "Constant" and "Variable" section property radio buttons on the "Bridge Span
Properties" dialog are used to specify whether girder dimensional data varies along the
length of the girder. There are four possible girder configurations: a) Uniform Shape
with Constant Height, b) Non Uniform Shape with Constant Height, c) Uniform Shape
with Variable Height, and d) Non Uniform Shape with Variable Height.

The "Bearings Per Girder" option is available only when the selected girder type is ‘Box’.
Select either "One" or "Two' bearings per box girder. This value will be applied to all box
girders on the selected span. To utilize the ‘Two’ bearings option, the number of bearing
locations in the model must be equal to twice the number of girders.

The "Girder Spacing Typical Section" button launches the dialog shown in Figure: 7.7.b.
The "Girder Spacing Typical Section" dialog displays the spacing between the girders.
Spacings are measured from the center-line of each girder. The girder spacings should
be set via this dialog.

Note: The girder spacing provided in the "Girder spacing Typical Section" is inde-
pendent of the bearing spacings, which are set via the "Bearing Locations" dialog
launched from the "Pier" page.
 Figure: 7.7.b Girder Spacings

The "Slab" material properties frame is used to input the following slab material prop-
erties: Young’s Modulus, Shear Modulus, and Unit Weight.

The "Girder" material properties frame is used to input the following girder material
properties: Young’s Modulus and Unit Weight.

The "Slab" dimensions frame is used to input the following slab dimensional properties:
Width and Height.

The "Girders" table in the ‘Dimensions’ frame is used to input girder dimensional data.
Which girder type is selected (see section on "Type" above) dictates how much girder
data will need to be input in the "Girders" table. The dimensional input is also dictated
by the girder type.

The "Girder Dimensions (Expanded View)" is launched via the “Expand Table” button.
This dialog is used to expand the viewable size of the "Girders" table, making viewing
large sets of data with many table rows easy. This expanded table also helps illustrate
the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:

When girders have uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder dimensional
data is input, and this set of data is applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is
one (1) row of input data (Figure: 7.7.c).

Figure: 7.7.c Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders have non-uniform shape and constant height, one set of girder dimen-
sional data is input per girder. Note there are two (2) rows of input data, as this model
contains 2 girders on the span (Figure: 7.7.d).
 Figure: 7.7.d Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders have uniform shape and variable height, one set of girder dimensional
data is input per element. Note there are ten (10) rows of input data, as this model con-
tains 10 span elements (Figure: 7.7.e).

Figure: 7.7.e Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height

When girders have non-uniform shape and have variable height, one set of girder
dimensional data is input per girder per element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of
input data, as this model contains 10 span elements and 2 girders on the span (Figure:
7.7.f).
 Figure: 7.7.f Girder Dimensions (Expanded View) Non Uniform Variable Height

The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girders" table.
The "Plot" button draws the 2-dimensional image of the slab and girders in the "Plot"
window (Figure: 7.7.g). It is recommended to click the "Plot" button after making
changes to the dimensional input, to ensure the image is based on the most current
input.
 Figure: 7.7.g Plot Window

On the "Plot" dialog, the "Print" button prints the 2-dimensional image of the slab and
girders.
On the "Plot" dialog, the "Element" drop-down list is used with variable height girders to
specify for which element the girders be drawn.

7.8 Vertical Link Properties

Properties of the Vertical Link match the axes between the Span (S) and the Vertical Link
(VL). The VL properties can be user defined. Alternatively, if the VL properties are to be
automatically calculated by the program, then the goal is to select properties that are
proportional to the ends of the span. The default program models make use of a special
pre-analysis feature that ensure uniform vertical bearing reactions due to span self-
weight.

Figure: 7.8.a Axis for Vertical Link and Span

Eqn: 7.8.A

Eqn: 7.8.B

Eqn: 7.8.C
Eqn: 7.8.D

Eqn: 7.8.E

Eqn: 7.8.F

Where,
LVL – Length of the vertical link element.
AVL – Cross sectional area of the vertical link element.
JVL – Torsional constant of the vertical link element.
I3VL – Moment of inertia (I3) of the vertical link element.
I2VL – Moment of inertia (I2) of the vertical link element.
EVL – Young’s modulus of the vertical link element.
GVL – Shear modulus of the vertical link element.
LS – Length of the attached total bridge span.
AS – Cross sectional area of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
JS – Torsional constant of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
I3S – Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
I2S – Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
ES – Young’s modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.
GS – Shear modulus of the nearest horizontal bridge span element.

7.9 Transfer Beam

The "Transfer Beam" is used to connect the bridge superstructure (which is modeled
using linear elastic frame elements) to the substructure bearings.

The "Transfer Beam" is made up of elastic frame elements, and continuity effects due to
a continuous superstructure are calculated as the analysis is conducted.

It is imperative that neoprene bearings are modeled because their stiffness provides for
the best and most realistic, distribution of forces between superstructure and sub-
structure. This is important for loads applied in both horizontal and vertical directions to
the transfer beam. For example: in order to obtain an even distribution of Dead Load
forces the vertical long term neoprene bearing stiffness should be included (use the cus-
tom bearing feature). Otherwise span Dead Loads may "migrate" to the bearings that
are closest to the stiffest parts of the pier cap (such as a bearing located directly above a
pier column). The custom bearing stiffnesses are very easy to input and typically require
just 3 lines of data to describe the linear stiffness of these bearings.

A paper in the August 2000 Journal of Bridge Engineering, "Effect of Bearing Pads on
Precast Prestressed Concrete Bridges" provides stiffness values for typical bridge neo-
prene pads. The publication "Construction and Design of Prestressed Concrete Seg-
mental Bridges", by Jean Muller and Walter Podolny , page 245, provides an excellent
reference for calculating neoprene bearing stiffness and also discusses the need to use
the long term shear modulus for sustained loads.

Note in Figure: 7.9.a that the node on the Transfer Beam and the corresponding node on
the pier cap are "master and slave nodes" that share the same coordinates in space, but
are linked by 6 springs that control relative motions between the superstructure and
substructure.

The stiffness of the Transfer Beam can be input by the Engineer or for preliminary
design the Engineer may elect to use the stiff or soft Transfer Beam option provided by
the program. Additionally, the transfer beam properties can be automatically computed
so that the bearing reactions due to span self-weight are of increased uniformity (as dis-
cussed here).
If the preload option is selected (which would allow one to apply "built in" loads to the
pier structure) such loading is applied by the software before the transfer beam is
engaged. These built in loads, as is often the case with Segmental Bridges, would thus
exist in addition to any other loads being applied.
Figure: 7.9.a Transfer Beam
The node numbering system for superstructure nodes, including Transfer Beam nodes,
is depicted above. The sequence is as follows per bridge span: node 1 is located at the
base of the left elevation beam; node 2 is located at the top of the left elevation beam;
the bridge deck is divided into 10 elements of equal length, with a node separating each
element (nodes 3 through 11); node 12 is located at the top of the right elevation beam;
node 13 is located at the base of the right elevation beam. The number and location of
the remaining superstructure nodes depend on the number of bearing locations. Node
14 is the first bearing location on the left rigid transfer beam. There is one transfer beam
node per bearing location (nodes 14 through 19 as depicted in Figure: 7.9.a). The right
transfer beam nodes then follow (nodes 20 through 25 as depicted in Figure: 7.9.a).

The transfer beam is used to model the end conditions of the span and to transfer the
load to the bearings. The transfer beam’s properties are dependent on the properties of
the vertical link.

The user can select from one of the three descriptions for the transfer beam:

1. Stiff (default)
2. Soft
3. Custom
 Figure: 7.9.b Axis for Transfer Beam and Vertical Rigid Beam

Equation used to generate the transfer beam properties for the stiff (default) and soft
options are described below.
Stiff (default) properties:

Eqn: 7.9.A

Eqn: 7.9.B

Eqn: 7.9.C

Eqn: 7.9.D

Eqn: 7.9.E

Eqn: 7.9.F
Soft properties:

Eqn: 7.9.G

Eqn: 7.9.H

Eqn: 7.9.I

Eqn: 7.9.J

Eqn: 7.9.K

Eqn: 7.9.L

Where,
LTB – Length of the transfer beam element.
ATB – Cross sectional area of the transfer beam element.
JTB – Torsional constant of the transfer beam element.
I3TB – Moment of inertia (I3) of the transfer beam element.
I2TB – Moment of inertia (I2) of the transfer beam element.
ETB – Young’s modulus of the transfer beam element.
GTB – Shear modulus of the transfer beam element.
LVL – Length of the nearest vertical link element.
AVL – Cross sectional area of the nearest vertical link element.
JVL – Torsional constant of the nearest vertical link element.
I3VL – Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest vertical link element.
I2VL – Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest vertical link element.
EVL – Young’s modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
GVL – Shear modulus of the nearest vertical link element.

7.10 Span Dead Load Staging

A spine model approach is used for modeling spans in FB-MultiPier. For models con-
taining spans, a special option is available within the Project Settings to allow for 'Uni-
form Bearing Forces due to Span Dead Load'. Enabling this analysis option will result in
the program carrying out a special pre-analysis to facilitate generation of uniform bear-
ing reactions due to the weight of the superstructure.

This process involves first conducting a static pre-analysis, where the only loading is due
to span self-weight, and intermediate superstructure elements are modeled as rigid.
Scale factors used in rigidizing the intermediate superstructure element properties (ver-
tical link and transfer beam properties) are then adjusted in the subsequent "real" ana-
lysis so that the span self-weight induces more uniform bearing reactions.

For models making use of static analysis, after the pre-analysis has completed, the ver-
tical link and transfer beam properties are updated (relative to the rigid properties used
in the pre-analysis) using the equations given below.
Eqn: 7.10.A

Eqn: 7.10.B

Eqn: 7.10.C

Eqn: 7.10.D

Eqn: 7.10.E

Eqn: 7.10.F

where
LTB – Length of the transfer beam element.
ATB – Cross sectional area of the transfer beam element.
JTB – Torsional constant of the transfer beam element.
I3TB – Moment of inertia (I3) of the transfer beam element.
I2TB – Moment of inertia (I2) of the transfer beam element.
ETB – Young’s modulus of the transfer beam element.
GTB – Shear modulus of the transfer beam element.
LVL – Length of the nearest vertical link element.
AVL – Cross sectional area of the nearest vertical link element.
JVL – Torsional constant of the nearest vertical link element.
I3VL – Moment of inertia (I3) of the nearest vertical link element.
I2VL – Moment of inertia (I2) of the nearest vertical link element.
EVL – Young’s modulus of the nearest vertical link element.
GVL – Shear modulus of the nearest vertical link element.

For dynamic analysis, when the span dead load staging feature is utilized, the same
approach (as that used for static analysis) is employed with regards to the specialized
pre-analysis. Subsequently, for the actual dynamic analysis, the transfer beam and ver-
tical link properties are determined using the equations given above, but with applic-
ation of additional scale factors. Namely, selected properties are amplified to better
ensure that intermediate superstructure elements remain stiff relative to adjacent phys-
ical members (e.g., pier cap beams) while undergoing motions driven by the various
terms of the dynamic equation of motion, such as inertial forces. Specifically, for
dynamic analyses, the I3TB term is scaled by "40.0" and the I2TB is scaled by "3.4" during
the "real" analysis stage.

Notes:
1. Use of custom stiffness definitions (representative of the actual bearing configuration
atop a given substructure) for bearing vertical translation stiffness are imperative to
bringing about uniform bearing reactions. This is in contrast to use of a stiffness that is
effectively rigid for bearing vertical translations.
2. The special pre-analysis will typically improve the uniformity of vertical reactions due
to span dead load. However, depending on the bridge configuration, some variation
across the bearing reactions of a given substructure may remain despite use of the spe-
cial pre-analysis feature. For instances where the level of variation is not desirable, cus-
tom properties may need to be specified for the transfer beam and/or vertical link
properties.
3. Caution should be used if Span Dead Load Staging is enabled when nonlinear force-
deformation relationships are supplied for bearing vertical stiffness (e.g., to model
uplift). Such conditions may warrant additional model adjustments to promote uniform
bearing reactions under span dead load, and further, may require custom specification
of vertical link and transfer beam properties.

7.11 Bearing Properties

The properties of the bearings are calculated by the software (1,2) or manually input (3).
1) Based on properties of the Transfer Beam (TB)
2) Based on properties of the Rigid Links (RL)
3) Based on user defined force-deformation and/or moment-rotation curves

For any bearing degrees of freedom that are input as "Constrained", the program will
use properties that are effectively rigid (based on the transfer beam and rigid link prop-
erties noted above). For any bearing degrees of freedom that are input as "Release", the
program makes use of nominal stiffness terms, based on "EWEAKSPRING", which is
defaulted to a value of 1E-05.

Each bearing pad element is defined with a 12x12 stiffness matrix.

Method 1 - Bearings based on transfer beam properties

 Figure: 7.11.a Axis for Bearing and Transfer Beam

Eqn: 7.11.A

Eqn: 7.11.B

Eqn: 7.11.C

Eqn: 7.11.D
Eqn: 7.11.E

Eqn: 7.11.F

Method 2 - Bearings based on rigid link properties

Figure: 7.11.b Axis for Bearing and Offset Rigid Link

Eqn: 7.11.G

Eqn: 7.11.H
Eqn: 7.11.I

Eqn: 7.11.J

Eqn: 7.11.K

Eqn: 7.11.L

7.12 Pier Cap to Bearing, Rigid Link Properties

The properties of the Rigid Link (RL) are based on those of the Pier Cap (PC), where the
rigid link is effectively defined as rigid relative to the pier cap.
 Figure: 7.12.a Axis for Offset Rigid Link and Transfer Beam

Eqn: 7.12.A
Eqn: 7.12.B

Eqn: 7.12.C

Eqn: 7.12.D

Where,
LRL –User input pad offset from pier cap centerline; 1 inch for single row; 1 inch if no off-
set is specified.
ARL – Cross sectional area of the rigid link element.
JRL – Torsional constant of the rigid link element.
I3RL – Moment of inertia (I3) of the rigid link element.
I2RL – Moment of inertia (I2) of the rigid link element.
E – Maximum Young’s modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
G – Maximum Shear modulus among all the pier cap elements (excluding cantilever).
LPC – Distance from the first column centerline to last column centerline.
APC – Maximum cross sectional area among all the pier cap elements (excluding can-
tilever).
JPC – Maximum Torsional constant among all the pier cap elements (excluding can-
tilever).
I3PC – Maximum Moment of inertia (I3) among all the pier cap elements (excluding can-
tilever).
I2PC – Maximum Moment of inertia (I2) among all the pier cap elements (excluding can-
tilever).
7.13 Bridge Wind Load Generator

This dialog appears for the Bridge problem type.

Figure: 7.13.a Bridge Wind Load Generation Dialog.

A wind angle of zero degrees applies all of the wind in the transverse direction. The
equations used in the wind load generation are found here.

Note: For the bridge model type the engineer must input the wind loads on sub-
structure manually.

7.14 Temperatures Dialog

The "Temperatures" button on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog
launches the "Temperatures" dialog (Figure: 7.14.a). This dialog is available for bridge
models only, for static analysis and when the AASHTO (LRFD) features are utilized. For
static analysis, the temperature data input on this dialog is applied to every load case,
though load cases can be excluded from the application of thermal loading via the
"Thermal Load’ button on the ‘Load Page’.

The "Temperatures" dialog is only available when the "Span Temperature Loading"
check box is checked on the "Section Properties and Temperatures" dialog. When the
AASHTO (LRFD) features are used, this check box is labeled the "Force Effects Due to
Superimposed Deformations (TU, TG)" check box.
 Figure: 7.14.a Temperatures Dialog

The "Temperatures" dialog is used to input temperature data for the slab and girders,
for each span in the model. For static analysis, this temperature data is applied to the
model as thermal loading on a per-load-case basis. To assign the thermal loading to spe-
cific load cases, use the "Thermal Loading" dialog, launched from the ‘Load Page".

The span for which data will be input on the "Temperatures" dialog is set on the "Bridge
Span Properties" dialog. This span number is displayed in the title bar of the "Tem-
peratures" dialog.
The "Reference Temperature" input is used to input a baseline temperature to which all
other temperature data is referenced. For example, if the inputted reference temperature
is -100 degrees F, and the inputted slab "Top Temperature" is 225 degrees F, the ana-
lysis will treat the slab top temperature as 325 degrees F (225 - (-100) = 325).

The "TU" and "TG" radio buttons are used to specify the type of loading used in asso-
ciation with the AASHTO (LRFD) feature.

The "Schematics" section displays a schematic of the temperature inputs and the loc-
ation within the girder for each input. There are three different schematics, one for each
girder type (steel, concrete, and box). The girder type is set on the "Section Properties"
dialog (see the "Type" section in the "Section Properties" dialog topic). Figure: 7.14.b, Fig-
ure: 7.14.c, and Figure: 7.14.d show the schematics for each girder type.

Figure: 7.14.b Girder Concrete Temperatures

 Figure: 7.14.c Girder Steel Temperatures

Figure: 7.14.d Girder Box Temperatures

The "Thermal Elastic Properties" section is used to input the following values for the
girders: Girder Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, and Slab Coefficient of Thermal Expan-
sion.

The "Slab Temperatures" section is used to input the following values for the slab: Top
Temperature (temperature at the top of the slab), Temperature 4 inches from the Top (of
the slab), and Bottom Temperature (temperature at the bottom of the slab).

The "Girder Temperatures and Heights" table is used to input girder temperature data.
The schematic in the "Schematics" section (described above) is useful in understanding
the locations on the girder at which the temperature inputs are applied.
The "Temperatures (Expanded View)" is launched via the "Expand Table" button. This dia-
log is used to expand the viewable size of the temperature and heights table, making
viewing large sets of data with many table rows easy. This expanded table also helps
illustrate the input data required for each girder configuration, as follows:

When girders are uniform with constant height, one set of girder temperature data is
input, and this set of data is applied to all elements in all girders. Note there is one (1)
row of input data (Figure: 7.14.e).

Figure: 7.14.e Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders are not uniform with constant height, one set of temperature data is input
for each girder. Note there are two (2) rows of input data, as this model contains 2
girders on the span (Figure: 7.14.f).

Figure: 7.14.f Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Girder Configuration

When girders are uniform with variable height, one set of temperature data is input per
element. Note there are ten (10) rows of input data, as this model contains 10 span ele-
ments (Figure: 7.14.g).
 Figure: 7.14.g Temperatures (Expanded View) Uniform Variable Height

When girders are not uniform and have variable height, one set of temperature data is
input per girder per element. Note there are twenty (20) rows of input data, as this
model contains 10 span elements and 2 girders on the span (Figure: 7.14.h).

Figure: 7.14.h Temperatures (Expanded View) Non Uniform Variable Height

The "Table PDF" button creates a .PDF file of the data displayed in the "Girder Tem-
peratures and Heights" table.
The "Plot" button launches the "Plot" dialog.

The "Plot" dialog displays the plot of the temperature data for the selected girder on the
selected span (Figure: 7.14.i).

Figure: 7.14.i Thermal Gradient Plot

The "Element" combo box specifies the element for which the thermal gradient plot is
displayed. This combo box is not active when the "Constant" radio button is selected on
the "Bridge Span Properties" dialog, because with "Constant" properties, all elements
within a girder share the same set of temperature data.
The "Girder" combo box specifies the girder for which the thermal gradient plot is dis-
played. This combo box is not active when the "Uniform (across all girders)" property is
selected on the "Section Properties" dialog is selected (checked), because with this prop-
erty selected, there is only one (1) set of temperature data per span.

The "Show Slab Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the slab tem-
peratures on the plot. This check box does not change the curve line; it merely controls
whether the slab temperatures are visible or hidden. It is useful when slab temperatures
and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such that they overlap.
Hiding the slab temperatures in this instance makes viewing the girder temperature
data easier to see.

The "Show Girder Temperatures" check box specifies whether to display the girder tem-
peratures on the plot. This check box does not change the curve line; it merely controls
whether the girder temperatures are visible or hidden. It is useful when slab tem-
peratures and the uppermost girder temperatures are very close together such that they
overlap. Hiding the girder temperatures in this instance makes viewing the slab tem-
perature data easier to see.

The "Print" button creates a printout of the thermal gradient plot.

8 Settings

1. Project Settings
2. Program Settings

8.1 Project Settings

Figure: 8.1.a Project Settings Dialog (General)

Environment -> General:

Message Options - Generation of message boxes for various conditions can be
enabled/disabled here. When 'Auto-compare soil sets vs. pile batter / type con-
figurations' is enabled (checked), then a message box will be issued in the event that
there are fewer soil sets assigned than there are pile batter / type conditions.
 Figure: 8.1.b Project Settings Dialog (Analysis Page)

Analysis -> Analysis Page:

Memory Settings - ‘Analysis Memory Allocation’ is the amount of memory allotted for
performing analyses.

The amount of memory allocated for running analyses using FB-MultiPier can be
increased as needed. If an analysis requires more memory than is currently allocated,
then the analytical engine will generate an error message:
STORAGE EXCEEDED BY ******** UNITS
Not enough memory is available for the analysis

Span Dead Load Staging - Checking the 'Uniform Bearing Forces due to Span Dead
Load' checkbox is applicable for any models containing spans, and will result in the pro-
gram carrying out a special pre-analysis to facilitate uniform bearing reactions due to
the weight of the superstructure. Additional discussion of this feature is provided here.
.
8.2 Program Settings Dialog

Figure: 8.2.a Program Settings Dialog

Environment -> General:

Export Format - 'Export Format' can be used to select the format for exporting data out
of FB-MultiPier windows. Exported data can be packaged in either Excel
(XML spreadsheet) or PDF formats.
Message Options - Generation of message boxes for various conditions can be
enabled/disabled here. When 'Show Server Hosted Input File Message' is enabled
(checked), then a warning message will be issued anytime a model is attempted to be
analyzed when said model is located on a server.
Render Settings - Certain hardware configurations may not support multi-sample anti-
aliasing (MSAA). To still allow use of FB-MultiPier on these hardware configurations, it
should be ensured that MSAA is disabled prior to loading model files.

Model Input -> General:

Cross Sections - Checking the 'Show Default Database Cross Sections' option will result
in the default database cross sections being (or not being) displayed in the pier, pile, and
X-member cross section dialogs.
Paths - The folder locations of Load functions and user-defined cross sections can be
viewed and modified here.

Model Input -> Soil Edit:

Soil Edit Window - Checking the 'Display Elevation at Mouse Position' will result in the
elevation bar being (or not being) displayed in the Soil Edit Window.
9 License Installation

1. License File
2. License Installation Help
3. Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation
4. Update/Install a License on a Network Server
5. Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation
6. Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server
7. Transfer License to a Different Computer

9.1 License File

FB-MultiPier operates using a license file to determine its status. All shipped versions
run in Demo mode as the default. The program can be "unlocked" into various modes
including full version and student version, networked or stand-alone. This unlocking can
be done by hand, through phone contact with the Bridge Software Institute ( http://bsi-
web.ce.ufl.edu ) or automatically through an internet connection to the BSI web server.
The program requires a license file to be installed. This license file is linked to the com-
puter on which it is installed.

NOTE: You must have administrator rights to install FB-MultiPier or the license
file on a server.

The following describes the modes and processes required:

Stand-Alone
A stand-alone or fixed license version is locked to run on a single machine and only that
machine. The license file is installed on the individual machine.
Network Version
A network version is a floating license version that allows a fixed number of machines to
run the program at any one time. For example, a three-seat installation allows three com-
puters to run the program at the same time. The program is actually installed on any
number of machines. For example, you can install the program on 20 computers in your
network. However, only three of the 20 can use the program at the same time.

This installation requires a network server that shares a directory with all the computers
wishing to run FB-MultiPier. The shared directory is where the license file is installed. All
client machines must have read and write permissions for the shared directory in order
for the program to run.

There is a separate install program for installing the license file on the server. If your net-
work installation has multiple servers, you will need to purchase multiple server ver-
sions.

Updating the license

Any installed version can have its permissions changed by entering encrypted numbers
into the license file. This is done by choosing the Control->Update license option from
the main menu. The update can be done by hand or automatically through the Internet.

E-mail/Fax/Phone License Update

This option is for installations that do not have an Internet connection. To do this install-
ation, call the BSI support number (check the web for the phone number) and you will
be stepped through the process. Numbers from your computer need to be given to the
BSI representative and we can Fax or E-mail the encoded numbers you will need to type
into the program.

Internet License Update

This option requires the computer on which you are installing the license file be con-
nected to the Internet. Then, all numbers are communicated through the Internet and
the license updated automatically. The computer can either be a stand-alone system or
the network server for a multiple seat license.
Transfer License
There is a built in function that allows you to transfer you license to another machine.
This allows you to move the license file from your current server or workstation to a
new machine.

Troubleshooting
The license file (both for servers and individual workstations) is locked to a machine
based on hardware components contained in the machine. If you change or modify your
hardware (drives, motherboards etc) your installation may not function. To do this, you
should first transfer the license, then modify your hardware, and then re-install the
license on the machine.

Novell systems: Be sure that the directory where the license file is saved is accessible to
any user. The user must have read, write, modify, erase and create rights for that dir-
ectory.

License Update Tutorial

9.2 License Installation Help

Before updating the program license for the first time, the program will run in demo
mode. While running in demo mode, the model size is limited to a 5x5 pile group and
the program execution is limited to 30 days. After purchasing the program, these lim-
itations can be removed by using the License Configuration Wizard.

To update the software license at any time, select Update Software License from the Con-
trol menu while viewing the intro Logo window. Doing so brings up the License Con-
figuration Wizard.

The initial License Configuration Wizard screen shows four options for updating the soft-
ware license. The options are shown below:
 Figure: 9.2.a License Configuration Wizard
License Update Tutorial

9.3 Update a License on a Stand Alone Workstation

This option is used for a single installation of the software that does not rely on network
to run the program. A license of this type is individually purchased per machine.
 Figure: 9.3.a Stand Alone icense Configuration Wizard

Click the Next button to continue. The next screen allows the user to update the license
by Email (bsi@ce.ufl.edu).Click Next. Please contact the BSI for assistance if needed.

Figure: 9.3.b Update Methods

License File Update by Email
This option requires to send an email to the BSI. To update a license by Email, select
Update by Email and click the next button to continue. The next screen shows a series of
edit boxes for entering license data. When updating your FB-MultiPier license you can
now use the copy and paste buttons to retrieve and paste license unlocking codes. Click-
ing the Copy Codes to Clipboard puts the Session Code and Machine ID on the clip-
board. The Session Code and Machine ID need to be given to the BSI representative.
EMAIL this Session Code and Machine ID to bsi@ce.ufl.edu.
After validating the user’s account information and status, the BSI representative will
then Email the user with a series of numerical codes that will modify the configuration
of the license file. Copy all of the codes at once and then click the Paste Codes from Clip-
board to paste the codes into the License Configuration Wizard. If the numerical codes
are entered correctly, the program will be unlocked and will run without any limitations.
If any of the numerical codes are entered incorrectly, the wizard will prevent the user
from advancing to the next screen.

Click Next after entering the numerical codes.

Figure: 9.3.c License Codes

The Update Complete screen will then be shown after successfully entering the numer-
ical codes. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier
program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically
close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.

License Update Tutorial

9.4 Update/Install a License on a Network Server

This option is used for a single installation of the software on a network server. This
license update is identical to stand alone workstation update, except that the license is
configured on the network server. This option would be used to run the program dir-
ectly on the server to take advantage of the server hardware configuration (i.e. more
memory, hard disk space, etc.). A license of this type is individually purchases per
machine.

Select Update a License on a Network Server from the initial screen and follow the steps
outline for Updating a License on a Stand Alone Workstation.
 Figure: 9.4.a Network License Configuration Wizard
License Update Tutorial

9.5 Set Path for a License File on a Stand Alone Workstation

This option is used to set the license file path to the license on a Stand Alone Work-
station. Once this path has been established it will be saved so that the client machine
will automatically find the license file each time the program is run.
 Figure: 9.5.a Set License Path (Stand Alone)

Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license
file path on the Stand Alone Machine. The user can either type the path or preferably
click the Browse button to locate the file. The license file is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click
the Browse button, locate the license file on the client machine.
 Figure: 9.5.b Browse to License File

Click the Next button after locating the license file. The Update Complete page is now
shown. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier pro-
gram needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically
close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.

9.6 Set Client Path for a License File on a Network Server

This option is used by the network client computer after a server license file has been
configured and successfully installed on the network server (see LicServe Wizard). When
a floating network license is purchased, the limiting factor is the number of network
seats. The FB-MultiPier program can be installed on any number of client machines, how-
ever, the number of clients that can run the program at one time is limited by the num-
ber of network seats purchased. In order for the client machine to run the program
using this scenario the client must locate the license file that has already been installed
on the network server. Once this path has been established it will be saved so that the cli-
ent machine will automatically find the license file each time the program is run.
 Figure: 9.6.a Set License Path (Network)

Click the Next button to continue. The next screen asks the user to browse to the license
file path on the network server. The user can either type the path or preferably click the
Browse button to locate the file. The license file is named "FB-MultiPier.lf". Click the
Browse button, locate the license file on the network server, and click Open to continue.
You must browse through the network to locate the license file. You can not use a
mapped drive letter.
 Figure: 9.6.b Browse to the License File

Click Next after locating the license file on the network server. The Update Complete
page is now shown. In order to apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-
MultiPier program needs to be restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and auto-
matically close the program. The program will now run in an unlocked state.
 Figure: 9.6.c Press Finish (Update Complete)

9.7 Transfer License to a Different Computer

This option is used to transfer a valid software license to another computer if the user
no longer wishes to have the license on the current computer. Please note that selecting
this option will invalidate the license file on the current machine. Also, this option is only
valid for a stand along workstation installation of FB-MultiPier. Floating network install-
ations are not applicable since the license is stored on the network server.

To proceed, select Transfer License to a Different Computer and click the Next button.
 Figure: 9.7.a Transfer Existing License

Because this process can not be reversed, the user must check the box to confirm the
remove the license from the current computer before proceeding. Doing so will enable
the Next button. Click the Next button to remove the license.
 Figure: 9.7.b Check to Transfer

The next screen informs the user that the license has been successfully removed. A veri-
fication code is displayed on the screen (and written to the file "LicRemoval.txt" in the
application directory). This code must be given to a BSI representative in order to com-
plete the license transfer process and activate the license on another computer.

Figure: 9.7.c License Transfer Code

Click the Next button to continue. The Update Complete page is now shown. In order to
apply the changes to the program configuration, the FB-MultiPier program needs to be
restarted. Clicking the Finish button will update and automatically close the program.
The program will now run in an unlocked state.

License Update Tutorial

10 Toolbar Icons

1. Description of Toolbar Icons

10.1 Description of Toolbar Icons

The buttons in the toolbar at the top of the screen control the accessed to different mod-
ules within the program. Some of the menu items can also be accessed using the but-
tons instead for convenience. The purpose of each button in the toolbar is described
below.

Figure: 10.1.a Toolbar Icons

Figure: 10.1.b File Option Icons

Figure: 10.1.c Model Data and Analysis Icons

 Figure: 10.1.d Analysis Results Control Icons

Figure: 10.1.e Pier and Load Case Menus

Figure: 10.1.f Pier and Time Step Menus (Dynamic Analysis)

Figure: 10.1.g 3D Control Bar Icons (if activated)
11 Batch Analysis

1. Batch Mode
2. Running FB-MultiPier in Batch Mode

11.1 Batch Mode

A batch of input files can be analyzed interactively in Batch Mode.

Figure: 11.1.a Batch Mode Dialog

Get Input Files:

 Click "Add Input File(s)" to add input files by using a windows browser. One or more
files can be added at a time by using the Ctrl key while selecting files in the Open file dia-
log.
 Click "Import Batch File" to retrieve an existing set of input file from a batch (".bat") files.
 Click "Export Batch File" to save the set of input files in the table to a new or existing
batch files.

Select Run Mode:

 Select "Run Without Interruption" to analyze all input files without pausing for mod-
eling errors or convergence failures.
 Select "Pause on Analysis Failure" to have the program pause to display modeling
errors or convergence failures for a particular model.

Analysis Options:
 Click "Run" to analyze all input files from the table.
 Click "Show Analysis Window" to see the analysis window while the input files are run-
ning or paused.
 Click "Resume Analyses" to start the analysis process again after the pause caused due
to analysis failure for an input file.
 Click "Stop Analyses" to halt all analyses.

Check the "Include" box to include the input file in the analysis.

Select the memory size for each input file. Most normal size models only require 8MB of
memory. Larger models may require more memory. The program will provide a noti-
fication if the memory size is exceeded. At this time, FB-MultiPier does not automatically
determine the memory requirements in advance of the analysis.

The Completion Status indicates a successful or unsuccessful analysis for each model.

11.2 Running FB-MultiPier in Batch Mode

The FB-MultiPier engine can be run in batch mode. This allows a number of input files to
be run sequentially. Any collection of input files can be analyzed in this manner by tak-
ing the following steps:
 1. Create a file with extension ".bat";
2. Populate the lines of the batch file, adhering to the format listed below:

""[path to engine]"" I:""[path to input file]"" O:""[path to output file]"" m:[memory]

There can be as many lines as required for the number of input files.

The format of each line is as follows:

[path to engine] This is the full (or relative) path to the .exe file. In addition, if there are
spaces in the path name, the entire executable must be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[path to input file] This the full (or relative) path to the input (.in) file. Note that the file
extension must be included. Also, the path should be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[path to output file] This the full (or relative) path to the output (.out) file. Note that the
file extension must be included. Also, the path should be enclosed in two pairs of quotes.
[memory] This is the amount of memory (in MB) to allocate for the analysis

3. Save the file as run.bat (run is an arbitrary name, the extension must be .BAT).
4. Double-click on the run.bat file to start execution.
12 Soil-Structure Interaction

This section defines input parameters and soil models available for lateral, axial, tor-
sional, rotational, and tip resistance. Lateral soil-structure interaction is modeled with
nonlinear p-y curves. Axial interactions are modeled with hyperbolic t-z curves. Coup-
ling can be included between axial and lateral resistance. Tip resistance is modeled with
compression-only non-linear q-z curves as presented in the Axial Soil Resistance sec-
tion. Four of the p-y models are the same as those presented in FHWA's COM624P
manual (Wang and Reese 1993). All soil resistance curves can also be input as custom
curves by the engineer. All soil-structure interaction calculations pertain to immediate
settlement.

1. Group Interaction
2. Battered Piles
3. Computing Soil Lateral (p-y) Resistance
4. Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rotation
5. Soil Properties
6. Lateral Soil Resistance
7. Axial Soil Resistance
8. Torsional Soil Resistance

12.1 Group Interaction

When a group of piles is subject to vertical or lateral loads (i.e. wind, earthquake, etc.)
the group vertical or lateral resistance is generally not equal to the sum of the individual
pile resistance. Generally, the group resistance is less than the individual pile resistance
and is a function of pile location within the group, and pile spacing.
Consider lateral loading of the variable groups (3x3, 4x3, to 7x3) in dense sand shown
below:

Experimental testing (centrifuge) on pile groups resulted in the following shear dis-
tribution in each of the individual rows:

Table: 12.1.A Average Pile Shear (kN) - Medium dense Sand (Dr = 55%)
Layout 3x3 4x3 5x3 6x3 7x3 Average

Lead Row 245 294 294 302 285 284

2nd Row 178 205 222 205 222 206
3rd Row 142 151 160 178 178 167
4th Row 142 151 142 151 148
5th Row 142 142 142 142
6th Row 142 142 142
7th Row 142 142

Group 1664 2375 2909 3336 3790

(Measured)

Group 1898 2398 2843 3270 3697

(Predicted)

Error (%) 14 1 2.3 2 2.5

Note that the individual row contributions, with the exception of the trail row, appear to
be only a function of row position. Also, using the average for the row (with exception of
the trail row) can be used in predicting the measured group response. Consequently, the
approach recommended by Hannigan et. al. (2006) with P-Multipliers listed in the
AASHTO LRFD specification has been implemented in the program. Separate listings of
p-multipliers can then be specified for lead/trail rows in the Xp direction and lead/trail
rows in the Yp direction. The program identifies the lead/trail rows in each direction
(with unique collections of p-multipliers assigned to Xp springs and Yp springs), as part
of the equilibrium iterations, based on the computed motions of the pile head nodes
under the applied loading.

The following P-Multipliers are recommended for lateral loading at 3D pile spacing:
0.8, 0.4, 0.3, 0.3, …..0.3 where 0.8 is the lead row and 0.3 is the trail row value

For 5D pile spacing the following P-Multipliers are recommended:

1.0, 0.85, 0.7, 0.7, …, 0.7 where 1.0 is the lead row and 0.7 is the trail row value.

These P-Multipliers generally represent group efficiencies of 70-75% for 3D spacings

and 95% for 5D pile spaced groups. Also, the P-Multipliers were found to be inde-
pendent of soil density (sands).

Note: The program will apply the P-Multipliers to the correct pile rows (lead to trail)
based on the direction the piles move. The P-Multipliers are always given in trail to lead
order. In this way, P-Multipliers can be input independent of the applied loading (i.e., the
program automatically determines the lead and trail rows as part of the analysis).

Considerations for motions that do not align with either the Xp or Yp direction are dis-
cussed here.

In the case of battered piles (A frame) as shown below:

 Figure: 12.1.a Pile Group Plan and Layout

Centrifuge Tests were conducted on both 3D and 5D groups shown in loose and dense
sands. Presented is one of the comparisons of plumb vs. battered response:
 Figure: 12.1.b Lateral Load Vs Displacement Curves

Based on the centrifuge results the same P-Multipliers are recommended for battered (A
frame) as plumb pile groups. Presently there is little, if any data on other batter layouts.

Pile Bents
For pile bent models, P-Multipliers can be specified for each pile in both the local Xp and
Yp directions. Note that for pile bent models with P-Multipliers specified in the Xp dir-
ection, the P-Multipliers are applied, by the software, in the same manner as that used
for pier models.

Axial Efficiency
The program also provides for input of axial group efficiency factors. This is a factor that
affects the force displacement in the axial direction. Provisions for the axial efficiency
factor are found on the "Soil Page", under the group button. For more information, see
Sayed (1992).
12.2 Considerations for Battered Piles

Modeling of pile inclination (batter) is available in FB-MultiPier, as indicated in Figure:

12.2.a for a pile with horizontal (H) versus vertical (L) slope. Instructions for making use
of the FB-MultiPier UI to incorporate pile batter into piles are listed here.

Figure: 12.2.a Schematic of battered pile

Lateral
Lateral soil-structure interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that lateral (horizontal) soil res-
istance (i.e., P-Y springs) is NOT rotated for battered piles. Stated alternatively, the P-Y
soil springs always remain parallel to the Xp axis (or Yp axis, as applicable), regardless of
the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the tributary length supplied in integ-
rating the lateral soil resistance force does reflect P-Y spring force along the pile length.
Consequently, the tributary length used for integrating the soil P-Y springs along
battered piles reflects the total horizontal soil resistance available to battered piles.

Vertical
Vertical soil-structure interaction in FB-MultiPier is such that vertical soil resistance (i.e.,
T-Z springs for skin friction; Q-Z springs for end bearing resistance) is NOT rotated for
battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T-Z and Q-Z soil springs always remain parallel
to the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching pile node. However, the tributary
length supplied in integrating the vertical soil resistance force does take into account the
vertical spring (T-Z, Q-Z) force along the pile length. Consequently, the tributary length
used for integrating the soil vertical soil resistance springs along battered piles partially
captures the total vertical soil resistance available to battered piles. Likewise, the nodal
displacement component (resolved) along the axial battered direction is supplied when
integrating to calculate the vertical soil resistance spring forces.
Critically, subsequent to calculating the soil resistance forces (using batter-oriented trib-
utary lengths and batter-oriented, axial nodal displacements), ONLY the vertical com-
ponent of the forces is retained for use in forming the vertical soil resistance stiffness.

Torsional
Torsional (rotation about the pile axial direction) soil-structure interaction in FB-
MultiPier is such that torsional soil resistance (i.e., T-θ springs) is NOT rotated for
battered piles. Stated alternatively, the T- θ soil springs are always oriented such that tor-
sion aligns with rotation about the Zp axis, regardless of the batter of the attaching pile
node. However, the tributary length supplied in integrating the torsional soil resistance
does take into account the length along the battered pile. Consequently, the tributary
length used for integrating the soil torsional soil resistance springs along battered piles
partially captures the total torsional soil resistance available to battered piles. Likewise,
the nodal rotation component (resolved) along the axial battered direction is supplied
when integrating to calculate the torsional soil resistance spring forces
Critically, note that ONLY the rotation and corresponding component of torsional res-
istance for rotation about Zp is used in forming the torsional soil resistance stiffness.

Orientation of Pile-Local Axes

The FAX axis aligns with the longitudinal axis of the pile, the F22 axis will deviate primar-
ily from the Xp axis as Xp batter increases, and the F33 axis will deviate primarily from
the Yp axis as Yp batter increases.

12.3 Computing Soil Lateral (p-y) Resistance

Consider a single pile subjected to static horizontal pile head loads. For this scenario, the
resultant pile head displacement should be consistent regardless of the applied load
direction. In other words, and consistent with Ch. 8 of FHWA (2006), the resultant soil
resistance should be considered in resisting applied lateral load.

In the following, considerations for computing soil lateral (p-y) resistance are detailed.
Further, a case study is presented, where the case is intentionally configured to highlight
the utility of accounting for resultant soil lateral (p-y) resistance. Computed pile head
horizontal displacements under static loads are compared across a range of resultant
load directions. In addition, considerations for dynamic analysis are discussed at the bot-
tom of this article.

Approaches for Defining and Orienting Soil Lateral (p-y) Resistance

Shown in Figure: 12.3.a. is a plan-view schematic of one possible approach for pos-
itioning of p-y springs along embedded pile nodes, as a numerical representation of soil
lateral resistance. In this approach, regardless of the load direction (and computed dis-
placements), two p-y springs are defined and remain oriented such that one p-y spring
aligns with the Xp direction and one p-y spring aligns with the Yp direction. In contrast,
the configuration shown in Figure: 12.3.b is implemented and utilized in FB-MultiPier
(for exceptions, see the considerations for dynamic analysis below). For this latter
approach, as part of each solution iteration, one p-y spring is oriented in the direction of
the resultant horizontal displacement (square root of the sum of the squares of total Xp,
Yp displacements). Differences that arise with adoption of these two approaches are
highlighted in the following discussion.

Figure: 12.3.a Plan-view schematic of lateral soil resistance (p-y) modeling: Springs
remain oriented in Xp and Yp directions
Figure: 12.3.b Plan-view schematic of lateral soil resistance (p-y) modeling: Spring ori-
entation is updated to resultant-displacement direction as part of the solution iterations

Illustration Case
Shown in Figure: 12.3.a is a single pile embedded in a clay layer. The pile head is sub-
jected to 5 kips of horizontal load and the load direction is varied from 0˚ to 90˚. Shown
in Figure: 12.3.d are the computed (resultant) horizontal displacement magnitudes for
each loading direction. While the expectation is that the displacement magnitudes
would be uniform, variation is exhibited when the approach shown in Figure: 12.3.a. is
utilized. In the most extreme case (loading at 45˚), the horizontal displacement mag-
nitude is stiffer by approximately %10.

Also plotted in Figure: 12.3.d are computed results obtained from the same model,
when directionality of the p-y spring is considered in evaluating the p-y resistance (the
approach illustrated in Figure: 12.3.b). Uniformity is achieved among the computed res-
ults using this latter approach. Note that, for loads that do not mobilize the p-y springs
into a state of pronounced non-linearity, the two approaches produce increasingly con-
sistent results.
 Figure: 12.3.c Lateral loading of single pile embedded in clay: configuration

Figure: 12.3.d Lateral loading of single pile embedded in clay: computed results
Considerations for p-multipliers
For pile groups, p-multipliers can be used to scale the ordinates (p values) of p-y curves
positioned at each embedded pile node, and thereby reflect the effect of lateral soil res-
istance along a pile due to the presence of other nearby piles. Uniquely valued p-mul-
tipliers can be input for pile displacements in the Xp and Yp directions. Considerations
for incorporation of p-multipliers into computed p-y response are discussed below.

Two approaches are available for computing p-multipliers (see documentation on the
Pile Group Factors dialog for how to utilize these options). When embedded pile node
displacements are anticipated to deviate substantially from the Xp or Yp directions, p-
multipliers can be computed during analysis using the theoretical approach proposed in
Reese et al. (2006). Alternatively, when p-multipliers are specified (as input prior to
analysis) for the Xp and Yp directions, the following steps are carried out during analysis:
1. Utilize the procedure illustrated in Figure: 12.3.b to determine the soil lateral res-
istance force (p).
2. Assign the appropriate p-multiplier to each pile row (in each direction).
3. Resolve the force into Xp and Yp components.
4. Scale each force component by the respective p-multiplier.

Note that the steps listed above are not directly based on experimental testing.
However, the approach affords consistency regardless of the presence of unique (or
identical, or unity-valued) p-multipliers, and shows reasonable agreement relative to
alternative approaches (e.g., a weighting scheme based on the distance, in the direction
of motion, between each pile and all other piles). Also, the approach described above
retains use of values, as input by the engineer, of p-multipliers in the Xp and Yp dir-
ections.

Considerations for Dynamic (Time-History) Analysis

Soil p-y resistance under multi-directional dynamic loading is not well established (May-
oral et al. 2005). Further, dynamic analysis capabilities in FB-MultiPier, within the context
of multi-directional loading, have been assessed as part of previous studies (Ch.2 of
NCHRP 2001). Therefore, for embedded nodes in time-history analysis models that
make use of dynamic soil-structure interaction behaviors, the approach in Figure: 12.3.a
is utilized. Otherwise, the approach in Figure: 12.3.b is utilized.

12.4 Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rotation

Coupling between axial and lateral soil resistance can be modeled in FB-MultiPier. Soil
resistance due to drilled shaft rotation about the 2 axis and 3 axis operates on t-z data,
and is available for all "Axial" soil model types. However, this feature is recommended
for use in modeling large-diameter drilled shafts (as opposed to relatively more narrow
driven piles) and accounts for the rotational resistance due to the substantial side fric-
tion developed as the shaft bends about the 2 axis and/or 3 axis.

Note: This feature should NOT be used if the lateral soil model "Limestone (McVay)
Uncoupled" is applied. Further, this feature is not recommended for use (due to limited
availability of data) when the "Driven Pile (McVay)" t-z model is applied.

Calculation of bending strains

At each location along the length of the shaft, the total strain consists of an axial and a
bending component. Of interest is the bending strain, εb at any given section of the
shaft,

Eqn: 12.4.A

where: ε1and ε2 are the values of the strain on the opposite sides of the shaft.
Figure: 12.4.a shows in detail how the bending strains are obtained from the measured
strains.
 Figure: 12.4.a Total, axial and bending strains on cross-section.

Soil Lateral Resistance P(F/L) from Bending Moments and Skin Friction
The difference in the moment at two different elevations is caused by soil’s lateral (P for-
ce/length) and axial force (T force/length) resistance at the soil-shaft interface. The con-
tribution to moment in the case of the latter is a function of shaft diameter, and the
soil’s T-Z curve as well as the rotation of the shaft. Shown in the figure below are the
forces acting on a buried element of length dz.

Eqn: 12.4.B

Consequently, from lateral force equilibrium, Figure: 12.4.b, the soil lateral P (for-
ce/length) is found as

Eqn: 12.4.C

If the side shear, T (Figure: 12.4.b), is taken into account, then moment equilibrium res-
ults:
Eqn: 12.4.D

OR

Eqn: 12.4.E

Figure: 12.4.b Forces acting on a buried element of length dz.

where: M = moment on the cross-section

Ms = moment per unit shaft length from the side shear force, T
Evoking horizontal force equilibrium,

Eqn: 12.4.F

Substituting Eqn: 12.4.E into Eqn: 12.4.F, then the soil lateral resistance, P, is obtained:

Eqn: 12.4.G
Evident from Eqn: 12.4.G vs. Eqn: 12.4.C, the side shear on the buried element will act to
shed load away from the lateral resistance, P. The moment/unit length, Ms, of the side
shear is obtained from the T-Z curve for the soil. The value of T requires the dis-
placement, Z, at a point on the shaft.

Moment Due to Side Shear, Ms

Lateral loading causes a rotation of the shaft at any given cross section. The shaft rota-
tion is resisted through skin friction, T, and lateral soil resistance, P, acting on the sides
of the shaft. In the case of the unit skin friction, a Moment/length resistance, Ms , may be
computed at any cross-section. The value of Ms is a function of the unit skin friction at
the periphery of the shaft, which varies around the shaft’s circumference. To estimate
the moment due to side shear (Ms), the shaft cross section was divided into slices as
shown in Figure: 12.4.c, Ri is the distance from the center of shaft to the center of slice i.
For example R1, is the distance from the center of the shaft to the middle of slice 1.

Figure: 12.4.c Shaft cross-section divided into slices to calculate Ms .

The value of shear stress, τi, is a function of vertical displacement, Zi, which is a function
of the rotation, θ, and the distance from the center of cross-section to the center of the
slice, Ri. If Z1 is the average axial displacement of slice 1 and τ1 (obtained from T-Z curve
knowing Z1) and C1 the arc length of slice 1 then the side shear force/unit length, T1, act-
ing on slice 1 is given by

Eqn: 12.4.H
The moment per unit shaft length about O, Ms1, is found by multiplying T1 by the dis-
tance to the cross-section centroid, R1, as

Eqn: 12.4.I

The total moment per unit length may be found by summing the moments acting on all
the slices:

Eqn: 12.4.J
where: n = number of slices

12.5 Soil Properties

Following are the important soil properties required as input parameters.

1. Preliminary Soil Parameters

2. Buoyancy
3. Young's Modulus
4. Poisson's Ratio
5. Shear Modulus
6. Angle of Internal Friction
7. Undrained Strength
8. Subgrade Modulus
12.5.1 Preliminary Soil Parameters

Tables of soil parameters that may facilitate preliminary design can be found online at
Soil Parameters Table
If no internet connection is available, the soil parameters tables can be downloaded dir-
ectly by right clicking here and selecting "Save Target As..."
12.5.2 Buoyancy

The buoyant force on the submerged bridge substructure components is automatically

computed if a buoyancy factor greater than 0 is input on the Load page. For models that
make use of the Design Specifications features, then buoyancy forces (e.g., WA, water
load, for AASHTO (LRFD)) are selected from the Load Case Manager dialog. Com-
putation of buoyancy forces includes piles, pile cap, pier columns. Partial buoyancy of
the pile cap is accounted for, where the volume of the pile cap that is submerged will be
used to determine the uniform buoyant force acting on the pile cap. A convenient way
to check buoyancy and self-weight calculations is to include only these loads, run the
program, and then view the "Sum of Total Soil Spring Loads", Z direction in the text out-
put (.out) file.
12.5.3 Young's Modulus

The young’s modulus, of soils, can be obtained from following empirical equations:

For Sand

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.A

where
= 5 for sands with fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure (≈ 2000 psf)

= corrected SPT blow-count (blows/ft)

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.B

where
= subgrade modulus (pcf)

= width of pile (ft)

= poisson’s ratio

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.C
where
= subgrade modulus (pcf)
= depth below ground surface (ft)

For Clay

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.D

where
= range of beta is shown in the table below

= undrained shear strength (psf)

Range of β for Clay

12.5.4 Poisson's Ratio

The following typical values may be used for the Poisson's ratio ν for soils:
ν = 0.2 to 0.45 for sand
= 0.4 to 0.5 for clay
or a spatial average, for the values of ν over depth may be used for soils consisting of
both sand and clay.
12.5.5 Shear Modulus

The shear modulus of soils, G, is a function of soil type, past loading, and geological his-
tory. It is recommended that G be obtained from insitu tests such as dilatometer, CPT,
and/or SPT. Note that the equations presented below constitute relatively broad descrip-
tions of estimating soil shear modulus, drawing upon theory of elasticity and empirical
methods. Engineering judgment should be used in deciding on applicability of the spe-
cific formulations listed below, or one of many available alternative formulations. For
example, for relatively undisturbed soils, Table 6-6 of Kramer (1996) may be of use in
estimating representative values of shear modulus. Additional discussion of shear mod-
ulus estimation for relatively undisturbed soils is included in relation to modeling soil
torsional resistance.

G can be computed from Young's Modulus , E and Poisson's ratio , v, from the following
correlation:

Eqn: 12.5.E

For Sand

(ksf)

Eqn: 12.5.F

where
= maximum shear modulus (ksf)

= corrected SPT blow-count (blows/ft)

When applicable, use values of Young's Modulus, E from Eqn: 12.5.A, Eqn: 12.5.B, and
Eqn: 12.5.C in Eqn: 12.5.E to calculate shear modulus for sand. Note that alternative for-
mulations may be more applicable, depending on soil/site conditions (e.g., empirical for-
mulations listed in Table 6-6 of Kramer, 1996).

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.G

where
= 5 for sand fines
10 for clean normally consolidated sand
15 for clean overconsolidated sand
= atmospheric pressure(≈ 2000 psf)

= corrected SPT blow-count (blows/ft)

= subgrade modulus (pcf)

= width of pile (ft)

= poisson's ratio
= depth below ground surface (ft)

For Clay
When applicable, use values of Young's Modulus, E from Eqn: 12.5.D in Eqn: 12.5.E to cal-
culate shear modulus for clay. Alternative formulations, such as the empirical rela-
tionships listed in Table 6-6 of Kramer, 1996 may also be applicable.

(psf)

Eqn: 12.5.H
where
= range of beta shown in Eqn: 12.5.D

= undrained shear strength (psf)

12.5.6 Angle of Internal Friction

Angle of internal friction, φ', can be computed from SPT N values using the following
empirical correlation:

Eqn: 12.5.I

where
CN = correction for overburden pressure

FHWA 96 uses the correction by Peck, et al. (1974):

Eqn: 12.5.J

valid only for σ’v ≥ 0.25 tsf (24 kPa) (Bowles, 1977)

Normalizing for atmospheric pressure (pa): (1 atm = 101.3 kPa = 1.06 tsf )

Eqn: 12.5.K

Larger values should be used for granular material with 5% or less of fine sand and silt.
For numerical implementation, the average correlation can be expressed as
Eqn: 12.5.L

where
12.5.7 Undrained Strength

Estimates of undrained shear strength, cu can be made using the correlations of qu with
SPT N-values (see the figure below).

Eqn: 12.5.M

where
qu = unconfined compressive strength

Figure: 12.5.a Correlations between SPT N-value and Unconfined Compressive

Strength
12.5.8 Subgrade Modulus

Subgrade modulus, k (F/L3) of cohesionless soil can be estimated from empirical cor-
relations.

Correlations for submerged cohesionless soils located in Florida

For submerged cohesionless soils located in Florida, use SPT-N values to find k [Figure
12.3.8a; FDOT SFH (Appendix B) 2017].

Figure: 12.5.b SPT-N versus k (pci) for submerged cohesionless soils in Florida (FDOT
2017)

Correlations for cohesionless soils (general)

If Figure 12.3.8a is not applicable, use relative density to find k, as listed in the tables
below (FHWA COM624P 2.0 Manual, 1993).

Table: 12.5.A Representative values of k for submerged sand (static and cyclic loading)
(FHWA 1993)
Relative density Loose Medium Dense
Recommended k (pci) 20 60 125
Recommended k
5429 16287 33931
(kN/m3)

Table: 12.5.B Representative values of k for sand above water table (static and cyclic
loading) (FHWA 1993)
Relative density Loose Medium Dense
Recommended k (pci) 25 90 225
Recommended k
6786 24430 61076
(kN/m3)

12.6 Lateral Soil Resistance

The following p-y models are available for modeling lateral soil resistance:

1. Sand (O'Neill)
2. Sand (Reese)
3. Sand (API)
4. Liquefied Sand (Rollins)
5. Hybrid Liquefied Sand (Franke and Rollins)
6. Piedmont Residual
7. C-Phi
8. Clay (O'Neill)
9. Clay (Soft, Matlock)
10. Clay (Stiff, with free water)
11. Clay (Stiff, without free water)
12. Clay (API)
13. Loess
14. Limestone (McVay)
15. Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled
16. Weak Rock (Reese)
17. Strong Rock
18. Massive Rock
19. Linear (Subgrade)
20. Custom P-Y

Considerations for computing p-y reaction forces are documented here.

12.6.1 Sand (O'Neill)

Murchison and O'Neill (1984) recommended a hyperbolic p-y relationship for sand for
both short-term static and cyclic loading conditions:

Eqn: 12.6.A

where
p = horizontal sand resistance per unit length
y = horizontal displacement
η = pile shape factor, which is equal to 1 for circular piles
A = factor depending on the loading type
pu = horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length
k = initial coefficient of subgrade reaction [F/L 3]; refer to 12.5.8 Subgrade Modulus for
typical values for sand above or below water table
z = depth

The parameters A and pu are computed in the following section.

For short-term static loading:

Eqn: 12.6.B

and for cyclic loading:

Eqn: 12.6.C

Horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length (pu) is determined from the lesser
value given by Eqn: 12.6.E, and Eqn: 12.6.F:

Eqn: 12.6.D

Eqn: 12.6.E

Eqn: 12.6.F

where
b = pile diameter
γ = unit weight of sand (use submerged unit weight for sand under water table)
φ = angle of internal friction
K0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Ka = coefficient of Rankine’s active earth pressure
Kp = coefficient of Rankine’s passive earth pressure

Jaky (1964) has presented an empirical relationship to estimate coefficient of earth pres-
sure at rest:

Eqn: 12.6.G

Rankine’s active and passive coefficients of earth pressure are defined using the fol-
lowing equations:
Eqn: 12.6.H

Eqn: 12.6.I

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.6.a p-y curve for sand (O’Neill and Murchinson 1983)
12.6.2 Sand (Reese)

Based on the results obtained from an extensive load testing program on pipe piles in
Texas, Reese et al., (1974) developed a p-y relationship for short-term static and cyclic
loading of sands. To construct this p-y relationship, p and y values should be obtained at
three distinct points (see Figure: 12.6.b). The p-y relationship between these points is lin-
ear except the section between the points k and m, where the relationship is parabolic.

Figure: 12.6.b Procedure to construct the p-y relationship for sand (Reese et al., 1974)

The procedure to construct the sand p-y relationship is summarized below in 9 steps:

1. The following parameters are first obtained:

Eqn: 12.6.J

Eqn: 12.6.K

Eqn: 12.6.L

where
φ = internal friction angle
Ka = Coefficient of active earth pressure

The earth pressure coefficient at rest (K0) is assumed constant:

Eqn: 12.6.M

2. The unfactored horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length of pile (ps) is
defined as the minimum of the following two parameters:

Eqn: 12.6.N
Eqn: 12.6.O

Eqn: 12.6.P

where
ps = unfactored horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length of pile
b = pile diameter
z = depth
γ = sand unit weight

3. The factored horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length of pile (pu) can be
computed using the following equations for short-term static:

Eqn: 12.6.Q

or cyclic loading:

Eqn: 12.6.R

where
pu = factored horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length of pile
As = short-term static loading factor for pu (for values refer to Figure 3.24 of Reese and
Van Impe, 2010)
Ac = cyclic loading factor for pu (for values refer to Figure 3.24 of Reese and Van Impe,
2010)
4. The displacement where the soil resistance per unit length reaches the ultimate value
(yu) is then computed:

Eqn: 12.6.S

5. pm can be computed using the following equation for short-term static loading:

Eqn: 12.6.T

or cyclic loading:

Eqn: 12.6.U

where
pm = horizontal sand resistance per unit length of pile at point m
Bs = short-term static loading factor for pm (for values refer to Figure 3.25 of Reese and
Van Impe, 2010)
Bc = cyclic loading factor for pm (for values refer to Figure 3.25 of Reese and Van Impe,
2010)

6. ym, the amount of displacement at point m can be computed using:

Eqn: 12.6.V
7. The p and y relationship between points m and k is parabolic. The value of horizontal
sand resistance per unit length of pile between the points m and k (pk-m) is obtained
using the following sets of equations:

Eqn: 12.6.W

Eqn: 12.6.X

Eqn: 12.6.Y

Eqn: 12.6.Z

where
y = horizontal displacement
C = factor
n = factor
m = slope between the points m and u

8. pk , defining the horizontal sand resistance per unit length at point k can be obtained
using

Eqn: 12.6.AA
where
y = horizontal displacement
k = initial coefficient of subgrade reaction [F/L 3]; refer to 12.5.8 Subgrade Modulus for
typical values for sand above or below water table

9. yk , defining the displacement at point k can be obtained using

Eqn: 12.6.AB

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.6.c p-y relationship for liquefied sand (Reese et al., 1974)

12.6.3 Sand (API)

Similar to O’Neill and Murchinson (1983), API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) recommended a hyper-
bolic p-y relationship for sand for both short-term static and cyclic loading conditions:

Eqn: 12.6.AC

where
p = horizontal sand resistance per unit length
y = horizontal displacement
A = factor depending on the loading type
pu = horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length
k = initial coefficient of subgrade reaction [F/L 3]; refer to 12.5.8 Subgrade Modulus for
typical values for sand above or below water table
z = depth

The parameters A and pu are computed in the following steps.

For short-term static loading:

Eqn: 12.6.AD

and for cyclic loading:

Eqn: 12.6.AE
Based on API RP 2A (2010), the horizontal ultimate lateral resistance for sand at a given
depth is the smaller of pus (horizontal ultimate lateral resistance at shallow depths) and
pud (horizontal ultimate lateral resistance at deeper depths), which are determined from
Eqn: 12.6.AG, and Eqn: 12.6.AH:

Eqn: 12.6.AF

Eqn: 12.6.AG

Eqn: 12.6.AH

where
b = pile diameter
γ = unit weight of sand (use submerged unit weight for sand under water table)
pus = horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length at shallow depths
pud = horizontal ultimate sand resistance per unit length at deeper depths
C1, C2, C3 = coefficients

C1, C2, and C3 are coefficients and are a function of φ. These coefficients can either be
calculated from Eqn: 12.6.AI - Eqn: 12.6.AK or can be determined from the plots of these
equations presented in API RP 2A (2010) for any specific value of φ.

Eqn: 12.6.AI

Eqn: 12.6.AJ
Eqn: 12.6.AK

Eqn: 12.6.AL

Eqn: 12.6.AM

Eqn: 12.6.AN

where
φ = angle of internal friction
α=φ/2
β = 45 + φ / 2
K0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Ka = coefficient of Rankine’s active earth pressure
Kp = coefficient of Rankine’s passive earth pressure

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.6.d p-y curve for sand (API RP 2GEO 1, 2014)
12.6.4 Liquefied Sand (Rollins)

Following blast-induced liquefaction, Rollins et al. (2005a) and Rollins et al. (2005b) per-
formed a full scale lateral load test on steel pipe piles (0.324 m OD with a 9.5 mm wall
thickness) driven into loose to medium-dense sand. The results of these tests were used
to form an empirical relationship for modeling the lateral resistance of piles and shafts
in liquefied sands. The resulting p-y relationship does not require input values other
than pile/shaft width, b.

Eqn: 12.6.AO

where
p = horizontal soil resistance per unit length in kN/m
pd = p-multiplier to take diameter effects into account
y = horizontal displacement in mm
A = depth dependent coefficient
B = depth dependent coefficient
C = depth dependent coefficient

Depth-dependent coefficients in the p-y relationships are given as:

Eqn: 12.6.AP

Eqn: 12.6.AQ
Eqn: 12.6.AR

Rollins et al. (2005a) compared the p-y curves obtained from their tests to those
obtained from other tests (at the same site) on drilled shafts of different diameters (0.9
m and 0.6 m). Based on these comparisons, a p-multiplier (pd) is defined and used to
take into account shaft diameter.

Eqn: 12.6.AS

where
b = pile/shaft diameter in m

Note that Eqn: 12.6.AS yields unity for pile/shaft diameters equal to 0.3 m (i.e., the ref-
erence case). According to Rollins et al. (2005a), Eqn: 12.6.AS may not be appropriate for
piles/shafts with diameters significantly less than 0.3 or greater than 1.0 m. As a general
practice, when the actual pile/shaft diameter is somewhat less than 0.3 m, pd can be
obtained by dividing the actual pile/shaft diameter, b, by 0.3 m. Also, for diameters, b,
greater than 2.6 m, it is recommended to limit pd, to 9.24.

Rollins et al. (2005a) tests were performed under the following conditions:
• Relative density of soil profile is 45%-55%,
• The water table is located near or at the ground surface,
• The maximum p (pu ) (for the tested piles with OD=0.324 m) is 15 kN/m,
• The maximum pile lateral deflection is 150 mm, and
• The p-y curves were obtained for depths less than 6 m.

Engineering judgment is warranted when using the proposed p-y relationship in con-
ditions different than those mentioned above.

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below. The initial curve portions are con-
cave up (the slope of the curve increases as deflection increases). Apparently, the con-
cave up curve portion relates to load-induced dilation and a decrease in excess pore
pressure locally around the pile/shaft.
Figure: 12.6.e p-y curve for liquefied sand (Rollins et al., 2005a)
12.6.5 Hybrid Liquefied Sand

The simplified hybrid p-y relationship for liquefied sand was developed by Franke and
Rollins (2013). This p-y relationship is applicable to a wide range of soil types, relative
densities, pile/shaft diameters, and loading conditions. The hybrid liquefied sand p-y
curve is developed as the lesser (i.e., lower-bound envelope) of the Rollins et al. (2005a)
p-y curve (Section 12.6.4 Liquefied Sand (Rollins)) and the Wang and Reese (1998) p-y
curve. The procedure to construct the hybrid liquefied sand p-y relationship is sum-
marized below.
Rollins et al. (2005a) p-y curve for liquefied sand uses the following empirical equation:

Eqn: 12.6.AT

where
pliq = horizontal liquefied soil resistance per unit length per Rollins et al. (2005a)
pd = p-multiplier to take diameter effects into account
y = horizontal displacement in mm
A = depth dependent coefficient
B = depth dependent coefficient
C = depth dependent coefficient

The depth coefficient and p-multiplier terms in the p-y equation are given as:

Eqn: 12.6.AU

Eqn: 12.6.AV
Eqn: 12.6.AW

Eqn: 12.6.AX

where
b = pile/shaft diameter in m

Note that Eqn: 12.6.AX yields unity for pile/shaft diameters equal to 0.3 m. According to
Rollins et al. (2005a), Eqn: 12.6.AX may not be appropriate for piles/shafts with dia-
meters significantly less than 0.3 or greater than 1.0 m. As a general practice, when the
actual pile/shaft diameter is somewhat less than 0.3 m, pd can be obtained by dividing
the actual pile/shaft diameter, b, by 0.3 m. Also, for diameters, b, greater than 2.6 m, it is
recommended to limit pd, to 9.24.

Knowing that the residual shear strength of the liquefied soil should limit the soil res-
istance at larger strains, Wang and Reese (1998) developed a different method to con-
struct p-y relationships for pile foundations in liquefied soil. They suggested using the
p-y relationships developed by Matlock (1970) for soft clay in conjunction with the pre-
dicted residual shear strength of the liquefied soil. As discussed in the Section 12.6.9
Clay (Soft, Matlock), p and pu values for Matlock (1970) p-y curve for soft clay can be
obtained by using the following relationships:

for
Eqn: 12.6.AY

for
Eqn: 12.6.AZ

Eqn: 12.6.BA

where
pclay = horizontal soft clay resistance per unit length per Matlock (1970)
pu-clay = ultimate soil resistance per unit length of pile
y = horizontal displacement
y50 = pile displacement at one-half of the ultimate soil resistance
b = shaft/pile diameter
ε50 = strain corresponding to one-half the maximum principal stress difference
γ' = average effective unit weight of the soil
c = shear strength of the soil at depth z
z = depth of interest from the ground surface
J = model factor typically equal to 0.5 for soft soils

According to Franke and Rollins (2013), the horizontal liquefied sand resistance per unit
length can be obtained by:

Eqn: 12.6.BB

Franke and Rollins (2013) provide the following recommendations when using the sim-
plified hybrid p-y model for liquefied sand:
• The 33rd percentile residual strengths from Seed and Harder (1990) be used in con-
junction with Eqn: 12.6.AZ.
• ɛ50 be modified according to Eqn: 12.6.BC to account for the stiffer load resistance
behavior of denser liquefiable soils.

Eqn: 12.6.BC
where
(N1)60-cs = corrected standard penetration test (SPT) blow counts
• Until additional case histories can justify higher values, residual strength of liquefied
soils with (N1)60-cs<5 blows/ft (Dr < 30%) should be neglected (i.e., c=0).

The procedure to construct the hybrid p-y model for liquefied sand according to Franke
and Rollins (2013) is illustrated in Figure: 12.6.f. The presented p-y curve is obtained for
a pile with 0.3 m diameter at 4 m depth in a liquefied soil with γ'=10 kN/m3. As it can
be seen, the first portion of the curve is controlled by the Rollins et al. (2005a) p-y curve
for liquefied sand, the second portion is controlled by Matlock (1970) p-y curve for soft
clay (with residual strength from Seed and Harder (1990), and the last portion is con-
trolled again by the Rollins et al. (2005a) p-y curve for liquefied sand.

Figure: 12.6.f Procedure to construct the hybrid p-y model for liquefied sand (Franke
and Rollins, 2013)
The general shape of the p-y curve is presented below.

Figure: 12.6.g Hybrid p-y model for liquefied sand (Franke and Rollins, 2013)
12.6.6 Piedmont Residual

Piedmont residual soils serve as the bearing foundation for several major cities in the
United States located between the Atlantic Coastal Plain on the east and the Appalachian
Ridge on the west (e.g. extending from Pennsylvania to Alabama). The Piedmont resid-
ual soil consists of in-place weathered rock underlain by the parent metamorphic rock,
which is mainly composed of gneisses and schists with possible intrusive deposits of
granite and mafic rocks. The thickness and the weathering depth and of the residual soil
layer can be significantly variable (Simpson and Brown, 2003; Mayne et al., 2000).

Simpson and Brown (2003) conducted 5 full-scale lateral load tests on drilled shafts in
Piedmont residual soil at a site located in Lee County, Alabama. The test data were used
to obtain the p-y relationship for the Piedmont residual soil present at this site. To con-
struct the proposed p-y relationship, in addition to the pile/shaft diameter, b, subsurface
site investigate test results are required to determine the initial coefficient of subgrade
reactions, ki. The proposed p-y relationship is divided into three portions: initial linear
resistance, transition, and ultimate resistance.

for
Eqn: 12.6.BD

for
Eqn: 12.6.BE

for
Eqn: 12.6.BF

where
p = horizontal soil resistance per unit length
ki = the coefficient of initial subgrade reaction
y = horizontal displacement
b = shaft/pile diameter
pu = horizontal ultimate soil resistance per unit length
λ = curve fitting constant and can be taken as 0.216

Simpson and Brown (2003) obtained the initial coefficient of subgrade modulus, ki,
using four different in situ tests:
• Standard penetration test (SPT) blow count;
• Cone penetration test (CPT) tip resistance;
• Dilatometer test (DMT); and,
• Menard Pressuremeter test (PMT).

The initial coefficient of subgrade modulus is calculated using input values, Vtest, from
any of the four soil test types listed above and an input factor, Ftest, dictated by the test
type:

Eqn: 12.6.BG

Input factors, Ftest, for each soil test type are:

• Standard penetration test blow count: 22 in blows/30cm;
• Cone penetration test tip resistance: 0.118 when in kPa;
• Dilatometer modulus: 0.076 when in kPa; and,
• Menard Pressuremeter modulus: 0.235 when in kPa.

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below. Shown in Figure: 12.6.h is also the
initial modulus of subgrade reaction (Ki, initial slope), which is defined as Ki=kib.
Figure: 12.6.h p-y curve for Piedmont Residual soils (Simpson and Brown, 2003)
12.6.7 C-Phi

The “c-φ” p-y relationship is implemented by drawing upon on the work of Ismael
(1990) on cemented soils having both components of shear strength, c (due to cement-
ation) and φ. Utilizing these “c-φ” p-y relationships is desirable in cases where the soil
mobilizes its shear strength using both internal friction and cohesion. Such cases include
predicting the lateral load behavior of piles when they are used for stabilizing slopes or
when they are founded in unsaturated cohesive soils.

The relationship implemented in FB-MultiPier is divided into four regions: initial slope;
transition; softening slope; and, ultimate resistance. As such, the p and y values for three
distinct points should be computed.

Figure: 12.6.i Procedure to construct the p-y relationship for c-φ soil (Ismael, 1990)
The p-y curve is constructed by first computing ultimate resistance, pu. As precursors,
the following terms are calculated:

Eqn: 12.6.BH

Eqn: 12.6.BI

Eqn: 12.6.BJ

Eqn: 12.6.BK

where
b = Pile/shaft diameter
φ = angle of internal friction
K0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
Ka = coefficient of Rankine’s active earth pressure

Note that once pu has been reached, the p-y curve ordinate is held constant, and pu is
taken as the minimum value of pu + pu_sand1b and pu_sand2:

Eqn: 12.6.BL

Eqn: 12.6.BM
Eqn: 12.6.BN

The ultimate resistance, pu, is then:

Eqn: 12.6.BO

where
pu = horizontal ultimate soil resistance per unit length of pile
σ'v = effective vertical stress
z = depth
A = constant associated with the p-y curve of Reese et al. (1974). It is different for short-
term static loading and cyclic loading conditions (for values refer to Figure 3.16 of Reese
and Van Impe, 2010)

The displacement at which pu is reached is taken as:

Eqn: 12.6.BP

As the next major step in p-y curve formation for C-phi soils, peak resistance (pm) is
computed, which is a function of both the cohesive and cohesionless components of ulti-
mate resistance.

Eqn: 12.6.BQ

where
c = Undrained shear strength
z = depth
b = pile diameter
J = constant; it can be taken as 0.5

The peak resistance, pm, is then:

Eqn: 12.6.BR

The displacement at which peak resistance, pm, is reached is taken as:

Eqn: 12.6.BS
where the resistance values between peak (pm) and ultimate (pu) values follow a linear
trend of slope mm_u.

The transition portion of the curve, which lies between the initial curve portion and peak
resistance, is calculated next. In particular, a curve fitting scheme is utilized, where the
curve portion exponent, ffit, is:

Eqn: 12.6.BT

and a term referred to as C is computed as:

Eqn: 12.6.BU

The displacement, yk , at which the p-y curve enters the transition region is then:

Eqn: 12.6.BV
where
k = initial coefficient of subgrade reaction [F/L 3]; refer to section 12.5.8 Subgrade Mod-
ulus for typical values

Having determined displacement and resistance values at the extents of the p-y curve
segments, the p-y curve can be expressed as:

for
Eqn: 12.6.BW

for
Eqn: 12.6.BX

for
Eqn: 12.6.BY

for
Eqn: 12.6.BZ

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.6.j p-y curve for c-φ soil (Ismael, 1990)
12.6.8 Clay (O'Neill)

O’Neill and Gazioglu (1984), O’Neill and Dunnavant (1984), and Dunnavant and O’Neill
(1985) recommended a p-y relationship for clay for both short-term static and cyclic
loading conditions. Shown in the figures below are both the short-term static and cyclic
p-y relationships. The engineer must supply the undrained strength, c, the strains at
50% failure (ε50) and 100% of failure (ε100) from an unconfined compression test on
clay samples.

Figure: 12.6.k p-y curve for clay for short-term static loading condition (O’Neill and
Dunnavant, 1984)
Figure: 12.6.l p-y curve for clay for cyclic loading condition (O’Neill and Dunnavant,
1984)
12.6.9 Clay (Soft, Matlock)

Matlock (1970) performed lateral load tests in Texas on fully instrumented pipe piles,
324 mm (12.75 in) diameter, driven into soft clay with undrained shear strength less
than 38 kPa (800 psf). Two types of short-term static and cyclic lateral load tests were
conducted.

I. Short-term static loading condition

Matlock (1970) recommended the following p-y relationship for short-term static load-
ing condition:

Eqn: 12.6.CA

where
p = horizontal soft clay resistance per unit length
pu = horizontal ultimate soft clay resistance per unit length of pile
y = horizontal displacement in mm
y50 = displacement at one-half of the ultimate soft clay resistance

puis the lesser of the Eqn: 12.6.CC and Eqn: 12.6.CD:

Eqn: 12.6.CB

Eqn: 12.6.CC
Eqn: 12.6.CD

where
γ’ = average submerged unit weight from ground surface to the desired depth
c = shear strength
z = depth
b = pile diameter
J = constant; based on experiments, Matlock (1970) recommended J=0.5 for soft clay
and J=0.25 for medium clay

y50can be obtained from the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CE

where
ε50 = strain at one-half the maximum difference in principal stresses of the specimen of
clay; refer to Reese and Van Impe (2010) for typical values

The general shape of the p-y curve for short-term static loading condition is presented
below.
 Figure: 12.6.m p-y curve for soft clay under short-term static loading condition (Mat-
lock, 1970)

II. Cyclic loading condition

For cyclic loading conditions, the maximum horizontal soft clay resistance per unit
length (p) is limited to 0.72pu.
The transition depth, can be obtained by simultaneously solving Eqn: 12.6.CC and Eqn:
12.6.CD:

Eqn: 12.6.CF

For depths greater than or equal to zr, then p is equal to 0.72pu for y>3y50.
For depths less than zr, the value of p reduces from 0.72pu at y=3y50 to the value given
by Eqn: 12.6.CG at y=15y50
Eqn: 12.6.CG
12.6.10 Clay (Stiff, with free water)

Reese et al. (1975) performed lateral load tests on fully instrumented pipe piles having a
diameter of 641 mm (25.2 in) at the upper sections and 610 mm (24 in) at the lower sec-
tions. The site was located in Manor, Texas and had strongly overconsolidated clay with
undrained shear strength ranging from 25 kPa (522 psf) at the ground surface to 1100
kPa (22974 psf) at 9.14 m depth. Two types of short-term static and cyclic lateral load
tests were conducted. To construct the Reese et al. (1975) p-y relationship, the p and y
values should be obtained at 4 distinct points: k, m, s, and u (see Figure: 12.6.n).

I. Short-term static loading condition

The following procedure is recommended to construct the p-y relationship for short-
term static loading condition:

Figure: 12.6.n Procedure to construct the p-y relationship for stiff clay (Reese et al..
1975)
1. In the first step, the ultimate stiff clay resistance per unit length of pile (pu) is com-
puted which is the lesser of the Eqn: 12.6.CI and Eqn: 12.6.CJ:

Eqn: 12.6.CH

Eqn: 12.6.CI

Eqn: 12.6.CJ

where
pu = horizontal ultimate stiff clay resistance per unit length of pile
γ’ = submerged unit weight of stiff clay
ca = average undrained shear strength of stiff clay over the depth z
b = pile diameter
z = depth
cu = undrained shear strength of stiff clay

2. The initial portion of the p-y relationship from the origin to point k is linear. The p-y
relationship can be obtained using:

Eqn: 12.6.CK

where
p = horizontal stiff clay resistance per unit length
k = initial coefficient of subgrade reaction [F/L 3]; refer to section 12.5.8 Subgrade Mod-
ulus for typical values
y = horizontal displacement
3. The first linear portion transits to a parabolic portion (between points k and m) using
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CL

where
y50 = displacement at one-half of the ultimate stiff clay resistance

y50 can be obtained using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CM

where
ε50 = strain at one-half the maximum difference in principal stresses of the specimen of
clay; refer to Reese and Van Impe (2010) for typical values

4. Eqn: 12.6.CI governs the p-y relationship in displacement range from the point k (inter-
section of Eqn: 12.6.CK to Eqn: 12.6.CL) to the displacement at point m given in Eqn:
12.6.CN:

Eqn: 12.6.CN

where
As = constant for short-term static loading conditions (for values refer to Figure 3.16 of
Reese and Van Impe, 2010)
As can be also computed using the following relationship:
Eqn: 12.6.CO

5. The second parabolic portion of the p-y relationship is computed using the following
equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CP

6. Eqn: 12.4.10.9 governs the p-y relationship in displacements from point m to the dis-
placement of point s given in Eqn: 12.6.CQ:

Eqn: 12.6.CQ

7. The second linear portion of the p-y relationship from point s to u is computed using
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CR

8. Eqn: 12.4.10.11 governs the p-y relationship in displacements from point s to the dis-
placement given in Eqn: 12.6.CS (point u):

Eqn: 12.6.CS

9. The final linear portion of the p-y relationship at point u and after it is computed
using the following equation:
Eqn: 12.6.CT

The general shape of the p-y curve for short-term static loading condition is presented
below.

Figure: 12.6.o p-y curve for stiff clay under short-term static loading condition (Reese
et al.. 1975)

II. Cyclic loading condition

To construct the p-y relationship for cyclic loading conditions, steps 1 and 2 are same as
those for short-term static loading conditions. Moreover, compared to the static loading
conditions, where 4 distinct points are needed, only 3 points (k, s, and u) are required to
construct the p-y relationship for cyclic loading conditions. That is, the initial linear por-
tion is extended, eliminating the first parabolic portion (between points k and m in Fig-
ure: 12.6.n) that existed in the p-y relationship for short-term static loading conditions.
The additional steps to be followed are explained in the section below:
3. The first linear portion transits to a parabolic portion (between points k and s) using
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CU

yp can be computed using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CV

where
Ac = constant for cyclic loading conditions (for values refer to Figure 3.16 of Reese and
Van Impe, 2010)

4. Eqn: 12.6.CU governs the p-y relationship in displacement range from the point k
(intersection of Eqn: 12.6.CK to Eqn: 12.6.CU) to the displacement at point s given in Eqn:
12.6.CW:

Eqn: 12.6.CW

5. The second linear portion of the p-y relationship is computed using the following
equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CX

6. Eqn: 12.6.CX governs the p-y relationship in displacements from point s to the dis-
placement of point u given in Eqn: 12.6.CY:
Eqn: 12.6.CY

7. The final linear portion of the p-y relationship at point u and after it is computed
using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.CZ
12.6.11 Clay (Stiff, without free water)

Welch and Reese (1972); Reese and Welch (1975) performed lateral load tests in Texas
on a fully instrumented drilled shaft, 915 mm (36 in) in diameter, and driven into stiff
clay with undrained shear strength of approximately 105 kPa (2200 psf) in the upper 6
m (19.7 ft) of the site. Two types of short-term static and cyclic lateral load tests were
conducted.

I. Short-term static loading condition

Welch and Reese (1972) recommended the following p-y relationship for short-term
static loading condition:

Eqn: 12.6.DA

where
p = horizontal soft clay resistance per unit length
pu = horizontal ultimate soft clay resistance per unit length of pile
y = horizontal displacement in mm
y50 = displacement at one-half of the ultimate soft clay resistance

pu is the lesser of the Eqn: 12.6.DC and Eqn: 12.6.DD:

Eqn: 12.6.DB

Eqn: 12.6.DC
Eqn: 12.6.DD

where
γ = unit weight
ca = average undrained shear strength from ground surface to the desired depth
c = shear strength
z = depth
b = pile diameter
J = factor; can be taken as 0.5 as used by Reese and Welch (1975)

y50 can be obtained from the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.DE

where
ε50 = strain at one-half the maximum difference in principal stresses of the specimen of
clay; refer to Reese and Van Impe (2010) for typical values

p should be taken as pu for displacements equal to or greater than y=16y50:

Eqn: 12.6.DF

The general shape of the p-y curve for short-term static loading condition is presented
below.
Figure: 12.6.p p-y curve for stiff clay with no free water under short-term static loading
condition (Welch and Reese, 1972)

II. Cyclic loading condition

For cyclic loading conditions, the short-term static p-y relationship should be first con-
structed for the desired depth. The number of times (N) that the design lateral load will
be applied to the pile is then determined.
The parameter C, describing the effects of repeated loading the pile displacement then
should be determined from laboratory tests or the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.DG
For each value of p corresponding to the value of p/pu (in Eqn: 12.6.DG), the new (shif-
ted) ycyclic value should be computed from Eqn: 12.6.DH. This will construct the p-y rela-
tionship for the cyclic loading condition:

Eqn: 12.6.DH
12.6.12 Clay (API)

API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) recommended a p-y relationship for soft clay, for both short-
term static and cyclic loading conditions. API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) also provided guidance
on how to model the lateral resistance of piles in clay.

I. Short-term static loading condition

For short-term (static) loading conditions, as the depth (z) increases from 0 to zr, pu
increases from 3c to 9c according to:

Eqn: 12.6.DI

For depths greater than zr, pu can be obtained from the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.DJ

where
pu = horizontal ultimate clay resistance (F/L 2)

γ’ = submerged unit weight

c = undrained shear strength for undisturbed clay soil samples
z = depth
zr= transition depth from the soil surface to bottom of reduced resistance zone
b = pile diameter
J = constant with values ranging from 0.25 to 0.5; API recommends using 0.5 for clays
encountered in the Gulf of Mexico.

The transition depth (zr), can be obtained by simultaneously solving Eqn: 12.6.DI and
Eqn: 12.6.DJ:
Eqn: 12.6.DK

The p-y relationship is presented in normalized form in Table: 12.6.A

p/pu y/y50
 0.00 0.00
0.50  1.00
0.72  3.00
1.00  8.00
1.00  ∞
Table: 12.6.A Soft clay normalized p-y relationship for short-term static loading con-
dition

where
p = horizontal soft clay resistance (F/L 2)
y = horizontal displacement in mm
y50= displacement at one-half of the ultimate soft clay resistance

y50can be obtained from the following equation:

Eqn: 12.6.DL

where
ε50 = strain at one-half the maximum difference in principal stresses of the specimen of
clay; refer to Reese and Van Impe (2010) for typical values

The general shape of the API soft clay p-y relationship for short-term static loading con-
dition is presented below.
 Figure: 12.6.q p-y relationship for API clay under short-term static loading condition
(API RP 2GEO 1, 2014)

For stiff clays (c>96 kPa, 14 psi), the horizontal ultimate lateral resistance under short-
term static loading conditions would vary between 8c and 12c, similar to soft clays.

II. Cyclic loading condition

For cyclic loading conditions, where equilibrium has been reached, the p-y curves can be
generated from Table: 12.6.B.

z>zr z<zr
p/pu y/y50 p/pu y/y50
0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0
0.50 1.00 0.50 1.0
0.72 3.0 0.72 3.0
0.72 ∞ 0.72z/zr 15.0
0.72z/zr ∞
Table: 12.6.B Soft clay normalized p-y relationship for cyclic loading condition

For stiff clays (c>96 kPa, 14 psi), the horizontal ultimate lateral resistance under cyclic
loading condition would be considerably reduced due to rapid deterioration and should
be taken into account in cyclic design.
12.6.13 Loess

Loess is an aeolian sediment formed by the accumulation of windblown silt. Although

primarily silty, loess may have up to 45% clay, resulting in a low plasticity clay behavior
(Yates et al., 2018). Moreover, equal parts of sand and silt are loosely cemented by cal-
cium carbonate (Donahue et al., 1977).

Johnson, et al. (2006) proposed empirical relationships for modeling the lateral res-
istance of piles/shafts in loess. The p-y relationship is of hyperbolic form and is capable
of modeling the lateral resistance degradation under cyclic loading.

First, the ultimate lateral resistance, pu, is calculated using the following parameters and
equations:

Eqn: 12.6.DM

where
qc = CPT cone tip resistance
N = Number of cycles for cyclic loading (=1 for static; =10 for cyclic)
b = pile/shaft diameter
pu = horizontal ultimate soil resistance per unit length

CPT cone tip resistance values are scaled by 0.5 at the ground surface and 1.0 at depths
of 2b or greater (with linear variation of the scale factor between 0b and 2b).
Next, the initial modulus (modulus of subgrade reaction), Ki, is calculated based on a ref-
erence displacement (yref) of 0.0029718 m (0.117 in).

Eqn: 12.6.DN
A mapping to hyperbolic displacements, yh, is also determined:

Eqn: 12.6.DO

The mapped displacement, yh, and initial modulus, Ki, allow for the secant modulus, Ks,
to be determined anywhere along the p-y curve domain:

Eqn: 12.6.DP

The p-y curve is then computed as:

Eqn: 12.6.DQ

where
p = horizontal soil resistance per unit length
y = horizontal displacement

The general shape of the p-y curve for Loess is shown below.
Figure: 12.6.r p-y curve for Loess (Johnson et al., 2006)
12.6.14 Limestone (McVay) for Axial and Lateral Coupling

McVay and Niraula (2004) presented a p-y relationship for Florida limestone. The pro-
posed empirical p-y relationship is obtained through conducting 12 lateral load tests in
a geotechnical centrifuge. In these tests, large-diameter (6 and 9 ft) fully instrumented
drilled shafts were laterally loaded in synthetic limestone (simulating the properties of
Florida limestone) with unconfined compressive strengths of 10 tsf (960 kPa) and 20 tsf
(1900 kPa). McVay and Niraula (2004) recommended that full-scale field tests be
employed to further validate the proposed relationship. It should be noted that joints,
cracks, and secondary structures in the rock may affect the p-y behavior relative to what
is presented below.

The p-y relationship is piecewise linear with initial slope (Eqn: 12.6.DR) and secondary
slope (Eqn: 12.6.DS) up to the ultimate resistance (Eqn: 12.6.DT).

for
Eqn: 12.6.DR

for
Eqn: 12.6.DS

for
Eqn: 12.6.DT

where
p = horizontal rock resistance per unit length
qu = unconfined compressive strength
y = horizontal displacement
b = shaft diameter
pu = horizontal ultimate rock resistance per unit length

Note that the p-y relationships are presented for the English system, where, units are
kips for force and feet for length.

Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for horizontal resistance
of the “Limestone (McVay)” lateral soil model.

Figure: 12.6.s p-y relationship for limestone (McVay and Niraula, 2004)

12.6.15 Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled

When a drilled shaft in rock/soil is laterally loaded, the response at any elevation along
the shaft length is a function of the lateral resistance of the rock/soil and the side shear
(skin friction) that is developed at the shaft-rock interface. The commonly used p-y rela-
tionships do not account for the contribution of the side shear. However, as the dia-
meter of the shaft becomes larger together with the high shear stress that is developed
at the shaft-rock interface, this effect can become significant. The inclusion of the side
shear contribution to the lateral response mechanism of drilled shaft in rock/soil can be
reflected in p-y relationships. Figure: 12.6.t shows a free body diagram of an element of
the shaft of length dz. Based on force equilibrium, the lateral resistance of the rock/soil
per shaft unit length can be obtained either by neglecting or including the contribution
of the side shear forces. If the contribution of side shear force (T) is included, then there
is a moment Ms due to the side shear:

Eqn: 12.6.DU

This will result in a lateral resistance reduction component, dp:

Eqn: 12.6.DV
 Figure: 12.6.t Forces acting on a shaft element of length dz

More information on the axial and lateral resistance coupling can be found in Section
12.4 Soil Resistance Due to Shaft Rotation or by referring to McVay and Niraula (2004)
and Taghavi et al. (2018).
The p-y relationship presented in this section is derived from McVay et al. (2004) and
inherently considers (through Eqn: 12.6.DU - Eqn: 12.6.DV) the coupling between lateral
and axial resistances.

Note: The "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" feature found on the Analysis
Settings page should NOT be made use of when this lateral soil model is applied.

The p-y relationship is bilinear with initial slope (Eqn: 12.6.DW) and secondary slope
(Eqn: 12.6.DX) up to the ultimate resistance (Eqn: 12.6.DY).

for
Eqn: 12.6.DW

for
Eqn: 12.6.DX
 for
Eqn: 12.6.DY

where
p = horizontal rock resistance per unit length
qu = unconfined compressive strength
y = horizontal displacement
b = shaft diameter
pu = horizontal ultimate rock resistance per unit length

Note that the p-y curves are presented for the English system, where, units are kips for
force and feet for length.

Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for horizontal resistance
of the “Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled” lateral soil model.
 Figure: 12.6.u p-y relationship for limestone-uncoupled (McVay and Niraula, 2004)

Note: The "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil Resistance" feature found on the Analysis
Settings page is NOT recommended for use with this p-y model.
12.6.16 Weak Rock (Reese)

Reese (1997) proposed empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of bored
piles (drilled shafts) in rock layers with unconfined compressive strengths ranging from
10440 psf (500 kPa) to 104400 psf (5000 kPa). He termed the method of obtaining the
equations “interim” principally due to the meager amount of data from lateral load tests
to validate the equations. The behavior of the shaft in rock can be dictated by the sec-
ondary structure of the rock which is related to the spacing and thickness of soil-filled
cracks and joints, fractures, and any other weakness zones (Reese and van Impe 2011).
Therefore, site specific subsurface investigation is warranted to characterize rock prop-
erties pertinent to constructing the p-y relationship (Reese 1997).

The p-y relationship is divided into three portions: initial slope (Eqn: 12.6.DZ), transition
(Eqn: 12.6.EA), and ultimate resistance (Eqn: 12.6.EB).

for
Eqn: 12.6.DZ

for ,
Eqn: 12.6.EA

, otherwise.
Eqn: 12.6.EB

where
p = horizontal rock resistance per unit length
Ki = initial slope (initial modulus of subgrade reaction)
y = horizontal displacement
ya = horizontal displacement at end of linear portion
pu = horizontal ultimate rock resistance per unit length
ym = krmb
krm = constant with values ranging from 0.0005 (more conservative) to 0.00005, that is
used to establish the overall stiffness of the p-y relationship.
b = shaft diameter

The initial slope (modulus of subgrade reaction) is calculated as:

Eqn: 12.6.EC

where
Ei = initial rock mass modulus
ki = dimensionless constant

for
Eqn: 12.6.ED

for
Eqn: 12.6.EE

Additionally, the horizontal displacement at end of linear portion (ya) is expressed as:

Eqn: 12.6.EF

In turn, the ultimate resistance (pu) is expressed as:

 for
Eqn: 12.6.EG

for
Eqn: 12.6.EH

where
αr = strength reduction factor
qu = unconfined compressive strength
z = depth below rock surface

The strength reduction factor varies linearly from 1.0 for rock quality designation (RQD)
values of 0 to 0.333 for RQD values of 100%. Collectively, the above expressions lead to
the following curve for horizontal resistance of weak rock.
Figure: 12.6.v p-y relationship for weak rock (Reese, 1997)
12.6.17 Strong Rock

Empirical relationships for modeling lateral resistance of strong rock (with uniaxial
strengths equal to or greater than 144100 psf, 6900 kPa) are given in NCHRP (2006).
The proposed p-y relationship was originally obtained by conducting a limited number
of full-scale lateral load tests on instrumented shafts in vuggy limestone. It should be
noted that joints, cracks, and secondary structure in the rock may alter the p-y behavior
to different than that presented below.

The p-y relationship is bilinear with initial slope (Eqn: 12.6.EI) and secondary slope (Eqn:
12.6.EJ) up to the ultimate resistance (Eqn: 12.6.EK). If the ultimate resistance (pu) is
reached, then brittle fracture is assumed to occur. It is assumed that cyclic loading does
not affect this p-y relationship.

for
Eqn: 12.6.EI

for
Eqn: 12.6.EJ

for
Eqn: 12.6.EK

where
p = horizontal rock resistance per unit length
Su = one half of the unconfined compressive strength
y = horizontal displacement
b = shaft diameter
pu = horizontal ultimate rock resistance per unit length
Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for horizontal resistance
of strong rock.

Figure: 12.6.w p-y relationship for strong rock (NCHRP, 2006)

12.6.18 Massive Rock

Liang et al. (2009) used both theoretical derivations and numerical parametric analysis
results to come up with a p-y relationship for modeling lateral resistance of drilled
shafts in rock mass (massive rock). The applicability of the proposed p-y relationship
was validated against six full-scale lateral load tests on instrumented drilled shafts,
where acceptable agreement was observed between computed and measured shaft
responses.

The p-y curve is constructed by first computing initial tangent stiffness (modulus of sub-
grade reaction), Ki:

Eqn: 12.6.EL

where
b = shaft diameter
bref = 0.3048 m (12 in)
Eshaft = shaft elastic modulus
Ishaft = shaft moment of inertia
Em = rock mass modulus
v = Poisson’s ratio associated with the rock mass

Eqn: 12.6.EM

where
Ei = rock intact modulus
GSI = geological strength index

The remaining major thrust is to compute the ultimate lateral resistance, pu, which is the
minimum of the ultimate resistance at the current depth, pu_depth, and the ultimate res-
istance at the centroid of the failure wedge within the layer, pu_wedge.
Using Hoek and Brown (1980) strength criterion, the term σ'1 is computed next:

Eqn: 12.6.EN

where
σ'1 = major principal stress at failure
σ'3 = minor principal stress at failure
qu= unconfined compressive strength
mb = material constant
s = material constant
a = material constant

Material constants can be computed using recommendations of Marinos and Hoek

(2000). Assuming a blast damage factor of 0, mb is computed as:

Eqn: 12.6.EO

Eqn: 12.6.EP

Eqn: 12.6.EQ

The supporting terms σ’n, τ, ϕ’, c, Ka, pa, and τmax are next calculated at the current
depth, as precursors for calculation of the ultimate resistance at depth, pu_depth:
Eqn: 12.6.ER

Eqn: 12.6.ES

Eqn: 12.6.ET

Eqn: 12.6.EU

Eqn: 12.6.EV

Eqn: 12.6.EW

τmax :

Eqn: 12.6.EX

Eqn: 12.6.EY

where
σ’n = effective normal stress
τ = shear stress
ϕ’ = effective internal friction angle for Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria of the rock mass
(Hoek, 1990)
c’ = effective cohesion for Mohr-Coulomb failure criteria of the rock mass (Hoek, 1990)
Ka = coefficient of active earth pressure
pa = horizontal active learth pressure
τmax = maximum shear stress of shaft-rock interface, used to limit shear stress. It is
estimated using the correlation proposed by Hoek, 1990, where, the value of qu (hence,
τmax) is in units of MPa.
σ'v = effective overburden pressure (recommended to be taken as equal to σ'3)
pl = compressive strength (limiting normal pressure) of the rock mass

The ultimate resistance at depth, pu_depth, is then:

Eqn: 12.6.EZ

As the next major step in computing the p-y curve, the ultimate resistance at the
centroid of the failure wedge within the layer, pu_wedge is determined. First, the terms ϕn,
τ, ϕ, c, Ka, and pa are recomputed at a depth equal to the centroid of the failure wedge in
the layer. In addition, the following terms are also computed at a depth equal to the
centroid of the wedge:

Eqn: 12.6.FA

Eqn: 12.6.FB

Eqn: 12.6.FC
Eqn: 12.6.FD

where
σ'v_top = effective vertical stress at the top of the layer
γeff = effective (submerged) unit weight of rock mass
z0 = Depth of tensile crack
K0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest

The expression for the ultimate lateral resistance (pu_wedge) at the wedge centroid is com-
prised of five components (c1 through c5):

Eqn: 12.6.FE

Eqn: 12.6.FF

Eqn: 12.6.FG

Eqn: 12.6.FH

Eqn: 12.6.FI

Having determined equation components c1 through c5), the ultimate resistance at the
wedge centroid, pu_wedge, is given as:
Eqn: 12.6.FJ

The ultimate lateral resistance, pu, is then taken as the minimum of pu_depth and pu_
wedge.

Finally, the p-y relationship (a hyperbolic p-y criterion) for massive rock is computed as:

Eqn: 12.6.FK

where
p = horizontal rock resistance per unit length
Ki = initial slope (initial modulus of subgrade reaction)
y = horizontal displacement
pu = horizontal ultimate rock resistance per unit length

The general shape of the p-y curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.6.x p-y curve for massive rock (Liang et al., 2009)
12.6.19 Linear (Subgrade)

For applications where a linear treatment of the p-y relationship is appropriate, the lin-
ear model may be utilized. The constant slope (modulus of subgrade reaction) of this
relationship is obtained by multiplying the coefficient of subgrade reaction (k) by the
pile/shaft diameter (b).

Eqn: 12.6.FL

where
p = horizontal soil/rock resistance per unit length
y = horizontal displacement
b = pile/shaft diameter
k = coefficient of subgrade reaction

Figure: 12.6.y Linear p-y relationship

12.6.20 Custom P-Y

A "Custom p-y" relationship can be defined and applied to pile/shaft nodes that fall
within a given soil/rock layer. Custom p-y curves are specified by a set of (up to) ten
pairs of p and y values, as well as a user-defined puvalue. The custom relationship can
be defined for one or more layers of interest from within the Soils page. For more
information, see "Additional Soil Properties". As stated above, the following parameters
are relevant in defining custom p-y curves:
p = horizontal soil/rock resistance per unit length of pile/shaft
y = pile/shaft lateral displacement
pu = horizontal ultimate soil/rock resistance per unit length of pile/shaft

Note: Only one custom p-y relationship can be assigned to a given layer. If linearly
varying soil resistance (with depth) is desired for a given depth range, then linear vari-
ation of properties in that region may possibly be mimicked by subdividing the depth
range into several layers and assigning a unique custom p-y curve to each subdivided
layer.

Note: If no value is supplied for pu, then the maximum value of "p" from the user-
defined curve will be assigned as pu.

The custom P-Y data can be pre-formatted as indicated below and then pasted into the
input table from within the Soils page.
y1 p1
y2 p2
y3 p3
... ...
y10 p10
where
pi = ith p (lateral resistance per unit length) value on the p-y curve
yi = ith y (lateral displacement) value on the p-y curve
12.7 Axial Soil Resistance

Axial soil modeling is comprised of side friction and tip resistance. Respective com-
ponent forces are obtained from the following curves:

1. Axial t-z Curves for Side Friction

2. q-z Curves for Tip Resistance
12.7.1 Axial t-z Curve for Side Friction

The following axial t-z curves are available for modeling side friction:

1. Driven Piles (McVay)

2. Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
3. Driven Pile Sand (API)
4. Drilled Shaft Sand
5. Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand
6. Drilled Shaft Gravel
7. Driven Pile Clay (Coyle and Reese)
8. Driven Pile Clay (API)
9. Drilled Shaft Clay
10. Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale
11. Drilled Shaft IGM (Cohesive)
12. Drilled Shaft IGM (Non-Cohesive)
13. Drilled Shaft Limestone (McVay)
14. Custom t-z

12.7.1.1 Driven Piles (McVay)

McVay et al. (1989) recommended a t-z relationship to predict the load transfer through
side resistance in driven piles:

Eqn: 12.7.A
where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
z = vertical displacement (settlement)
r = pile radius
Gi = Initial (small-strain) shear modulus of soil
rm = outward radius were the transferred shear stress to soil is negligible
β = side resistance parameter

The parameter β is computed as:

Eqn: 12.7.B

where
tu = ultimate (maximum) side resistance
rm is assumed to be initially equal to:

Eqn: 12.7.C

where
L = pile length
ν = Poisson’s ratio of soil
Gmid = shear modulus of soil at mid-depth
Gtip = shear modulus of soil at the pile tip

At a particular location on the pile, τo is the shear stress being transferred to the soil for
a given z displacement, where ro is the radius of the pile and rm is the radius out from
the pile where axial loading effects on soil are negligible, assumed to be initially equal to
the product of the pile length, (1- Poisson's ratio), and the ratio of the soil shear
modulus at the pile center to the value at the pile tip. The engineer must supply Gi, the
initial shear modulus of soil, v, Poisson's ratio of soil, and τu , the ultimate shear stress
between the pile and soil at the depth in question. Evident from the equation above, the
side springs are highly nonlinear.

The general shape of the t-z curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.a t-z curve for driven piles McVay et al. (1989)

Note: Due to limited availability of data, use of the "Coupled Axial and Lateral Soil
Resistance" feature found on the Analysis Settings page is NOT recommended for this t-
z model.
12.7.1.2 Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)

Mosher (1984) suggested the following equation to determine the load transfer in side
resistance for piles in sand:

Eqn: 12.7.D

where
t = side resistance (skin friction), lb/ft2
z = vertical displacement, in
tu = ultimate (maximum) side resistance, lb/ft2

Kt = Initial modulus of side resistance, lb/ft2/in

The mixed units utilized in Eqn: 12.7.D should be noted when using this equation.
Mosher (1984) suggested to use the following table to obtain initial estimates of Kt .

Table: 12.7.A Pairing of initial modulus of side resistance with soil relative density and
internal friction angle (Mosher, 1984)
Kt
Description Internal friction angle (o) (lb/ft
2/in)

6000-
Loose 28-31
10000
10000-
Medium dense 32-34
14000
14000-
Dense 35-38
18000
If the ultimate side resistance (tu ) is not known, Figure 76 in Mosher (1984) gives curves
relating relative depth, internal friction angle, and tu .

The general shape of the t-z relationship is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.b t-z relationship for sand (Mosher, 1984)

12.7.1.3 Driven Pile Sand (API)

For pipe piles in cohesionless soils, API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) suggested the following table
to calculate load transfer associated with side resistance:

z/zpeak t/tu
0.00 0.00
0.16 0.30
0.31 0.50
0.57 0.75
0.80 0.90
1.0 1.00
>1.0 1.00

where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
tu = nominal side resistance
zpeak= vertical displacement at which nominal side resistance is reached

Values of zpeak have been found to range from 0.25% to 2% of the pile (outer) diameter.
As indicated in API RP 2GEO 1 (2014), zpeak can be taken as 1% of the pile
(outer) diameter.

Note: As a backwards compatibility measure, the API RP 2A (2002) approach will be

used for layer(s) where the input value of zpeak is zero.

The general shape of the t-z relationship is shown below.

 Figure: 12.7.c t-z relationship for sand API RP 2GEO 1 (2014)

12.7.1.4 Drilled Shaft Sand

The t-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts are based on the recom-
mendations found in Reese and O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993). In par-
ticular, the curves are obtained by passing trendlines through available load test data. As
stated in Reese and O'Neill (1988), there was measured data exhibited considerable scat-
ter, which should be considered when using these load transfer curves.

Ultimate load transfer in side resistance for drilled shafts in sand can be obtained
through the following equation, which is valid for sands with internal friction angles (φ)
greater or equal to 30°:
Eqn: 12.7.E

Eqn: 12.7.F

where
tu = ultimate side resistance
K = parameter that combines lateral earth pressure and effects of installation
σ'z = effective vertical stress at the depth in question
φ = Internal friction angle
β = dimensionless shaft friction factor
z = depth

These equations are valid for depths ranging from 5 ft to 87.5 ft (1.5 m to 26.7 m).

The non-linear t-z relationships can be obtained using the following equations:

Eqn: 12.7.G

Eqn: 12.7.H

These equations are valid for depths ranging from 5 ft to 87.5 ft (1.5 m to 26.7 m).

where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.I

The general shape of the t-z curve is presented below.

Figure: 12.7.d t-z curve for drilled shafts in sand Reese and O'Neill (1988)
12.7.1.5 Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand

The t-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts in gravelly sand are based on
recommendations found in Rollins et al. (2005). In the 2005 study, 28 axial tension
(uplift) load tests were performed, and also, data from elsewhere in the literature was
complied to evaluate side friction of shafts in soil profiles ranging from uniform
medium sand to well-graded sandy gravel. Load transfer curves were obtained by fitting
trendlines to the measured and gathered load test data. As stated in Rollins et al. (2005),
there was considerable scatter around the data, which should be considered when using
these load transfer curves. Using the available results, Rollins et al. (2005) presented
three t-z relationships providing a lower bound fit, an average fit, and an upper bound
fit to the available data.

Ultimate load transfer in side resistance for drilled shafts in gravelly sand can be
obtained through the following equation, which is valid for gravelly sands with 25-50%
gravel size particles with NSPT value greater than 25. For smaller NSPT values, Reese and
O'Neill (1988) t-z relationship for sand might be considered.

Eqn: 12.7.J

Eqn: 12.7.K

Eqn: 12.7.L

where
tu = ultimate side resistance
σ'z = effective vertical stress at the depth in question
β = dimensionless shaft friction factor
z = depth

Note: If β is input as zero, then it will be computed automatically during analysis.

The non-linear t-z relationships can be obtained using the following equations for the
lower bound, average, and upper bound fits, respectively:

Lower bound t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.M

Eqn: 12.7.N

Average t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.O

Eqn: 12.7.P

Upper bound t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.Q

Eqn: 12.7.R
where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.S

The general shapes of the t-z curves are presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.e t-z curves for drilled shafts in gravelly sand (Rollins et al., 2005)

12.7.1.6 Drilled Shaft Gravel

The t-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts in gravel are based on recom-
mendations found in Rollins et al. (2005), wherein 28 axial tension (uplift) load tests
were performed. Also, in the 2005 study, the researchers acquired load test data from
the literature pertaining to evaluation of side friction of shafts in soil profiles ranging uni-
form medium sand to well-graded sandy gravel. Load transfer curves were then
obtained by fitting trendlines to the available load test data. As stated in Rollins et al.
(2005), there was considerable scatter around the data, which should be taken into con-
sideration when making use of the load transfer curves. Using the available results,
Rollins et al. (2005) presented three t-z relationships: a lower bound fit, an average fit,
and an upper bound fit to the data.
Ultimate load transfer in side resistance for drilled shafts in gravel can be obtained
through the following equation, which is valid for gravelly sands with over 50% gravel
size particles with NSPT value greater than 25. For smaller NSPT values, Reese and
O'Neill (1988) t-z relationship for sand might be considered.

Eqn: 12.7.T

Eqn: 12.7.U
where
tu = ultimate side resistance
σ'z = effective vertical stress at the depth in question
β = dimensionless shaft friction factor
e = natural base (2.718)
z = depth

Note: If β is input as zero, then it will be computed automatically during analysis.

The non-linear t-z relationships can be obtained using the following equations for the
lower bound, the average, and the upper bound fits, respectively:
Lower bound t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.V

Eqn: 12.7.W
Average t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.X

Eqn: 12.7.Y

Upper bound t-z relationship:

Eqn: 12.7.Z

Eqn: 12.7.AA
where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.AB

The general shapes of the t-z curves are presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.f t-z curves for drilled shafts in gravel (Rollins et al., 2005)

12.7.1.7 Driven Pile Clay (Coyle and Reese)

Friction piles are those where the end resistance is small in comparison with the skin fric-
tion (side resistance). By conducting laboratory tests and full-scale field tests, Colye and
Reese (1966) suggested the following table to determine the load transfer for steel fric-
tion piles in clay:

z (in) t/tu
0.00 0.00
0.01 0.18
0.02 0.38
0.04 0.79
0.06 0.97
0.08 1.00
∞ 1.00

where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
tu = ultimate (maximum) side resistance
z = vertical displacement in inch

The general shape of the t-z relationship is shown below. It is evident from the table and
Figure: 12.7.g that very small displacement is required to mobilize the full side res-
istance.

Figure: 12.7.g t-z relationship for clay (Coyle and Reese, 1966)
12.7.1.8 Driven Pile Clay (API)

For pipe piles in cohesive soils, API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) has suggested the following equa-
tion to calculate the side resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.AC

where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
α = dimensionless friction factor
cu = undrained shear strength of the soil at the point in question
α can be computed using the following equations:

Eqn: 12.7.AD

Eqn: 12.7.AE
where
Ψ = c/p’0 for the point in question
p'0 = effective overburden pressure at the depth in question lb/ft2 (kPa)

In the absence of more definitive criteria, the following t-z curves are suggested for
clays:

z/D t/tu
0.0016 0.30
0.0031 0.50
0.0057 0.75
0.0080 0.90
0.0100 1.00
0.0200 0.70 to 0.90
∞ 0.70 to 0.90

where
tu = ultimate (maximum) side resistance according to Eqn: 12.5.1.4.1
z = vertical displacement in inch
D = pile diameter

Note: The ratio of residual shear stress to nominal shear stress is taken as 0.9 in FB-
MultiPier.

The general shape of the t-z relationship is shown below.

 Figure: 12.7.h t-z relationship for clay API RP 2GEO 1 (2014)

12.7.1.9 Drilled Shaft Clay

The t-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts are based on the recom-
mendations found in Reese and O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993). In par-
ticular, the curves are obtained by passing trendlines through available load test data. As
stated in Reese and O'Neill (1988), considerable scatter was present among the meas-
ured data, which should be considered when using these load transfer curves.

Ultimate load transfer in side resistance for drilled shafts in clay can be obtained
through the following equation:
Eqn: 12.7.AF

where
tu = ultimate side resistance
cuz = undrained shear strength at depth z
α = dimensionless shaft friction factor

Note that α is 0.0 from the ground surface to a depth of 5 ft (1.5 m) and also at the bot-
tom 1.0 diameter of drilled shaft or 1.0 stem diameter above the top of the bell. In all
other points along the sides of the drilled shaft α = 0.55.

The immediate settlements are computed using the following nonlinear t-z equations:

Eqn: 12.7.AG

Eqn: 12.7.AH

Eqn: 12.7.AI

Eqn: 12.7.AJ
where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.AK

The general shape of the t-z curve is presented below.

Figure: 12.7.i t-z curve for drilled shafts in clay Reese and O'Neill (1988)
12.7.1.10 Drilled Shaft (Shale)

Aurora and Reese (1977) performed full-scale load tests on drilled shafts in shale. The
tested shafts were less than 30 ft (9 m) length and were penetrated approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m) into shale. As such, Aurora and Reese (1977) recommended limiting their pro-
posed criteria to the similar mentioned shafts. According to the classification system sug-
gested by Morgenstern and Eigenbrod (1974), the term “clay-shale” can be also used for
the test site material (shale).

When using the α-method to predict the side resistance of drilled shafts in shale,
depending on the construction method, the following α values can be used:

Construction Method α
Dry 0.75 – 0.9
Casing 0.5
Slurry-displacement 0.5

where
α = shear strength reduction factor

Due to the sampling difficulty and anisotropic nature of shale, care should be taken in
determination of undrained shear strength of shale. Aurora and Reese (1977) per-
formed both triaxial tests and field static cone tests to obtain the shear strength of shale,
where a reasonable agreement was observed between the results. They also suggested
the following correlation between the unconsolidated undrained shear strength of shale
and NSPT value:

Eqn: 12.7.AL
Eqn: 12.7.AM
where
Cu = unconsolidated-undrained shear strength
NSPT = Standard Penetration Test (SPT) number corrected for the hammer energy (so
called N60) but uncorrected for overburden pressure

Applying the aforementioned recommendations, the procedure suggested by Reese and

O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993) for t-z relationship for drilled shafts in clay
might be applicable to clay-shales. The general shape of the t-z curve is presented
below.

Figure: 12.7.j t-z curve for drilled shafts in shale (Aurora and Reese, 1977)
12.7.1.11 Drilled Shaft IGM (Cohesive)

The design of drilled shafts founded in cohesive intermediate Geomaterials (IGM) draws
upon the recommendations of O’Neill et al. (1996).

Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following three types:

1. (Type 1) Argillaceous geomaterials: heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale, saprolite
and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very dense granular geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock,
and glacial till.

Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials (i.e., cohesive intermediate geo-
materials). Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100. Method 1, doc-
umented by O’Neill et al. (1996), is applicable for Type 1 and 2 materials and has been
implemented in FB-MultiPier. This method is valid for the following conditions:

• IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < qu < 5.0 MPa (73 < qu < 725 psi); Recovery > 50 %;
• Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is arti-
ficially roughened and part is smooth
• Very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);

where
L = socket length
D = socket diameter

A step-by-step procedure for t-z curve computation of drilled shafts in cohesive IGM is
provided and implemented in FB-MultiPier:

1. Find the total socketed length along the pile (L).

2. Find the average mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket:

Eqn: 12.7.AN

where
Em = average mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket
Emi = mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket for ith core

Li = length of the ith core of the socket

For design purposes, if modulus measurements are not made and if soft seams and
open fractures are not present, Emi can be calculated using the following equation for
type 2 IGMs:

Eqn: 12.7.AO

where
qui = unconfined compressive strength of the ith core of the socket

Similarly, Emi can be calculated using the following equation for type 1 IGMs:

Eqn: 12.7.AP

A range of typical Emi values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.
Once the RQD and nature of joints are known, the following table can be used to obtain
Emi/Eii ratios:

where
RQD = rock quality designation
Eii = intact sample Young’s modulus for ith core

Emi / Eii
RQD (%)
closed joints open joints
100 1.00 0.60
70 0.70 0.10
50 0.15 0.10
20 0.05 0.05

Note: Values of Emi/Eii for RQD values between those shown above can be estimated by
linear interpolation.

3. Find the average side resistance along the side of the socket.

Eqn: 12.7.AQ

where
fsu = average side resistance along the side of the socket
fsui = side resistance along the side of the socket for ith core

For cohesive IGM in “smooth” boreholes, failure occurs at the interface and side res-
istance can be calculated using the following equation:
Eqn: 12.7.AR

where
α = constant of proportionality based on Figure 34 of O’Neill et al. (1996)

For cohesive IGM in “rough” boreholes, failure occurs through the rock and side res-
istance can be calculated using the following equation (McVay et al. 1992):

Eqn: 12.7.AS

4. If Emi/Eii < 1.0, reduce the side resistance using the following table:

Emi/Eii Reduction factor

1 1
0.5 0.8
0.3 0.7
0.1 0.55
0.05 0.45

5. Determine the “characteristic parameter” n:

Eqn: 12.7.AT

where
n = characteristic parameter
σn = normal stress between the concrete and borehole wall
For “rough” sockets:

Eqn: 12.7.AU

where
γc = unit weight of the concrete
zc = distance from the top of the completed column of concrete to the point in the bore-
hole at which is desired (usually the middle of the socket)
M = empirical factor which depends on the fluidity of concrete (see the figure and table
below)

Figure: 12.7.k Values of factor M versus concrete slump

zc (m) Slump (mm)

 125 175 225
0 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 0.50 0.95 1.00
8 0.45 0.75 1.00
12 0.35 0.65 0.90

If a water table is present, then σn should be revised to the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.AV

where
γ'c = buoyant unit weight of the concrete
zw = depth from top of concrete to elevation of water table

For "smooth" sockets, n can be estimated from the figure below.

 Figure: 12.7.l Factors of “n” for smooth sockets

6. Calculate Ω:

Eqn: 12.7.AW

where
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete

7. Calculate Γ:
Eqn: 12.7.AX

8. Calculate Θf and Kf:

Eqn: 12.7.AY

Eqn: 12.7.AZ

9. Calculate the side resistance versus vertical shaft displacement as:

Eqn: 12.7.BA

Eqn: 12.7.BB

The general shape of the t-z curve is presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.m t-z curve for drilled shafts in cohesive IGM (O’Neill et al., 1996)

12.7.1.12 Drilled Shaft IGM (Non-Cohesive)

Mayne and Harris (1993) investigated the resistance and load-settlement behavior of axi-
ally loaded drilled shafts socketed in non-cohesive intermediate geomaterials (IGMs).
Particularly, the studied materials belong to the third category of IGMs, which includes
very dense granular geomaterials. This category encompasses residual, completely
decomposed rock, gravel, and granular glacial till with NSPT values between 50 and 100.

The Mayne and Harris (1993) method is based on an approximate elasticity solution and
correlations of geomaterial properties with standard penetration test results in cohe-
sionless geomaterials. O’Neill et al. (1996) revised the method after conducting load
tests on several full-scale drilled shafts.
Given below are the recommended correlations, the procedure to obtain t-z curves, and
the total load-settlement relationship of the in-situ piles/shafts in non-cohesive IGMs.

Eqn: 12.7.BC is used to obtain the ultimate side resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.BC
where
tu = ultimate side resistance
σ'v0 = effective vertical stress at the depth in question
φ' = effective angle of internal friction
K0 = coefficient of horizontal earth pressure at rest

The following equations are used to define the input parameters for Eqn: 12.7.BC.

Eqn: 12.7.BD

Eqn: 12.7.BE

It should be noted that O’Neill et al. (1996) recommended changing φ' to 0.75φ' for
cases where drilling fluid meets acceptable specifications and a good practice is used to
drill the borehole.

Eqn: 12.7.BF
Eqn: 12.7.BG
where
OCR = overconsolidation ratio
σ'p = preconsolidation pressure
NSPT-60 = SPT blow count corrected to an energy ration of 60% (the average ratio of
actual energy delivered by safety hammers to the theoretical free-fall energy)
Pa = the atmospheric pressure (usually 1 atmosphere, or 101 kPa)

The ultimate end resistance can be calculated using Eqn: 12.7.BH.

Eqn: 12.7.BH
where
qu = ultimate end resistance
Nc = bearing factor; Nc = 9.33 is appropriate for deep circular foundation elements
su = undrained shear strength

Eqn: 12.7.BI can be used to estimate undrained shear strength:

Eqn: 12.7.BI

As shown in Figure: 12.7.n, the socket load-settlement relation is a three-branched

curve. For a given load P at the top of the socket, the corresponding elastic settlement
along segment 1, z, is computed from Eqn: 12.7.BJ:

Eqn: 12.7.BJ
Figure: 12.7.n Hypothetical load-settlement relationship for method of Mayne and Har-
ris (1993)

where
z = settlement
P = axial load at top of the socket
Iρ = dimensionless influence factor
D = socket diameter
EsL = Young’s modulus of the granular geomaterial along the sides of the socket at the
base level (as distinguished from the geomaterial below the base)
Mayne and Harris (1993) recommended the following correlation to estimate Young’s
modulus of the Piedmont residuum:

Eqn: 12.7.BK

The values of Iρ are given in approximate closed-form:

Eqn: 12.7.BL

Following are the definitions of the parameters used in Iρ:

Eqn: 12.7.BM

Eqn: 12.7.BN

Eqn: 12.7.BO

Eqn: 12.7.BP
Eqn: 12.7.BQ

Eqn: 12.7.BR
where
Db = shaft diameter at base; η=1 for straight shafts
ξ = xi factor; ξ=1 for floating shaft
ρ = rho factor; ρ=1 for uniform soil and ρ=0.5 for Gibson soil
L = socket length
Ep = Young’s modulus of the composite (concrete plus reinforcing steel in the shaft
cross section)
Esm = soil modulus at mid-depth of shaft
Eb = soil modulus below foundation base
ν = Poisson’s ratio of soil

The total load at the end of segment 1 is termed Ptotal-1:

Eqn: 12.7.BS

By applying the total load at the end of segment 1 (Ptotal-1), the total settlement (ztotal-1)
can be obtained at this point:

Eqn: 12.7.BT

The magnitude of Ptotal-1 can be calculated using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.BU
where
Ptu = ultimate load due to side resistance

Eqn: 12.7.BV

The contribution of end bearing at the end of segment 1 (Pbase-1) can be obtained using
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.BW

The maximum total load at the end of segment 2 (Ptotal-max) can be determined:

Eqn: 12.7.BX
where
Pqu = ultimate load due to end resistance

The settlement due to the increment of base load Ptotal-max-Ptotal-1 is given by:

Eqn: 12.7.BY

The corresponding settlement at the end of segment 2 is then

Eqn: 12.7.BZ

The bilinear t-z relationship can be then derived. The general shape of the t-z curve is
presented below.

Figure: 12.7.o t-z curve for drilled shafts in non-cohesive IGM (Mayne and Harris,
1993)

12.7.1.13 Limestone (McVay)

McVay et al. (2004) presented a t-z relationship for Florida limestone. The proposed
empirical t-z relationship is obtained through conducting axial load tests in a geo-
technical centrifuge. In these tests, large-diameter (6 ft) fully instrumented drilled shafts
were axially loaded in synthetic limestone (simulating the properties of Florida lime-
stone) with unconfined compressive strengths of 10 tsf (958 kPa), 20 tsf (1915 kPa), and
40 tsf (3830 kPa). The axial load tests results are presented below. The proposed side res-
istance load transfer curves are in excellent accord with those obtained by Kim (2001)
through analyzing data from 33 Osterberg axial load tests conducted at various bridge
sites in Florida. It should be noted that joints, cracks, and secondary structure in the rock
may alter the t-z behavior to different than that presented below.

Figure: 12.7.p Measured side resistance (t) versus shaft displacement (z) for synthetic
limestone McVay et al. (2004)

The t-z relationship is characterized by three equations:

Eqn: 12.7.CA

Eqn: 12.7.CB

Eqn: 12.7.CC

where
t = side resistance (skin friction)
tu = ultimate side resistance
R = normalized vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.CD

where
z = vertical displacement (settlement)
D = shaft diameter

Collectively, the above expressions lead to the following curve for side resistance.
 Figure: 12.7.q t-z relationship for limestone McVay et al. (2004)

12.7.1.14 Custom t-z

Any desired t-z relationships can be entered into FB-MultiPier. As such, the "Custom t-z"
relationship option can be utilized to apply any user-defined t-z relationships to
pile/shaft nodes that fall within a given soil/rock layer. Custom t-z curves are specified
by a set of (up to) ten pairs of t and z values. The custom relationship can be defined for
one or more layers of interest from within the Soils page. As stated above, the following
parameters are relevant in defining custom t-z curves:

t = soil/rock skin resistance

z = pile/shaft vertical displacement
 Note: Only one custom t-z relationship can be assigned to a given soil set. If linearly
varying soil resistance (with depth) is desired for a given depth range, then linear vari-
ation of properties in that region may possibly be mimicked by subdividing the depth
range into several layers and assigning a unique custom t-z curve to each subdivided
layer.

The custom t-z data can be pre-formatted as indicated below and then pasted into the
input table from within the Soils page.

z1 t1
z2 t2
z3 t3
... ...
z10 t10

where
ti = ith t (side resistance) value on the t-z curve

zi = ith z (vertical displacement) value on the t-z curve

12.7.2 q-z Curve for Tip Resistance

The following tip resistance (q-z) models are available:

1. Driven Pile (McVay)

2. Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)
3. Driven Pile Sand (API)
4. Drilled Shaft Sand
5. Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand and Gravel
6. Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)
7. Driven Pile Clay (API)
8. Drilled Shaft Clay
9. Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale
10. Drilled Shaft IGM (Cohesive)
11. Drilled Shaft IGM (Non-Cohesive)
12. Custom q-z

12.7.2.1 Driven Pile (McVay)

McVay et al. (1989) recommended a q-z relationship to predict the load transfer
through end resistance in driven piles:

Eqn: 12.7.A

where
q = axial end bearing (tip) resistance
z = vertical displacement (settlement)
rb = pile radius at the base
Gi = Initial (small-strain) shear modulus of soil
qu = ultimate axial end bearing resistance
ν = Poisson’s ratio of soil

The general shape of the q-z curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.a q-z curve for driven piles McVay et al. (1989)

12.7.2.2 Driven Pile Sand (Mosher)

Pile tip spring (q-z) curves can be automatically generated for piles that are tipped in
sand layers, and where the work of Mosher (1984), Castello (1980), and Vijayvergiya
(1977) are applicable. The tip load versus tip (vertical, compressive) displacement rela-
tionship is defined by Vijayvergiya (1977) as:

Eqn: 12.7.B

where
q = end bearing resistance
qu = ultimate end bearing resistance
z = pile tip vertical displacement
zc = pile tip critical vertical displacement
n = exponent

Mosher (1984) assumed a value of 0.25 in (0.00635 m) for zc. Other values have been
suggested as well, for example, Vijayvergiya (1977) recommended relating zc to the pile
width.

The default value given by Vijayvergiya (1977) for exponent n is 1/3. However, Mosher
(1984) also listed the following values of n for various sand relative densities:

Table: 12.7.A Pairing of q-z equation exponent with soil relative density and internal
friction angle (Mosher (1984), Table 6, Eqns. 49a-c)
Internal friction angle
Relative density n
(deg)
Loose 28-31 1/2
Medium-dense 32-34 1/3
Dense 35-38 1/4
If the ultimate end bearing resistance (qu) is not known, Castello (1980), Figure 72 in
Mosher (1984), gives curves relating relative depth, internal friction angle, and qu.

The general shape of the q-z relationship is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.b q-z relationship for sand Mosher (1984)

12.7.2.3 Driven Pile Sand (API)

For pipe piles in cohesionless soils, API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) suggested the following equa-
tion to calculate end bearing resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.C

where
q = end bearing resistance
Nq = dimensionless bearing capacity factor
p'0 = effective overburden pressure at the depth in question

Note: As a backwards compatibility measure, the API RP 2A (2002) approach will be

used for layer(s) where the input value of Nq is zero.

Based on a total unit weight of soil, an effective unit weight (γ’soil = γsoil – γwater) is cal-
culated for p'0 that is subsequently used to compute the unit end bearing.

Recommended Nq values are presented in the table below. End bearing resistance acts
over the entire cross section of plugged piles. Considering unplugged piles, end bearing
only acts on the pile annulus, offering additional friction at the interface of soil plug and
pile inner wall. For long piles, end bearing may not linearly increase with the depth. As
such, the limiting values presented in the below table may be used.

Limiting q values (ksf,

Relative density Soil description Nq
kPa)
Very Loose Sand N/A N/A
Loose Sand N/A N/A
Loose Sand-Silt N/A N/A
Medium Dense Silt N/A N/A
Dense Silt N/A N/A
Medium Dense Sand-Silt 12 60 (3000)
Medium Dense Sand 20 100 (5000)
Dense Sand-Silt 20 100 (5000)
Dense Sand 40 200 (10000)
Very Dense Sand-Silt 40 200 (10000)
Very Dense Sand 50 250 (12000)
Figure: 12.7.c Design Parameters for Cohesionless Siliceous Soil

Note: The above table is intended as a guideline only. Other values may be justified
when detailed field load tests and laboratory tests results are available.

Note: Sand-Silt soils have significant fractions of both sand and silt. Increasing silt con-
tent might reduce the strength and vice versa.

The following definitions for relative density description might be used:

Description Relative Density (%)

Very Loose 0-15
Loose 15-35
Medium Dense 35-65
Dense 65-85
Very Dense 85-100

In the absence of more definitive criteria, the following q-z curves are suggested for
non-carbonate sands:

In the absence of more definitive criteria, the following t-z curves are suggested for non-
carbonate sands:

z/D q/qu
0.002 0.25
0.013 0.50
0.042 0.75
0.073 0.90
0.100 1.00

where
qu = ultimate (maximum) end bearing resistance
z = vertical tip displacement in inches
D = pile diameter

For pipe piles, the ultimate end bearing capacity, in force units, may be calculated by the
equation:

Eqn: 12.7.D

where
Q = ultimate end bearing
A = cross sectional area at tip of pile and is calculated, based on pile end condition;
Plugged – a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity;
Unplugged – a net cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity

The q-z curves are generated using piecewise linear function based on the data given in
this table. The general shape of the q-z relationship is shown below.
 Figure: 12.7.d q-z relationship for sand API RP 2GEO 1 (2014)

12.7.2.4 Drilled Shaft Sand

The q-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts are based on recom-
mendations found in Reese and O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993). In par-
ticular, the curves are obtained by passing trendlines through available load test data. As
stated in Reese and O'Neill (1988), the measured data exhibited considerable scatter,
which should be taken into consideration when using these load transfer curves.

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing for drilled shafts in sand can be obtained through
the following table, which is valid for sands with uncorrected Standard Penetration Test
(SPT) values (NSPT) of greater than 10:
Eqn: 12.7.E

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing values for drilled shafts in sand can be found
using the following table:

NSPT (uncorrected) qu (tsf) qu (kPa)

0-50 0.6 NSPT 57.5 NSPT
>50 30 2900

If the diameter of the shaft at the base is greater than 50 in (1.27 m), the ultimate end
bearing resistance might be reduced using the following equation:

where
q = End bearing resistance
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

where
z = vertical displacement (immediate settlement) of shaft/pile

The general shape of the q-z curve is presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.e q-z curve for drilled shafts in sand Reese and O'Neill (1988)

12.7.2.5 Gravelly Sand and Gravel

There is a lack of load tests available for characterizing end bearing (q-z) relationships
for drilled shafts in gravelly sand and gravel. Therefore, the q-z curves used for drilled
and cast in-situ piles/shafts in gravelly sand and gravel are based on the recom-
mendations found in Reese and O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993). In par-
ticular, the curves are obtained by fitting trendlines to available load test data. As stated
in Reese and O'Neill (1988), the measured data exhibited considerable scatter, which
should be taken into consideration when using these load transfer curves.

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing for drilled shafts in sand can be obtained through
the following table, which is valid for sands with uncorrected Standard Penetration Test
(SPT) values (NSPT) of greater than 10:
Eqn: 12.7.F

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing values for drilled shafts in sand can be found
using the following table:

NSPT (uncorrected) qu (tsf) qu (kPa)

0-50 0.6 NSPT 57.5 NSPT
>50 30 2900

If the diameter of the shaft at the base is greater than 50 in (1.27 m), the ultimate end
bearing resistance might be reduced using the following equation:

where
q = End bearing resistance
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

where
z = vertical displacement (immediate settlement) of shaft/pile

The general shape of the q-z curve is presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.f q-z curve for drilled shafts in gravelly sand and gravel, based on Reese
and O'Neill (1988)

12.7.2.6 Driven Pile Clay (Skempton)

For piles tipped in clay, Skempton (1951) suggested the following equation to calculate
the unit end bearing resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.G

where
q = end bearing resistance
z = pile tip vertical displacement
cu = undrained shear strength of the soil at the point in question
D = pile diameter
Nc = dimensionless bearing capacity factor, which can be taken as 9.0 according to
Skempton (1951)
ε50 = strain at 50% maximum stress
n = exponent, which can be taken as 0.5 for clays according to Skempton (1951)

The general shape of the q-z relationship is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.g q-z relationship for sand Skempton (1951)

12.7.2.7 Driven Pile Clay (API)

For piles in cohesive soils API RP 2GEO 1 (2014) suggested the following equation to cal-
culate the unit end bearing resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.H

where
q = end bearing resistance
cu = undrained shear strength of the soil at the point in question

In the absence of more definitive criteria, the following q-z curves are suggested for
clays:

z/D q/qu
0.002 0.25
0.013 0.50
0.042 0.75
0.073 0.90
0.100 1.00

where
qu = ultimate (maximum) end bearing resistance
z = vertical tip displacement in inches
D = pile diameter

For pipe piles, the ultimate end bearing capacity, in force units, may be calculated by the
equation:
Eqn: 12.7.I

where
Q = ultimate end bearing
A = cross sectional area at tip of pile and is calculated, based on pile end condition;
Plugged – a gross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity;
Unplugged – a net cross sectional area is used to compute ultimate end bearing capacity

The q-z curves are generated using piecewise linear function based on the data given in
this table. The general shape of the q-z relationship is shown below.

Figure: 12.7.h q-z relationship for clay API RP 2GEO 1 (2014)

12.7.2.8 Drilled Shaft Clay

The q-z curves used for drilled and cast in-situ piles/shafts are based on the recom-
mendations found in Reese and O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993). In par-
ticular, the curves are obtained by passing trendlines through available load test data. As
stated in Reese and O'Neill (1988), there was measured data exhibited considerable scat-
ter, which should be considered when using these load transfer curves.

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing for drilled shafts in clay can be obtained through
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.J

where
qu = ultimate end resistance
cub = average undrained shear strength of the clay obtained 1-2 diameters below the
shaft tip
Nc = end resistance factor

Nc can be computed using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.K

where
L = penetration of shaft
Db = diameter of the shaft at the base
Per AASHTO 10.8.3.5.1, the end resistance factor (Nc) is scaled by 0.67 if cub is input as
less than 0.5 ksf (23.9 kPa).

If the diameter of the shaft at the base is greater than 75 in (1.90 m), the ultimate end
bearing resistance might be reduced using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.L

where
qur = ultimate-reduced end bearing resistance
Fr = reduction factor

Fr can be computed using the following equations:

Eqn: 12.7.M

Note that, in the above, Db should be in units of inches.

Eqn: 12.7.N

Eqn: 12.7.O

Note that, in the above, cub should be in units of ksf.

where
a = geometric factor
b = undrained shear strength factor

The short-term settlement is computed using the following nonlinear q-z equations:

Eqn: 12.7.P

Eqn: 12.7.Q

where
q = end bearing resistance
R = dimensionless vertical displacement

R is defined as:

Eqn: 12.7.R

where
z = vertical displacement (short-term settlement) of shaft/pile

The general shape of the q-z curve is presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.i q-z curve for drilled shafts in clay Reese and O'Neill (1988)

12.7.2.9 Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale

Aurora and Reese (1977) performed full-scale load tests on drilled shafts in shale. The
tested shafts were less than 30 ft (9 m) length and were penetrated approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m) into shale. As such, Aurora and Reese (1977) recommended limiting their pro-
posed criteria to the similar mentioned shafts. According to the classification system sug-
gested by Morgenstern and Eigenbrod (1974), the term “clay-shale” can be also used for
the test site material (shale).

Ultimate load transfer in end bearing for drilled shafts in cohesive soils can be obtained
through the following equation:
Eqn: 12.7.S

where
qu = ultimate end resistance
cub = average undrained shear strength of the clay obtained 1-2 diameters below the
shaft tip
Nc = end resistance factor

Accordingly, when modeling the tip load transfer curve for drilled shafts in clay-shale,
two input parameters are utilized: Nc and cub. Correlations to help estimate these two
quantities are provided below.

When predicting the end bearing resistance of drilled shafts in shale, depending on the
construction method, the following bearing capacity (Nc) factors can be used:
Construction Method Nc
Dry 8.0 - 8.5
Casing 8.0 - 8.5
Slurry-displacement 7.0

Due to the sampling difficulty and anisotropic nature of shale, care should be taken in
determination of undrained shear strength of shale. Aurora and Reese (1977) per-
formed both triaxial tests and field static cone tests to obtain the shear strength of shale,
where a reasonable agreement was observed between the results. They also suggested
the following correlation between the unconsolidated undrained shear strength of shale
and NSPT value:

Eqn: 12.7.T
Eqn: 12.7.U

where
Cu = unconsolidated-undrained shear strength
NSPT = Standard Penetration Test (SPT) number corrected for hammer energy, but
uncorrected for overburden pressure

The following correlations were suggested to obtain the bearing capacity of drilled
shafts in shale, and the two input parameters (Nc, cub) can be adjusted if so desired to fit
these correlations:

Eqn: 12.7.V

Eqn: 12.7.W

Applying the aforementioned recommendations, the procedure suggested by Reese and

O'Neill (1988) and Wang and Reese (1993) for q-z relationship for drilled shafts in clay
is applied for clay-shales. The general shape of the q-z curve is presented below.
 Figure: 12.7.j q-z curve for drilled shafts in shale (Aurora and Reese, 1977)

12.7.2.10 Drilled Shaft IGM (Cohesive)

The design of drilled shafts founded in cohesive intermediate Geomaterials (IGM) draws
upon the recommendations of O’Neill et al. (1996).

Intermediate Geomaterials are characterized as one of the following three types:

1. (Type 1) Argillaceous geomaterials: heavily overconsolidated clay, clay shale, saprolite
and mudstone.
2. (Type 2) Calcareous rock: Limestone and Limerock
3. (Type 3) Very dense granular geomaterials: residual, completely decomposed rock,
and glacial till.
Types 1 and 2 are considered to be cohesive materials (i.e., cohesive intermediate geo-
materials). Type 3 is primarily cohesionless and has Nspt from 50 to 100. Method 1, doc-
umented by O’Neill et al. (1996), is applicable for Type 1 and 2 materials and has been
implemented in FB-MultiPier. This method is valid for the following conditions:

• IGM Type 1 and 2; 0.5 < qu < 5.0 MPa (73 < qu < 725 psi); Recovery > 50 %;
• Where there is strong layering in the formation, or where part of the socket is arti-
ficially roughened and part is smooth
• Very short sockets (L/D <2) or very long sockets (L/D>20);

where
L = socket length
D = socket diameter

A step-by-step procedure for q-z curve computation of drilled shafts in cohesive IGM is
provided and implemented in FB-MultiPier:

1. Find the total socketed length along the pile (L).

2. Find the average mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket:

Eqn: 12.7.X

where
Em = average mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket
Emi = mass modulus of elasticity along the side of the socket for ith core

Li = length of the ith core of the socket

For design purposes, if modulus measurements are not made and if soft seams and
open fractures are not present, Emi can be calculated using the following equation for
type 2 IGMs:

Eqn: 12.7.Y

where
qui = unconfined compressive strength of the ith core of the socket

Similarly, Emi can be calculated using the following equation for type 1 IGMs:

Eqn: 12.7.Z

A range of typical Emi values for limestone is 50,000 psi to 300,000 psi.

Once the RQD and nature of joints are known, the following table can be used to obtain
Emi/Eii ratios:

where
RQD = rock quality designation
Eii = intact sample Young’s modulus for ith core

RQD (%) Emi / Eii

closed joints open joints
100 1.00 0.60
70 0.70 0.10
50 0.15 0.10
20 0.05 0.05
Note: Values of Emi/Eii for RQD values between those shown above can be estimated by
linear interpolation.

3. Find the average side resistance along the side of the socket.

Eqn: 12.7.AA

where
fsu = average side resistance along the side of the socket
fsui = side resistance along the side of the socket for ith core

For cohesive IGM in “smooth” boreholes, failure occurs at the interface and side res-
istance can be calculated using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.AB

where
α = constant of proportionality based on Figure 34 of O’Neill et al. (1996)

For cohesive IGM in “rough” boreholes, failure occurs through the rock and side res-
istance can be calculated using the following equation (McVay et al. 1992):

Eqn: 12.7.AC

4. If Emi/Eii < 1.0, reduce the side resistance using the following table:
Emi/Eii Reduction factor
1 1
0.5 0.8
0.3 0.7
0.1 0.55
0.05 0.45

5. Determine the “characteristic parameter” n:

Eqn: 12.7.AD

where
n = characteristic parameter
σn = normal stress between the concrete and borehole wall

For “rough” sockets:

Eqn: 12.7.AE

where
γc = unit weight of the concrete
zc = distance from the top of the completed column of concrete to the point in the bore-
hole at which is desired (usually the middle of the socket)
M = empirical factor which depends on the fluidity of concrete (see the figure and table
below)
 Figure: 12.7.k Values of factor M versus concrete slump

zc (m) Slump (mm)

125 175 225
0 1.00 1.00 1.00
4 0.50 0.95 1.00
8 0.45 0.75 1.00
12 0.35 0.65 0.90

If a water table is present, then σn should be revised to the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.AF

where
γ'c = buoyant unit weight of the concrete
zw = depth from top of concrete to elevation of water table

For "smooth" sockets, n can be estimated from the figure below.

Figure: 12.7.l Factors of “n” for smooth sockets

6. Calculate Ω:

Eqn: 12.7.AG

where
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
7. Calculate Γ:

Eqn: 12.7.AH

8. Calculate Λ:

Eqn: 12.7.AI

9. Calculate the end bearing resistance versus vertical tip displacement as:

Eqn: 12.7.AJ

The general shape of the q-z curve is presented below.

 Figure: 12.7.m q-z curve for drilled shafts in IGM O’Neill et al. (1996)

12.7.2.11 Drilled Shaft IGM (Non-Cohesive)

Mayne and Harris (1993) investigated the resistance and load-settlement behavior of axi-
ally loaded drilled shafts socketed in non-cohesive intermediate geomaterials (IGMs).
Particularly, the studied materials belong to the third category of IGMs, which include
very dense granular geomaterials. This category encompasses residual, completely
decomposed rock, gravel, and granular glacial till with NSPT values between 50 and 100.

The Mayne and Harris (1993) method is based on an approximate elasticity solution and
correlations of geomaterial properties with standard penetration test results in cohe-
sionless geomaterials. O’Neill et al. (1996) revised the method after conducting load
tests on several full-scale drilled shafts.
Given below are the recommended correlations, the procedure to obtain the q-z curve,
and the total load-settlement relationship of the in-situ piles/shafts in non-cohesive
IGMs.

Eqn: 12.7.AK is used to obtain the ultimate side resistance:

Eqn: 12.7.AK
where
tu = ultimate side resistance
σ'v0 = effective vertical stress at the depth in question
φ' = effective angle of internal friction
K0 = coefficient of horizontal earth pressure at rest

The following equations are used to define the input parameters for Eqn: 12.7.AK.

Eqn: 12.7.AL

Eqn: 12.7.AM

It should be noted that O’Neill et al. (1996) recommended changing φ' to 0.75φ' for
cases where drilling fluid meets acceptable specifications and a good practice is used to
drill the borehole.

Eqn: 12.7.AN
Eqn: 12.7.AO
where
OCR = overconsolidation ratio
σ'p = preconsolidation pressure
NSPT-60 = SPT blow count corrected to an energy ration of 60% (the average ratio of
actual energy delivered by safety hammers to the theoretical free-fall energy)
Pa = the atmospheric pressure (usually 1 atmosphere, or 101 kPa)

The ultimate end resistance can be calculated using Eqn: 12.7.AP.

Eqn: 12.7.AP
where
qu = ultimate end resistance
Nc = bearing factor; Nc = 9.33 is appropriate for deep circular foundation elements
su = undrained shear strength

Eqn: 12.7.AQ can be used to estimate undrained shear strength:

Eqn: 12.7.AQ

As shown in Figure: 12.7.n, the socket load-settlement relation is a three-branched

curve. For a given load P at the top of the socket, the corresponding elastic settlement
along segment 1, z, is computed from Eqn: 12.7.AR:

Eqn: 12.7.AR
Figure: 12.7.n Hypothetical load-settlement relationship for method of Mayne and Har-
ris (1993)
where
z = settlement
P = axial load at top of the socket
Iρ = dimensionless influence factor
D = socket diameter
EsL = Young’s modulus of the granular geomaterial along the sides of the socket at the
base level (as distinguished from the geomaterial below the base)

Mayne and Harris (1993) recommended the following correlation to estimate Young’s
modulus of the Piedmont residuum:

Eqn: 12.7.AS

The values of Iρ are given in approximate closed-form:

Eqn: 12.7.AT

Following are the definitions of the parameters used in Iρ:

Eqn: 12.7.AU

Eqn: 12.7.AV

Eqn: 12.7.AW

Eqn: 12.7.AX

Eqn: 12.7.AY
Eqn: 12.7.AZ
where
Db = shaft diameter at base; η=1 for straight shafts
ξ = xi factor; ξ=1 for floating shaft
ρ = rho factor; ρ=1 for uniform soil and ρ=0.5 for Gibson soil
L = socket length
Ep = Young’s modulus of the composite (concrete plus reinforcing steel in the shaft
cross section)
Esm = soil modulus at mid-depth of shaft
Eb = soil modulus below foundation base
ν = Poisson’s ratio of soil

The total load at the end of segment 1 is termed Ptotal-1:

Eqn: 12.7.BA

By applying the total load at the end of segment 1 (Ptotal-1), the total settlement (ztotal-1)
can be obtained at this point:

Eqn: 12.7.BB

The magnitude of Ptotal-1 can be calculated using the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.BC
where
Ptu = ultimate load due to side resistance

Eqn: 12.7.BD

The contribution of end bearing at the end of segment 1 (Pbase-1) can be obtained using
the following equation:

Eqn: 12.7.BE

The maximum total load at the end of segment 2 (Ptotal-max) can be determined:

Eqn: 12.7.BF
where
Pqu = ultimate load due to end resistance

The settlement due to the increment of base load Ptotal-max-Ptotal-1 is given by:

Eqn: 12.7.BG

The corresponding settlement at the end of segment 2 is then

Eqn: 12.7.BH

The bilinear q-z relationship can be then derived. The general shape of the q-z curve is
presented below.
 Figure: 12.7.o q-z curve for drilled shafts in non-cohesive IGM (Mayne and Harris
1993)

12.7.2.12 Custom q-z

Any desired q-z relationships can be entered into FB-MultiPier. As such, the "Custom q-
z" relationship option can be utilized to apply any user-defined q-z relationships to
pile/shaft nodes that fall within a given soil/rock layer. Custom q-z curves are specified
by a set of (up to) ten pairs of q and z values. The custom relationship can be defined for
one or more layers of interest from within the Soils page. As stated above, the following
parameters are relevant in defining custom q-z curves:

q = soil/rock end bearing resistance

z = pile/shaft vertical displacement

The custom q-z data can be pre-formatted as indicated below and then pasted into the
input table from within the Soils page.

z1 q1
z2 q2
z3 q3
... ...
z10 q10

where
qi = ith t (end bearing resistance) value on the q-z curve

zi = ith z (vertical displacement) value on the q-z curve

12.8 Torsional Soil Resistance

Torsional soil resistance is modeled using t-θ springs, where t is the torque applied to
the pile and θ is the angle of twist, in radians. The springs are located at the nodal
points. t-θ springs can be modeled as follows:

1. Hyperbolic Curve
2. Custom t-θ
12.8.1 Hyperbolic Curve

Nonlinear torsional resistance of pile/shafts (T) against torque-induced rotation (twist

angle, θ) is modeled using a hyperbolic T-θ curve. The curve smoothly transits from a
maximum stiffness (initial slope) to an ultimate resistance (asymptote). General descrip-
tions for each curve component are given below, followed by specific equations (includ-
ing those implemented in FB-MultiPier).

Initial Stiffness
The initial slope of the hyperbolic curve is (in part) a function of shear modulus G. Engin-
eering judgment should be used when selecting a representative value of shear mod-
ulus, and in-situ test data should be taken into consideration whenever possible. For
scenarios involving relatively undisturbed soils, the small-strain shear modulus (com-
monly referred to as Gmax) might be considered as a candidate for use in modeling soil
resistance. Several empirical formulations for estimating Gmax can be found
in references such as Kramer (1996), including those specific to cohesive and cohe-
sionless soils.

Ultimate Resistance
The maximum ordinate value (i.e., the curve asymptote, Tult ) of the hyperbolic curve is
strongly influenced by the ultimate shear stress (τult ) available at the soil-pile contact
interface. Values for this parameter can be estimated using procedures similar to those
associated with axial skin friction.

For a length of pile ΔL, torque is given by

Eqn: 12.8.A

where
ΔT = torque increment
r = pile radius
τ0 = shear stress along ΔL
ΔL = pile length increment

For a long rigid pile embedded in a soil with shear modulus G, Randolph (1981)
deduced the expression for the torque per unit length

Eqn: 12.8.B

where
G = shear modulus of soil

This expression does not consider pile tip stiffness. For a long pile, the tip contribution
may be considered negligible.

In FB-MultiPier, the following hyperbolic form is used to relate torque (T) to rotation (θ):

Eqn: 12.8.C

where
T = torque
θ = angle of twist of pile (or rotation angle)
a = coefficient
b = coefficient

The coefficients a and b are given by:

Eqn: 12.8.D
Eqn: 12.8.E

The general shape of the T-θ curve is shown below.

Figure: 12.8.a Hyperbolic representation of T- θ curve

12.8.2 Custom t-θ

Any desired t-θ relationships can be entered into FB-MultiPier. As such, the "Custom t-θ
" relationship option can be utilized to apply any user-defined t-θ relationships to
pile/shaft nodes that fall within a given soil/rock layer. Custom t-θ curves are specified
by a set of (up to) ten pairs of t and θ values. The custom relationship can be defined for
one or more layers of interest from within the Soils page. As stated above, the following
parameters are relevant in defining custom t-θ curves:

t = soil/rock torsional resistance

θ = pile/shaft rotation

Note: Only one custom t-θ relationship can be assigned to a given layer. If linearly
varying soil resistance (with depth) is desired for a given depth range, then linear vari-
ation of properties in that region may possibly be mimicked by subdividing the depth
range into several layers and assigning a unique custom t-θ curve to each subdivided
layer.

The custom t-θ data can include up to ten points, and can be pre-formatted as indicated
below.

θ1 t1
θ2 t2
θ3 t3
... ...
θ10 t10

where
ti = ith t (torsional resistance) value on the t-θ curve

θi = ith θ (rotation) value on the t-θ curve.

13 Pile Cap and Footing Elements

Thick shell finite elements are used in modeling pile caps and footings in FB-MultiPier.
These specialized elements exhibit linear behavior, yet are capable of accounting for
both shear deformations and the drilling degree-of-freedom. The elements derive from
the considerations detailed in the articles listed below.

1. Membrane Element
2. Plate Element
3. Flat Shell Element
4. Mindlin Theory
5. Generalized Stress and Strain
6. Special Element for FB-MultiPier
7. Mesh Correctness and Convergence

13.1 Membrane Element

The membrane element is a flat, constant thickness element. It can be triangular, rect-
angular or have curved sides. The element can have configurations of three, four, six,
eight or nine nodes. Whatever the shape or number of nodes, the element has two
translational DOF per node. These DOF must lie in the plane of the element. The results
from the element consist of two normal stresses and a shear stress in the plane of the
element, (see Figure: 13.1.a below). The stress results are given at each corner node in
the element in FB-MultiPier.
 Figure: 13.1.a Membrane Stress Sign Convention
Note:
S1 and S2 represent in-plane normal stresses. Positive S1 (as shown in Figure: 13.1.a)
causes tension along the local 1-axis in the membrane element . S1 and S21 represent in-
plane shear stresses along the edges perpendicular to the local 1- and 2-axis, respect-
ively. Unit of S1, S2, and S12 is force per unit area, e.g., ksi.

The difference between element behavior is dictated by the choice of the number of
nodes and hence the number of DOF for the element. The three node triangle has linear
shape functions and hence constant strain and stress. This element is referred to as the
constant strain triangle. The four node element has slightly better response than the
three node element. The six node triangle has quadratic shape functions and linear
stress and strain. The eight and nine node element has better response than the six node
element. FB-MultiPier uses a nine node version for the membrane (in-plane) stresses.
13.2 Plate Element

True plate elements do not include in-plane effects. In-plane effects are handled by
membrane elements. Similarly in a beam element the bending and axial effects are un-
coupled. This is the same in two dimensions. These two elements are commonly merged
to get a complete in and out-of plane element referred to as a Flat Shell Element. We will
discuss a true plate element before discussing the flat shell elements used in FB-
MultiPier. To do this we must cover a small amount of theory.

There are two common versions of plate theory used in finite elements: Kirchoff and
Mindlin. Kirchoff plate bending theory is derived in a similar fashion to beam bending
but includes bending in both directions. The derivation assumes that the normal dis-
placement, vertical displacement w, controls. In Kirchoff theory the rotation, Θ, in the
plate is the derivative of w. This is the same as beam theory. This means that shear
deformations are ignored. In Mindlin theory, shear is included and the rotation is the
sum of the derivative of w and the shear angle. FB-MultiPier uses a Mindlin formulation.

The results from all plate elements consist of moments. Some plate elements also give
the transverse shear, Q, as a result. It is important to note that the moments and shear
results are per unit length of plate. The following figure (Figure: 13.2.a) gives the sign
convention for moment and shear results.
 Figure: 13.2.a Plate Bending Moment Sign Conventions

Note:
M1 represents flexural moment about the local Yp-axis where bending occurs. Positive
M1 (as shown in Figure: 13.2.a) causes tension at the top surface of the plate. S13 rep-
resents shear force acting out-of-plane along the edges parallel to the local Zp-axis. Unit
of M1, M2, and M12 is moment per unit length, e.g., in-kip/in. Unit of S13, and S23 is force
per unit length, e.g., kip/in.

Flat Plate elements can be found in three to nine node versions, just like the membrane
elements (see Figure: 13.2.b below). The same concepts of shape function order are true
for the plates as well as for the membrane. Three node triangular plates model con-
stant moments exactly. Nine node elements model linear moments with some second
order effects. It is important to note that in plates, moments are equivalent to stress
and curvature is equivalent to strain, in terms of modeling. In other words, we need
more elements in a high moment gradient area for plates.
 Figure: 13.2.b Common Flat Plate Configurations

13.3 Flat Shell Elements

Shell elements combine the effects of plate bending and in-plane (membrane) effects.
There exist formulations for both flat and curved shell elements. The curved element for-
mulation is a much more complicated derivation. The flat shell however can be con-
sidered to be merely the addition of the membrane and flat plate elements (see Figure:
13.3.a below). This is the most common form of shell element found.

Figure: 13.3.a Flat Shell Element as a Combination of Membrane and Plate Element

The flat shell element can be used to model structures where both bending and stretch-
ing effects need to be considered. Many small flat shell elements can be used to form
curved surfaces. The modeling of bridge decks, wide flange beams and curved shell
structures are three such structures where flat shell elements are commonly used.
 Figure: 13.3.b Common Applications of Flat Shell Elements

FB-MultiPier uses nine node Mindlin flat shell elements for the pile cap.

13.4 Mindlin Theory

Mindlin theory includes shear deformations. As a result, the normal to the surface
shear does not remain normal. Likewise, the derivative of the shape function for the
normal displacement w(x,y) is not equal to the slope. In Mindlin theory the slope of the
surface is the sum of the derivative of w(x,y) and the shear angle change. Figure: 13.4.a
below shows the relationship between the displacement w(x,y), shear angle γ and the
derivative of the displacement.

Figure: 13.4.a Mindlin Plate Theory

This sum of angles to get the total rotation implies that different shape functions can
be used for the displacement w and the rotations (Θx , Θy). This is the most common
formulation found in flat plate and shell elements used in current computer programs.
This means there will not be rotational continuity across elements boundaries (since
shear exists). Hence the elements are considered to be C0 elements. The following figure
(Figure: 13.4.b) shows this lack of continuity across elements.

Figure: 13.4.b Lack of Rotational Continuity for Mindlin Plate Theory

In either case, the pure plate bending element has three DOF per node; the normal dis-
placement w and the out of plane rotations (Θx , Θy). These are shown in Figure: 13.4.c
below.

Figure: 13.4.c Plate Degrees of Freedom

13.5 Generalized Stress and Strain

In plate theory, most derivations refer to the equations for generalized stress and
strain. This is because the equations for plate behavior can be converted to the form:

Eqn: 13.5.A

Where E* is a modified constitutive matrix. Notice that this is just like the equation for
stress and strain except we have moments and curvature. In plates, the displacement
unknowns are the normal displacement and the two rotations. Following the analogy of
generalized stress, moments are equivalent to stress and curvature is equivalent to
strain. This means when using these elements in modeling, we treat the moment gradi-
ent like we would stress to determine the level of shape function and number of ele-
ments required for an accurate analysis. In addition, the difference in moment at a
common node between two elements indicates the adequateness of the mesh.

13.6 Special Element for FB-MultiPier

Neither the membrane nor the plate element offer normal rotational stiffness. This
means that pile torsion would not be transmitted to the pile cap using a standard ele-
ment formulation. To account for this torsional force transfer, special normal rotational
stiffness terms have been incorporated into the shell element formulation. The stiffness
is calculated based on an equivalent beam formulation using the tributary area of the
pier cap over each pile. This is an approximate method offering good transfer for thick
pile caps.

Using the above formulation, the Zp rotational degree of freedom becomes active for
corner nodes of pile cap shell elements. Note, however, that the Zp rotation degree of
freedom is not active for the mid-side and center nodes of pile cap shell elements.
The second enhancement is the use of an eight point gauss integration scheme for the
element. The eight point scheme is a reduced integration scheme offering good shear
integration while avoiding locking problems. The eight point scheme is tuned for the
pile problem so that zero energy modes are removed while still retaining good element
flexibility.

13.7 Mesh Correctness and Convergence

The accuracy of a finite element solution depends on the number of elements and the
order of the shape functions. As the number of elements increase, the piece-wise dis-
placement approximation approaches any true displacement field. Recall that two linear
elements provided a better response than a single linear element. Also, a single quad-
ratic element performs even better.

The stress results also follow the same pattern. More elements provide better stress res-
ults. However, since we only guarantee the continuity of the displacements, the stresses
are discontinuous. This means that at a node where two elements meet, the stresses do
not match. However, as the number of elements increase, the stresses between ele-
ments get closer. As an example, below is a plot of the stress along the top of the can-
tilever beam. The results are plotted for the four - four node membranes, the two nine
node membranes and the 40 - four node membranes.
 Figure: 13.7.a Stress Plot for Cantilever Beam

Notice that for the four - four node elements, the difference between the elements is
28%. This large percentage error indicates a poor mesh (or not enough elements). Look-
ing at the two - nine node model we see a closer difference. Here the error is 14.0%. This
indicates that the mesh is marginal but probably sufficient. Finally we look at the 40 ele-
ment model. Here the error is much better and only 3%. The 40 element model is very
good.

The difference in element stresses at a node is an important measure of model cor-

rectness. In general, we do not have the exact displacements in order to check our
model. Hence, the stress check is necessary to verify convergence of our model. If the dif-
ference in stresses between elements is small the finite element mesh is good.
14 Nonlinear Behavior

A discrete element formulation is used to model the nonlinear behavior of piles, pier
columns, and pier cap members in FB-MultiPier. The discrete element accounts for both
constitutive (i.e., material) and kinematic (i.e., geometric) nonlinear behavior. The non-
linear material behavior is modeled by integrating stress-strain curves over the cross-
section that is applicable to each element.

The nonlinear geometric behavior is modeled using P-delta moments (the product of
the axial force and relative displacements that occur across a given element). For
instances when pile, pier column, and pier cap members are discretized into a number
of sub-elements, P-y moments (the product of axial force and bending-induced internal
displacements within a given element) are also accounted for in the discrete element for-
mulation. Further, the element formulation automatically accounts for end fixity and
member level buckling.

1. Discrete Element Model

2. Stress-Strain Curves
3. Confined Concrete Model
4. Bi-axial Interaction Diagram
5. Nonlinear Solution Strategies

14.1 Discrete Element Model

The discrete element model (Mitchell 1973 and Andrade 1994) can be represented as a
mechanical model as shown in Figure: 14.1.a. The center bar can both twist and extend
but is otherwise rigid. The center bar is connected by two universal joints to two rigid
end blocks. The universal joints permit bending at the quarter points about the y and z
axes. Discrete deformational angle changes ψ1, ψ2, ψ3, ψ4 occur corresponding to the
bending moments M2, M1, M4, M3, respectively. A discrete axial shortening
corresponds to the axial thrust T and the torsional angle ψ5 corresponds to the torsional
moment in the center bar M5. Unlike element forces associated with other degrees of
freedom, torsional moment is uncoupled is treated as linear.

Figure: 14.1.a Discrete Element Model

Additional aspects of the discrete element model are discussed in the links provided
below.

1. Element Deformation Relations

2. Integration of Stresses
3. Element End Forces
4. Element Stiffness
14.1.1 Element Deformation Relations

In Figure: 14.1.a, w1 - w3 and w7 - w9 represent displacements in the x, y and z directions

at the left and right ends respectively, w4 and w10 represent axial twists (twists about the
x -axis) at the left and right ends, respectively, and w5-w6 and w11- w12 represent the
angles at the left and right end blocks about the x and z axes, respectively. Based on a
small displacement geometric analysis:

Eqn: 14.1.A

Eqn: 14.1.B

The elongation of the center section of the element is calculated as follows:

Eqn: 14.1.C

The angle changes for the center section about the z and y-axes are then defined below:

Eqn: 14.1.D

Eqn: 14.1.E

The discretized vertical and horizontal angle changes at the two universal joints are
then:

;
Eqn: 14.1.F
 ;
Eqn: 14.1.G

and the twist in the center part of the element is defined as:

Eqn: 14.1.H

Thus, the internal deformations of the discrete element model are uniquely defined for
any combination of element end displacements.

The curvature for small displacements at the left and right universal joints about the y
and the z axes are defined as follow:

At the left joint,

;
Eqn: 14.1.I

At the right joint,

;
Eqn: 14.1.J

The axial strain at the center of the section is given by:

Eqn: 14.1.K
14.1.2 Integration of Stresses

Consider a beam subjected to both bending and axial loads. It is assumed that the
strains vary linearly over the area of the cross-section. This assumption enables the
strain components due to bending about the z and y-axes, and the axial strain, to be sep-
arated or combined using superposition. Examples of these three components are rep-
resented separately in Figure: 14.1.b -(a-c) and combined in Figure: 14.1.b -d. Also
shown in Figure: 14.1.b -d is a differential force, dFi, acting on a differential area, dAi. Fin-
ally Figure: 14.1.b-e represents the stress-strain relationship for the material.

Figure: 14.1.b Linear Strain Distribution over Square Cross-Section

Then
Eqn: 14.1.L

And, to satisfy equilibrium:

Eqn: 14.1.M

Eqn: 14.1.N

Eqn: 14.1.O

The relationship for strain at any point in the cross-section is:

Eqn: 14.1.P

The stress at any location in the section is found using the appropriate material stress-
strain curve described subsequently.

Numerical integration of equations is done using Gaussian Quadrature. To use the

method of Gaussian Quadrature, the function being integrated must be evaluated at
those points specified by the position factors. These values are then multiplied by the
appropriate weighting factors and the products accumulated. Figure: 14.1.c shows a
square section with 25 integration points (a 5x5 mesh). The number of defaults integ-
ration points for square pile is set at 49 (a 7 by 7 mesh). For circular sections, the section
is divided into circular sections (12 radial divisions and 5 circumferential divisions as
shown in Figure: 14.1.d). The sections are integrated at the centroid of each sector using
weighting factors of 1.0. The stress in all steel bars is evaluated at the centroid and a
weighting factor of 1 is used for each bar.
Figure: 14.1.c Section Integration Divisions - Cross Section of square pile showing integ-
ration points
 Figure: 14.1.d Section Integration Divisions - Circular pile cross section showing steel
rebars

When a circular void is encountered in a square section, the force is first computed on
the un-voided section and then the force that would be acting on the voided circular
area is computed and subtracted from the force computed for the non-void section. Cir-
cular sections with voids are divided into sectors omitting the voided portion.

Even for nonlinear material analysis, the torsional moment M5 is assumed to be a linear
function of the angle of twist, Ψ5, and the torsional stiffness GJ, where J is the torsional
constant and G is the shear modulus as shown next

Eqn: 14.1.Q
14.1.3 Element End Forces

From equilibrium of the center bar (see Figure: 14.1.a):

Eqn: 14.1.R

Eqn: 14.1.S

And from equilibrium of the end bars:

; ; ;
Eqn: 14.1.T

;
Eqn: 14.1.U

; ; ;
Eqn: 14.1.V

;
Eqn: 14.1.W

where f1- f3 and f7 - f9 are the acting end forces, and f4 - f6 and f10 - f 12 are the end
moments.
14.1.4 Element Stiffness

Using the standard definition, the stiffness of an element having n degrees of freedom
(d.o.f.) is a square matrix [K] of order n in which Kij is the force necessary in the i-th d.o.f.
to produce a unit deflection of the j-th d.o.f. The secant stiffness computed is the stiff-
ness that the members would have if each of the integration points had the secant stiff-
ness defined by dividing the present stress by the present strain as shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 14.1.eSecant Stiffness for Nonlinear Stress-Strain

During the iteration process the element stiffness matrix is reevaluated in each new
deformed position. For each iteration, initially the secant stiffness is stored at all integ-
ration points within an element. Then on 12 subsequent passes a unit displacement is
applied to each element degree of freedom in turn keeping all other displacements as
zero and the forces corresponding to that unit displacement are calculated by integ-
rating the stresses over the cross-section of the element as described earlier. The pre-
viously stored secant moduli at each of the Gaussian integration points are used in this
integration of stresses. The element end forces thus computed would be the nth column
of the stiffness matrix corresponding to a case where the nth degree of freedom has a
unit displacement imposed, all other displacements being held to zero.

14.2 Stress-Strain Curves

The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the
default values described below.

1. Concrete
2. Mild Steel
3. High Strength Prestressing Steels
4. Adjustment for Prestressing

Note: Extrapolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those
provided in the stress-strain curve.
14.2.1 Concrete

The figure below shows the default stress-strain curve used by FB-MultiPier in determ-
ining internal demands for concrete portions of member sections in nonlinear analyses.
The function values are dependent upon f'c and Ec, as input by the user. Note that this
stress-strain model incorporates tension stiffening, and is applicable for unconfined nor-
mal weight concrete with compressive strengths of approximately 41 MPa (6,000 psi) or
less (MacGregor and Wight 2005).
The tensile portion of the curve is assumed as linear up to a stress of fr. Piece-wise linear
tension softening is modeled out to a tensile strain of 0.002, and no tensile stress con-
tribution is modeled for tensile strains greater than 0.002. The tension softening portion
of the stress-strain curve is intended to account for the uncracked portions of in-tension
concrete sections, which are capable of carrying some non-zero level of tensile stress.
The value of fr is based on the fixed value of εr shown in the figure below, and the mod-
ulus of elasticity Ec input by the user. For English units this will give a value of fr of 7.5
√f'c.
The compression portion of the concrete curve is highly non-linear, and is defined by
the Modified Hognestad parabola. For compressive strains bounded between the strain
at peak compressive stress (ε0) and the ultimate compressive strain (εcu ), a linear des-
cending curve segment is employed. For any members that generate compressive strain
levels exceeding εcu , the stress level is estimated using linear extrapolation. For
instances where such large compressive strain levels are reached (or for other instances
where the default curve may not be applicable), users are recommended to supply a
user-defined stress-strain curve. Additionally, confined concrete model is available.
Figure: 14.2.a Default Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete
14.2.2 Mild Steel

For mild steel reinforcement the stress-strain relationship is assumed to be elastic-

plastic and similar in both tension and compression. A yield strain εy is computed based
on the yield stress, fy and the modulus of elasticity input Es,

Eqn: 14.2.A

The default relations for the mild steel stress-strain curve are given by,

Eqn: 14.2.B

Eqn: 14.2.C

Eqn: 14.2.D

The default stress-strain curve generated for steel with f'y=60 ksi and Ec=29600 ksi is
shown in the figure below.
Figure: 14.2.b Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve for Fy = 60 ksi.
14.2.3 High Strength Prestressing Steels

The figure in mild steel shows reinforcing as rebars. However, the user may select high
strength reinforcing strands as well as rebars. The stress-strain curves for prestressing
steels generally do not have a definite yield point as illustrated by the curve for fsu =
270 ksi in the figure below. The most common values of fsu used in prestressing prac-
tice are fsu = 250 ksi and 270 ksi. For these two input values when using standard (Eng-
lish) Units, the curves defined by the PCI Design Handbook (PCI 1992) will be used. For
other strengths or when using nonstandard units, the default curves will be obtained by
using non-dimensional equations based on curve fitting the two cited curves. These
curves are not recommended for use for values of fsu that fall outside of the range of
standard values.

Figure: 14.2.c Prestressing Steel Stress-strain Curve for fsu = 270 ksi.

14.2.4 Adjustment for Prestressing

When piles are prestressed prior to installation, there are stresses and strains existing at
the time of installation due to the prestressing. The program shifts the origin of the
stress-strain curve for the steel by the amount of the prestressing stress in the steel and
the corresponding steel strain. Also, the program shifts the origin of the concrete stress-
strain curve by the amount of compression in the concrete and the corresponding con-
crete strain. It is assumed that the prestressing is symmetrically placed and thus only a
constant compressive stress is developed in the concrete due to the prestressing.

14.3 Confined Concrete Model

Confinement options available in FB-MultiPier were introduced in "Circular Section Prop-

erties".

Introduction
Effective confinement has been shown to considerably enhance the compressive
strength and ductility of concrete. The strength and ductility enhancement from con-
finement of the concrete will of course cause corresponding increases in the axial and
flexural strength and ductility of reinforced concrete columns or piles. The confining
effect of the column or pile may be accomplished through the use of circular hoops,
spiral reinforcement, and an external steel jacket.

In the case of internal confinement i.e. spirals or circular hoops, the cover concrete will
be unconfined and will become ineffective after the maximum compressive strain of the
concrete has been attained, but the confined core will continue to carry stress at high
strains. The compressive stress-strain response used for the core and cover concrete are
those obtained by the Mander model (Mander et al. 1988) for confined and unconfined
concrete, respectively.
In the case of an external jacket, the jacket will provide confinement to the cover con-
crete and the inner concrete will be doubly confined by the jacket and the internal con-
finement due to the circular hoops or spirals. The compressive stress-strain response
used for the core and cover concrete are those obtained by the modified Mander model.
The Mander model was modified to account for confining effects associated with steel
jacketing, as documented in Priestly et al. (1996).
14.3.1 Mander Models for Confined Concrete

Both the Mander (Mander et al. 1988) and modified Mander (Priestley et al. 1996) mod-
els use the following equation for the longitudinal compressive stress of confined con-
crete:

Eqn: 14.3.A

where
f ’cc is the compressive strength of the of confined concrete

 x is given by:

Eqn: 14.3.B

The expression suggested for ε’cc increases linearly with f ’cc and is given by:

Eqn: 14.3.C

where
f ’co is the unconfined compressive stress of the concrete
ε’co is the unconfined concrete compressive strain, adopted as 0.002

The parameter r is given by:

Eqn: 14.3.D
 Figure: 14.3.a Confining Effect on Compressive Response of Concrete

Ec is the tangent modulus of elasticity for unconfined concrete and is given by:

Eqn: 14.3.E

A linear tension region is included in the stress-strain relationship, which follows the tan-
gent modulus of elasticity, Ec, up to a tensile strain of 0.0001316, where this strain level
is consistent with the default concrete model in FB-MultiPier.

Esec is the secant modulus for confined concrete, defined with respect to f ’cc and ε’cc
and is given by:
Eqn: 14.3.F

For f ’cc, the confined concrete strength, Mander used the five-parameter failure cri-
terion proposed by William and Warnke and the tri-axial test data of Schickert and Wink-
ler. In the case of circular columns confined by circular hoops or spirals, the confined
concrete compressive stress has been shown to be:

Eqn: 14.3.G
where 
f ’l is effective confining pressure, and may be obtained from the equilibrium of internal
forces acting on the dissected sections shown in Figure: 14.3.b.

For the cover concrete in columns, assuming uniform yield of the jacket, the equilibrium
of forces requires:

Eqn: 14.3.H

where
f ’lj is the lateral confining pressure acting on the cover concrete
Dj is the outside diameter of the steel jacket
tj is the thickness of the steel jacket
fyj is the yield strength of the steel jacket
 Figure: 14.3.b Confining Action of Steel Jacket and Internal Hoops [4]

The confining ratio for the steel jacket is defined as:

Eqn: 14.3.I

Substituting into Eqn: 14.3.H we obtain

Eqn: 14.3.J

By using f ’l = f ’lj in Eqn: 14.3.G, the compressive strength of the cover concrete con-
fined by the steel jacket can be determined.

Additional confinement is provided to the concrete core by the transverse rein-

forcement. The additional lateral pressure, f ’lh , may also be determined from the equi-
librium of forces. Assuming uniform yield of the transverse steel yields the following
equation:

Eqn: 14.3.K

where
ds is the diameter of the concrete core defined along the center line of the confining
steel
s is the vertical spacing of the transverse steel
fyh is the yield strength of the transverse reinforcement
Ash is the cross-sectional area of the transverse steel

The confinement effectiveness coefficient, ke, is defined as:

Eqn: 14.3.L

where
Ae  is the area of an effectively confined concrete core

Eqn: 14.3.M

where  
Ac is the core area of the section
ρcc is the ratio of the area of longitudinal reinforcement to the confined area of the con-
crete core of the section Ac, i.e.:

Eqn: 14.3.N

where  
As  is the total longitudinal steel area .

By assuming an arching action between circular hoops in the form of a second -degree
parabola with an initial tangent slope of 45o, the confinement effectiveness ratio has
been shown to be:

Eqn: 14.3.O

where
s’ is the clear distance between the hoop.
Similarly, the confinement effectiveness coefficient for a circular spiral has been shown
to be:

Eqn: 14.3.P

By introducing ρs as the ratio of the volume of transverse confining steel to the volume
of confined concrete i.e.:

Eqn: 14.3.Q
 Figure: 14.3.c Definition of Confinement Effectiveness Coefficient [4]

Eqn: 14.3.R

The lateral confining pressure due to transverse steel in Eqn: 14.3.J may be written as:

Eqn: 14.3.S
Thus using f ’l =f ’lj + f ’lh in Eqn: 14.3.G will allow the enhanced compressive strength of
the concrete core to be determined.

Basic assumptions for flexural resistance are given in AASHTO 5.6.2.1, with con-
siderations for confined sections. It is stated therein that the maximum usable strains
exceeding 0.003 may be used in computing nominal flexural resistance, if verified. For
the purposes of computing interaction diagrams of confined sections in FB-MultiPier, a
conservative approach is taken:
1. For sections that are confined using only hoops or spirals, the limiting strain value of
0.003 is utilized when forming load-moment interaction diagrams.
2. For sections that are confined using casing (both CFT and RCFT sections), the limiting
strain value recommended in Bjerkeli et al. (1990) is utilized when forming load-
moment interaction diagrams (Figure: 14.3.d). In the Bjerkeli et al. (1990) formulation, fu
is designated as the maximum compression stress achieved, and εu is designated as the
corresponding strain. In FB-MultiPier, the stress-strain curve associated with the out-
ermost concrete is utilized in defining the limiting compressive strain (again, con-
servatively taken as εu ). The approach implemented in FB-MultiPier produces limiting
compressive strain values that agree with values computed using other empirical for-
mulations (e.g., Scott et al; 1982) for reinforcement ratios of approximately 1%.
 Figure: 14.3.d Depiction of εu given in Bjerkeli et al. (1990)

Note: In contrast to formation of load-moment interaction diagrams, the full stress-

strain curve defined for a given material is utilized in solving for internal forces and dis-
placements.
14.3.2 Unconfined Concrete

For the concrete outside the inner core when a steel shell is not used , the unconfined
condition may be simulated by setting the lateral confinement pressure equal to zero, i.e
f’l = 0. The following simplifications can be made to the prior equations:

Eqn: 14.3.T

Eqn: 14.3.U

Eqn: 14.3.V

Eqn: 14.3.W

It is assumed that the stress-strain curve for unconfined concrete follows Eqn: 14.3.X dur-
ing the earlier stages of loading up to 2ε’co. Also, a linear tension region is included in
the stress-strain relationship, which maintains the same modulus as the initial com-
pressive portion of the curve, up to a tensile strain of 0.0001316. This limiting tensile
strain is consistent with the default concrete model in FB-MultiPier.

For compressive strains larger than 2ε’co, the strains are assumed to decrease linearly
with strains up to the spalling strain εsp. A value of 0.005 has been adopted for εsp. The
longitudinal compressive stress for unconfined concrete may be written as:

For εc <= 2ε’co,

Eqn: 14.3.X
For 2ε’co < εc<= εsp,

Eqn: 14.3.Y

For εc > εsp

Eqn: 14.3.Z
14.3.3 Reinforcement

To avoid congestion of reinforcement, earlier design practices tended to use large dia-
meter bars, up to #14 or #18, however, such practice may lead to potential bond prob-
lems in cases where the column main reinforcement were lapped at insufficient length
with starter bars in the plastic hinge regions. Consequently, such columns are char-
acterized by very rapid flexural strength degradation under the design seismic loads.
The current Caltrans (1981) approach has been to avoid lap splicing of the main rein-
forcement in the potential plastic hinge region of bridge columns. The analytical model
developed here assumes full yield of the main reinforcement including strain hardening.
14.3.4 Longitudinal Reinforcement

The monotonic uniaxial stress-strain curve of a typical reinforcing steel is shown by an

elastic region, a yield plateau, a strain hardening region, followed by a falling branch
after peak stress up to the strain at which fracture occurs. A typical stress-strain curve
for the reinforcing steel is shown in Figure: 14.3.e.

The monotonic uniaxial stress strain curve for reinforcing steel is defined by the fol-
lowing equations:

For the elastic range, i.e. εs <= εy

Eqn: 14.3.AA

Where
εs is the axial strain in the reinforcing steel
fs is the stress in the reinforcing steel
Es is the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcing steel

For the yield plateau, i.e. εy < εs < εsh  ,

Eqn: 14.3.AB

where
εsh is the axial strain at the on-set of strain hardening
fy is the yield stress of the reinforcing steel
 Figure: 14.3.e Mild Steel Stress-Strain Curve (Priestley et al. 1996)

For the strain-hardening range, i.e. εsh <= εs< εsu

Eqn: 14.3.AC

where
εsu is the ultimate strain in the reinforcing steel
fsu is the ultimate stress in the reinforcing steel and

Eqn: 14.3.AD
Eqn: 14.3.AE

It has been shown by Mizra and MacGregor (1979) that the ratio of ultimate to yield
strength was fsu /fy = 1.55. The steel model adopted for the program assumes a mod-
ulus of elasticity of 29,000 ksi and a slightly lower ultimate to yield strength ratio of
1.50. The other mechanical properties assumed for the stress strain model are:

For all grades of steel,

Eqn: 14.3.AF

Eqn: 14.3.AG

where
fyl is equal to 40 for ksi units. This would be converted to any other consistent set of
units

The above equations are non-dimensional, allowing the model to be used with any
grade steel. They were obtained by interpolating from the values given by (Priestley et
al. 1996) for 40 and 60 ksi steel.

It should be noted that the tangent modulus at the onset of strain hardening may be
obtained by taking the derivative of Eqn: 14.3.AC with respect to steel strain, εs and oper-
ated at the strain-hardening strain, εsh :

Eqn: 14.3.AH
14.3.5 Transverse Reinforcement

Closely spaced transverse reinforcement in regions of severe inelastic actions will main-
tain the integrity of the concrete core and increase the rotational capacity of the column.
Maintaining the integrity of the core also allows higher shear forces to be resisted by
the concrete. The potential shear failure plane must intersect a large quantity of trans-
verse reinforcement, which increases the shear resistance. Lateral stability of the lon-
gitudinal reinforcement is improved by the presence of the closely spaced hoops or
spiral reinforcement. The hoops or spiral acts as anti-buckling ties to allow full com-
pression yield of the mild steel to be developed. The integrity of the core and mild steel
ensures the vertical load carrying capacity of the column after a severe earthquake.

The effective use of the transverse reinforcement also requires careful detailing of spir-
als or hoops. Current usage may entail welding at the lap splices of the spiral or hoop,
or bending back of these bars into the concrete core for anchorage in order to develop
full yield capacity. Design practice prefers the use of since fewer anchorages are
required for spirals when compared to hoops. The transverse reinforcement in earlier
design practice, however was often anchored with lap splices in the plastic hinge
regions where serious spalling of the cover concrete is expected. The loss of cover con-
crete may initiate unwinding of the spirals or hoops and renders the transverse rein-
forcement ineffective. The model used here assumes full development of the transverse
steel strength at the ultimate condition.
14.3.6 Steel Jacket

The role of the steel jacket for a column is similar to that of the transverse rein-
forcement. The jacket prevents the spalling of cover concrete and allows the devel-
opment of large compressive strains in the mild steel without buckling. The shear
strength of the encased region is also enhanced.

Although the commercially available structural steel for steel jackets has yield strengths
ranging from 36 ksi to 50 ksi or higher, the level of confining pressure required does
not generally require yield strength greater than 36 ksi. Suitable steel for the jacket is
the A36 hot-rolled, which has relatively low carbon content (from 0.25 to 0.29%). The
low carbon content provides a good welding property, which is important for on-site
welding of the steel jacket.

Grout
The propensity for shafts with casing to robustly exhibit composite behavior is sup-
ported by experimental research (NCHRP 2018). Therefore, it is assumed that the steel
jacket is fully bonded to the reinforced concrete column to facilitate composite action. It
is further assumed that the strength of the grout is the same as that of the concrete
column.

Voids in members
While voids are allowed in the general analysis procedures used in FB-MultiPier, the
reduction in the beneficial effects of confinement due to voids in columns and piles are
not considered in the Mander and modified Mander models used FB-MultiPier.

Examples
Several example columns are analyzed and comparisons are made between the exper-
imental results, the results obtained from FB-MultiPier program with those produced by
the COLRET computer program.
In the analysis performed with FB-MultiPier, to achieve the large post yield dis-
placements on the flat portion of the P-D curves, a spring was placed at the tip of the
column.

The force plotted is the force absorbed by the column attached to the spring. This is a
technique called displacement control.
14.3.7 Full-Scale Column without Steel Casing

The example used in the comparison was a full scale (60" diameter) flexure column
tested by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (Stone and Cheok, 1989).
The column represents the current ductile design for bridge columns. The design details
for the column are described in Table below. The test column was subjected to an axial
compression force of 1000 kips and a lateral cyclic displacement of increasing amp-
litudes until failure of the column.

Table: 14.3.A Design details for Full-Scale Flexure Column

Diameter D 60"
Height L’ 30'
cover to main bar 4"
Concrete Strength f’co 5.2 ksi
Longitudinal Steel 25 #14
Yield Strength fy 68.9 ksi
Transverse Steel #5 Spiral at 3.5"
Yield Strength fyh 71.5 ksi
Axial Force 1000 kips
 Figure: 14.3.f Force Deformation Curve for Full Scale Column

The force deformation curve for the full-scale column is given in the figure above. As
can be seen from the figure, the data from FB-MultiPier program is generally close to
both the COLRET values and the experimental data. For the majority of the curve the FB-
MultiPier values are less than the COLRET values. Also, it is noted that the initial stiffness
of the response is higher from the CORLET than obtained from the FB-MultiPier Ana-
lysis and the measured response.
14.3.8 Half Scale Column With Steel Retrofitting Jacket

The second example analyzed for comparison purposes was a test column with a 24"
diameter. It is retrofitted with a steel sleeve that has a length of 48 inches. The design
details for the column are shown in the table below. 

Table: 14.3.B Design details for Column With Steel Jacket

Diameter D 24"
Height L’ 12'
Cover to Main Bar 4"
Concrete Strength f’co 5.2 ksi
Longitudinal Steel 26 #6
Yield Strength fy 45.7 ksi
Transverse Steel #2 hoops at 5 in.
Yield Strength fyh 51.0 ksi
Length of Jacket 48"
Thickness of Jacket .188"
Yield strength of Jacket 47 ksi
Axial Force 400 kips
 Figure: 14.3.g Force Deformation Curve for Jacketed Column

The force-deformation curve for the jacketed column is given in the figure above. Look-
ing at the results, we can see that FB-MultiPier provides a close estimation of the exper-
imental and COLRET curves until the post yield region of curve where we see a
reduction in the lateral load capacity predicted by FB-MultiPier in comparison to the
experimental and COLRET values. It is also noted that the CORLET program show
slightly greater strengths than that for the test.
14.3.9 Discussion

A model for the prediction of the non-linear response of circular concrete piles with con-
finement has been presented. More details on the model are available in Stone and
Cheok (1989) .

This model has been incorporated into FB-MultiPier to facilitate modeling of concrete
members confined by hoops, spirals, and/or a steel jacket.

In the comparative studies conducted, the FB-MultiPier results show generally less of an
increase in strength and ductility than those given by the COLRET program. This is due
to the following differences between the FB-MultiPier program and the CORLET pro-
gram:

1. 14.3.1 computing the maximum concrete strain, εcu , whereas COLRET uses a more
complex procedure that was only documented for grade 40 and grade 60 steel. FB-
MultiPier is more conservative, and is applicable for any grade of steel.
2. The COLRET program assumes the entire area contained within a diameter ds is con-
fined in integrating the stresses over the column area, whereas FB-MultiPier con-
servatively uses only the effectively confined area of the core.
3. In the case of an external steel jacket, the longitudinal stiffness of the jacket may (or
may not) be neglected, at the discretion of the engineer. For the analysis results presen-
ted, the stiffness was neglected, whereas for the confined model in the COLRET pro-
gram, steel jacket stiffness is taken into account.

The above three differences promote conservatism in FB-MultiPier.

14.4 Interaction Diagrams

Assumptions and Features for the Biaxial Interaction Diagram

The strength routines compute section strength under axial force and internal bending
moments about the two principle axes for a prestressed or non-prestressed reinforced
concrete and steel cross sections which can be used for both columns or piles. The ana-
lysis routine computes the section moments, Mnz and Mny, and axial force, Pn and mul-
tiplies these by the appropriate strength reduction (φ) factors which are discussed later
for steel and concrete.

It is assumed that the user inputs the appropriate factored loads (service-level loads
times load factors). The analysis routines then compute the factored moments, Muz and
Muy , and axial force, Pu , acting at each section. The strength routines indicate whether
the section is adequate or not adequate. This information can be displayed graphically
on an interaction diagram of moments for a given level of axial force or found in the out-
put as a single factor, called a Demand/Capacity ratio, DC. The details of how the DC is
calculated will be discussed later. If the DC is less than or equal to one, this indicates the
section is safe for the applied factored moments and axial force.

The interaction diagram routines do not consider any long column or stability effects
that are important for slender members. However, if the nonlinear analysis option is
selected for the piles and the structure, then the slenderness effects through the PΔ and
Py moments are considered in the computation of the factored axial force and moments
as discussed earlier. Thus the direct use of the interaction diagrams using the linear ana-
lysis option for the piles and structure could be very unsafe for slender members. The
option to use the interaction diagrams and linear analysis of the piles and structure is
provided for preliminary design phases and must not be used for a final design.

Also it should be noted that the nonlinear analysis procedures while very thorough may
not reflect all of the criteria required for design of slender structures in appropriate
codes. A list of factors that may affect the final design that are not considered in the ana-
lysis are as follows:

1) Creep in concrete.
2) Initial imperfections or out of straightness of members.
3) Residual stresses.
4) A separate analysis phi factor to account for the possibility of undersized members.
All of the factors could potentially increase the defections and thus the PΔ and Py
moments above those given by the nonlinear analysis routines and should be accoun-
ted for by the designer as appropriate.

The routine operates by computing numerous horizontal slices of the Pn , Mnx, Mny (nom-
inal strength) interaction surface. The result is a series of Mnx, Mny interaction curves for
various magnitudes of axial load, Pn . Next, each interaction curve is represented in the
form.

Eqn: 14.4.A

If it is desired to reconstruct the 3D failure surface, then the α and β terms for each quad-
rant can be utilized. These terms are found among the XML output. The terms adhere to
the following mapping, with respect to the element local 2-3 axes:
- Quadrant 1: +M3, -M2
- Quadrant 2: -M3, -M2
- Quadrant 3: -M3, +M2
- Quadrant 4: +M3, +M2

The moments M0z and M0y represent the nominal moment strength at axial load, Pn , for
uni-axial bending about the z and y axes respectively. The exponents, α and β are com-
puted in by the least squares method. They enable the above expression to fit the com-
puted interaction curve, and vary with axial load. The actual DC is computed, by
interpolation for the axial force Pu /φ using the stored values of axial force and expo-
nents, α and β. The program then computes the parameter, DC, as; the ratio of the
length of the vector for the actual forces (in 3-d space – Mux, Muy and P) divided by the
length of the vector with the same direction as the actual results but with that vector
touching the 3-D failure surface. This has the effect of assuming that the moments and
axial load will increase proportionally until failure.

Note that the routines handle square, rectangular or circular sections with prestressed
or non-prestressed steel and H-piles that themselves may be encased in concrete. The
capabilities and limitations of sections were discussed in detail earlier in the User Guide.
The interaction diagrams for all sections that contain concrete are handled in a similar
manner and will be discussed next. Then the case of the H-pile section without concrete
will be discussed last.

Sections with Reinforced or Prestressed Concrete

The routine assumes a planar strain distribution across the section. The criterion for sec-
tion failure is that the concrete reaches the crushing strain εcu (εcu = -0.003 in/in) at one
corner of the section. This conservatively ignores any effect of the ties or spiral rein-
forcement on the compressive strength or crushing strain of the concrete.

All tensile stresses in the concrete are neglected. This includes both tension in uncracked
regions and tension stiffening in cracked regions.

Considerations for AASHTO (LRFD)

The design of a perfectly axially loaded column is not permitted in AASHTO (LRFD). A
certain minimum eccentricity of load must always be included. This is accomplished by
limiting the applied factored axial force, Pu , to a factor times P0, where P0 is the nominal
capacity of the section in an axially loaded column. For a tied column, this maximum
load is 0.8φP0, while for a column with spiral reinforcement the maximum load is
0.85φP0. When a factored load, Pu , larger than these limits is input to the routine, the
routine responds that the section is inadequate.

The routine also includes a maximum axial tension for a section based on all the mild
steel bars attaining the yield stress fy for mild steel and all the prestressing strands
attaining the ultimate stress fsu . If the factored Pu exceeds this maximum tension force
the routine responds that the section is inadequate.

Solutions for α and β for approximately 30 points between the maximum compressive
and tensile forces are attempted. The values of axial force are obtained for strains in the
extreme bar farthest away from the corner of the section where limiting (tensile and
compressive) reinforcement (mild and prestressed) strains are taken in accordance with
those values given in Sec. 5.7.2.1 of the AASHTO LRFD code.
The strength reduction factor, φ, is determined according to the unified requirements
for prestressed and nonprestressed concrete of AASHTO (LRFD). In these requirements,
the magnitude of φ is based on the net tensile strain occurring in the most heavily
strained steel bar or strand when the nominal strength of the section is attained (when
the concrete crushes). The net tensile strain is that portion of the steel strain associated
with the development of tensile strain in the concrete adjacent to the steel bar or strand.
For nonprestressed steel, the net tensile strain is exactly the total strain in the steel. For
prestressed steel, the net tensile strain is the total strain in the steel minus the sum of
the effective prestress strain in the steel and the effective prestress strain in the concrete
adjacent to the steel. The latter term can be thought of as the decompression strain.

The factor φ can be obtained for net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel in non-
prestressed reinforcement by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression con-
trolled reinforcement strain limit εcl) to 0.90 (at tension controlled strain limit εtl).
Whereas the factor φ for prestressed reinforcement can be obtained for net tensile
strain in extreme steel by linearly interpolating between 0.75 (at compression controlled
strain limit εcl) to 1.00 (at tension controlled strain limit εtl). (Refer to Sec. 5.5.4.2.1 in the
AASHTO LRFD code).

Steel-Only Sections
Interaction diagrams of steel sections such as H-pile and pipe pile sections are based on
development of the full plastic section. Steel code requirements for local buckling effects
must be checked for design purposes.

H-piles
H-piles embedded in concrete are treated as if fully bonded to the concrete and are thus
treated just as if they were an equivalent group of a large number of small rectangular
reinforcing bars.

Interaction diagrams for H-piles that are not embedded in concrete are calculated under
the following assumption: the cross section can undergo full plastic section behavior. As
a consequence of this assumption, the engineer should independently check that local
buckling effects will not adversely affect the behavior of the member under the applied
loads. Given the assumption of full plastic section, a range of axial forces (with 30 data
points) is obtained by locating the neutral axis in successive positions across the depth
of the section.
14.4.1 Demand/Capacity Ratio for Cross Sections

FB-MultiPier calculates the demand/capacity ratio for each cross section used in the ana-
lysis. The Demand/Capacity ratio as well as the interaction diagram are only calculated
when full cross sections are specified (either linear with full cross section or nonlinear).
The Demand/Capacity ratio is an estimate of the percentage of the cross sections' capa-
city that has been reached for that particular loading state. The Demand/Capacity ratio is
calculated as the length of the vector for the current load state divided by the length of
the vector when it pierces the failure surface.

Figure: 14.4.a Biaxial-Moment Interaction Diagram calculations for Demand/Capacity

Ratio

The actual result vector is the current set of forces that the cross section is experiencing
due to the applied load. The surface piercing vector length assumes that the applied
loads will be increased proportionally until the cross section fails. This assumption
implies that the result state (P,Mx,My) will also increase proportionally until the cross sec-
tion fails. As a result, the surface piercing point is found by extending the length of the
result vector along its known direction until it pierces the failure surface.
Typically, a cross section Demand/Capacity ratio is calculated by taking the Mx-My dia-
gram for a constant axial load P. This is equivalent to the shaded slice of the 3-D failure
surface. Then the Demand\Capacity ratio is calculated as the (Mx,My) vector length
divided by the point at which the extended vector will touch the failure curve. This
assumes that the axial load will remain constant. While conservative, it is not very real-
istic. In indeterminate structures, all forces interact and in order for the moments to
increase, the axial load must also increase. For pile groups, this is caused by the frame
action of the group which changes the axial load in the piles due to a changed lateral
load.

14.5 Nonlinear Solution Strategies

A program such as FB-MultiPier, which takes nonlinearity into account can be used to
provide some very good models of physical behavior. However, the use of nonlinear
analysis programs implies that the user understand the nonlinear models very thor-
oughly. The nonlinear models are described in the program documentation and it is
assumed that the user is familiar with these. However, the user should also understand
that the use of the nonlinear characteristics of the program may cause the program to
be unable to converge on a solution for a particular loading and that in some cases
described later, nonlinear programs may converge on a mathematical solution that isn’t
physically reasonable.

A novice user may then be tempted to say that one should stick to linear programs and
avoid such difficulty. However, the counter argument can be made that a linear analysis
will almost always find a solution even if the user puts in a totally unreasonable loading.

For the sake of discussion, assume that a relatively simple structure is being modeled by
FB-MultiPier, perhaps even a single pile cap with one or two piles with some vertical
load applied which is held constant and then a lateral load is applied gradually. Several
different scenarios of lateral load versus lateral displacement are possible as shown in
the following figure.
 Figure: 14.5.a Different Types of Load Displacement Response

The most desirable nonlinear response of the structure is shown as case 1. The load dis-
placement response starts to soften at about point a or b, reaches a peak load at c and
has an essentially flat top that show very good ductility. This is primarily due to yielding
of the structure at several locations in the piles possibly combined with similar action in
some of the supporting soil layers. However, if the user should put in a load above that
corresponding to point c, it is obvious that a solution will not be found. Likewise if a load
near c is tried, it is possible that the solution will be very slow to converge and may fail if
a large number of iterations are not allowed.

This failure to converge can be avoided by doing a preliminary linear pile analysis and
then checking the strength ratios of the pile to see if they are all less than 1. However,
the capacities of the soils springs should be considered as well. It should also be noted
that solutions may be found where the pile strength ratios are greater than 1.0. This is
primarily because the analysis program does not use capacity reduction factors as are
used in generating the strength ratios.

The response indicated by case 2 is not as good as shown in case 1. The difference is
that some element in the soil or the pile has a very limited ductility and causes the col-
lapse of the structure before sufficient ductility is obtained. As examples, a section of the
pile could be under reinforced and fail when cracking or a section could be over rein-
forced and fail when the concrete fails in compression without adequate yielding of the
steel. Numerous other causes are possible such as premature shear failure and the
designer must insure that these failure modes do not prevent adequate ductile
response, since they are not considered in the analysis. As in the type 1 response the
user may encounter difficulties when trying to apply loads near the level of the capacity.

Suppose the designer wants to demonstrate that the behavior is indeed type 1 versus
type 2. A push over analysis could be done and this requires a displacement-controlled
solution. A large spring would be placed at the node where the lateral load is applied
and then a series of large loads would be applied. The spring would take the larger
amount of the load but by properly choosing the spring stiffness and load, the dis-
placements could be controlled and the load absorbed by the structure could be found
and the pushover results plotted.

In rare instances the response of a structure may resemble that shown for case 3. Here
at a load near d the curve flattens and may even decrease. However, for increasingly
large displacements the load may start to rise again. It will be very difficult to obtain con-
verged solutions for loads near d. However, if a much larger load is applied a solution
may be found on the curve well above d. This type of behavior generally occurs when
some type of local failure occurs. If the structure has sufficient ductility it may then be
able to find a new path to distribute the forces and carry some additional load, albeit
with a considerable reduction in stiffness. An example of this type of behavior is when
the gravity loading is small and because of a large lateral load a pull out occurs on one
of the piles. The question then arises, should the design based on the post pull out beha-
vior be used?

Clearly the use of nonlinear analysis programs do not remove the responsibility of the
designer to monitor the local responses of the structure. Fortunately the program out-
puts detailed information about the behavior of the soil and pile that can and must be
reviewed before a structure can be said to be adequate.

Finally, case 4 in which the structure appears to move against the loads must be con-
sidered. For very slender structures with very large gravity loading, the stiffness of the
structure will go negative when the elastic buckling loading of the structure is exceeded.
Again this is a rare case and would almost never happen for a designer evaluating a real
structure. However, someone trying the program out with arbitrary dimensions and
loads might create such a condition and then be disturbed that the program is giving
obvious unreasonable results. A linear analysis program would of course produce even
more possibly dangerous results; it would indicate a positive displacement, which would
then not give any indication that something was wrong with the structure.
15 Dynamic Behavior

The dynamic behavior used in FB-MultiPier is explained in detail in the following topics:

1. Analysis Type
2. Time Stepping Parameters
3. Dynamic Relaxation
4. Damping
5. Global Mass
6. Time Functions
7. Dynamic Soil Properties
8. Structural Material Behavior
9. Seismic Soil-Structure Interaction

15.1 Dynamic Analysis Types

FB-MultiPier contains transient dynamic (time-history) analysis features for analyzing

structural response under time-varying loads. Transient dynamic analysis enables struc-
tural response to be determined when inertial and/or damping effects are considered to
be significant. Correspondingly, the equation to be solved in dynamic analysis contains
mass and damping terms, in addition to those of stiffness and external load :

Eqn: 15.1.A
where is the mass matrix; is the nodal acceleration vector; is the damping mat-
rix; is the nodal velocity vector; is the stiffness matrix; is the nodal displacement
vector; and, is the external force vector.
For a given structural system, the solution to Eqn: 15.1.A is necessary to determine struc-
tural response to external loading . However, for systems that possess kinematic
nonlinearity; constitutive nonlinearity; many degrees-of-freedom (DOF); or any com-
bination thereof, the obtainment of a direct analytical solution to Eqn: 1.1.A is not feas-
ible. In place of a direct analytical solution, FB-MultiPier employs implicit time
integration algorithms to obtain a numerical solution of Eqn: 15.1.A. Specifically, in FB-
MultiPier, both the Newmark and Wilson-Theta methods are available for finding the
numerical solution to Eqn: 1.1.A at user-specified, discrete time increments (i.e., time-
steps, Δt ). See Fernandez (1999) for details regarding the theory and implementation of
these methods in FB-MultiPier.

Determination of time-step Δt :

An important property of the implicit dynamic time-integration methods in FB-MultiPier

is that these methods are implemented so as to be unconditionally stable: for a given
structural system, the numerical solution will not diverge solely due to the selection of a
very large time-step, Δt , for the analysis. It is important to note, however, that other
factors (e.g., loading a nonlinear system beyond the system capacity) can still result in a
lack of convergence for a given analysis. Furthermore, numerical stability in the imple-
mented time-integration methods does not guarantee a numerically accurate solution.
The following expression is recommended in Tedesco et al. (1999) for determining an
appropriate time-step for a given implicit time-integration analysis, with consideration
of accuracy:

Eqn: 15.1.B
where (sec) is the smallest period of interest in the analysis.

Transient loading
Transient loading can be specified as an arbitrary set of nodal load-histories, , in
FB-MultiPier. Such loading is readily handled by the time-integration methods imple-
mented in FB-MultiPier, given that a proper time-step Δt has been selected.

Modal Analysis
The Modal Response feature uses the static loads to determine a nonlinear equilibrium
state, and then feeds the corresponding stiffness matrix [Kstatic] into an eigenanalysis
process, as part of the overall modal response analysis.
Importantly, none of the displacements from static loading {dstatic}, internal forces from
static loading {Fi}, or applied static loads {Fext} are directly used in the eigenanalysis pro-
cess. These quantities are only used when determining the stiffness matrix that equi-
librates the applied static load.
The eigenanalysis takes ONLY the stiffness matrix from the static analysis [Kstatic], the
system mass matrix [M], and solves for the mode shapes and frequencies. These mode
shapes and frequencies are then paired with the spectral acceleration values that are
supplied to build up the modal response. The only portion of the modal response that
"knows" about the static loading is the stiffness matrix. The displacements and modal
response forces determined from the modal analysis ONLY arise from pairing the mode
shapes and frequencies with the acceleration spectrum.
If the engineer wishes to account for both the response to the static loading and the
response due to the acceleration spectrum, then the displacements and internal forces
from the static analysis will need to be combined with the displacements and forces
from the modal analysis. For example, the square-root-sum-of-squares of a dis-
placement or internal force of interest could be combined at identical locations from
among the two analyses.

15.2 Structural Material Behavior

The user may define their own stress strain curves for concrete and steel or use the
default values described below.

1. Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)

2. Concrete (Hysteretic)
3. Steel (Nonlinear Elastic)
4. Steel (Hysteretic - Bilinear)
5. Steel (Hysteretic - Strain Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)
 Note: Extrapolation is used to calculate stresses for strain levels beyond those
provided in stress-strain curves.
15.2.1 Concrete (Nonlinear Elastic)

Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. The default constitutive behavior for concrete portions of cross-sections in non-
linear dynamic analyses is that of nonlinear elastic behavior. Alternatively stated, the
default approach in mapping concrete strains to stresses is such that no deviation
occurs from the “backbone” curve. While this approach increases the likelihood of con-
vergence for a model, no hysteresis occurs within concrete fibers.

Stress-strain curve description

The default stress-strain curves for concrete portions of structural members are
described here (for unconfined concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined concrete
sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves
for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-
defined stress-strain curve is treated as the “backbone” curve (but with no deviation
from the backbone curve).

Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.2.2 Concrete (Hysteretic)

Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. Hysteretic behavior can be incorporated into the constitutive behavior of con-
crete portions of cross-sections in nonlinear dynamic analyses. Alternatively stated, an
option is available to introduce behaviors such as unloading, reloading, and softening of
concrete fibers while conducting time-history analyses. Incorporating hysteresis
increases model fidelity with respect to that of physical systems containing concrete
members. However, the incorporation of concrete hysteresis may limit the cir-
cumstances under which convergence can be reached.

Stress-strain curve description

The default stress-strain “backbone” curves for concrete portions of structural members
are described here (for unconfined concrete cross-sections) and here (for confined con-
crete sections ). Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain
curves for concrete portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-
defined stress-strain curve is treated as the “backbone” curve. The algorithm governing
deviations from the backbone stress-strain curve is adopted from Yassin (1994) .

Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)

The concrete hysteresis option may be activated by navigating to the ‘Advanced’ dialog,
located on the ‘Dynamics’ page. From within the ‘Advanced’ dialog, check the ‘Concrete
Hysteresis’ option. Note that this option, when activated, applies to all nonlinear frame
elements in the model.

Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.2.3 Steel (Nonlinear Elastic)

Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. The default constitutive behavior for steel portions of cross-sections in nonlinear
dynamic analyses is that of nonlinear elastic behavior. Alternatively stated, the default
approach in mapping steel strains to stresses is such that no deviation occurs from the
“backbone” curve. While this approach increases the likelihood of convergence for a
model, no hysteresis occurs within steel fibers.

Stress-strain curve description

The default stress-strain curves for longitudinal reinforcement within structural mem-
bers are described here (for mild steel bars) and here (for prestressed tendons). Altern-
atively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves for steel portions
of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-defined stress-strain curve is
treated as the “backbone” curve (but with no deviation from the backbone curve).

Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.2.4 Steel (Hysteretic - Bilinear)

Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. The default constitutive behavior for steel portions of cross-sections in nonlinear
dynamic analyses is that of a bilinear approach to modeling hysteresis. Alternatively
stated, the default approach in mapping steel strains to stresses is such that deviations
from the input stress-strain curve (i.e., the “backbone” curve) adopt a slope that is equal
to the initial slope of the backbone curve.

Stress-strain curve description

The default stress-strain curves for longitudinal reinforcement within structural mem-
bers are described here (for mild steel bars) and here (for prestressed tendons). Altern-
atively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-strain curves for steel portions
of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, the user-defined stress-strain curve is
treated as the “backbone” curve (where all deviations adhere to the initial tangent stiff-
ness of the backbone curve).

Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.2.5 Steel (Hysteretic-Strain-Hardening; Bauschinger Effect)

Overview
For nonlinear dynamic (time-history) analysis, frame element cross sections are divided
into fibers for the purposes of integrating stresses and calculating element internal
forces. The option to incorporate relatively more advanced hysteresis behavior into steel
portions of cross-sections is available for nonlinear dynamic analyses. Specifically, in
contrast to the (default) Steel-Bilinear hysteresis modeling approach, phenomena such
as strain-hardening and the Bauschinger effect can be included among the simulated
steel unloading, reloading, and material evolution behaviors.

Stress-strain curve description

The stress-strain “backbone” curves for steel portions of structural members are
described in Filippou et al. (1983), where only the Young’s modulus and yield stress
need to be specified. Alternatively, FB-MultiPier permits user-defined input of stress-
strain curves for steel portions of frame element cross sections. In this latter case, para-
meters that satisfy the curve given in Filippou et al. (1983) are derived from the user-
defined stress-strain curve.

Accessing the feature in the User Interface (UI)

This option may be activated by navigating to the ‘Advanced’ dialog, located on the
‘Dynamics’ page. From within the ‘Advanced’ dialog, check the ‘Steel Hysteresis (Strain-
Hardening and Bauschinger Effect)’ option. Note that this option, when activated, applies
to all nonlinear frame elements in the model.

Return to the Structural Material Behavior page.

15.3 Time Stepping Parameters

Three time step integration techniques are available in FB-MultiPier:

 1. Average Acceleration (Newmark);
2. Linear Acceleration (Newmark) ; and,
3. Wilson-Theta.

See Tedesco et al. (1999) for details regarding each technique. For a selected time step
integration, the time step size (sec) and the number of time-steps must additionally be
input.

15.4 Dynamic Relaxation

When conducting a static analysis, the application of permanent loading, , is typically

trivial. During static analysis, the structure achieves static equilibrium between the
product of stiffness and displacements in response to the application of .
However, to analyze the structure dynamically, careful consideration of permanent
loads, , is necessary.
Dynamically, an abrupt application of self weight loading is unrealistic, and furthermore,
can lead to undesired dynamic response. In Figure: 15.4.a, an example of improper
dynamic self-weight load (w) application is given to demonstrate that instantaneous
application of permanent loads can lead to exaggerated structural response. Inertial
forces caused by motion of the single-degree of freedom (SDF) mass push the system
far beyond the static displacement, ust . By applying the load w abruptly, the maximum
dynamic displacement, umax, is 100% larger than that predicted by a static analysis. Addi-
tionally, the excessive displacement leads to amplified internal forces, , and poten-
tially, unwarranted inelastic deformations.
 Figure: 15.4.a Dynamic amplification due to instantaneous application of load (w).

When a bridge structure is loaded in this manner (i.e., through instantaneous application
of ), vertical oscillations result in amplified internal forces, , in the pier columns
and piles. Furthermore, if transient loads, , are additionally applied, vertical oscil-
lations due to the suddenly applied can exaggerate the dynamic structural response.
The erratic pier behavior caused by instantaneous application of renders any assess-
ment of structural response—such as determining maximum internal forces or
load-moment interaction—unreliable.
The dynamic relaxation feature is used in FB-MultiPier to facilitate staged loading in
transient dynamic analysis by initializing the dynamic system such that it is in equi-
librium with an arbitrary set of permanent, or static, loads (e.g., gravity loads), .
When dynamic relaxation is employed, the equation of motion (recall Eqn: 15.1.A) is ini-
tialized as:

Eqn: 15.4.A

where is the initial nodal acceleration vector; is the initial nodal velocity vector;
is the stiffness matrix obtained from a static pre-analysis; is the nodal
displacement vector obtained from the same static pre-analysis; and, is the initial
transient load vector. It is important to note that and are assumed to be constant
throughout the analysis.

As expressed in Eqn: 15.4.A and shown in Figure: 15.4.b, for dynamic relaxation, struc-
tural response to is initialized by means of a static pre-analysis. Meaning, two dis-
tinct analyses are conducted—one static analysis (with only applied), and one
dynamic analysis, where both and are applied. Statically, once the structure
reaches equilibrium, the stiffness matrix and displacement vector are stored.
These quantities are then used to define the initial state for a time-domain analysis. In
the dynamic analysis, is applied instantaneously. However, because the dynamic
terms and are initialized to and , respectively, the abrupt application of
does not cause undesired vertical oscillations. It is important to note that
remains constant throughout the dynamic analysis, even though updated , , ,
, and quantities are present in the equation of motion after the first numerical
solution iteration.

Figure: 15.4.b Dynamic analysis using stiffness and displacements from

static pre-analysis to properly initialize structural response to

Examples of dynamic relaxation:

The emphasis of the following discussion is placed on the utility of employing the
dynamic relaxation feature as a means of introducing self-weight loading into a
dynamic structural analysis. Selected demonstration cases are presented to illustrate the
effectiveness of dynamic relaxation in mitigating structural response amplification
(when such amplifications should not be present). Models of a single pile, single pier,
and partial bridge configuration are used for the demonstration cases (shown in the fig-
ures below). The models were analyzed (with only self-weight—gravity and buoyancy—
loading) using three methods: static analysis, dynamic analysis with instantaneous grav-
ity loading, and dynamic analysis with static pre-analysis.
In the following, displacements at pertinent locations within each structure are com-
pared for the three analysis types. Specifically, for the single pile model, vertical dis-
placements are compared at the pile head; for the pier/bridge models, vertical
displacements are compared at the pile cap center node of pier 1.

Single square pile:

Displacements for the 30”x 30” prestressed pile were found to be:

Figure: 15.4.c Single square pile displacements.

Single pier:
Displacements for the single pier model were found to be:
 Figure: 15.4.d Single pier displacements

Three-pier partial bridge:

Displacements for the three-pier partial bridge model were found to be:

Figure: 15.4.e Three-pier model displacements (pier 1 is the rearmost pier).

For each of the above cases, employment of dynamic relaxation also produces system
axial forces that are in-line with those obtained statically. This is in contrast, however to
those obtained from a non-restart dynamic analysis, as shown in Figure: 15.4.f.
 Figure: 15.4.f Total soil reaction (at analysis termination time) per model and analysis
type.

15.5 Damping

The following forms of damping can be defined:

1. Global Damping : The user can specify global damping through the Dynamic Page
For time step integration dynamic analysis:
Rayleigh damping coefficients are inputted.
The Rayleigh damping mass (i.e., alpha) and stiffness (i.e., beta) coefficients can be sup-
plied for each of:

a. Pier structural members;

b. Pile structural members; and,
c. Soil Springs

See Tedesco et al. (1999) for details regarding calculation of the Rayleigh damping coef-
ficients.

For modal response analysis:

Damping in proportion to critical damping is input. Damping can be incorporated into
the system by supplying the damping level.
where the damping level is the percentage of critical damping (between 0% and 100%)
for the fundamental vibration mode of the system.

2. Concentrated dampers. These dampers are applied using the Mass/Damper Page.

3. Hysteretic damping. This form of damping is available when gap modeling is enabled
for the lateral soil response as well as for nonlinear pile and pier material behavior.
Refer to "Dynamic Soil Properties" for more details.

15.6 Global Mass

A consistent (distributed) mass formulation is used by default in FB-MultiPier. However,

for time-history analysis, a Lumped Mass formulation can be enabled from within the
Advanced dialog of the Dynamics page.

15.7 Time Functions

For a given time step integration analysis, one of four different types of load-time func-
tions can be utilized:

1. Applied Load vs Time;

2. Applied Acceleration vs. Time;
3. Applied Acceleration vs. Time (All Nodes);
4. Vessel Collision

For options 2, and 3, above, the acceleration through time is specified in relation to g
(e.g., 9.81 m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2). As a result, the acceleration for a given time (t) is pre-
scribed as:
Acceleration(t) = (g)*(Time Function Ordinate)

For option 2, the entries of {z (t)} are zero-valued, except for the DOF that have been
assigned as being subjected to base excitation. By default, a body force approach is
taken for option 2. However, a multiple-support excitation approach can be utilized
instead of the body force approach (see seismic soil-structure interaction and Fernandez
1999 for a discussion of the multiple support excitation approach).

Note: The multiple support excitation feature should only be utilized in conjunction
with applied accelerations in the X and/or Y directions.

For option 3, ‘acceleration’ is used to form and apply body forces. Recall the externally
applied transient force term, {F(t)}, within the equation of motion (see Section 15.1 ).
Here, the term {F(t)} is formed as the product of the system mass matrix [M] and -{z (t)}.
In turn, {z (t)} is an array with entries populated using the defined Acceleration Time
Function(s) for the nodal DOF(s) in the model. All entries of the of {z (t)} vector are equal
to the Acceleration Time Function ordinates.

Note: For models utilizing the English unit system, and for instances where the RX,
RY, or RZ degrees of freedom are activated, then the units of the Load Function for these
degrees of freedom is kip-in/sec.

For response spectrum analysis, spectral acceleration is utilized:

1. Spectral Acceleration vs Period

15.8 Dynamic Soil Properties

The following parameters can be input for each soil layer of a model where transient
dynamic (time-history) soil behavior is anticipated.

1. Number of Cycles
Number of cycles is associated with modeling soil degradation of P-Y curves. This para-
meter defines the number of loading cycles needed to reduce the P-Y curve ordinate
(i.e., P) values such that these ordinates fall 50% of the way between upper bound val-
ues and lower bound values. In this context, the upper bound P values are taken from
the original input P-Y curve. The lower bound values are determined by scaling the P-Y
curve ordinates using the “Soil Degradation Factor”.
The input value of the “Number of Cycles” should be determined based on the soil type
and system natural frequencies. For details, see "Sudip Basack. 2007".
Note that the “Number of Cycles” parameter must be greater than 1, and requires input
of the "Soil Degradation Factor".

2. Soil Degradation Factor

The soil degradation factor is associated with modeling of soil degradation of P-Y
curves. This parameter is used to scale the ordinate (i.e., P) values of soil P-Y curves, and
establish a lower bound (or fully degraded) P-Y curve, to mimic fully degraded soil beha-
vior.
Note that the “Soil Degradation Factor” should be less than 1.0.
During time-history analyses, cyclic degradation of P-Y curves proceeds as follows:
During the first displacement response cycle of a P-Y curve, the original input P values
are utilized to model soil resistance. For each displacement response cycle subsequent
to the first, the P values of effected P-Y curves are scaled down in accordance with the
“Number of Cycles” and “Soil Degradation Factor”. More specifically, when the number
of displacement response cycles reaches the “Number of Cycles” value, then the P val-
ues of effected P-Y curves will be taken as the average of the original input P-Y curve P
values (as an upper bound) and the P values scaled by the “Soil Degradation Factor” (as
a lower bound). At an infinite number of displacement response cycles, the P values of
effected P-Y curves will be scaled to match the fully degraded P-Y curve. For all other dis-
placement response cycles, the P values of the P-Y curve will gradually transition from
original, to 50% degraded, to fully degraded.

3. Shear Wave Velocity

Shear Wave velocity can be used in conjunction with Load Frequency to model load rate
effects (see Load Frequency below). Also, Shear Wave Velocity can be used in the cal-
culation of "Radiation Damping".
4. Load Frequency
When input along with shear wave velocity, then the methodology proposed by "El Nag-
gar and Bentley. 2000" will be used to account for load frequency effects.
Note: Restrictions within a given soil layer: If "Number of Cycles" and "Soil Degrad-
ation Factor" are input, "Load Frequency" should not be used.

5. Force-Dependent Soil Damping Factor

The Soil Damping Factor is used to directly impose damping behavior into subsurface
nodes. At the end of any time step numbering two or greater, the global damping matrix
entries corresponding to degrees of freedom of subsurface nodes are updated by:

A. Cataloging the soil reaction forces and moments.

B. Scaling the cataloged soil reactions by the soil damping factor.
C. Cataloging the change in the step B products, between the current time step and the
previous time step.
D. Updating the corresponding entries of the global damping matrix using the quant-
ities obtained from Step C.

6. Soil Gap
Users can incorporate soil gapping into dynamic analyses. Refer to Chapter 9 of "Con-
solazio et al. 2006" for details about how this feature incorporates hysteresis into the
soil behavior.

Radiation Damping:
Radiation damping of embedded nodes is utilized within the FB-MultiPier engine when
global damping is active (by checking the ‘Damping’ checkbox on the "Dynamics Page"),
but the mass and stiffness (Rayleigh) damping coefficients for the Soil are both defined
as ‘0.0’. Note that radiation damping is only imposed on horizontal translations using
"Boulanger et al. 1998". The damping coefficient (C) is calculated for each layer. Then,
the number of nodes that reside within each layer are determined. Finally, the damping
coefficient (per soil layer) is evenly distributed across those nodes that reside within
each layer.

C = 4·d·(ɣ / GF)·SW
Eqn: 15.8.A

where,
d = Effective diameter of the pile section.
ɣ = Unit weight of the soil.
GF = Gravity factor = g · (Scale Factor); g = 9.81 m/sec2 or 386.2 in/sec2; Scale Factor =
user input in the Dynamic Page.
SW = Shear wave velocity of soil.

15.9 Seismic Soil-Structure Interaction

Seismic soil-structure interaction can be modeled in an uncoupled manner using the

“substructure” procedure (Wolf 1985). In this context, “uncoupled” indicates that the
overall analysis is performed in two stages:
1) Computation of free field motions; and
2) Computation of pile-superstructure response.

During the first stage, free field motions are computed independently by performing
site response analysis using available software packages such as SHAKE (Schnabel et al.
1972). The computed ground motions (e.g., displacement-time histories) are then pre-
scribed at nodal locations in the foundation system model, corresponding to nonlinear
p-y elements. Here, the nodal locations correspond to the "base" nodes of the soil p-y
elements. In other words, motions are prescribed to the "far" ends of soil p-y elements,
rather than the "near" ends of the p-y elements that terminate at the structural degrees
of freedom.

The p-y elements consist of three major components:

1) Nonlinear p-y springs
2) Linear-viscous dashpots
3) Soil masses
The nonlinear p-y springs permit modeling of nonlinear soil-structure behavior and
associated hysteretic damping. As described below, the nonlinear p-y springs account
for soil gapping, cyclic degradation, and rate effects. A linear viscous dashpot is used to
model radiation damping. The masses, attached to the "far" ends of the p-y elements,
allow for generation of inertial forces upon application of prescribed base node
motions.

The rheology of the p-y element implemented in FB-MultiPier can be configured with
stiffness and damping components in parallel or in series. In the parallel configuration
(Figure: 15.9.a), the soil mass and dashpot operate independent of the attached p-y
spring, and are always active. In contrast, the p-y element can be configured with the
stiffness and damping acting in series (Figure: 15.9.b). For the series configuration, the
mass and dashpot are enabled or disabled depending on the state of the p-y spring,
where the mass is always active unless an active gap is present. The series-configuration
dashpot deactivates when the soil p-y spring: 1) is in an actively gapped state; or,
2) otherwise exhibits nonlinear or plastic behavior (further discussed below). In the sec-
tions below, evolution of the original static p-y spring (backbone curve) is discussed for
possible soil gapping, cyclic degradation, and rate effects.

Figure: 15.9.a Nonlinear p-y element components (parallel)

 Figure: 15.9.b Nonlinear p-y element components (series)

Linear versus Nonlinear Behavior Detection for Series Configuration

As stated above, when the parallel configuration is selected for modeling nonlinear
dynamic p-y elements, the soil mass and radiation damping dashpot remain active
regardless of the soil p-y spring state. For the series configuration, the soil mass is dis-
abled whenever an active gap exists. Also, the radiation damping dashpot is disabled
whenever nonlinear, or plastic, p-y spring behavior is detected (including that due to
gapping and degradation).
The p-y spring behavior is categorized as being in a nonlinear or "plastic" state by com-
paring the p-y spring force to the ultimate p-y force. Specifically, behavior is categorized
as nonlinear when the p-y spring force exceeds a percentage (defaulted to 10%) of the
ultimate p-y force. Also, phenomena such as unloading, reloading, and degradation are
taken into account. As an example, consider a p-y spring that undergoes reloading along
a degraded curve after overcoming a gapped state. Such behavior would be categorized
as linear until the reloading was such that the p-y spring force exceeded 10% of the ulti-
mate (but degraded) p-y force.

Soil Gapping
Soil gapping is modeled based on the recommendations of O’Neill et al. (1997) and
Brown et al. (2001). The soil gapping component is shown in Figure: 15.9.a and Figure:
15.9.b by opening and closure springs. The original static p-y curve and the final evolved
curve is illustrated in Figure: 15.9.c. As the pile load is reversed at a given displacement
level, the soil reaction unloads along a path parallel to the initial portion of the previous
loading path, which produces hysteretic damping.
When the soil reaction reaches zero, no further reaction is generated until the dis-
placement of the pile at that location (node) reverses. Subsequently, the curve follows
the loading path in the opposite direction. Then, upon load reversal in the opposite dir-
ection, a mirror image effect is generated, except that no further soil reaction is gen-
erated until the deflection reaches the value of deflection corresponding to the width of
the gap in the previous cycle. Then, loading occurs along the previous path (unless
degradation is modeled as discussed below). For more details on modeling the soil gap-
ping in FB-MultiPier, refer to Fernandes Jr. (1999) and Consolazio et al. (2006).

Figure: 15.9.c p-y Method for modeling cyclic degradation and hysteretic damping in
soil (Brown et al. 2001)

Cyclic Degradation
Increasing cyclic shear strains in soil reduces shear modulus and increases material
damping. Increasing the number of cycles in undrained cyclic loading further degrades
the overall stiffness and strength of soil with degradation rate increasing with cyclic
shear strain. Soil cyclic degradation can affect the strength properties of the soil and,
therefore, influence soil-structure interaction (Taghavi et al. 2017). In FB-MultiPier, the
effects of soil cyclic degradation on the p-y curves is considered through the use of Eqn:
15.9.A (Brown et al. 2001; O’Neill et al. 1997):
Eqn: 15.9.A

where,
λ is the soil degradation parameter specified by the user;
pc is the soil resistance for the current cycle of loading;
pp is the value of resistance corresponding to the present value of y on the previous
cycle of loading;
pd is the fully degraded value of p at the present value of y.

The fully degraded p-y curve can be obtained by multiplying a degradation factor (input
given by the user) by the initial p-y curve. A typical value for the soil degradation para-
meter, λ, can be obtained using Eqn: 15.9.B (Fernandes Jr. 1999):

Eqn: 15.9.B

where,
N50 is the number of cycles that would be necessary to degrade the soil by 50 percent.
This parameter is site-specific and can be obtained through laboratory tests or from cyc-
lic lateral load tests on piles. The degraded p-y curve is shown in Figure: 15.9.c.

Strain Rate Effect

When soil is subjected to dynamic loading, cyclic degradation can occur simultaneously
with an increase in the apparent soil resistance caused by rapid rates of loading (Ishi-
hara 1996; Kramer 1996). In FB-MultiPier, once the cyclic degradation has been accoun-
ted for, the rate effect can be computed using Eqn: 15.9.C (Brown et al. 2001; O’Neill et
al. 1997):
Eqn: 15.9.C

where,
pi is the instantaneous soil resistance considering both cyclic degradation and loading
rate effects;
pc is the resistance considering only cyclic degradation;
tr is the actual rate of loading in Hz;
ts is the corresponding rate of loading (in Hz) appropriate for standard slow cyclic load-
ing (typically 0.01 to 0.1 Hz);
F2 is a soil factor, which can be taken as 0.01 - 0.03 for sand, 0.02 - 0.07 for silts, 0.02 -
0.12 for clays, and 0.01 - 0.03 for calcareous soils.

Radiation Damping
Whenever the pile moves against the soil, outgoing stress waves are generated which
carry away some of the energy transmitted from the pile to the soil. The loss of this
energy is the mechanism of radiation damping. Radiation damping is modeled in FB-
MultiPier through the use of dashpots attached to the p-y springs in either a parallel or
series configuration. Berger et al. (1977) assumed that the horizontally moving pile only
generates P-waves in the direction of moving (shaking) and SH-waves perpendicular to
the shaking. Based on this definition and the recommendations of Gazetas and Dobry
(1984), the viscous dashpot coefficient is defined by:

Eqn: 15.9.D

where,
vs is the shear wave
vp is P-wave velocities

Clay can be nearly incompressible in undrained loading conditions, and the P-wave velo-
city can become large, leading to unrealistic excessive damping calculated from Eqn:
15.9.D. To avoid this, the Berger model is modified in Eqn: 15.9.E (Wang et al. 1998) and
implemented in FB-MultiPier:
Eqn: 15.9.E
16 Equivalent Stiffness Formulation

1. Equivalent Stiffness Generation

2. Coordinate System Conversion

16.1 Equivalent Stiffness Generation

The equivalent stiffness feature is typically used to estimate the collective, nonlinear stiff-
ness of a foundation structure, while capturing stiffness contributions from structural
members (pier columns, piles) and soil. The equivalent stiffness is reported in the FB-
MultiPier text output (.out) file for a single point (node), and therefore, consists of a 6x6
matrix. The user can select any node within the pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, or pile
bent model for which the equivalent stiffness matrix is of interest, and the matrix terms
will be automatically calculated for each load case.

Stiffnes Node (Recommended) versus Stiffness Model (Legacy)

FB-MultiPier can be used in two ways to calculate equivalent stiffness for models. The
most versatile method is to navigate to the Analysis Settings page, and supply a node of
interest in the Stiffness Option region. In this way, FB-MultiPier can be used to calculate
system stiffness at a node of interest for pile, pile-and-cap, pier, and pile bent model
types, and across load cases.
The second method for calculating equivalent stiffness for models is by selecting the
“Stiffness” model from the “Model Type” list. This second method is retained purely for
backwards compatibility, and limits both the loading and the node of interest to the (geo-
metric) center pile cap node of a pile and cap model. The following discussion emphas-
izes use of the more versatile method (“Analysis” page → “Stiffness Options”) for
calculating equivalent stiffness of a model.

Procedure
The equivalent stiffness at a node is calculated as follows:
1. The model (pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, or pile bent) is analyzed based on the
applied loading.
2. After the solution is obtained for the applied loading, the program uses the equi-
librium-state stiffness matrix to calculate a flexibility matrix at the location (node) of
interest, following general principles. To do that the program internally applies unit
forces at the selected node of interest. The unit forces are applied successively in all six
possible directions (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz).
3. The displacements obtained from each successive unit-load application at the selected
node comprise the columns of the flexibility matrix (e.g., the displacements from the
solution under the application of the Fx unit load comprise the first column of the flex-
ibility matrix).
4. The off-diagonal terms are averaged to ensure symmetry.
5. After the flexibility matrix is obtained, the program calculates the matrix inverse,
which constitutes the equivalent stiffness at the node of interest.
6. Finally, the program reports both the flexibility and equivalent stiffness matrices.

Note: If the location (node) of interest corresponds to a pile cap shell element, then
consider selecting a corner node shell element. Corner nodes of shell elements contain
all six degrees of freedom, whereas mid-side and center nodes only contain five degrees
of freedom (i.e., no "drilling" degree of freedom). Additional details can be found here.

Example
It is worth repeating that the equivalent stiffness matrix is calculated after the equi-
librium state of the structure is obtained. This calculation order is necessary since mod-
els generally contain nonlinear elements (e.g., soil springs). Therefore, the equilibrium
state is used as a “snapshot” of the system conditions under the applied loads.

If the program were to obtain the equilibrium solution prior to calculating the equi-
valent stiffness, then the calculation of the equivalent system stiffness would be incor-
rect. This is because the program would be using information for a state of the structure
other than the load-induced equilibrium state.

For example, consider the pile and cap model shown below. If the center of the cap is
subjected to increasing horizontal loads, then the load-deformation curve generated
using FB-MultiPier is produced. Importantly, the slope of the load-deformation curve
produced using FB-MultiPier changes as the applied load changes. The slope changes
because FB-MultiPier accounts for the various kinematic and constitutive nonlinearities
of the system in using a secant stiffness approach to solve for system equilibrium. There-
fore, the system stiffness matrix that is supplied to the equivalent stiffness algorithm is
obtained from a secant stiffness approach. Accordingly, the equivalent stiffness
approach accounts for changes to system stiffness that arise from the applied loading.

Figure: 16.1.a Comparison of load-deformation behavior obtained from FB-MultiPier

versus a constant stiffness approach.

Given below is a step by step guide to obtain a stiffness matrix for any node selected in
a pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and pile bent model.

Step 1: Select new model type and click on "Pier" model type. This will open a default
pier model in FB-MultiPier (See Figure: 16.1.b)
 Figure: 16.1.b Selecting New Model Type.

Step 2: Click on the stiffness node in "Stiffness Options" Panel on "Analysis" Page. For
this example, Node 17 is selected (see Figure: 16.1.c)
 Figure: 16.1.c Activating the stiffness node option

Step 3: If the equivalent stiffness matrix output is desired to be oriented in a particular

manner, open the ‘Coordinate System’ dialog (see Figure: 16.1.d). The transformation
procedure is discussed in Sec. 16.2 , although any transformation matrix that satisfies
orthogonality and linear independence can be specified.

Figure: 16.1.d Coordinate System dialog for defining coordinate transformation matrix
Step 4: Run the analysis and review the output file for the stiffness data (see Figure:
16.1.e). Note that the data are printed for each load case (or load combination). The data
include unaveraged flexibility terms, averaged flexibility terms, condensed (or equi-
valent) stiffness in the FB-MultiPier coordinate system. Further, the transformation mat-
rix and transformed stiffness matrix are also reported.
 Figure: 16.1.e Equivalent stiffness data in the output file

Ensuring Distribution of Large Concentrated Loads

Engineers commonly utilize the Equivalent Stiffness feature to facilitate representation
of a foundation system (e.g., Pile and Cap) in software external to FB-MultiPier. In such
instances, the “connection” between the FB-MultiPier model and the external software
may be limited to a small number of locations, such as the interfaces between the pile
cap and the pier columns. Accordingly, large concentrated loads are often applied within
the FB-MultiPier model at nodes corresponding to these “connection” locations (e.g., pile
cap nodes).

For the above conditions, the engineer is encouraged to take modeling steps that ensure
distribution of the large, concentrated loads throughout the model. For example, the
engineer may distribute the load to nodes that lie within the physical plan-footprint of
the pier column location(s). As another example, the engineer may make use of the FB-
MultiPier feature that permits increasing the stiffness of selected pile cap elements (Sec.
3.2.2 ). As a third example, if the large, concentrated loads are applied to a relatively
thick, monolithic pile cap, then the modulus of the cap could possibly be increased to
reflect the relatively rigid system component. Importantly, the engineer should use dis-
cretion when modifying the model to better distribute large, concentrated loads. Fur-
ther, the engineer should ensure that the elected modifications maintain fidelity to the
physical system.

By taking the above into consideration, highly localized (and, possibly, non-physical)
deformations are less likely to develop for elements located in close proximity to the
“connection” locations between the FB-MultiPier model and the externally modeled sys-
tem components. Further, and critically, proper distribution of the applied loads allows
for the Equivalent Stiffness feature to better capture the overall system response, pre-
cisely because the stiffness condensation procedure will not be unduly influenced by the
localized effects of large, concentrated loads.

Permitted Load Locations for the Stiffness Model Type

In contrast to the relatively more generalized equivalent stiffness procedure discussed
above for single pile, pile-and-cap, single pier, and pile bent models, when the “Stiffness
(Pile and Cap)” pile-and-cap model type is employed, the program only permits loading
to be applied to the center of the pile cap. Further, in association with use of the “Stiff-
ness” feature, the equivalent stiffness is calculated at a special “stiffness node” located at
the center of the pile cap, and only for a single load case. It is therefore imperative, when
the “Stiffness” model type is utilized, that the engineer makes sure that the resultant of
the loads from the superstructure (bridge pier) passes through the center of the pile cap.

Note: For the "Stiffness (Pile and Cap)" model type, four rigid links are included in the
model, where these rigid links join the loaded pile cap node and nodes of the four adja-
cent pile cap shell elements. These links are included to facilitate transfer of large-mag-
nitude concentrated loads across the physical footprint of column members.

16.2 Coordinate System Conversion

The following explanation shows how to convert a 6x6 stiffness matrix from the FB-
MultiPier global coordinate system to a standard coordinate system defined below.

Figure: 16.2.a FB-MultiPier Coordinate Figure: 16.2.b Standard Coordinate

System System

A 3x3 transformation matrix (T) is first defined to show how the two coordinate systems
are related.

Which can be stated as [d] = [T][D]

This shows that x maps to X, y maps to Z, and z maps to –Y.

The same transformation matrix [T] is then used to transform the stiffness matrix from
the FB-MultiPier coordinate system to the standard 3D coordinate system as follows.

Eqn: 16.2.A

This requires 2 matrix multiplications to obtain the transformed stiffness matrix. This
can be easily done using either Excel or MathCad.

As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the
following.
 Note: Both the locations and signs change for some of the stiffness terms.

Example
The FB-MultiPier stiffness matrix is given by

Then the stiffness matrix in the standard coordinate system would be.

To transform the 6x6 stiffness matrix generated by FB-MultiPier from the 2D x-z coordin-
ates system to a standard 2D X-Y coordinate system.

Figure: 16.2.c FB-MultiPier Coordinate Figure: 16.2.d Standard Coordinate

System System
The following transformation is used to transform the stiffness matrix from the FB-
MultiPier coordinate system to the standard 2D coordinate system as follows.

Eqn: 16.2.B

As a result, to convert the FB-MultiPier stiffness to a standard coordinate system, use the
following.
17 Engine Input Users Guide

1. Engine Input Overview

2. Global Headers
3. Substructure-Specific Headers

17.1 Engine Input Overview

The engine input parameters are divided into two categories. The Global headers cat-
egory describes control data for the entire model. The Pier Specific headers category
describes data that is specific to a particular pier in the model.

Character Limits Per Line

An individual line is limited to 160 characters. However, a continuation symbol "\" can
be supplied at the end of an individual line to indicate that the next line is to be inter-
preted by the engine as a single line of data. For lines interpreted in this manner, a total
of 4,000 characters is permitted. For example, 25 adjacent lines could each contain 160
characters and still be interpreted as a single line by the engine as long as the first 24
lines ended with the continuation symbol "\".

Substructure-Specific Data
For bridge models, data specific to each substructure is separated in the input file by a
special header, as follows:
__PIER#x
Where
x Pier number
17.2 Global Headers

1. Model Data
2. Print Control
3. General Control
4. Program Settings
5. User Defined Coordinate System
6. User Defined Extra Member End Fixity
7. Multiple Pier Substructure Information
8. Superstructure Information
9. User Defined Bearing Connection
10. Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors
11. Bridge Spring Toggle
12. Pushover
13. Minimum Pile Tip Embedment
14. Bearing Reactions Due to Span Self Weight
15. PreLoad
16. Combination
17. Modify Load Factors
18. Dynamic Control Parameters
19. Dynamic Step by Step Integration
20. Spectrum Analysis
21. Global Dynamics
22. Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions
23. Span Concentrated Nodal Loads
24. Span Thermal Data
25. Span Thermal Load Case
26. One Pier Two Span (OPTS)
27. One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Spring
28. Span Mass
29. Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)
17.2.1 Model Data

PROBLEM
Problem Title
Units
Client
Project Name
Project Manager
Date
Completed By
Description

The first two lines* are reserved for user information - TITLE, DATE, JOB NUMBER, .... etc.
For instance, the second line usually serves as a reminder to the user of the units that
were used to create the input file. The above lines are always required.

Note: a comment line can be added anywhere in the input file by simply placing a C
in column 1 of the line. 
17.2.2 Print Control

The following two lines specify the data to be printed to the output file. These lines are
always required.

PRINT
L=L1 M=M1 D=D1 O=O1 S=S1 P=P1 T=T1 F=F1 C=C1 B=B1 J=J1 H=H1 I=I1
R=R1 N=N1 X=X1 G=G1 A=A1 E=E1 K=K1 Q=Q1 V=V1 W=W1

Any of the values: L1,M1,D1... etc. can be either 0 or 1. Setting a value to 1 enables its
printing. Setting the value to 0 turns off the printing of that data block. The default is =0
(NO print). Only the options desired (=1) are required. A SUMMARY OUTPUT TABLE
WILL ALWAYS BE PRINTED.

Where
L1 is the flag for printing of the Pile and Structural coordinates.
M1 is the flag for printing the pier material properties.
D1 is the flag for printing the pile displacement.
O1 is the flag for the out of balance forces.
S1 is the flag for the soil response forces.
P1 is the flag for the pile element forces.
T1 is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap displacement.
F1 is the flag for the pier columns and pier cap force output.
C1 is the flag for the pile cap stress/moment output.
B1 is the flag for the bridge simulation spring force output.
J1 is the flag for the bridge span element displacements.
H1 is the flag for the bridge span element forces.
I1 is the flag for printing the interaction diagrams.
R1 is the flag for printing section stress-strain data.
N1 is the flag for printing missing pile information.
X1 is the flag for XML data printing. This is used in conjunction with the Model Data
Report Generator for data extraction.
G1 is the flag for the pile material properties.
A1 is the flag for the soil data per layer.
E1 is the flag for the soil data per pile node.
K1 is the flag for printing soil resistance curves.
Q1 is the flag for the printing span properties.
V1 is the flag for printing Eigen-analysis results.
W1 is the flag for printing span temperature input data and loading.
17.2.3 Control

The following lines are required and specify global control parameters.

CONTROL            line 1
NUMLC U=U1 F=PROT S=S1 N=NPLNOD J=OPTSSPRINGSMASSES
K=NSTIF C=CASECOMBFLAG P=PRELOAD R=NPUSH E=DYTPE A= PY_
DIRECTIONALITY L= CASING_SKIN_FRICTION G= DISABLE_GEORGIADIS_
CORRECTIONS W=SPANTEMPERATURE H=DYRELAX I=BEARINGLOADCALC
X=EXPORTOPT D=DESIGN V=VER Z=RSOIL L=RIGSTIFF Y=TRANSSTIFF
B=RIGMOD G=TRANSMOD A=TORSION line 2

where
NUMLC  is the number of load cases. An input of 0 will halt execution after all the input
file has been processed by the engine.
U1  is the units flag
  = 0 is mixed for English units (ld-f, kips, inches, ft)
  = 1 is for SI units (kilonewtons and meters)
  = 2 is for metric (kilonewtons and millimeters)
PROT  is the flag for coupling soil axial and lateral resistance
  = 0 do not couple axial and lateral soil resistance (default)
  = 1 couple axial and lateral soil resistance
S1  is the flag for equivalent stiffness calculation.
 < 0 model type is not a stiffness model, and absolute value indicates node at which
stiffness is to be calculated
 = 0 off
 = 1 model type is a stiffness (pile and cap) model, and stiffness is calculated at center
of pile cap
NPLNOD is the number of nodes per pile
OPTSSPRINGSMASSES = flag that indicates special analysis for determining springs
and masses as part of automatic OPTS model formation (only applicable for interior
piers of bridge models).
   = 0 off
  = 1 on
NSTIF  is the type of stiffness.
  = 0 secant stiffness (default).
  = 1 tangent stiffness. (required for preload and time step dynamics, optional for a
static analysis)  
CASECOMBFLAG  flag for use with models that make use of the Design Specifications
features, and which indicates if all load cases and combinations are to be analyzed, or if
just all load combinations are to be analyzed. Not accessible within UI.
  = 0 load combinations(default).
  = 1 load cases and combinations.
PRELOAD is the preload option
 =0 for no preload
 =1 for preload
NPUSH  is the pushover option
  =0 for normal analysis
  =1 for pushover analysis
DYTYPE is the flag for Dynamic Analysis Type (which is selected on the Dynamics Page)
=0 Time Step Integration
=1 Modal Response
PY_DIRECTIONALITY is the flag for directionality of the p-y springs (not accessible
from the UI)
=0 Enabled (default, a single p-y spring is applied per embedded node, in the dir-
ection of the node horizontal displacement)
=1 Disabled (a p-y spring will be placed in the Xp direction and a p-y spring will be
placed in the Yp direction for each embedded pile node).
CASING_SKIN_FRICTION is a factor on skin friction along embedded casing lengths of
drilled shafts. This value must be positive, where the default value is 1.0.
DISABLE_GEORGIADIS_CORRECTIONS is a flag to disable the Georgiadis layer cor-
rections for layered soil profiles
  =0 enable Georgiadis layer corrections for layered soil profiles
  =1 disable Georgiadis layer corrections for layered soil profiles
SPANTEMPERATURE is the flag to indicate whether or not span temperature loading
is utilized, and if so, the scope of activity.
  = -1 is for use when temperature loading is utilized while in AASHTO analysis mode.
  = 0 is for when span temperature loading is not utilized.
  = 1 is for when span temperature loading is utilized in non-AASHTO analyses.
BEARINGLOADCALC is the control flag for engine generation (or reading of) a special
post-processing file for ensuring evenly distributed bearing reactions of span dead load
in bridge models (only used by the UI). When this flag is equal to "1", the PREPLDS
header is printed to the input file.
=0 off
=1 on
DYRELAX is the flag for Dynamic Relaxation, which is selected on the Dynamics Page
(only used by the UI).
=0 do not apply dynamic relaxation
=1 apply dynamic relaxation
EXPORTOPT is a flag to indicate the export format (used only by the UI).
  = 0 Excel option.
  = 1 PDF option.
DESIGN is the flag for the preliminary design option( currently limited to off, or '0')
VER  =Version for English Units
=0 is for English units are Kip & Inches.
=1 is for metric units of newtons and meters.
=2 is for metric units of newtons and millimeters.
RSOIL is the flag for the rotated soil option (not currently available in UI)
=0 do not use rotated soil option
=1 use rotated soil option
RIGSTIFF is the flag for Rigid Link Stiffness ( not currently available in UI)
TRANSSTIFF is the flag for Transfer Beam Stiffness ( not currently available in UI)
RIGMOD is the flag for Rigid Link Modulus ( not currently available in UI)
TRANSMOD is the flag for Transfer Beam Modulus ( not currently available in UI)
TORSION is the flag for Torsion PG( not currently available in UI)
S=IFLEX T=ITIP, TSTIF P=NLOPT I=INTERACTION_APPROACH F=PHI_AXIAL PHI_
FLEXURE line 3

Where
IFLEX  controls how the soil is to be modeled (INTEGER)
  =0 user supplied P-Multipliers must be given
  =1 all user supplied P-Multipliers are set to 1 internally in FB-MULTIPIER
  =2 pile restraint only occurs through tip springs (i.e. no soil); soil information may be
supplied, but is ignored.
ITIP  is for the linear tip spring option (IFLEX=2) (INTEGER)
=0 for no linear tip springs on piles
=1 for axial tip springs on piles of stiffness TSTIF
=2 all d.o.f. at tip have springs with stiffness TSTIF
TSTIF  is the stiffness of linear tips springs (REAL)
NLOPT indicates pile linear or nonlinear behavior
  =1 for linear piles
  =2 for nonlinear piles (cracked concrete, steel yielding and P-∆)
  =3 for linear piles, but where interaction diagrams are generated
INTERACTION_APPROACH determines the Phi-factor scheme to use when forming
interaction diagrams
  =0 AASHTO
  =1 AREMA
  =2 user-defined
PHI_AXIAL is the user-defined axial Phi factor (0 unless INTERACTION_APPROACH is
equal to 2)
PHI_FLEXURE is the user-defined flexure Phi factor (0 unless INTERACTION_
APPROACH is equal to 2)

The no soil model (IFLEX=2) can be useful in testing the model and comparing its res-
ults to other solutions. In this case, the user must make sure the structure is stable
through the proper use of tip springs (ITIP) and pile cap fixity (KFIX). The tip spring
model allows the user to add either linear springs to the axial (ITIP=1) or to all (ITIP=2)
degrees of freedom at the bottom of each pile. In the case of IFLEX=0 or 1, ITIP or
TSTIF are still active in addition to any soil tip properties specified through the use of
soil tip modeling.

I=MAXITER T=TOLER M=MEM P=NPROC X=TRANS A=PILELINE

V=VER L=LETTER     line 4

Where
MAXITER is the maximum # of iterations for the nonlinear soil analysis (INTEGER)
TOLER is the tolerance on the maximum out-of-balance force for any node in the sys-
tem in the nonlinear analysis (REAL)
MEM is the amount of memory used during analysis, always in Megabytes (MB)
NPROC is the number of processors
TRANS  is the option to use the transformed section properties
  = 0 do not use the transformed section
  = 1 do use the transformed section
PILELINE is a flag used only by the UI to indicate whether or not "Pile Behavior" on the
"Analysis" is applied to all piers/bents.
  = 0 Not applied to all piers/bents
  = 1 Applied to all piers/bents
VER is Units Version to dictate any needed conversion when input file is opened in the
UI
  < 1 indicates that some English units values in the input file need converting (e.g.
from inches to feet for pile segment length) when the input file is opened in the UI;
only files from FB-Pier version 3 and older use a VER value that is not equal to 1
  =1 indicates English units values in the input file need converting (e.g. from inches to
feet for pile segment length) when the input file is opened in the UI; all FB-MultiPier
v4 and v5 files save a value of VER= 1
  =2 indicates metric units of newtons and millimeters; only files FB-Pier version 3 and
older use a VER value that is not equal to 1
LETTER is the version letter. This value, combined with the version number, fully
describes the version of the program
The out of balance forces are obtained in the following manner. The stiffness matrix is
multiplied times the current set of displacements to obtain a force vector. This force vec-
tor is then compared with the applied forces on the structure. If the structure is in static
equilibrium then the two force vectors would be identical. The difference between the
two sets of forces are the out of balance forces.

The following default values are be used for the maximum # of iterations for nonlinear
analysis (MAXITER) and the tolerance on the out-of balance forces (TOLER) for con-
vergence:
MAXITER = 50
TOLER = 1.0

FB-MultiPier offers the option to use linear or nonlinear piles and piers. Linear piles will
converge more quickly and should be used for preliminary design and when nonlinear
sections are not significant. NLOPT (on previous line) chooses which type of pile beha-
vior will be used.
17.2.4 Settings

The following lines are required and specify global program settings and individual pro-
ject settings.

PROGSET            line 1
S= AUTO_SOIL_SET_DETECTION M= MEM N= NPROC U= SPAN_PREPLOADS line
2

where
AUTO_SOIL_SET_DETECTION  indicates whether or not the auto-detection of soil set
assignments versus batter / pile type is enabled (0=disabled; 1=enabled).
MEM  is the amount of memory used during analysis, in Megabytes (MB).
NPROC  is the number of processors (cores) to be used during analysis (default = 1).
SPAN_PREPLOADS  is the flag to indicate if, for models containing spans, a pre-ana-
lysis will be conducted to determine bearing loads due to span self-weight (only used by
the UI).
  = 0 disabled
  = 1 enabled (default)
17.2.5 User Defined Coordinate System

When making use of the equivalent stiffness feature, a user-defined coordinate system
can be supplied. Consisting of three basis vectors, the coordinate system is used to trans-
form the condensed stiffness matrix relative to the FB-MultiPier global coordinate sys-
tem. Input of the user-defined coordinate system is as follows:

CS_USERCOORDSYS line 1
F= V11,V12,V13 line 2
S= V21,V22,V23 line 3
T= V31,V32,V33 line 4
:

Where
V11 is the X-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 1.0000
V21 is the Y-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V31 is the Z-X entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V12 is the X-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V22 is the Y-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V23 is the Z-Y entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to -1.0000
V13 is the X-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
V23 is the Y-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 1.0000
V33 is the Z-Z entry of the coordinate system, and is defaulted to 0.0000
17.2.6 User Defined Extra Member End Fixity

This section allows for the definition of custom end fixity conditions, which can be
applied to one or more extra members in a model.

X_FIXITY line 1
NUMCONDS line 2

The following lines are repeated for each custom end fixity definition
I1 I2 I3 J1 J2 J3 line 3
...
:

Where
NUMCONDS is the number of custom end-fixity definitions.
I1 to I3 are the end fixity flags for rotations about the 1, 2, and 3 axes at the I-end of a
given element.
J1 to J3 are the end fixity flags for rotations about the 1, 2, and 3 axes at the J-end of a
given element.
17.2.7 Multiple Pier Substructure Information

The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information
under the SUBSTR header describes the pier to pier geometry.

SUBSTR
NPIERS
PIERNUM X= XDIST Y= YDIST R= ZROT A= LBROT B= RBROT

Where
NPIERS is the number of piers (or pile bents)
XDIST is the x-distance from the global origin (located at the first pier)
YDIST is the y-distance from the global origin
ZROT is the pier rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved alignments)
LBROT is the left bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved
alignments)
RBROT is the right bearing row rotation angle about the global z-axis (used for curved
alignments)

This section must end with a blank line.

The pier rotation option allows each pier to be rotated about the global z-axis (clockwise
positive) to accommodate skew and curved bridge alignments. The rotation is per-
formed as follows based on the bottom left corner of the pile cap

Figure: 17.2.a Pier rotation options

17.2.8 Superstructure Information

The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information
under the SUPPROP header describes the superstructure properties. These properties
are used in establishing the pier to pier connectivity.

SUPPROP
A= AREA, AREASUP I= I3, I2 J= TOR E= EMOD G= GMOD S= WEIGHT F= BEGIN
X=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD B=END Y=AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD
C= CONTIN Z= AREA, I3 , I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD T= BEGINVERT K= AREA, I3,
I2,TOR, EMOD, GMOD P= ENDVERT Q= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD H=H1,
H2 L=LH V=VARSP N=NODES U=USERDCOORD   (One line for each span)
If variable span properties are present, each property line that follows applies to an ele-
ment along the span. For each span, the total number of intermediate span node
coordinates, defined by N=NODES, dictates the number of elements (NODES +1). The
above line contains the properties for Element #1.
A=AREA I=I3, I2 J=TOR E=EMOD G=GMOD S= WEIGHT (One line for each span ele-
ment for variable span properties)
If user-defined span nodal coordinate option is selected, each flowing line represent the
user inputted span nodal coordinates.
X=XCOORD Y=YCOORD Z=ZCOORD (One line for each intermediate span node)

where
AREA is the transverse cross-sectional area of the corresponding superstructure com-
ponent
AREASUP is the span profile area used for wind load generation
I3 is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (strong axis
bending)
I2 is the moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component (weak axis
bending)
TOR is the torsional moment of inertia of the corresponding superstructure component
EMOD is the elastic modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
GMOD is the shear modulus of the corresponding superstructure component
WEIGHT is the unit weight of the corresponding superstructure component
BEGIN is the flag for the begin (left) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No Dia-
phragm; 2 = Custom)
END is the flag for the end (right) span end condition (0 = Diaphragm; 1 = No Dia-
phragm; 2 = Custom)
X= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for begin (left) span end con-
dition
Y= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for end (right) span end con-
dition

CONTIN is the flag to indicate custom input of continuity link properties (0=default;
1=custom)
Z= AREA, I3, I2, TOR, EMOD, GMODis the property list for continuity link element

BEGINVERT is the flag to indicate custom input of begin vertical link properties (0=d-
default; 1=custom)
ENDVERT is the flag to indicate custom input of end vertical link properties (0=default;
1=custom)
K= AREA, I3, I2,TOR, EMOD, GMODis the property list for begin vertical link element
Q= AREA, I3, I2,TOR, EMOD, GMOD is the property list for end vertical link element

H1 is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the
superstructure (beginning of span)
Note: For OPTS models, the Begin Height of Span 1 will equal the End Height of Span
2, and the Begin Height is not processed by the engine.
H2 is the vertical distance from the center of the pier cap to the center of gravity of the
superstructure (end of span)
Note: For OPTS models, the End Height of Span 2 will equal the Begin Height of Span
2, and the End Height is not processed by the engine.

LH is the live load height from the center of the pier cap to the center of the live load
VARSP indicates whether variable span properties are present (0 = no, 1 = yes)
NODES is the number of superstructure beam nodes
USERDCOORD is the flag for the user-defined span nodal coordinates (0 = program
generated, 1 = user-defined)
XCOORD, YCOORD, and ZCOORD are the global X, Y, and Z coordinates for the inter-
mediate span nodes in feet (when user-defined span nodal coordinates flag = 1)
:

Each span of the superstructure is modeled with a single beam (divided into sub-ele-
ments) that spans from the center of the back span pier to the center of the forward
span pier. The superstructure beam is connected to rigid beams at the back span and for-
ward span, which distribute the load to the bearing locations.
Figure: 17.2.b Superstructure Beam
Figure: 17.2.c Superstructure Beam with Continuity Link
Figure: 17.2.d Continuity Rigid Link
17.2.9 User Defined Bearing Connection

The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information
under the PADPROP header describes the load-displacement behavior for the bearing
locations. This information is only provided for user-defined substructure to super-
structure connectivity.

PADPROP
NPROP
X1,X2,X3,…,X20
F1,F2,F3,…,F20
T=TYPE1,TYPE2.....TYPE100

Where
NPROP is the number of custom load-displacement curve definitions
F1…F20are the load values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points max.)
X1…X20 are the displacement values in the load-displacement relationship (20 points
max.)
TYPE1....TYPE100 are the bearing curve types. A value of 1 is written for translational, a
value of 2 for rotational.
(Repeat curve pair values for each user-defined curve definition)
:
This section must end with a blank line.

A maximum of 20 points can be used to describe the load-displacement relationship for

the bearing. Load values should be entered for both positive and negative dis-
placements. Zero force values can be entered intentionally. For example, to model no
vertical reaction due to girder uplift, enter a load-displacement curve for the vertical dis-
placement with positive load and displacement values (for loads acting downward) and
zero force values for negative displacement (loads acting upward). Displacement values
must be entered in order from the largest negative displacement to the largest positive
displacement.
Examples:

Figure: 17.2.e Example Load-Displacement Curve for Vertical Displacement

17.2.10 Self Weight and Buoyancy Load Factors

Self weight and Buoyancy loading is handled automatically in the program by entering a
unit weight for each type of element (Pile, Pile cap and pier elements). Since self-weight
and Buoyancy have different load factors, these load factors can be input per load case.
The following data is input for the load factors for self-weight and buoyancy:

SWFACT

LC F=FSW, FBUO (one line per load case)

Where
LC is the load case in which to apply the load factors
FSW is the load factor for the self-weight in load case LC.
FBUO is the load factory for buoyancy in load case LC
17.2.11 Bridge Spring Toggle

This header allow for specification of which static load cases (or load combinations) that
will not make use of springs during analysis. Note that this header is not populated for
dynamic analyses.

BRSPR

Case #1
Case #2
Case #3
Case #n

Where Integer #n is the load case number for which the bridge springs are turned OFF.
If pre-load is used and bridge springs are present, a –1 value should appear in this list to
indicate that springs are turned off for the pre-load case.

For models that make use of the Design Specifications features, the Load Combination
numbers where springs are disabled are written. Note that, in the FB-MultiPier engine,
Load Combinations are ordered after the Load Cases (or Load Types).
17.2.12 Pushover

For static pushover analysis,

PUSH
N=NPSTEP I=PINCR

Where
NPSTEP is the number of load steps
PINCR is load increment (e.g. 1.0 = increase initial load by 100% for each load step)

2 load cases are required

Use load case #1 for permanently applied loads
Use load case #2 for initial load to be incremented

Under the CONTROL header,

R=NPUSH

Where
NPUSH = 0 for normal analysis
= 1 for pushover analysis
17.2.13 Minimum Pile Tip Embedment

For single substructure analyses, the following header allows for automatic calculation
of minimum pile tip embedment (MPTE). Note that use of this header requires coordin-
ation between the user interface (UI) and engine, where the UI creates and distributes a
series of analysis files for each candidate embedment length. When the engine encoun-
ters the following header, it serves as an indicator to print a special post-processing file
(*.PEL). Note that this feature is not permitted for use in association with the PREPLDS
header.

MPTE
B= INCREMENT_INDEX M= FLAG F= EMBEDLENGTH I= NUMINCR S=
SUBSTRUCTURE

Where
INCREMENT_INDEX is an integer-based index of the pile embedment increment num-
ber, indicating a unique realization of a candidate pile embedment length. Index “0”
indicates the base file, or starting point embedment length. Index values greater than 0
and less than or equal to NUMINCR signify models configured with candidate pile
embedment lengths between the starting-point embedment and (inclusively) the ending
embedment length.
The UI makes use of this index to determine if the MPTE feature should be enabled in
the “Model Data” window upon file loading (0=yes; >0=no). The engine prints this index
to the *.PEL file anytime the *.PEL file is generated.
FLAG is a boolean indicator of the special analysis mode for automatic MPTE calculation
(0=false; 1=true).
EMBEDLENGTH is the final embedment length to consider (can be deeper or shallower
than starting length).
NUMINCR is the number of increments to attempt between the starting and final
embedment lengths.
SUBSTRUCTURE is the substructure of interest (for bridge models).
17.2.14 Bearing Reactions Due to Span Self Weight

The following lines specify the control parameters for engine generation (or reading
of) a special post-processing file (.BPF). This special post-processing file contains load
data associated with even distributions of bearing reactions that are in equilibrium with
span self weight in bridge models. There are two lines of input for this section, including
the title. These lines are only written if the proper flag settings are in place under the
CONTROL header. Note that these lines are not written when the MPTE feature is
employed.

PREPLDS  line 1
R=GENERATE_OR_READ line 2

where
GENERATE_OR_READ is a flag that indicates if the engine is to generate or read the spe-
cial post-processing (.BPF) file.
  = 0 generate the .BPF file
  = 1 read the .BPF file
17.2.15 PreLoad Case

This data is used to determine which load cases will be initialized using the results from
a PreLoad case.

PRELOAD line1

For Load Case 1, store the load case number (LCNUM) and indicate if the load case will
utilize the PreLoad feature (LCFLAG), where a value of “1” indicates that the PreLoad fea-
ture is used for the corresponding load case number, and a value of “0” indicates that
the PreLoad is not being used for the corresponding load case number.

L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG line2

Repeat input for each load case (excluding the PRELOAD header).
17.2.16 Combination

When Design Specifications are made use of to form load combinations, limit states can
be turned on or off as needed. In the input file after the COMBINATION header,

COMBINATION

D= CODE F=DMM N= NUMLC

K= L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9, L10, L11, L12, L13, L14, L15, L16, L17, L18
Note that 13, 11, and 18 values are printed for AASHTO (LRFD), AASHTO (LFD), and
AREMA, respectively.
N= NREVER M= MAXMIN L= STYPE1, STYPE2, STYPE3, STYPE4, STYPE5

Where
Code = 0 for AASHTO (LRFD)
= 1 for AASHTO (LFD)
= 2 for AREMA (LFD and SLD)
DMM = 0 for Maximum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
= 1 for Minimum Load Factors selected on the Load Factor Dialog.
AASHTO (LRFD)
L1 = 1 for STRENGTH-I ( 0 otherwise)
L2 = 1 for STRENGTH-II ( 0 otherwise)
L3 = 1 for STRENGTH-III ( 0 otherwise)
L4 = 1 for STRENGTH-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L5 = 1 for STRENGTH-V ( 0 otherwise)
L6 = 1 for EXTREME-I ( 0 otherwise)
L7 = 1 for EXTREME-II ( 0 otherwise)
L8 = 1 for SERVICE-I ( 0 otherwise)
L9 = 1 for SERVICE-II ( 0 otherwise)
L10 = 1 for SERVICE-III ( 0 otherwise)
L11 = 1 for SERVICE-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L12 = 1 for FATIGUE-I ( 0 otherwise)
L13 = 1 for FATIGUE-II ( 0 otherwise)

AASHTO (LFD)
L1 = 1 for GROUP-I ( 0 otherwise)
L2 = 1 for GROUP-IA  ( 0 otherwise)
L3 = 1 for GROUP-III  ( 0 otherwise)
L4 = 1 for GROUP-II  ( 0 otherwise)
L5 = 1 for GROUP-IV  ( 0 otherwise)
L6 = 1 for GROUP-V  ( 0 otherwise)
L7 = 1 for GROUP-VI  ( 0 otherwise)
L8 = 1 for GROUP-VII  ( 0 otherwise)
L9 = 1 for GROUP-VIII  ( 0 otherwise)
L10 = 1 for GROUP-IX  ( 0 otherwise)
L11 = 1 for GROUP-VESSEL  ( 0 otherwise)

AREMA (L1 through L11, LFD; L12 through L18, SLD)

L1 = 1 for GROUP-I ( 0 otherwise)
L2 = 1 for GROUP-IA  ( 0 otherwise)
L3 = 1 for GROUP-III  ( 0 otherwise)
L4 = 1 for GROUP-II  ( 0 otherwise)
L5 = 1 for GROUP-IV  ( 0 otherwise)
L6 = 1 for GROUP-V  ( 0 otherwise)
L7 = 1 for GROUP-VI  ( 0 otherwise)
L8 = 1 for GROUP-VII  ( 0 otherwise)
L9 = 1 for GROUP-VIII  ( 0 otherwise)
L10 = 1 for GROUP-IX  ( 0 otherwise)
L11 = 1 for GROUP-I ( 0 otherwise)
L12 = 1 for GROUP-II ( 0 otherwise)
L13 = 1 for GROUP-III ( 0 otherwise)
L14 = 1 for GROUP-IV ( 0 otherwise)
L15 = 1 for GROUP-V ( 0 otherwise)
L16 = 1 for GROUP-VI ( 0 otherwise)
L17 = 1 for GROUP-VII ( 0 otherwise)
L18 = 1 for GROUP-VIII ( 0 otherwise)

NUMLC = the total number of load combinations (only used by the UI).
NREVER = 1 for reversible loads ( 0 otherwise)
Reversible Loads: WS, WL, BR, FR (LFRD)
W, WL, LF, R, S, T (LFD)
MAXMIN = 1 to consider max and min factors for LFRD permanent loads (DC, DD,
DW) ( 0 otherwise) 
STYPE1...STYPE5 are the load case subtypes associated with the five load cases that
accept subtypes.
Here is a list of these load cases and their respective subtypes:
1) Downdrag - Piles (alpha Tomlimson), Piles (lambda method), and Drilled Shafts
(O'Neill & Reese).
2) Horiz. Earth Press . - Active, and At Rest.
3) Vert. Earth Press. - Retaining Walls & Abutments, Rigid Buried Structures, Rigid
Frames, Flexible Buried Structures, and Flexible Metal Box Culverts.
4) Creep - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
5) Shrinkage - Segmental Superstructure, and Non Segmental Superstructure.
17.2.17 Modify Load Factors

When the Design Specifications features are used, the load combination factors can be
modified as follows. In the input file after the COEFF header,

COEFF
COEFF S=LIMST T=TYPE

Where
COEFF is the new load factor
LIMST is the limit state to be modified for AASHTO (LRFD)
 = 1 for STRENGTH I
 = 2 for STRENGTH II
 = 3 for STRENGTH III
 = 4 for STRENGTH IV
 = 5 for STRENGTH V
 = 6 for EXTREME I
 = 7 for EXTREME II
 = 8 for SERVICE I
 = 9 for SERVICE II
 = 10 for SERVICE III
 = 11 for SERVICE IV
 = 12 for FATIGUE I
 = 13 for FATIGUE II
LIMST is the load group to be modified for AASHTO (LFD)
 = 1 for GROUP I
 = 2 for GROUP I-A
 = 3 for GROUP II
 = 4 for GROUP III
 = 5 for GROUP IV
 = 6 for GROUP V
 = 7 for GROUP VI
 = 8 for GROUP VII
 = 9 for GROUP VIII
 = 10 for GROUP IX
LIMST is the load group to be modified for AREMA (1-10 for LFD; 11-18 for SLD)
 = 1 for GROUP I
 = 2 for GROUP I-A
 = 3 for GROUP II
 = 4 for GROUP III
 = 5 for GROUP IV
 = 6 for GROUP V
 = 7 for GROUP VI
 = 8 for GROUP VII
 = 9 for GROUP VIII
 = 10 for GROUP IX
= 11 for GROUP I
 = 12 for GROUP II
 = 13 for GROUP III
 = 14 for GROUP IV
 = 15 for GROUP V
 = 16 for GROUP VI
 = 17 for GROUP VII
 = 18 for GROUP VIII
TYPE is the load type

Use one line per load factor.

Example:
COEFF
1.60 S= 1 T= DC
1.45 S= 3 T= WS
:
17.2.18 Dynamic Control Parameters

The following lines specify the dynamic control parameters for the FB-MULTIPIER pro-
gram.

DYN
Y=NDYNS C=NDAMP F=ALPHA1,BETA1,ALPHA2,BETA2 S=NPMAX J=DMP
K=DMS O=NPRT M=SMASS H=NSHM L=NBMM N=NDYSOL U=NMSE E=EPP
R=NCMOD T=NSTEEL B=MULTI_SUPPORT_PY_ELEMENT_CONFIG V=MULTI_
SUPPORT_PULT_PERCENTAGE P=D1,D2,...,D24,D25 Z=NFREQ Q=CFRQ A=NSCS
W=JPIL(1),JPIL(2),JPIL(3) (all on one line)

where
NDYNS is the type of dynamics solution.
 = 0 Step by step integration (default).
 = 1 Response spectrum analysis.
NDAMP is the damping option.
 = 0 no damping (default).
 = 1 damping.
ALPHA1,BETA1 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the structure
(C=ALPHA*M+BETA*K).
ALPHA2,BETA2 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the piles.
ALPHA3,BETA3 coefficients for Rayleigh damping for the soil.
NPMAX is the maximum number of time steps for the analysis.
DMP is the mass density for the piles. This a default global value used if a weight dens-
ity if not given for a pile cross-section.
DMS is the mass density for the pier (excluding pile cap). This a default global value
used if a weight density if not given for a pier cross-section.
NPRT is the output option for time step analysis.
 = 0 maximum displacements and maximum forces caused by the maximum dis-
placements (default).
 = 1 all displacements and maximum forces.
 = 2 maximum displacements and all forces.
 = 3 all displacements and all forces.

Note: NPRT = 2 or 3 options only allow the program to compute the element forces
for the options above (because this may take some time for a large structure), to print
them out, you still have to use these in addition to the print out option. For example, if
you want the pile forces for every time step use O=4 and set P=1 under the PRINT label.
If you want only the structure forces use T=1. The maximum forces are the forces
caused by the maximum displacements, note that these can be smaller than the max-
imum forces for the structure. For options 2 and 3 a summary of the maximum forces
and the time step when it occurred will be printed out at the end.

SMASS is the concentrated mass adopted for the soil. This mass is applied to all the
translational DOF X, Y and Z to represent the attached soil mass.
NSHM is the option for the mass matrix for the cap.
 = 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
 = 1 lumped mass matrix.
NBMM is the option for the mass matrix for the structure and piles.
 = 0 consistent mass matrix (default).
 = 1 lumped mass matrix.
NDYSOL is the option for the type of numerical solution. This option is only valid for
step by step solution (NDYNS=0)
 = 0 Newmark's method - average acceleration.
 = 1 Newmark's method - linear acceleration. This method is conditionally stable and is
not guaranteed to converge unless dt/T < 0.551 for all vibration modes.
 = 2 Wilson-Theta method (default).
NMSE is the option for multiple support excitation.
 = 0 standard analysis.
 = 1 multiple support excitation.
EPP is the strain rate for concrete (default = 1e-5)
NCMOD is the option for the concrete model in nonlinear analysis.
 = 0 ; nonlinear elastic (default)
 = 1 ; hysteresis
NSTEEL is the steel model
 = 0 ; bilinear (default)
 = 1 ; strain - hardening and Bauschinger effect
MULTI_SUPPORT_PY_ELEMENT_CONFIG is the p-y element configuration (only applic-
able for multiple-support excitation)
 = 0 ; series (default)
 = 1 ; parallel
MULTI_SUPPORT_PULT_PERCENTAGE is the linear threshold, expressed as a per-
centage of p-ultimate (only applicable for multiple-support excitation)
 = 10% (default value; which should be updated for a given soil layering)
D1...D25 this is an option if the user wants to save a specific NODE displacement to a
file for possible later plotting or checking.
D1 - is the number of NODES that will be saved (maximum = 25).
D2...D25 - is the number of the NODE to be saved. For example:
P=25,1,2,...,25
D1 = 25 - twenty five NODES will be saved to the file.

Note: The displacements will be saved in a text file with the name: 'inputname'.DSn,
the velocities in 'inputname'.VSn, and the accelerations in 'inputname'.ASn, where n is
the file number for the chosen node. For example, if the input file is "test.in", then the dis-
placements for node 1 are saved in test.DS1, those of node 2 in test.DS2, etc.

NFREQ is the option for computing the period.

 = 0 (default) - initial period for the structure will not be computed.
 = 1- computes the initial periods for the structure.
CFRQ is the frequency of loading (used for cyclic degradation, in Hz)
NSCS is the option for subtracting the stress in the concrete at the level of the steel bar
for dynamic analysis.
 = 0 (default) - does not subtract.
 = 1 - subtracts.
JPIL is the option to track the forces in a specific pile element.
JPIL(1) = pile number
 JPIL(2) = element number, must be between 1 and 16. 1 is top element, 16 is bottom
element. If not specified is set to 1.
JPIL(3) = element node, must be 1 or 2. 1 is bottom element node, 2 is top element
node. If not specified is set to 1.
This information is saved to the file ‘INPUT.DFO’, where INPUT is the input file name.

This section MUST end with a blank line.

17.2.19 Dynamic Step by Step Integration

Any structure may be analyzed using the step by step integration method of dynamic
analysis. This method uses the Newmark method and Rayleigh damping to solve for
dynamic response resulting from time varying loading. The time varying loading can be
applied as a single load function applied at many nodes or different time functions
applied at specific DOF. The applied load function can be a force or a ground accel-
eration.

TRANSIENT
T=T1 L=L1 P=P1 Q=Q1 G=GF A=A0 B=A1 F=FF C=PB

Where
T1 is the time step increment for integration, default is 0.01s.
L1 is the number of time varying load functions to be specified. The functions are
applied at the specified nodes and DOF.
P1 is the maximum number of time points specified for any load function. If three func-
tions are specified, P1 is the maximum number of points used to specify any of the three
functions.
Q1 is the flag for the type of load function applied. If Q1=0 then the load is a force. If
Q1=1, then the load applied is a prescribed acceleration (all nodes). If Q1=2, then the
load applied is a prescribed acceleration (a unique acceleration vs time function can be
applied to one or more nodal DOF).
GF is the gravity factor to multiply times the acceleration or load record input below. If
the acceleration record is given in g’s, then the gravity factor would be 386.4 in/sec2 or
9.81 m/sec2. Use GF=1.0 if the acceleration is not normalized by g.
A0, A1 are global damping factors, implying that only one damping factor will be
applied to structure, piles and soil.
FF is the flag for the file format of the load function file(s): 1 is for new format, 0 is for
old format.
PB is the Peer Berkeley decryption string, to describe the Load Function.
Note: you must choose one damping factor, either here or under the DYN header,
only for the soil. Both can not be chosen.
Z= LFN

Where
LFN is the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.

LOADING FUNCTION DEFINITIONS (L1 Sets of lines)

If you choose the multiple support excitation option, you have to create one set of load-
ing functions for each pile node. Including the first line.

The next lines specify the loading function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs of
numbers each. The number of lines is dictated by the maximum number of points used
to specify the function (P1). The points do NOT need to be at even spacing.

T1,F1 T2,F2 T3,F3 T4,F4

Where
Ti,Fi are the time and force (or acceleration) values for the point being specified.

This section MUST end with a blank line.

17.2.20 Spectrum Analysis

The results of an EIGEN solution can be used to perform a spectrum analysis. This pro-
cedure uses the mode superposition method to combine the individual eigen vectors
into a single response, based on the excitation given by a response spectrum. Response
spectrums are usually given for earthquake loading. This procedure combines the indi-
vidual modes response for a spectrum acting in each of the three global directions, X, Y,
and Z. The modal responses are combined using the Complete Quadratic Combination
(CQC) procedure, the directions are combined using Square Root Sum of the Squares
(SRSS) or CQC3. SPECT allows only a single input response spectrum with different scale
factors for that spectrum in each of the three directions (X, Y, and Z).

SPECTRUM

For input Spectrum use the following lines:

S=SP D=DX,DY,DZ N=NV F=FF E= EF H=CM L=SM B=RD Q=CQC3FLAG

Where
SP is the number of spectrum points used to define the response spectrum curve. The
points are given in pairs (Period (sec), Value) and are assumed linear between values.
DX is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the X direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the X direction.
DY is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Y direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the Y direction.
DZ is the scale factor to apply to the input spectrum for use in the Z direction. The
response spectrum values are scaled by this factor when used for the Z direction.
NV is the number of eigenvectors to use for the responses. The default is the total num-
ber of vectors solved for from EIGEN.
FF  is the flag for the file format of the modal response spectrum function file. 1 is for
new format, 0 is for old format.
EF  is the eigenvector analysis stop flag. 1 means analysis will stop after eigenvector cal-
culations are complete. 0 means analysis will run through to normal completion.
CM is the global mass flag for the cap. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
SM is the global mass flag for the structure. 0 means consistent, 1 means lumped.
RD is the Rayleigh damping coefficients flag for the structure. 0 means Rayleigh damp-
ing is inactive, 1 means Rayleigh damping is active.
CQC3FLAG is a flag (0=OFF; 1=ON) that enables use of the CQC3 combination rule.

A spectrum analysis also needs damping levels for each mode used in the analysis. The
damping level is the percentage of damping for the mode in question. These values
must be specified if a spectrum analysis is to be performed. The next line specifies the
damping levels to use.

NF,NL,NI S=S1

Where
NF is the first mode in a generation sequence for which the damping level is used.
NL is the last mode in a generation sequence for which the damping level is used.
NI is the increment for generating mode for which the damping level is used. Modes
between NF and NL will also use the specified damping level.
NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
S1 is the damping level value to be used (as a decimal).

Z= LFN

Where
LFN is the name of the load function. This can be up to 20 characters in length.

SPECTRUM DEFINITION LINES (Repeat for as many lines as necessary)

The next lines specify the spectrum function values. The lines MUST contain FOUR pairs
of numbers each. The number of lines is dictated by the number of points used to spe-
cify the function (SP). The points do NOT need to be at even spacing.
F1,A1 F2,A2 F3,A3 F4,A4

Where
Fi,Ai are the period (sec) and acceleration (g's) values for the point being specified.

 Note: The acceleration values should represent the maximum absolute acceleration
(spectral acceleration), not the relative acceleration (between the structure and moving
support).

This section MUST end with a blank line.

17.2.21 Global Dynamics

Global dynamics header stores the input parameters for calculation of the Rayleigh
damping coefficients (alpha and beta).

GLOB_DYN
F=DF A=PIER B=PILE C=SOIL I=M1 J=M2 P=DL

where,
DF is a flag to indicate if the Rayleigh damping coefficients are to be calculated.
0 = no
1 = yes
M1 is the first (lower-index) mode of interest for use in calculating the Rayleigh damp-
ing coefficients.
M2 is the second (higher-index) mode of interest for use in calculating the Rayleigh
damping coefficients.
DL is the supplied damping level (as a percentage of critical damping).
PIER is a flag to indicate if the Rayleigh damping coefficients are to be populated for
Pier DOF (used by UI only).
0 = no
1 = yes (default)
PILE is a flag to indicate if the Rayleigh damping coefficients are to be populated for Pile
DOF (used by UI only).
0 = no
1 = yes (default)
SOIL is a flag to indicate if the Rayleigh damping coefficients are to be populated for soil
portions of the model (used by UI only). Note that if these remain zero-valued, then radi-
ation damping can be utilized.
0 = no
1 = yes (default)
17.2.22 Girder and Slab Cross-section Dimensions

This data is used to define discrete span cross-section geometry for each span.

SPANDIM (line 1)
T= SUPXSECTYPE G= GIRGEOM N= NGIRDERS P= PRISGIRFLAG E=NSPAN S=
BEARPGIR C= TRANSECPROP (line 2)

where
SUPXSECTYPE is superstructure cross-section type.
1 = steel girders.
2 = concrete girders.
3 = box girders.
GIRGEOM shows whether or not girders all have the same cross-section.
0 = all girders have the same cross-section.
1 = geometry varies among girders.
NGIRDERS is the number of girders.
PRISGIRFLAG is prismatic girder flag.
0 = non prismatic.
1 = prismatic.
NSPAN is number of span elements.
BEARPGIR is bearings per girder (usually there is one bearing per girder, but a box
girder can have two bearings per girder).
TRANSECPROP is the transformed section properties flag.
0 = do not compute transformed section properties.
1 = compute transformed section properties.

B= SLABDEPTH U= SLABWIDTH E= SEMOD G= SGMOD S= SUNWT F= GEMOD

H= GGMOD T= GUNWT (line 3)
Note that the above line of parameters is read only once per span.
where
SLABDEPTH and SLABWIDTH are depth and width of slab, respectively.
SEMOD and SGMOD are slab elastic and shear moduli, respectively.
SUNWT is slab unit weight.
GEMOD and GGMOD are girder elastic and shear moduli, respectively.
GUNWT is girder unit weight.

For prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 1) and identical in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 0), the fol-
lowing lines of parameters are read once.
For prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 1) and mutually varying in cross-section (GIRGEOM= 1),
the following lines of parameters are read once for each girder.
For non-prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 0) but identical (GIRGEOM= 0), the following lines
of parameters are read once for each span element.
For non-prismatic (PRISGIRFLAG = 0) and mutually varying in cross-section
(GIRGEOM= 1), the following lines of parameters are read for each girder of each span
element.

steel girders,
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH (line 4)
E= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH (line 5)
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 6)

where
BFLDEPTH and BFLWIDTHare bottom flange depth and width, respectively.
WEBDEPTH and WEBWIDTH are web depth and width, respectively.
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are top flange depth and width, respectively.

concrete girders,
D= BFLDEPTH W= BFLWIDTH (line 4)
E= BTDEPTH (line 5)
F= WEBDEPTH X= WEBWIDTH (line 6)
G= TTDEPTH (line 7)
H= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 8)

where
BFLDEPTHand BFLWIDTH are bottom flange depth and width, respectively.
BTDEPTH is bottom taper depth (i.e. depth of taper between bottom flange and web).
WEBDEPTH and WEBWIDTH are web depth and width, respectively.
TTDEPTH is top taper depth (i.e. depth of taper between web and top flange).
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are top flange depth and width, respectively.

For box girders,

D= BSLDEPTH W= BSLWIDTH (line 4)
N= NWEBW O= WEBWDIST (line 5)
E= WEBWDEPTH X= AWEBWWIDTH (line 6)
F= TFLDEPTH Y= TFLWIDTH (line 7)

where
BSLDEPTH and BSLWIDTH are girder’s bottom slab depth and width, respectively.
NWEBW is the number of web-walls.
WEBWDIST is the width at top of web walls (i.e. the horizontal distance from the top,
outside of the outermost web walls) .
WEBWDEPTH and AWEBWWIDTH are the web wall depth and width (i.e. the average
web-wall width), respectively.
TFLDEPTH and TFLWIDTH are the top flange depth and width, respectively.

Repeat input (excluding the SPANDIM header) for each additional span.
17.2.23 Span Concentrated Nodal Loads

These are automatically generated load input lines. As many lines as needed can be
used. One line must be supplied for each loaded node and each load condition.

SPANLOAD
NODE L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, S=SPAN, T=TYPE, B=BRG, I=INDEX,
P=PIER, R=ROW N=PHODE, D=DL, U=UF
(one line per nodal load)

where
NODE is span node number
LC is the load case number
FX is the force in the global X-direction
FY is the force in the global Y-direction
FZ is the force in the global Z-direction
MX is the moment about the global X-axis
MY is the moment about the global Y-axis
MZ is the moment about the global Z-axis
SPAN is span number (starting at left pier)
TYPE is the load type, specified only when Design Specifications features are used
LRFD Loads:
TYPE =
DC Dead load of components 
DD Downdrag
DW Dead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EH Horizontal earth pressure load
EV Vertical earth pressure load
ES Earth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
 CR Creep
SH Shrinkage
LL Live load
IM Impact
CE Vehicular centrifugal force
BR Vehicular braking force
PL Pedestrian live load
LS Live load surcharge
WA Water load and stream pressure
WS Wind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
VP Vertical Wind Pressure
VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FR Friction
TU Uniform temperature
TG Temperature gradient
SE Settlement
EQ Earthquake
IC Ice load
CT Vehicular collision force
CV Vessel collision force

LFD Loads:
TYPE =
D Dead load
LL Live load (AASHTO Type "L")
IM Impact (AASHTO Type "I")
E Earth pressure
B Buoyancy
WS Wind load on structure (ASSHTO Type "W")
WL Wind load on live load
LF Longitudinal force from live load
 CF Centrifugal force
R Rib shortening
S Shrinkage
T Temperature
EQ Earthquake
SF Stream flow pressure
ICE Ice pressure

The following are only written for span nodes that correspond to a bearing location:
BRG is the flag for the span node's association with a bearing location (span nodes on
the transfer beam have bearing associated with them).
1 = for bearing association.
0 = for no bearing association.
INDEX is the 0-based bearing position index that the span node is associated, with the
span node's bearing row.
PIER is the 0-based pier number that the span node is associated with.
ROW is flag for the bearing row number in which the span node is located.
0 = for the left row.
1 = for the middle row (when there is one row of bearings).
2 = for the right row.
PNODE is the 1-based pier node number that the span node is associated with.
DL is no longer used and thus a 0 is listed; previously, this line had been used to write
the span dead load applied to the node, which includes the self weight factor.
UF is the span dead load applied to the node, which does NOT include the self weight
factor.
17.2.24 Span Thermal Data

This data is used to determine span thermal loading conditions (either uniform or gradi-
ent-based) for each span.

SPANTHERM (line 1)
R= REFT U=UNIFT (line 2)
S= SPANNO (line 3)
A= GALPHA (line 4)
B= SALPHA (line 5)
S= SLABTOPT T=SLABFINT U= SLABBOTT (line 6)

where,
REFT is the reference temperature.
UNIFT is the uniform span temperature (if using the AASHTO (LRFD) features).
SPANNO is only read by the UI (engine should skip to next line).
GALPHA is the coefficient of thermal expansion for the girders.
SALPHA is the coefficient of thermal expansion for the slab.
SLABTOPT is the slab top temperature.
SLABFINT is the temperature at 4 in. below the slab top.
SLABBOTT is the slab bottom temperature.

For prismatic and identical in cross-section (as determined in the SPANDIM header),
the following lines of parameters are read once.
For prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the following lines of parameters
are read once for each girder.
For non-prismatic but identical in cross-section, the following parameters are read once
for each element.
For non-prismatic and mutually varying in cross-section, the following parameters are
read for each girder of each span element.
steel girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 (line 7)
D= D3 D4 D5 (line 8)

where
T1 and T2 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the bottom flange, respect-
ively.
T3, T4 and T5 are the temperatures at the first, second and third arbitrary web depth,
respectively.
T6 is the temperature at the top of web.
T7 is the temperature at top of the top flange.
D3, D4, and D5 are the arbitrary vertical offsets ( that correspond to the arbitrary web
depth temperatures, T3, T4, and T5, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative,
where D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being
defined.

concrete girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 (line 7)
D= D4 D5 D6 (line 8)

where
T1 is the temperatures at the bottom of the girder.
T2is the temperature at the top of the bottom flange.
T3 is the temperature at the top of the bottom flange to web taper.
T4, T5, and T6are the temperatures at the first, second, and third arbitrary web depth,
respectively.
T7 is the temperature at the bottom of the web to top flange taper.
T8 and T9 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the top flange, respectively.
D4, D5, and D6 are the arbitrary web depths that correspond to the arbitrary web depth
temperatures, T4, T5, and T6, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative, where
D4 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being defined.
box girders,
T= T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 (line 7)
D= D3 D4 D5 (line 8)

where
T1 and T2 are the temperatures at the bottom and top of the box-girder bottom slab,
respectively.
T3, T4, and T5 are the temperatures at the first, second, and third arbitrary web-wall
depth, respectively.
T6is the temperature at the top of the web-wall.
T7 is the temperature at the top flange.
D3, D4, and D5 are the arbitrary web depths that correspond to the arbitrary web depth
temperatures, T3, T4, and T5, respectively. Note that the offsets are cumulative, where
D3 is taken relative to the bottom of the web, for the current element being defined.

Repeat input for each span (excluding the SPANTHERM header and the reference tem-
perature, REFT).
17.2.25 Span Thermal Load Case

This data is used to determine which load cases are active for static analysis models that
utilize span thermal loading. This header is not applicable when the Design Spe-
cifications features are utilized.

SPANLCTHERM (line 1)
L= LCNUM P = LCFLAG (line 2)

LCNUM is the load case number.

LCFLAG is flag for span thermal loading feature.
1 = span thermal loading feature is used for the corresponding load case number.
0 = span thermal is not being used for the corresponding load case number.

Repeat input for each load case (excluding the SPANLCTHERM header).
17.2.26 One Pier Two Span (OPTS)

The OPTS header contains input to determine whether or not an OPTS analysis will be
conducted. If OPTS analysis is utilized, then the input file must also contain the X, Y and
Z direction offsets (all parallel to the respective global axes) from the top node of the ver-
tical link element (see Transfer Beam Properties) of the pier. Used in conjunction with
appropriately determined span springs and span masses, OPTS analysis employs a
single pier and two spans to produce output of similar accuracy with respect to that
obtained from analyzing a multiple-pier model (see Davidson 2007).

OPTS
X=SXPXL Y=SPYL Z=SPZL
X=SXPXR Y=SPYR Z=SPZR

where
SPXL is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPYL is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPZL is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the left span.
SPXR is the x-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.
SPYR is the y-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.
SPZR is the z-axis offset from the top of the vertical links of the pier to the end-node of
the right span.

Note: 1. In the English system, units are feet for span offsets.
2. In the SI system, units are meters for span offsets.
17.2.27 One Pier Two Span (OPTS) Span End Springs

The following lines specify span end spring stiffness input for the OPTS model in FB-
MultiPier. There are six lines of input for each span end. These lines are always required
if the header is present in the text input file.

OPTS_DIR line 1
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 line 2
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 line 3
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 line 4
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 line 5
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 line 6
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 line 7
X= S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 line 8
Y= S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 line 9
Z= S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 line 10
P= S41 S42 S43 S44 S45 S46 line 11
Q= S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 line 12
R= S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 line 13

where
X, Y, Z, P, Q, R correspond to the rows of the 6x6 stiffness matrices, and where lines 2-
7 pertain to the left extent of the OPTS model, while lines 8-13 pertain to the right extent
of the OPTS model.
S11, S12, S13… are the individual stiffness terms. For each of the six data rows allotted
for the left and right model extents, the rows correspond to X-translation, Y-translation,
Z-translation, X-rotation, Y-rotation, and Z-rotation degrees-of-freedom, respectively.
For example, entry S44 of line 5 corresponds to the diagonal value of X-rotational stiff-
ness for the left extent of the OPTS model.

Note: For Spring Stiffness, the English units are kip/in and kip-ft/rad for translational
and rotational terms, respectively. SI units are kN/m and kN-m/rad, respectively.
17.2.28 Span Mass

The SPANMASS header contains input that allows users to specify additional (discrete)
mass at span nodes. The input indicates which span(s) and node(s) to which the mass
(es) will be applied.

SPANMASS
NODE M=MTX,MTY,MTZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ S=SPAN (one line per nodal mass set)
…
:

where
NODE is the span node number to which the Mass will be applied
MTX is the additional mass in the x-axis translational DOF
MTY is the additional mass in the y-axis translational DOF
MTZ is the additional mass in the z-axis translational DOF
MRX is the additional mass in the x-axis rotational DOF
MRY is the additional mass in the y-axis rotational DOF
MRZ is the additional mass in the z-axis rotational DOF
SPAN is the span to which the mass(es) will be applied

Note: For Span mass, the English units are kip-sec^2/in and kip-sec^2/rad for trans-
lational and rotational DOF, respectively.
17.2.29 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis (CVIA)

With the COUPLED header active, FB-MULTIPIER conducts an impact analysis on the
pier structure based upon the characteristics of a moving vessel. Using vessel weight
and initial velocity, as well as the load-deformation characteristics of the vessel bow, the
impact loading can be quantified at each time step, and applied to the impacted pier.
The vessel bow can be characterized using elastic-plastic behavior, or arbitrarily defined
bow load-deformation data. To use the COUPLED analysis feature, the external force
modification flag (MODEXT) must be set to “1” in the LOADYN header.

COUPLED
D=IDEFN I=IVTYPE S= MST W=WB M=CH V=VBIX,VBIY T= BCFT L= LO H= HOS

where
IDEFN is the vessel definition method [Pre-defined=1, User-defined=2]
IVTYPE is the vessel type:
If definition is Pre-defined (IDEFN=1):
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is a barge
If definition is User-defined (IDEFN=2)
IVTYPE=1 indicates the vessel is defined by an elastic, perfectly-plastic
curve
IVTYPE=2 indicates the vessel is defined by general load and unload-
ing curves
MST is maximum separation time between structure and vessel. If this time is reached,
then analysis is terminated.
WB is the weight of the vessel
CH is the hydrodynamic mass coefficient
VBIX is the initial velocity of the vessel in the x-direction
VBIY is the initial velocity of the vessel in the y-direction
BCFT = tolerance for barge contact force convergence (not currently available in UI)
LO = level of output flag (not currently available in UI)
HOS = historical oscillation smoothing parameter (not currently available in UI)
If IDEFN=1 and IVTYPE=1 (Pre-defined vessel, barge)
W=WIDTH S=SURF

WIDTH is the effective impact zone width on the vessel bow

SURF is the shape of the impact surface (1=planar surface, 2=non-planar surface)

If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=1 (User-defined vessel, elastic, perfectly-plastic)

A=ABY P=PBY

ABY is the crush depth at yield for the vessel bow

PBY is the yield load for the vessel bow

If IDEFN=2 and IVTYPE=2 (User-defined, general loading and unloading)

N=NABPB

NABPB is the number of points in bow force-deformation curve [limited to 200 points]

AB(1) PB(1)
AB(2) PB(2)
AB is the abscissa for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve
PB is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow load-deformation curve

N=NABPBU X=ABMAXU

NABPBU is the number of points in current unloading curve [limited to 25 points]

ABMAXU is the crush level at which the loading and unloading curves intersect

ABU(1) PBU(1)
ABU(2) PBU(2)
ABU is the abscissa for the current user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
PBU is the ordinate for the user-defined vessel bow unloading curve
17.3 Substructure-Specific Headers

1. Pile Information
2. Multiple Pile Sets
3. Pile Batter Information
4. Missing Pile Data
5. Soil Information
6. Multiple Soil Sets
7. Custom Pile Cap Compression-Only Vertical Bearing Springs
8. Structural Information
9. Column Information
10. Proximity to Collapse
11. Concentrated Nodal Loads
12. Bearing Location Loads
13. Wind Load Generation
14. Spring Properties
15. Pile Cap Properties
16. Removed Pier Cap Element
17. Bearing Connection
18. Point Mass
19. Point Dampers
20. Dynamic Load Function Application
21. Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model
17.3.1 Pile Information

The following input lines define the pile properties such as type of cross section, pile
dimensions, quantity and location of reinforcement and prestressing strands, and linear
or non-linear material properties. There are many parameters and input variations.

There are three allowable pile section types, circular, square/rectangular and H-pile. The
H-pile section can be embedded within the circular or square section. If the H-pile is
embedded it is considered a square/rectangular or circular pile. Also note that a pile can
have varying cross sections along its length.

The pile shape (KTYPE) sets the cross sectional shape of the pile. For square linear piles,
the effective diameter (for lateral soil interaction) is calculated automatically by FB-
MULTIPIER. For nonlinear piles, KTYPE determines the cross section for steel layout and
behavior.

PILE           line 1
NSET= NPSET N=NPLNOD S= SLUMP M=γc NSEG= NPSEG1, NPSEG2,
NPSEG3... P= GROUPSETTING line 2

Where
N1 specifies how many pile cross sections will be given along the length of the pile.
NSET is the number of pile sets
NPLNOD is the number of nodes in the pile
NPSEGi is the number of segments in pile set i (must specify for each pile set)
PARFIX is the reduction factor for the capacity for the TOP sub-segment of the pile
(attached to the pile cap). This feature is not available in FB-MultiPier, but was used with
the previous Florida Pier program.
γc is the concrete unit weight (used only for axial soil model type 4)
SLUMP is the concrete slump (used only for axial soil model type 4)
GROUPSETTING is 0 - for user-specified
1 - for 3D values
 2 - for 5D values
3 - for All equal to 1
4 - for no soil
5 - for program-generated values (as part of the analysis)

Cross Sections: The piles may be modeled as varying cross sections along the length.
For example we could have a drilled shaft where the casing only goes partially through
the depth.
 Figure: 17.3.a Varying Pile Cross sections

For each cross section, the pile properties must be specified. If any cross section is non-
linear, you must specify:
1) The material by default (one line) or user defined stress strain curves (one control
line and two additional lines for each stress strain curve used.)
2) The pile shape - by default (one line) or multiple lines to define the shape and
steel placement.
C DESC (comment line, not read by engine)
C T=STYPE D=DSEG U=SUNIT SHAPE LNR (comment line, not read by engine)

Where
C indicates the following info is for commenting purposes only, and is (not read by the
engine)
DESC is a decription of the cross section, for example 24" Square FDOT Presstressed
STYPE is the segment type code, where HPILE = 0, PRECAST = 1, DRILLED SECTION = 2,
and PIPE= 3.
DSEG is the segment data type, where UNKNOWN = 0, LINEAR = 1, and NONLINEAR=
2.
SUNIT is the units code, where ENGLISH = 0, and METRIC = 1.
SHAPE is the shape description. These include H-Pile, PreCast, Drilled Shaft, Pipe Pile,
and Generic.
LNR is the linear / non linear decription. These include nonlinear and linear.

Finally, for both linear and nonlinear piles, six additional lines are needed to define the
pile geometry.

Linear Pile Properties

For Circular Linear Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=1)

L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J A=AREA D=DIA S=SW K=KTYPE line 3

For Square / Rectangular Linear Piles and/or Linear H-Piles (NLOPT=1, KTYPE=2 or 3)
L=XPL E=E G=G I=RINER2, RINER3 J=J W=WIDTHD=DEPTH line 3
A=AREA S=SW K=KTYPE line 3

Where 
XPL is the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
E  is Young’s Modulus of the pile (REAL)
G is the shear modulus of pile, default = E/2.4 
RINER2  is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 2-axis (REAL)
RINER3  is the moment of inertia of the pile about the 3-axis (REAL)
J  is the torsional moment of inertia (REAL)
AREA  is the cross-sectional area of the pile (REAL)
DIA is the diameter for round piles (REAL)
WIDTH  is the width for square piles (REAL)
DEPTH  is the depth for rectangular piles (REAL) (if depth is not given the section is
assumed square)
SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations.
 If SW>0, self-weight is included in the analysis.
KTYPE  specifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile.

Nonlinear Property Lines

For Nonlinear Piles or Linear Piles with Interaction Diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)

The following lines are required for nonlinear piles, or when interaction diagrams are
requested by the user (NLOPT=2 or 3). For the non-linear pile properties, the user can
specify the defaulted stress strain curves or can generate the desired stress strain curves
for the steel and the concrete.

For the Default Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=1)

K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES
(2), ES(3), ES(4)
or
For user specified Stress Strain Curves (MATOPT=2) plus up to 5 sets of stress strain
points for user defined curve
K=KTYPE L=XPL M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4)
Where 
XPL  is the pile length for this segment for plumb and battered piles (REAL)
MATOPT is the material input option (INTEGER)
MATOPT=1 means input FPC, FY or FSU,ES,EC and KSTEEL on this line and default
stress strain curves will be generated.
MATOPT=2 means describe stress strain curves for steel and concrete in INPUT #6B
and #6C
No FPC, (FY or FSU), ES and EC values to be entered for MATOPT=2.
FPC is the compression stress, f'c, for concrete (REAL)
FPC = 0 for tubular steel sections
EC  is the modulus of elasticity of concrete (REAL)
FY(1)  is the yield stress, Fy , for mild steel (REAL)
FSU(2) is the ultimate stress for prestressed strands (REAL)
FY(3)  is the yield stress for H-pile section (REAL)
FY(4)  is the yield stress for tubular steel section (REAL)
(only for circular pile)
ES(1)  is the modulus of elasticity of mild steel (REAL)
ES(2)  is the modulus of elasticity of prestressing strand (REAL)
ES(3)  is the modulus of elasticity of H-pile section (REAL)
ES(4)  is the modulus of elasticity of tubular steel section (REAL)
KSTEEL(I) is the steel type option (INTEGER)
KSTEEL(I) = 1 includes steel type
KSTEEL(I) = 0 does not include steel type
KSTEEL(1) for mild steel reinforcement
KSTEEL(2) for prestressing steel strands
KSTEEL(3) for H-pile section
KSTEEL(4) for tubular steel section (only for circular piles)
KTYPE  specifies the cross sectional shape of the pile
KTYPE=1 for a round pile.
KTYPE=2 for a square pile.
KTYPE=3 for an H-pile
Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above
or in the non-linear user defined stress strain curves and inputting the section prop-
erties described in the sections for the input of circular piles and H-piles.

Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2

NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,, line 1

EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,,     line 2

Where
NPCC is the number of points on concrete curve (INTEGER)
NPCC=0 for round tubular section or H-pile section (no concrete)
No SIGC or EPSC values to be entered for NPCC=0
SIGC(1) is the first stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
SIGC(2) is the second stress point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(1) is the first strain point on concrete curve (REAL)
EPSC(2) is the second strain point on concrete curve (REAL)

Tubular and H-pile steel sections can be input by negating concrete as described above
and inputting the section properties described in the sections for the input of circular
piles and H-piles.

Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(1) = 1

S1=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y= εy line 2

Where
NPSC  is the number of points on the mild steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the mild steel curve (REAL)
εy  is the steel yield strain

Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(2) = 1

S2=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,    line 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,,     line 2

where 
NPSC  is the number of points on the prestressed steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the prestressed steel curve (REAL)

Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(3) = 1

S3=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,    line 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy line 2

Where
NPSC is the number of points on the H-pile steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the H-pile steel curve (REAL)
εy  is the steel yield strain
Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL
(4) = 1

S4=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,    line 1

EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy line 2

where
NPSC  is the number of points on the tubular steel curve (INTEGER)
SIGS(1) is the first stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
SIGS(2) is the second stress point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(1) is the first strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
EPSS(2) is the second strain point on the tubular steel curve (REAL)
εy is the steel yield strain

For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and

KTYPE=2

W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV P=PREST N=ISTNOPT S=SW

Where 
WIDTH is the width of square pile parallel to the local Z axis (REAL)
DEPTH  is the depth of rectangular pile parallel to the local Y axis (REAL)
DV is the diameter of the void (DV=0 for no void) (REAL) (It can also be the width of a
rectangular void IF BV>0)
BV is the depth of a rectangular void. If BV>0, then the void is rectangular and the DV
value is used for the width of the void.
PREST  is the prestressing stresses after release & all losses
PREST=0 for non-prestressed (i.e. reinforced concrete)
ISTNOPT is the standard section option (INTEGER)
ISTNOPT=1 means use FDOT standard reinforcement for input width
STNOPT=2 means describe the reinforcement in the section for the nonlinear ana-
lysis of nonstandard rectangular piles. (Use next lines)
 SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-
weight is included in the analysis.

For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piles, used with NLOPT=2,

KTYPE=2, and ISTNOPT= 2

NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE

AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times

Where 
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands(INTEGER)
IHPILE  is the H-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for H-pile embedded in the concrete,
else IHPILE = 0
BMETH  0=Custom; 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE  Bar Type Number
AS  is the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Y  is the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Z  is the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PREST is the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1 is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
First bar is at coordinates Y,Z
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands
N=N1 D=3 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Z direction as follows:
First bar is at coordinates Y,Z
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate Y,-Z
 and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strand

Figure: 17.3.b Permissible Nonstandard Rectangular Piles

EXAMPLE INPUT

Figure: 17.3.c Example Rectangular Pile for Input

Rectangular Pile (WIDTH=20" and DEPTH = 15") with 12 strands As=0.08 each spaced
as shown
and prestressed to 175 ksi.
W=20 D=15 V=0 N=2
NG=4 HPI=0
0.08, 4.5, 6.0, 175 N=4 D=2
0.08, 4.5, -6.0, 175 N=4 D=2
0.08, -4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3
0.08, 4.5, 2.0, 175 N=2 D=3

For Piles the orientation of the local Y-Z axis to that of the global XS, YS axes are shown
in figure above.

For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piles, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1

NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICONF T=TR HPI=IHPILE \

BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI]  repeat NLAY times
FY= CYIELD HS= CSPG D= CDIA,

Where  
NLAY  is the number of circumferential steel layers
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
DP  is the outer diameter of pile (REAL)
DS  is the thickness of the outer steel shell (REAL)
DV  is the diameter of the void (REAL)
DV = 0 for no void and tubular steel sections
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE Bar Type Number
IHPILE  is the h-pile option.
IHPILE = 1 for h-pile embedded in the concrete, else IHPILE = 0
TR=1 for spiral reinforcement with a φ factor of 0.75 (REAL)
=2 for tied reinforcement with a φ factor of 0.70 (REAL)
ICONF is the confined concrete option.
 ICONF=0 for none.
ICONF=1 for spiral only.
ICONF=2 for shell and spiral conferment.
ICONF=3 for ‘confine-only’ casing and spiral confinement.
SW is the unit weight of the pile, used for self-weight calculations. If SW>0, self-weight
is included in the analysis.
PREST is the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer (REAL)
PREST=0 for no prestressing
NBS is the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (INTEGER)
DSI is the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASI is the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)
CYIELD is the confined yield
HS is the confined spacing
CDIA is the confined diameter
 Figure: 17.3.d Permissible Circular Piles

If the pile is prestressed, then neither tubular steel nor H-pile sections are allowed. If
mild steel is present along with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on the con-
crete is reduced due to the area of mild steel, and the strain in the concrete due to the
prestressing is assumed to be shared with the mild steel.

EXAMPLE INPUT
 Figure: 17.3.e Sample Circular Pile for Input
22" diameter circular pile. 1" thick outer steel shell, 2 layers of reinforcing steel with 8
#7 bars in each layer.

NL=2 D=22.0 V=0.0 TH=1.0 HPI=0

8 N=7 C=3
8 N=7 C=5.875

For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:

OR=ORIENT       line 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT] line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections

Where 
ORIENT is the orientation of the H-pile.
 ORIENT=2 for web parallel to the Local Y axis, or 3 for web parallel to thelocal Z-
axis. (INTEGER)
DEPTH is the depth of the H-pile in inches (REAL). (Use the nominal depth for standard
sections)
WEIGHT is the standard unit weight of the H-pile in lb/ft3 (REAL)
WEB is the web thickness in inches (REAL)
WIDTH is the flange width in inches (REAL)
FLANGE is the flange thickness in inches (REAL)

Note: For metric examples H-pile dimensions will be soft converted to metric units.

After the cross section data is input, SIX additional lines defining the pile system are
required

Figure: 17.3.f Allowable H-Pile Orientations

EXAMPLE INPUT
 Figure: 17.3.g Sample Mild Steel and H-pile Layout

Square Pile with 14 mild steel bars As=1

each spaced as shown with an embedded
14 x 117 H-pile.

W=30 V=0 N=2

NG=2 HPI=1
1.0 12 12 0 N=7 D=2    
1.0 12 -12 0 N=7 D=2
OR=2
D=14 U=117       

For Nonlinear Analysis of Oblong Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=4 NOTE: This
type is ONLY available for pier elements NOT for piles.

R= OR RW=RWIDTH D=DIAM T=VT V=DV B=WV S=WDEN

Where 
OR  is 2 or 3 and defines orientation, see Figure: 17.3.i (INTEGER)
RWIDTH is the width of rectangular portion (REAL)
DIAM  is the diameter of semi-circular ends (REAL)
VT  is void type, see Figure: 17.3.i VT may be 1 or 2 for OR = 2 or 3 (INTEGER) 
DV  is the diameter of the void for VT=1 (DV=0 for no void)
DV  is the depth of the void parallel to DIAM for VT=2 (DV=0 for no void) (REAL)
WV  is the width of the void parallel to RWIDTH for VT=2
(WV= 0 for no void) (REAL)
WDEN  is the self weight of the concrete

Reinforcement specification (Rectangular middle is similar to steel generation for rect-

angular sections)

NG=NGRPS >M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE

AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times

Where 
NGRPS is the # of groups of bars/strands (INTEGER)
BMETH 0=Custom, 1=Percentage
MINSPACE Minumum spacing between two bars
TYPE Bar Type Number
AS  is the bar or strand areas (REAL)
Y  is the local Y coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
Z  is the local Z coordinate for bar or strand (REAL)
PREST is the prestressing stress in the strands after all losses (REAL)
N=N1 D=D1 is code to generate multiple bars in (INTEGER)
N=N1 D=2 means generate N1 bars/strands in the local Y direction as follows:
First bar is at coordinates Y,Z
if N1 = 2, second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
if N1 > 2, then second bar is at coordinate -Y,Z
and remaining N1-2 bars/strand are equally spaced between first two bars/strands

Reinforcement specification: (Semi-circular ends are similar to steel generation for cir-
cular sections.)
NL=NLAY
PREST, NBS, D=DSL, A=ASI  repeat NLAY times

Where  
NLAY  is the number of circumferential steel layers (INTEGER)
NBS  is the number of bars in the layer (INTEGER)
PREST is the effective prestressing stress in the strands for the layer
PREST=0 for no prestressing (REAL)
NBS is the numbers of bars/strands in the layer (total for both semicircular ends.
DSL is the diameter of the centerline of the steel layer (REAL)
ASI is the area of each steel bar/strand in the layer (REAL)

Note: If mild steel is present along with prestressing strands, the prestressing stress on
the concrete is reduced due to the area of mild steel, and the strain in the concrete due
to the prestressing is assumed to be shared with the mild steel.

Figure: 17.3.h Allowable Horizontal Oblong Orientation

 Figure: 17.3.i Allowable Vertical Oblong Orientation

Required for all types: Input for free length, number of sub-elements, axial effi-
ciency and pile head fixity

F=FLNG H=KFIX A=SKNEFF B=TIPEFF S=NSUB G=GAP C=KBCAP L=RIGIDIZED_

PILE_LENGTH R=EXCLUDE_SOIL_IN_RIGIDIZED_LENGTHpile configuration line 1
or
E=ECAP H=KFIX A=SKNEFF D=SKNEFFUPLIFT B=TIPEFF S=NSUB G=GAP
C=KBCAP L=RIGIDIZED_PILE_LENGTH R=EXCLUDE_SOIL_IN_RIGIDIZED_LENGTH
Where 
FLNG is the length of pile between the pile cap and the ground surface, the free length.
It can be zero. If < 0, the cap is analyzed as a buried cap.(not currently written to GUI)
ECAP is the elevation of the pile cap. This is assumed at the top of the pile heads, which
is the same as the centroid of the pile cap. Since the pile cap is modeled using a shell ele-
ment, the pier column base, the pile heads and the neutral axis of the pile cap all meet in
the same location. This modeling does NOT account for the thickness of he pile cap in
the geometry of the system (it is included in the behavior).
KFIX is for the pile head fixity into the cap (INTEGER)
KFIX=0 for pinned pile head
KFIX=1 for fixed pile head
NSUB is the number of sub-elements the length of pile between the pile cap and the
ground surface, Z, is to be divided into for the non-linear analysis only. (INTEGER). Typ-
ical values for NSUB vary between 10 to 15 (NSUB ensures adequate cracking and fail-
ure analysis over the large Z [free length] distances)
KBCAP is the option for soil-springs on the pile cap
KBCAP=0 for no springs
KBCAP=1 for 4 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on
the sides in contact with the soil
KBCAP=2 for 9 vertical springs under each cap element and 3 horizontal springs on
the sides in contact with the soil
RIGIDIZED_PILE_LENGTH is the length of pile (from top) to effectively rigidize.
EXCLUDE_SOIL_IN_RIGIDIZED_LENGTH is a flag to indicate if soil resistance forces
are to be applied within any embedded nodes that fall within the pile rigidized length.
EXCLUDE_SOIL_IN_RIGIDIZED_LENGTH=0 to apply forces (default)
EXCLUDE_SOIL_IN_RIGIDIZED_LENGTH=1 to not apply forces
SKNEFF  is the skin efficiency factor for all embedded nodes that undergo downward
motion (compression).
SKNEFFUPLIFT  is the skin efficiency factor for all embedded nodes that undergo uplift.
TIPEFF  is the tip efficiency factor.
GAP is the gap between the bottom of the pile cap and the ground surface. Must be pos-
itive, a zero or negative gap is ignored. Used in conjunction with the KBCAP parameter.
Input for the number of piles in the X and Y directions

NPX, NPY, NCX, NCY   pile configuration line 2

Where 
NPX is the # of piles in X direction (INTEGER)
NPY  is the # of piles in Y direction (INTEGER)
NCX is the spacing X combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to
GUI)
NCY is the spacing Y combo box index on the Pile Cap page(not currently written to
GUI)
The piles are generated in the order given in the figure below:

Figure: 17.3.j Pile Numbering and Spacing

For Pile Spacing in the X-direction

The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the X direction. If only ONE value is
given (DX1), then the spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each dis-
tance between every row of piles. There must be NPX-1 values given for uneven spa-
cing.

DX1, DX2,...     pile configuration line 3

Where 
DX1 is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)
DX2 is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the X direction. (REAL)

Pile Spacing in the Y-direction

The pile system may have even or uneven spacing in the Y direction. If only one value is
given (DY1), then the spacing is uniform. Otherwise, values MUST be given for each spa-
cing value between every row of piles. There must be NPY-1 values given for uneven
spacing.

DY1, DY2,...     pile configuration line 4

Where 
DY1 is the spacing between the first and second row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)
DY2 is the spacing between the second and third row of piles in the Y direction. (REAL)

Input for P-Multipliers in the X-direction

P-Multipliers used for the X direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles (Fig-
ure: 17.3.k). P-Multipliers have to be specified for existing rows only. The program
assigns the values in the correct order depending upon the resultant loads in the X dir-
ection.

PYMX1, PYMX2, ...     pile configuration line 5

Where 
PYMX1 is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMX2  is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
 Figure: 17.3.k P-multiplier definition

Input for P-Multipliers in the Y-direction

P-Multipliers used for the Y direction given in order from trail to lead row of piles. P-Mul-
tipliers have to be specified for existing rows only. The program assigns the values in
the correct order depending upon the resultant loads in the Y direction.

PYMY1, PYMY2,...     pile configuration line 6

Where 
PYMY1 is the multiplier for the trail row (REAL)
PYMY2 is the multiplier for the second row (REAL)
17.3.2 Multiple Pile Sets

This section allows for the definition of multiple pile cross sections to be defined. This
allows for different pile cross sections in a group. Each cross section is referred to as
type. A type of cross sections can be assigned to any pile in the group. The following
data tells which pile cross section type to use for each pile. Only types greater than 1
(the default set to use) need to be specified.

PILESET

The next line can be repeated for as many pile types as need to be specified.

PILEx PSETx (repeat for each pile type greater than 1)

Where
PILE  is the pile number to which the cross section type is applied.
PSET  is the pile cross section set number to apply to this pile.

Example:
PILESET
1 2   (pile # 1 of pile type #2)
2 2   (pile # 2 of pile type #2)
3 2   (pile # 3 of pile type #2)
6 3   (pile # 6 of pile type #3)
17.3.3 Pile Batter Information

This input specifies the batter of the piles. There can be as many lines as required. Each
line can use the Ni or Pi method of applying the batter for multiple piles but not both.
This section can be skipped if there are no battered piles. NOTE: the self-weight of the
pile is corrected for a battered pile.

BATTER
N1, N2, N3, X=XB, Y=YB
or
P=P1, P2, P3,...PN X=XB Y=YB

Where
N1 is the battered pile number ( zero for no more battered piles) for generation, it is
the first pile number in series (INTEGER)
N2 is the last pile number in series. (defaults to N1) (INTEGER)(not written by GUI)
N3 is the pile number increment in the series (defaults to 1) (INTEGER)(not written by
GUI)
Pi is a list of the piles to which the current batter is specified.(INTEGER)
XB is the battering in x-direction specified as a slope (Figure 8, example 0.33 in./in.)
(REAL)
YB is the battering in the y-direction. (REAL)

Battered piles can be defined in one of several ways. The simplest approach is to list
each pile that is battered with its corresponding batter angle. This is of the form "N1
X=XB Y=YB". To decrease the number of input lines, the pile numbers can be generated
as in a FORTRAN do loop. The format "N1,N2,N3 X=XB" applies the given batter to the
piles starting at N1 and going to N2 with the increment of N3. Thus "5,14,3 X=0.25"
applies an X batter of H=3/L=12 (Figure 8) to the piles 5,8,11,14. Another method of
applying batter to multiple piles is to list all the pile numbers at which the batter is
applied in the form "P=P1,P2,P3,... X=0.25". To apply the same batter as before we could
write "P=5,8,11,14 X=0.25".
Figure: 17.3.l Battered Pile with Slope Defined
17.3.4 Missing Pile Data

This data is used to specify any removed piles. If none are removed, skip this section.

MISSING
NMPIL

Where
NMPIL is the number of missing piles from the pile group (INTEGER). This value may be
zero.

Specify missing piles by x-row, y-row pile coordinate system. The coordinate system of
the pile rows is shown in Figure: 17.3.m. One line is used for each missing pile. Repeat
the following lines NMPIL times.

IXORD, IYORD repeat NMPIL times

Where
IXORD is the x row location of missing pile (INTEGER)
IYORD is the y row location of missing pile (INTEGER)

Figure: 17.3.m Missing Pile Coordinate System Definition

17.3.5 Soil Information

This section is used to specify the soil properties.

SOIL
NSET=SOILSETS, L=NLAYERS, R=NLAYER1, NLAYER2, … C=KCYC, S=NNSPT1,
NNSPT2, … W=WT, O=OBURDEN, V=WFREQ, P=NDYFLG, B=TB, X=LS1, LS2,…
(all on one line)

where 
SOILSETS is the number of soil sets.
NLAYERS is the total number of soil layers to be given (INTEGER).
NLAYER1, ... is the number of layers in each soil set.
KCYC is for the cyclic response of soil (INTEGER).
  =0 for a static soil response.
  =N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number of
events.
NNSPT1, ... is the number of points in the SPT sounding for each soil set (an integer
value is to be provided per soil set).
WT is the water table elevation used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table (in
graphical interface).
OBURDEN is the overburden option used in conjunction with the SPT boring log table
(in graphical interface).
  =0 Don’t include overburden.
  =1 Include overburden (only applicable value).
WFREQ is the frequency of loading (rad/sec) (Used to create pseudo dynamic p-y
curves from static curves for static loads only)
NDYFLG
  = 0 non-reversible P-Multipliers
  = 1 reversible P-Multipliers
  = 2 sets P-Multipliers to 1.0 after first peak
TB is Flag for user input at top and bottom of all soil layers in all soil sets (This flag is a
legacy flag for input files created in version FB-MultiPier v4.03 or older, that did not yet
treat the top and bottom property flag as a distinct per-layer flag; thus, when an input
file last saved in version 4.03 or older is opened, this flag is applied to each layer in all
soil sets).
  = 0 uniform properties specified for layer
  = 1 properties specified for top and bottom of layer
LS1 is the flag to indicate the lateral model Limestone (McVay) is present in the soil set
and has at least one soil layer, of any type, beneath it. This is written once per soil set.
The ‘1’ in LS1 indicates this flag belongs to soil set 1, and so on.
  = 0 no layers exist beneath Limestone (McVay), or no layer of Limestone (McVay)
exists.
  = 1 at least one layer, of any soil type, exists beneath a layer of Limestone (McVay)

Soil property input lines (repeat for each soil layer)

This input specifies the soil properties. When using built-in soil resistance curves, soil
layer properties are defined using a pair of lines. The first line of the pair provides the
soil properties at the top of the layer, the soil type, and depth of the layer. The second
line of each pair provides the soil properties at the bottom of the layer. Properties
between the layer top and bottom elevations are computed by linear interpolation. A
total of 2*NLAYERS lines are required, where NLAYERS is the number of soil layers
defined.

φ or N60 (ASM = 13); K or E mLat (LSM = 12) or SOIL_TEST_TYPE (LSM = 16) or

CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE (LSM = 18) or E iLat (LSM = 19) ; γ; Cu or RQD (LSM = 12)
or RESIDUAL_STRENGTH (LSM = 15) or SOIL_TEST_VALUE (LSM = 16) or
MATERIAL_INDEX (LSM = 19); ε50 or quLat (LSM = 8 or LSM = 9 or LSM = 12 or
LSM = 13 or LSM = 19) or CoeffEarthPress (ASM = 7) or RANGE (ASM = 10 or
ASM = 14); ε100 or Cavg (LSM = 5 or LSM = 6) or STIFFNESS_CONSTANT (LSM =
12) or GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_INDEX (LSM = 19); G; ν or zpeak (ASM = 7) or
INITIAL_MODULUS (ASM = 9) or α (ASM = 12) or β (ASM = 10 or ASM = 14); τf
or Fside (ASM = 7); THICKNESS; LSM; ASM; TSM; SURFACE_TYPE (ASM = 4) or
SOCKET_DIAMETER (ASM =13); quAx (ASM = 4) or fsmax (ASM = 6); RESERVED;
E m; E m/E i; qt; U= USER_DEF_PU; N=N50; L=SLR; V=SWVS; F=SFDF; M=NSMOD;
J=RSDAMP; E=ETOP, EBOT; B=PBOT; S=TYPE; A=TANDB line one

φ or N60 (ASM = 13); K or E mLat (LSM = 12) or SOIL_TEST_TYPE (LSM = 16) or

CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE (LSM = 18) or E iLat (LSM = 19); γ; Cu or RQD (LSM = 12)
or RESIDUAL_STRENGTH (LSM = 15) or SOIL_TEST_VALUE (LSM = 16) or
MATERIAL_INDEX (LSM = 19); ε50 or quLat (LSM = 8 or LSM = 9 or LSM = 12 or
LSM = 13 or LSM = 19) or CoeffEarthPress (ASM = 7) or RANGE (ASM = 7 or
ASM = 10 or ASM = 14); ε100 or Cavg (LSM = 5 or LSM = 6) or STIFFNESS_
CONSTANT (LSM = 12) or GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_INDEX (LSM = 19); G; ν or
zpeak (ASM = 7) or INITIAL_MODULUS (ASM = 9) or α (ASM = 12) or β (ASM =
10 or ASM = 14); τf or Fside (ASM = 7) line two

where 
φ is the angle of internal friction.
N60 is the SPT blow count (corrected for hammer efficiency).
K is the subgrade modulus.
E mLat is the mass modulus for the lateral soil model.
E iLat is the intact modulus for the lateral soil model.
SOIL_TEST_TYPE is an integer indicator of the soil test type (SPT, CPT, dilatometer, pres-
suremeter). It is paired with the SOIL_TEST_VALUE variable.
CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE is the cone tip resistance.
γ is the total unit weight.
Cu is the undrained shear strength.
RQD is rock quality designation.
RESIDUAL_STRENGTH is the residual strength.
SOIL_TEST_VALUE is the soil test value, given the SOIL_TEST_TYPE.
MATERIAL_INDEX is the Hoek-Brown material index.
ε50 is the major principal strain @ 50% maximum deviator stress in a UU triaxial com-
pression test.
quLat is the unconfined compressive strength for lateral soil models.
CoeffEarthPress is the horizontal earth pressure coefficient.
RANGE is the range to use for the regression curves of Gravelly Sand and Gravel
(1=low, 2= average, 3 = high).
INITIAL_MODULUS is the initial modulus of the t-z curve for driven piles in sand
(Mosher).
α is the t-z scale factor for determining tu, given Cu.
β is the t-z scale factor used for API sand, Gravelly Sand, and Gravel t-z curves. For
API sand, if this value is non-zero, then it other input such as Internal Friction Angle, and
Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure will be ignored. For Gravelly Sand and Gravel, if this
value is zero, then it will be computed automatically by the program.
ε100 is the major principal strain @ failure in a UU triaxial compression test.
STIFFNESS_CONSTANT is the stiffness constant.
GEOLOGICAL_STRENGTH_INDEX is the geological strength index (GSI).
Cavg is the average undrained shear strength for the soil layer.
G is the shear modulus.
ν is Poisson's ratio.
zpeak is the axial displacement at which the maximum shear stress is reached (API sand).
τf is the vertical failure shear stress.
Fside is the ultimate side friction.
THICKNESS is the thickness of the soil layer.
LSM is the Lateral Soil Model (for p-y curves):
1 = Sand (O'Neill, 1984) requires φ, K, γ
2 = Sand (Reese, Cox, and Koop, 1974) requires φ, K, γ
3 = Clay (O'Neill) requires Cu, ε50, ε100, γ
4 = Clay - Soft, Matlock; (Matlock, 1970) requires γ, Cu, ε50
5 = Clay - Stiff, with free water; (Reese, 1975) requires K, γ, Cu, ε50, Cavg
6 = Clay - Stiff, without free water; (Reese, 1975) requires γ, Cu, ε50, Cavg
7 = Custom P-Y curve for lateral soil response. Requires four additional lines of input
(2 for top and 2 for bottom of layer).
8 = Limestone (McVay) Uncoupled requires quLat
9 = Limestone (McVay) requires quLat
10 = Sand (API) requires φ, K , γ
11 = Clay (API) requires γ, Cu, ε50
12 = Weak rock (Reese 1997) requires quLat, E mLat, RQD, STIFFNESS_CONSTANT
 13 = Strong rock (NCHRP 2006) requires quLat
14 = Liquefied sand requires γ
15 = Hybrid liquefied sand requires γ, RESIDUAL_STRENGTH, ε50
16 = Piedmont residual requires γ, SOIL_TEST_TYPE, and one SOIL_TEST_VALUE,
signifying: SPT Blow Count, Cone Tip Resistance, Dilatometer Modulus, or Pres-
suremeter Modulus
17 = C-Phi requires γ, K, φ, Cu
18 = Loess requires γ, CONE_TIP_RESISTANCE
19 = Massive rock requires γ, quLat, ν, E iLat,, MATERIAL_INDEX, GEOLOGICAL_
STRENGTH_INDEX
20 = Linear (subgrade) requires γ, K
ASM is the axial soil model (for T-z curves).
1 = Driven Pile (McVay et al, 1989) requires G, ν, τf
2 = Drilled Shaft on Sand (O’Neill et al, 1996) requires γ
3 = Drilled Shaft on Clay (O’Neill et al, 1996) requires Cu, γ
4 = Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material IGM (O'Neill) requires quAx, γ, E m,
E m/E i, SURFACE_TYPE, qt, drilled shaft unit weight, and concrete slump. Note that
the latter two items are stored in the PILE header. Further, note that only one set of
parameter values can be specified per layer for this axial soil model.
5 = user defined T-Z curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for
bottom of layer).
6 = Drilled shaft limestone (McVay) requires Fsmax.
7 = Driven Pile Sand (API) requires φ, CoeffEarthPress, γ, Fside,zpeak.
8 = Driven Pile Clay (API) requires γ, Cu.
9 = Driven Pile Sand (Mosher) requires τf, INITIAL_MODULUS.
10 = Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand requires β, RANGE.
11 = Driven Pile Clay (Coyle and Reese) requires τf.
12 = Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale requires , Cu, α.
13 = Drilled Shaft IGM Non-Cohesive requires N60, ν, SOCKET_DIAMETER.
14 = Drilled Shaft Gravel requires β, RANGE.
TSM is the torsional soil model.
1 = Hyperbolic Model requires G, τf
 2 = user defined T-θ curve. Requires four additional lines of input (2 for top and 2 for
bottom of layer)
SURFACE_TYPE is the bore hole surface type:
1 = Rough surface
2 = Smooth surface
SOCKET_DIAMETER is the socket diameter.
quAxis the unconfined compressive strength for axial soil models.
Fsmax is the ultimate unit skin friction
E m is the mass modulus for the axial soil model
E m/E i is the ratio of mass modulus to intact modulus  
qt is the split tensile strength 
USER_DEF_PU is the Pu value for a layer that is assigned user defined p-y curves
N50 is the number of cycles necessary to degrade the soil by 50%.
SLR is the rate of loading for slow cyclic loading.
SWVS is the shear wave velocity for each soil layer.
SFDF is the fully degraded soil factor.
NSMOD
0 = no soil gap, soil loads and unloads on the same curve.
1 = gap model, soil forms a gap when unloading parallel to initial stiffness in either
tension or compression.
RSDAMP is the force proportional soil damping factor (lateral only)
(e.g. 0.01 applies 1% of the lateral soil force as a damping force)
ETOP is the elevation at the top of the soil layer
EBOT is the elevation at the bottom of the soil layer
PTOP is the elevation of the piezometric head at the top of the layer
PBOT is the elevation of the piezometric head at the bottom of the layer
STYPE is the soil layer type (UI only)
0 = Cohesionless
1 = Cohesive
2 = Rock
TANDB specify both Top and Bottom soil layer properties for the select layer.
0 = Use one set of properties per layer
 1 = Specify top and bottom properties

SPT Sounding values (values are provided per soil set)

This input lines consists of two input lines per soil set. Contained in the first input line
are the elevations for which SPT data are available, and the SPT values are supplied in
the second input line. In the event that no SPT values are supplied for a given soil set,
then two lines with ‘0’ values will be supplied.
SPTELEV1 SPTELEV2 …
SPTVALUE1 SPTVALUE2 …
:
Where
SPTELEV1 is the highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is available.
SPTELEV2 is the second highest elevation value for which an SPT blow count value is
available.
SPTVALUE1 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV1.
SPTVALUE2 is SPT blow count value corresponding to SPTELEV2.

User defined P-Y data - ONLY FOR LSM=7

User defined soils require TWO additional lines of input.

(Two lines define the P-Y curve for the soil layer.)

Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6, Y7, Y8, Y9, Y10
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10

Where 
Yi  is the ith Y value on the user specified P-Y curve.
Pi  is the ith P value on the user specified P-Y curve.

The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.

User defined T-Z data - ONLY FOR ASM=5

User defined axial soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.

(Two lines define the T-Z curve for the soil layer.)

Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10

Where 
Zi  is the ith Z value on the user specified T-Z curve.
Ti  is the ith T (axial stress) value on the user specified T-Z curve.

The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.

User defined T-θ data - ONLY FOR TSM=2

User defined torsional soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.

(Two lines define the T-θ curve for the soil layer)

θ1, θ2, θ3, θ4, θ5, θ6, θ7, θ8, θ9, θ10
T1,T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10

Where 
θi  is the ith θ value on the user specified T-θ curve.
Ti  is the ith T (torque) value on the user specified T-θ curve.

The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.

Pile Tip Soil Data

After all layer data is supplied, the soil tip data is input

The following tip models are available:

 1 = Diven Pile (McVay et al. 1989)
2 = Drilled Shaft Sand (O'Neill et al. 1996)
3 = Drilled Shaft Clay (O'Neill et al. 1996)
4 = Drilled Shaft Intermediate Geomaterial (IGM) (O'Neill)
5 = Custom Q-Z Curve
6 = Driven Pile Sand (API)
7 = Driven Pile Clay (API)
8 = Driven Pile Sand (Mosher 1984)
9 = Driven Pile Clay (Skempton 1951)
10 = Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand (Rollins et al. 2005)
11 = Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale (Aurora and Reese 1977)
12 = Drilled Shaft IGM Non-Cohesive (Mayne and Harris 1993)
13 = Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand (Rollins et al. 2005)

Gi , ν, Qult, TipSM
or
NSPT, 0, 0, TipSM
or
Cub, 0, 0, TipSM
or
Emtip, 0, 0, TipSM
or
phi, EndCond, Eb, TipSM
or
Cub, EndCond, 0, TipSM, Nc
or
Eb, Zc, nMosher, TipSM
or
Cub, e50, nSkempton, TipSM
or
NSPT, 0, 0, TipSM
or
Cub, Nc, 0, TipSM
or
N60, ν, SOCKET_DIAMETER.
or
NSPT, 0, 0, TipSM

Where
Gi is the shear modulus of the soil
NSPT is the uncorrected SPT value at the tip elevation
Cub is the undrained shear strength at the tip elevation
Emtip is the IGM mass modulus at the tip elevation
ν is the Poisson’s Ratio at tip elevation
Qult is the axial bearing failure load (force) acting on the pile tip
phi is the angle of internal friction
EndCond is the pile end condition (pipe piles only)
 0 = not plugged
 1 = plugged
Nc is the bearing capacity factor used for API sand. If this value is non-zero, then other
parameters such as Internal Friction Angle and Nominal Unit End Bearing will be
ignored.
N60 is the SPT blow count at the tip elevation, corrected for hammer efficiency.
SOCKET_DIAMTER is the socket diameter at the tip elevation.
Eb is the ultimate unit end bearing
Zc is the tip displacement upon reaching Eb
nMosher isthe soil relative density exponent
e50 is the major prinicpal strain at 50% maximum deviator stress in a UU triaxial com-
pression test
nSkmepton is the tip displacement expononent
Nc is a scale factor that relates Cub to qufor drilled shaft clay-shale q-z curves
TipSM: 
 1 = Driven Pile (Mcvay et al, 1989) requires Gi, ν, Qult
 2 = Drilled Shaft on Sand (O'Neill et al, 1996) requires  NSPT
  3 = Drilled Shaft on Clay (O'Neill et al, 1996) requires Cub
 4 = Drilled Shaft on Intermediate Geo Material (O'Neill) requires Emtip
 5 = user defined Q-Z curve. Requires two additional lines of input
 6 = Driven Pile Sand (API), requires phi, EndCond, Eb, Nc
 7 = Driven Pile Clay (API), requires Cub, EndCond
 8 = Driven Pile Sand (Mosher), requires Eb, Zc, nMosher, TipSM
 9 = Driven Pile Sand (Skempton), requires Cub, e50, nSkempton
 10 = Drilled Shaft Gravelly Sand, requires NSPT
 11 = Drilled Shaft Clay-Shale, requires Cub, Nc
 12 = Drilled Shaft IGM Non-Cohesive requires N60, ν, SOCKET_DIAMETER.
 13 = Drilled Shaft Gravel, requires NSPT

User defined Q-Z data - ONLY FOR TIP SOIL MODEL=5

The user defined tip soil model requires TWO additional lines of input.

Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, Z5, Z6, Z7, Z8, Z9, Z10
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6, Q7, Q8, Q9, Q10

Where 
Zi is the ith Z value on the user specified Q-Z curve.
Qi is the ith Q value on the user specified Q-Z curve.

The user defined curves are specified by a set of TEN points.

SPT data is defined as follows:

Two lines of data are provided for each soil set. The first line of data contains a number
of elevations, where the number of values provided is equal to to the previously defined
value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set. The second line of data contains a number of
SPT blow counts, where the number of values provided is equal to the previously
defined value(s) of NNSPT1, ... for each soil set.

ELEV1, ...
NSPT, ...
(the two lines of data above are repeated per soil set)

Where
ELEV1, ...  is the line of data containing elevation values for soil set 1
NSPT1, ...  is the line of data containing SPT blow counts for soil set 1
17.3.6 Multiple Soil Sets

Multiple soil sets are used to define unique soil profiles for a particular pile (or piles) in a
pile group. In the input file after the SOIL header,

SOIL

NSET= NSSET L= NLAYER C= KCYC S= NNSPT R= NSSEG1, NSSEG2, NSSEG3...

Where
NSSET  is the number of soil sets
NLAYER is the total number of soil layers
KCYC  is for cyclic response of soil
KCYC=0 for a static soil response
KCYC=N modifies P-Y curves to account for cyclic application of loads with N number
of events
NNSPT  is the number of points in the SPT sounding
NSSEGx is the number of layers in soil set x (must specify for each soil set)

(Soil properties for each soil layer)

SOILSET

PILEx SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)

Where
PILEx  is the pile number to apply soil set x
SSETx  is the soil set number (x)

Example:
SOILSET
1 2   (pile # 1 of soil set # 2)
2 2   (pile # 2 of soil set # 2)
3 3   (pile # 3 of soil set # 3)

SOILGRID

PILEX PILEY SSETx (repeat for each pile of soil set greater than 1)

Where
PILEX is the row number that the pile is located within.
PILEY is the column number that the pile is located within.
SSETx is the soil set number (x)

Example:
SOILGRID
1 1 2 (pile in row 1, column 1 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
2 2 3 (pile in row 2, column 2 has soil set 3 applied at its grid location)
3 3 2 (pile in row 3, column 3 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
SOILGRID is only used by the UI.

SOILCAP header is only saved when the Vertical Bearing Resistance is turned on and soil
set greater than 1 is applied to one or more pile cap elements.
SOILCAP

CAPX CAPY SSETx (repeat for each pile cap grid)

Where
CAPX is the row number that the pile is located within.
CAPY is the column number that the pile is located within.
SSETx is the soil set number (x)

Example:
SOILCAP
1 1 2 (pilecap in row 1, column 1 has soil set 2 applied at its grid location)
2 2 3 (pilecap in row 2, column 2 has soil set 3 applied at its grid location)
3 3 1 (pilecap in row 3, column 3 has soil set 1 applied at its grid location)
17.3.7 Custom Pile Cap Compression-Only Vertical Bearing
Springs

This section allows for the definition of compression-only vertical bearing springs for fit-
ting to those portions of pile caps that lie at or below the GSE for one more soil sets.

SFND_VC
T= NUMCURVES

The following lines are repeated for each soil set that encompasses the midplane of the
pile cap, and further, for which custom pressure versus displacement curves are defined.
Alternatively stated, the next NUMPOINTS+1 lines are repeated NUMCURVES times,
where NUMPOINTS can vary between 2 and 20 for a given soil set.

S= SOILSETNO N= NUMPOINTS U= ULTBRG

X1 Y1
X2 Y2
XN YN
…

where,
SOILSETNO is the soil set number associated with the next NUMPOINTS lines.
NUMPOINTS is the number of points making up the pressure vs displacement curve,
where up to 20 points can be specified.
ULTBRG ultimate bearing pressure associated with curve.
X1 to XN are the displacement values for the curve (must begin with zero and be in
ascending order).
Y1 to YN are the pressure values for the curve (must begin with zero and be in ascend-
ing order).
:
This section must end with a blank line.
17.3.8 Structural Information

INPUT FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF STRUCTURES

The following lines are for the differing types of structures available for analysis. This
section can be skipped if no structure is used. There are four different allowable types of
structures. These are indicated by the following headers: STRUCTURE, MAST, SOUND,
RETAIN. The user can only select one type of structure.

The STRUCTURE header is for the standard pier structure

STRUCTURE
N=N1 S=S1, S2, S3... H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, [V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)...
PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2(R)... PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \
T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=RH1, RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE (all one line)

Figure: 17.3.n Structure Geometry

 Figure: 17.3.o Pier Cap Superelevation

When using the STRUCTURE header, a minimum of three material property lines are
required. The first is for the column, the second is the pier cap and the third is for the
center section of the pier cap. After the three material lines, any additional properties
(NUMPR) and then additional members (NUMLM) should be given.
Superelevation is modeled by specifying a slope for the pier cap. When applying super-
elevation, the leftmost column height remains the same while all other column heights
are automatically adjusted by the program.

The BENT header is for the pile bent structure

BENT
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV
D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR [V=NPAD(L), POFF(L), PSPC1(L), PSPC2(L)...
PSPCn(L), NPAD(R), POFF(R), PSPC1(R), PSPC2(R)...
PSPCn, NROW
or
P=NPAD(L), PUNF(L), POFF(L), NPAD(R), PUNF(R), POFF(R), NROW ] \ T=TC,
CANT, TBEAM R=RH1,
RH2, RH3 J=NLOPT K=SHAPE(all one line)
 Figure: 17.3.p Pile Bent Geometry

When using the BENT header, a minimum of two material property lines are required.
The first is for the pier cap and the second is for the center section of the pier cap.

The MAST heading  is used for high mast lighting/sign type structures.

MAST
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, TCANT, TBEAM R=RH1, RH2,
RH3 J=NLOPT
(all one line)
 Figure: 17.3.q Mast Geometry

When using the MAST header, a minimum of two material property lines are required.
The first is for the column, the second is for the mast/sign portion. Next comes any addi-
tional properties (NUMPR). Next comes two lines for high mast line loading, as follows:

LC= MLL
LA= ALL

Where
MLL is the line loading applied to the mast in the positive Y direction. One value is writ-
ten on this line per load case.
ALL is the line loading applied to the arm in the positive Y direction. One value is written
on this line per load case.

Next, the data for the additional members (NUMLM) is written.

The SOUND header is for use when sound walls are required.

SOUND
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT

Figure: 17.3.r Sound Wall Geometry

The sound wall is modeled as a single cantilever in the center of the pile cap. The prop-
erties represent a given width (S1) of the wall. One material property line is required
when using the SOUND header. The properties represent the single column. Following
this line should be any additional properties (NUMPR) and then any additional mem-
bers (NUMLM).

This header is needed if retaining walls are used. The retaining wall is modeled by a can-
tilever representing a section of the wall. The soil layers behind the wall must also be
defined. The soil layers are used to apply load to the structure.

RETAIN
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \
E=SPELEV D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR T=TC, CANT, TBEAM J=NLOPT
 Figure: 17.3.s Retaining Wall Geometry

The following line defines the soil layers behind the wall

O=IOPTI S=ISURG L=NLAYE line 1

Where 
IOPTI is equal to 1 for pressure at rest
 is equal to 2 for active case computed with Coulomb expression
 is equal to 3 for passive case computed with Coulomb expression
ISURG is 0 for no surcharge
 is 1 for uniform surcharge 
 is 2 for line load
 is 3 for strip load
NLAYE is the number of layers

This line defines the basic soil geometry

A=THETA S=BETA H= HWATE G=GWATE Q=Q1, Q2, Q3 line 2

Where
THETA is the inclination of the back of wall measured clockwise from horizontal plane
(degrees)
BETA is the inclination of ground slope behind wall measured counterclockwise from the
horizontal plane (degrees)
HWATE is the Z coordinate of ground water level (reference is center of pile cap)
GWATE is the unit weight of water 
Q1, Q2, Q3 are parameters for surcharge definition
 If ISURG = 0 Q1, Q2, Q3 are not used
 If ISURG = 1 Q1 = uniform surcharge
 If ISURG = 2 Q1 = line load intensity
Q2 = Horizontal distance of line load from back of wall
 If ISURG = 3 Q1 = Intensity of load
Q2 = Horizontal distance of load from back of wall
Q3 = Width of strip load

Soil Layer Property Lines (one line for each layer, NLAY)

T=THICK S=NSLAY P=COHES, PHI, DELTA G=GAMMA, GASAT

(one line per layer, the bottom layer being layer #1)

Where 
THICK is the layer thickness
NSLAY is the number of sub-layers in which the layer will be divided
COHES is the cohesion of the soil
PHI is the friction angle of soil (degrees)
DELTA is the angle of friction soil/wall (degrees)
GAMMA is the unit weight of the soil
GASAT is the saturated unit weight of the soil

One material property line is required when using the RETAIN header. Then any addi-
tional properties and extra members.
The definition of the parameters for all structures are given below.

Where
N1 is # of columns of the bridge bent supported on the pile group (INTEGER)
S1, S2, S3… is spacing of the pier columns. For retaining walls and sound walls, S1 is
the wall width. (REAL)
H1 is height of the pier columns (REAL,)
O1 is offset of the pile cap from the column (REAL)
C1 is # of column nodes (INTEGER)
B1 is # of pier cap nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
B2 is # of pier cap cantilever nodes (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NPAD(L) is the number of bearing locations (left row of bearings)
POFF(L) is the offset from the first bearing location (left row of bearings)
PSPCx(L) is the bearing location spacing value (left row of bearings)
NPAD(R) is the number of bearing locations (right row of bearings)
POFF(R) is the offset from the first bearing location (right row of bearings)
PSPCx(R) is the bearing location spacing value (right row of bearings)
PUNF(L) is the uniform bearing location spacing (left row of bearings)
PUNF(R) is the uniform bearing location spacing (right row of bearings)
PUNF is uniform spacing between bearing locations, same for all locations (REAL)
For a single row of bearing locations, the left and right row parameters should be the
same.
W1 is cantilever length of top of bent (REAL)
CC is the cantilever flag, where a value of 1 means the model has cantilevers, and a
value of 0 means the model does not have cantilevers.
NUMLM is number of extra beam elements (Figure F21) (INTEGER)
NUMPR is number of extra beam properties (INTEGER)
TC is # of segments for tapered column (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered
columns. This overrides C1
TCANT is # of segments for tapered cantilevers (INTEGER), equal to zero for no tapered
cantilevers. This overrides B2
TBEAM is the number of segments for tapered beams (INTEGER), equal to zero for no
tapered beams
NLOPT selects the non-linear option for the pier structure analysis
NLOPT=1 for linear material
NLOPT=2 for nonlinear material
NLOPT=3 for linear material where interaction diagram are generated
RH1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
RH2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
RH3 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
KFLOOD is the flag to tell if the column (if under the water table) is flooded or not. If
flooded, the buoyancy will use the net area. If not flooded, it will use the
gross area (net=area-void).
SPELEV is the pier cap superelevation slope (+ or -) beginning at leftmost pier column.
Expressed as a decimal (not a percent).
CONT is the bridge span continuity option (over the pier)
 0 for discontinous spans (does not transfer moment)(default)
 1 for continous spans (transfers moment)
NROW is the number of bearing rows on the pier cap
 1 for a single bearing row
 2 for two rows of bearings (default)

Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the RH1, RH2, and RH3 properties
are missing (zero by default) then a linear taper will be used.
The bearing locations are specified based on the following figure.
 Figure: 17.3.t Positioning Two Rows of Bearings

MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES

The next lines specify the cross-sectional properties of the pier column and pier cap. A
total of 1,2 or 3 + NUMPR properties (extra beam members) are required. The material
properties are input beginning with material # 2 (Figure: 17.3.t) onward: pier columns,
pier cap, center pier cap (Figure: 17.3.t), and extra beams, respectively for a general pier
structure. The extra beam (Figure: 17.3.t) properties have the same format and may be
given individually or lumped together. To simulate no connection between piers, use
very small values for I, E, G, J, and A for the center pier cap material (Figure: 17.3.t). For
linear properties, use the following single lines for each property.

Linear Property Line

L=LEN E=E1 I=I3,I2 J=J1 G=G1 A=A1 W=WIDTH D=DIA S=SW K=SHAPE

Where 
I3 is the Moment of Inertia for axis 3 of the frame element (REAL)
I2 is the Moment of Inertia for axis 2 of the frame element (REAL)
J1 is Torsional Moment of Inertia of the frame element (REAL)
A1 is Area of c/s of the frame element (REAL)
G1 is Shear Modulus of the frame element (REAL)
LEN is the component length. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future pro-
gram expansion.
WIDTH is the section width. Not currently used in the analysis. Reserved for future pro-
gram expansion.
SHAPE is the cross-section shape.
 1: Circular
 2: Rectangular
 3: H-Pile
 4: Oblong

Nonlinear property lines (Same as for Piles)

For nonlinear structures with interaction diagrams (NLOPT=2 or 3)

These lines are almost identical to the input for the piles. See pile input for definitions of
terms.

For the default stress strain curves (MATOPT=1)

M=MATOPT C=FPC, EC S=FY(1), FSU(2), FY(3), FY(4), ES(1), ES(2), ES(3), ES(4)
K=KTYPE
or
For user specified stress strain curves (MATOPT=2)
M=MATOPT S=KSTEEL(1), KSTEEL(2), KSTEEL(3), KSTEEL(4) K=KTYPE

Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and MATOPT=2

NC=NPCC, SIGC(1), SIGC(2),,, line 1
EPSC(1), EPSC(2),,,      line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for Mild Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(1) =
1
S1=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,    line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for Prestressing Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and
KSTEEL(2) = 1
S2=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,    line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,,      line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for H-pile Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL(3)
=1
S3=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy      line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for Tubular Steel, used with NLOPT=2 and MATOPT=2 and KSTEEL
(4) = 1
S4=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,,   line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, y=εy      line 2

For Nonlinear Analysis of Square/Rectangular Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and

KTYPE=2
W=WIDTH D=DEPTH V=DV B=BV N=ISTNOPT P=PREST S=SW

For nonlinear Analysis of Nonstandard Square/Rectangular Piers used with NLOPT=2,

KTYPE=2, and ISTNOPT= 2
NG=NGRPS HPI= IHPILE M=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
AS, Y, Z, PREST N=N1 D=D1 repeat NGRPS times

For Nonlinear Analysis of Round Piers, used with NLOPT=2 and KTYPE=1

NL=NLAY NG=NGRPS D=DP V=DV S=SW TH=DS IC=ICON, T=TR HPI=IHPILE \

BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE
[PREST, NBS, D=DSI, A=ASI] repeat NLAY times

For confined sections (ICON=2):

When default stress-strain curves are specified for steel components (MATOPT=1), the
following single line is required:
FY=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS D=DHOOP T=CONF_USER_DEF R=CUD_MILD, CUD_
PRESTRESS,CUD_HPILE,CUD_CASING
where,
CONF_USER_DEF=1;
CUD_MILD=0;
CUD_PRESTRESS=0;
CUD_HPILE=0;
CUD_CASING=0.

When user defined stress-strain curves are specified for steel components (MATOPT=2),
the following single line is required:
FY=FYHOOP HS=HOOPS D=DHOOP T=CONF_USER_DEF R=CUD_MILD, CUD_
PRESTRESS, CUD_HPILE,CUD_CASING
where,
CONF_USER_DEF=2.
For any type of steel present in the cross section, the corresponding CUD_ parameter
must be set equal to 1.

For each CUD_ parameter set equal to 1, the following corresponding lines are required:

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_MILD=1 (Mild Steel):

S1=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, Y=εy Q=v line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_PRESTRESS=1 (Prestressing Steel):

S2=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, Y=εy Q=v line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_HPILE=1 (H-pile)

S3=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, Y=εy Q=v line 2

Stress-Strain Curve for CUD_CASING=1 (Casing)

S4=NPSC, SIGS(1), SIGS(2),,, line 1
EPSS(1), EPSS(2),,, Y=εy Q=v line 2

where:
T= flag to determine default or user defined stress-strain curve.
= 1 (Default Stress-Strain Curve)
= 2 (User-Defined Stress-Strain Curve)
Y = yield strain
Q = poison’s ratio

For steel H-piles used with KTYPE=3 or HP=1 in either circular or square sections
Two lines are required:

OR=ORIENT      line 1
[D=DEPTH U=WEIGHT] line 2, for standard H-pile sections
or
[D=DEPTH TW=WEB B=WIDTH TF=FLANGE] line 2, for user defined sections 

For Nonlinear Analysis of Bullet Piers, used with NLOPT=2 or 3 and KTYPE=2
R=ORIENT W=WIDTH D=DEPTH T=VTYPE V=DV B=BV S=SW N=ISTNOPT
P=PREST (line 1)
NG=NGRPS BM=BMETH X=MINSPACE Z=TYPE (line 2)
Figure: 17.3.u Material Property Identification
 Figure: 17.3.v Tapered column only - material numbers

Figure: 17.3.w Tapered cantilever only - material numbers

 Figure: 17.3.x Tapered column and cantilever material numbers

EXTRA MEMBER LINES (Only Required if NUMLM 0)

The next set of lines define any extra beams used in the superstructure. NUMLM lines
are required to define node numbers and material numbers for each extra beam. The
nodes connecting the extra beams must be in the pile cap or in the Pier. The material
number must correspond to one defined in material properties. The user has the option
of using any previously defined material property (ex. # 3, Pier Cap properties) for the
extra beams or defining new ones (material # 5, 6, etc.) in increasing sequential order.

INODE, JNODE M=MATNUM L=LOC T=TYPE

Where 
INODE  is the first node of the extra beam
JNODE  is the end node of the extra beam
MATNUM  is the material number to use for the element
LOC is the location of the extra member in the model. A value of 1 means
the extra member connects column nodes, a value of 2
means the extra member connects pier cap nodes, and a value of 3 means the
extra member connects pile nodes.
TYPE is the cross section type code. A value of 0 means a pier type, and a
value of 1 means a pile type.

TAPERED COLUMN AND CANTILEVER SECTIONS

Columns and Cantilever Pier Cap sections can be set to tapered (non-prismatic) by set-
ting TC and/or TCANT to values greater than 0. When material properties, linear or non-
linear, are set for tapered sections, 2 sets of properties [base and top (tip)] are required
instead of the one set required for prismatic sections. Figure: 17.3.w and Figure: 17.3.x,
and sample inputs, below, illustrate the addition of tapered column and cantilever prop-
erties to the input file.

Figure: 17.3.y Addition of tapered Column properties

When tapered column properties are set, the Column Base properties are set on Mater-
ial Property Line #1, and the Column Top properties are set on Material Property Line
#2. All subsequent structure properties are set on one line # higher than as specified in
MATERIAL PROPERTY LINES.
A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered columns is given
below. The structure also has two extra members, with one extra member property. For
reference purposes, the material property lines are numbered and labeled in italics.

STRUCTURE
N= 1 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A=
2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0
1 I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. a)
2 I= 900.0,900.0 J= 4000.0 A= 400.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. b)
3 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
5 I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0

Material Property Lines (MPL’s) 1 and 2 list properties for the Column base and top,
respectively. MPL 3 lists properties for the Pier Cap, and MPL 4 lists properties for the
Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same values as Pier Cap properties). MPL 5 lists the
extra members’ properties.
 Figure: 17.3.z Addition of tapered Cantilever properties

If the Cantilevers are prismatic [TCANT = 0], Cantilever properties default to the Pier
Cap Material properties. For a tapered Cantilever Pier Cap, the Cantilever Base prop-
erties are set on Material Property Line #4, and the Cantilever Tip properties are set on
Material Property Line #5, unless tapered column sections have also been set (see
example below), in which case the properties are set on Material Property Lines #’s 5
and 6, respectively. Any extra member properties are set on two line #’s higher (or three
line #’s higher, if columns are tapered as well) than as specified in MATERIAL PROPERTY
LINES.

A sample input for a structure with linear properties and tapered cantilevers is given
below. The structure also has two extra members, with one extra member property. For
reference purposes, the material property lines are numbered and labeled in italics.

STRUCTURE
N= 2 S= 72.0 H= 120.0 O= 90.0 C= 4 B= 1,2 W= 60.0 X= 1 F= 0 E= 0 D= 0 A=
2,1 T= 3,2,0 J= 1 K= 0,0
1 I= 1000.0,1000.0 J= 5000.0 A= 500.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
2 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
3 I= 700.0,700.0 J= 3000.0 A= 350.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0
4 I= 400.0,400.0 J= 1200.0 A= 100.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. c)
5 I= 300.0,300.0 J= 1000.0 A= 90.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0 (prop. d)
6 I= 100.0,100.0 J= 500.0 A= 50.0 E= 4400.0 G= 1830.0

Material Property Line (MPL) 1 lists properties for the Column. MPL 2 lists properties for
the Pier Cap, and MPL 3 lists properties for the Center Pier Cap (defaulted to the same
values as Pier Cap properties). MPL’s 4 and 5 list the Cantilever Pier Cap base and tip
properties, respectively. MPL 6 lists the extra members’ properties.
For the output, the material properties are listed starting with property #2. Property #2
is for the column. If the column is tapered, the base is property #2 plus as many of the
next ones required to get one property for each section in the column (TC). Next comes
the beam property, then the center beam. If the cantilever is tapered, then TCANT prop-
erties will be next. Finally only additional (extra members) properties will be last.

Hammerhead Piers with Parabolic Tapered Pier Caps

Under the STRUCTURE header.

STRUCTURE
N=N1 S=S1 H=H1 O=O1 C=C1 B=B1, B2 W=W1 X=CC F=KFLOOD \ E=SPELEV
D=CONT A=NUMLM, NUMPR [V=NPAD, POFF, PSPC1, PSPC2, .... or P= NPAD,
PUNF, POFF/
T=TC, CANT, TBEAM R=H1, H2, H3 J=NLOPT KSHAPE (all one line)

Where
H1 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever base
H2 is the depth of the pier cap at the center of the pier cap
H3 is the depth of the pier cap at the cantilever tip
Specify the number of tapered sections with CANT. If the H1, H2, and H3 properties are
missing (zero by default) then a linear taper will be used.

Figure: 17.3.aa Parabolic Cantilever Taper

17.3.9 Column Information

The “Column” problem type allows for the convenient analysis/design of a single struc-
tural (frame) member. The column ends are supported by springs, and the engineer
may adjust the spring stiffnesses to simulate the actual end support conditions. A spring
value equal to zero eliminates that support. External forces and self weight may be
applied to all nodes on the column.

A total of five lines are required in addition to the pile property data.

COLUMN
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 top of column
S = S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 bottom of column
L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ   top of column
L = LF, LL, LI F = FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ   bottom of column

Where 
S1  is the tip spring resistance in the global X direction
S2  is the tip spring resistance in the global Y direction
S3  is the tip spring resistance in the global Z direction
S4  is the rotational spring resistance about the global X-axis
S5  is the rotational spring resistance about the global Y-axis
S6  is the rotational spring resistance about the global Z-axis
LF  is the first load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied
in.
LL  is the last load case number in the generation sequence that the load will be applied
in.
LI  is the increment for the generation sequence between load cases LI and LL.
FX  is the magnitude of the load in X direction
FY  is the magnitude of the load in Y direction
FZ  is the magnitude of the load in Z direction
MX  is the magnitude of the moment about X axis
MY  is the magnitude of the moment about Y axis
MZ  is the magnitude of the moment about Z axis

The first S= line is for the top of the column. The second S= line is for the bottom of the
column. The first F= line is for the top of the column. The second F= is for the bottom of
the column.
17.3.10 Proximity to Collapse

For laterally loaded substructures, a quantitative measure of the global proximity to col-
lapse can be automatically calculated, based on a plastic hinge counting scheme. In turn,
this measure of how close the system is to reaching failure factors directly into, for
example, a dynamics-based Probability of Collapse expression for vessel collision load-
ing. The overall procedure is detailed in Davidson et al. (2013).

As an integral component in calculating proximity to collapse, subsets of elements mak-

ing up primary load paths must be selected by the engineer. The required element list-
ings and other input necessary for automatic calculation of proximity to collapse are
indicated below.
Note that the header below is substructure-specific.

PROXCOL
T= NUM_MECHANISMS

where
NUM_MECHANISMS is the number of collapse mechanisms considered, where each
collapse mechanism pertains to a unique listing of elements (identified below). Note
that the maximum number of mechanisms that can be considered is 10.

The following lines (including N=NUM_HINGES… and ELEM##... listings) are repeated
NUM_MECHANSIMS times.
N=NUM_HINGES L= NUM_LINES E=NUM_ELEMS_PER_LINE

The following lines occur NUM_LINES times per mechanism, and each line should con-
tain a list of NUM_ELEMS_PER_LINE items. For example, for a given mechanism defin-
ition, if two lines with three element per line were defined, then the following two lines
of elements would be issued.
I=ELEM11,ELEM12,ELEM13,…
I=ELEM21,ELEM22,ELEM23,…
where
NUM_HINGES is the number of simultaneous hinges that must occur within each line
of elements in order to bring about the collapse mechanism. The minimum number of
hinges is 1.
NUM_LINES is the number of lines of elements considered for the collapse mechanism.
Note that the minimum number of lines is 1, and the maximum number of lines is 50.
Note that all elements making up a given hinge mechanism must be selected from pile
elements or pier column elements. Mixed selections of pile/column elements are not per-
mitted, with the exception of hammerhead configurations (pile cap grid of 1x1; and,
single pile/shaft concentric with single column up to the pier cap). Nor are extra mem-
ber elements or pier/bent cap elements permitted to be included in a collapse mech-
anism definition.
NUM_ELEMS_PER_LINE is the number of elements contained listed on each line. Note
that the minimum number of elements per line is 1, and maximum number of elements
per line is 50. Further, all elements defined on a given line must be consecutive (with
respect to position) and ordered from bottommost to topmost.

The section must end with a colon.

:
17.3.11 Concentrated Nodal Loads

These are load input lines. As many lines as needed can be used. One line must be sup-
plied for each loaded joint and each load condition. This can be skipped if no con-
centrated nodal loads are applied. This can happen in the case of mast or sound walls
where wind load is applied or in retaining walls where soil pressure is applied.
Note, torsion in the pile cap can only be applied where piles are located.

In the input file after the LOAD header,

LOAD
NF, NL, NI, L=LC, F=FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ, D=DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ, T=TYPE
(one line per nodal load)

Where
NF is the starting node number
NL is the ending node number(not available in GUI)
NI is the node numbering increment(not available in GUI)
LC is the load case number
FX is the force in the global X-direction
FY is the force in the global Y-direction
FZ is the force in the global Z-direction
MX is the moment about the global X-axis
MY is the moment about the global Y-axis
MZ is the moment about the global Z-axis
DX is the force in the global X-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DY is the force in the global Y-direction (only written for applied displacement)
DZ is the force in the global Z-direction (only written for applied displacement)
RX is the moment about the global X-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RY is the moment about the global Y-axis (only written for applied displacement)
RZ is the moment about the global Z-axis (only written for applied displacement)
TYPE is the load type, specified only when Design Specifications features are used

AASHTO (LRFD) Loads:

TYPE =
DC Dead load of components 
DD Downdrag
DW Dead load of wearing surfaces and utilities
EH Horizontal earth pressure load
EV Vertical earth pressure load
ES Earth surcharge load
EL Locked-in Construction Stresses
PS Post Tensioning
CR Creep
SH Shrinkage
LL Live load
IM Impact
CE Vehicular centrifugal force
BR Vehicular braking force
PL Pedestrian live load
LS Live load surcharge
WA Water Load
WS Wind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
VP Vertical Wind Pressure
VR Vertical Wind Press. - Reverse Loads
FR Friction
TU Uniform temperature
TG Temperature gradient
SE Settlement
EQ Earthquake
BL Blast Loading
IC Ice load
 CT Vehicular collision force
CV Vessel collision force

AASHTO (LFD) Loads:

TYPE =
D Dead load
LL Live load
IM Impact
E Earth pressure
B Buoyancy
WS Wind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
LF Longitudinal force from live load
CF Centrifugal force
R Rib shortening
S Shrinkage
T Temperature
EQ Earthquake
SF Stream flow pressure
ICE Ice pressure

AREMA (LFD and SLD) Loads:

TYPE =
D Dead load
LL Live load
IM Impact
CF Centrifugal force
E Earth pressure
B Buoyancy
WS Wind load on structure
WL Wind load on live load
LF Longitudinal force from live load
F Longitudinal force due to friction
EQ Earthquake
SF Stream flow pressure
ICE Ice pressure
O Other forces
17.3.12 Bearing Location Loads

The following information is used by piers with bearings locations. The information
under the LOADBP header describes the concentrated loads applied to the bearing loc-
ations.

LOADBP
PADNUM L= LC F= FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ T=TYPE B=DIR (one line per nodal
load)

Where
PADNUM is the bearing number
LC is the load case number
FX is the force in the global X-direction
FY is the force in the global Y-direction
FZ is the force in the global Z-direction
MX is the moment about the global X-axis
MY is the moment about the global Y-axis
MZ is the moment about the global Z-axis
TYPE is the load type, specified only when Design Specifications features are used
DIR is the bearing row ("L" for left or "R" for right)
:

This section must end with a blank line.

17.3.13 Wind Load Generation

The following information is used by the wind load generator in the graphical interface:

WIND
N=NMWIND A=ANGLE1, ANGLE2, ANGLE3, ANGLE4, ANGLE5

S=SSAREA, SSWIND, SSWARM C= CPARET, CPAREL, CPWIND

P=CLARET, CLAREL, CLWIND, CLWARM (Wind load on structure--All on one line)

And
V=LTLENG, LTWIND, LTFARM (Wind load on live load)

SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 0 degrees)

SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 15 degrees)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 30 degrees)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 45 degrees)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 60 degrees)
SSWINDT SSWINDL PIERWINDT PIERWINDL LTWIND LLWIND (for 75 degrees)

Where
NMWIND  is the number of wind load cases (WSx and WLx count together as one case).
A maximum of 5 wind load cases can be generated automatically.
ANGLEx  is the skew angle of the wind in degrees measured from the transverse axis.
(angles can vary between 0 and 75°, in increments of 15 degrees).
SSAREA  is the transverse area of superstructure.
SSWIND is the transverse wind intensity on superstructure (not currently used).
SSWARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to
the center of gravity of the superstructure.
CPARET  is the transverse area of the pier cap.
CPAREL  is the longitudinal area of the pier cap.
CPWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the pier cap (not currently
used).
CLARET  is the transverse area of the columns.
CLAREL  is the longitudinal area of the columns.
CLWIND is the transverse wind intensity at the level of the columns (not currently
used).
CLWARM is the transverse wind force moment arm from the base of the columns to
the center of gravity of the columns. This parameter is computed by the program for
Pile Bent models (using the water table or ground surface elevation).
LTLENG  is the transverse length of the live load.
LTWIND is the transverse wind intensity on the live load (not currently used).
LTFARM  is the transverse wind force moment arm from the center of the pier cap to
the center of gravity of the live load.
SSWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle).
SSWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the superstructure (at each angle).
PIERWINDT is the transverse wind pressure on the pier (at each angle).
PIERWINDL is the longitudinal wind pressure on the pier (at each angle).
LTWIND is the transverse wind line load on the live load (at each angle).
LLWIND is the longitudinal wind line load on the live load (at each angle).

Note: This section must end with a blank line.

The wind load generator calculations are as follows:

Wind Load on Structure (WS)

l Transverse load (per bearing location), Ftrans

l Longitudinal load (per bearing location), Flong

 l Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring
model

l Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), Mx

Note: Since the wind load on the column is applied at the centroid (and not the pier cap),
ratio of clwarm/colheight is used to reduce the wind load in order to apply it at the level
of the pier cap.

Wind Load on Live Load (WL)

l Transverse load (per bearing location), Ftrans

l Longitudinal load (per bearing location), Flong

l Vertical loads at the bearing locations are determined using a rigid beam and spring
model

l Moment about the global x axis (per bearing location), Mx

17.3.14 Spring Properties

This set of lines specifies discrete stiffness springs, which may be placed on the pier
columns, pier cap, pile cap, and/or piles/shafts. These lines may be skipped if there are
no springs.

SPRING
NS
Where
NS is the number of spring elements (INTEGER) (zero identifies no springs)

A total of NS lines, one for each spring is required to define the spring stiffness.
If NS=0, no stiffness lines necessary.

NN  S=KX, KY, KZ, KXX, KYY, KZZ

Where
NN is the node the spring element is connected to (INTEGER)
KX is the stiffness of the spring in X direction (REAL)
KY is the stiffness of the spring in Y direction (REAL)
KZ is the stiffness of the spring in Z direction (REAL)
KXX is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about X axis (REAL)
KYY is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Y axis (REAL)
KZZ is the stiffness of the spring for rotation about Z axis (REAL)

This section must end with a blank line.

17.3.15 Pile Cap Properties

These two lines specify the properties for the pile cap which is identified as material # 1
in Figure F26-a.

CAP
E=E1 U=U1 T=T1 S=WGT O=SWGT

Where
E1 is Young's modulus of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
U1  is Poisson's ratio of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
T1  is Thickness of the Pile Cap elements (REAL)
WGT is the unit weight of the pile cap (REAL).
SWGT is the unit weight of the soil on the pile cap (REAL).

Specify thickened cap elements:

Additional lines can be input directly after the cap property line to specify that a par-
ticular element have a different thickness than the one specified above. This can be done
using the following line (repeated as many times as necessary):

ROW, COL T=THICK, SELTHK D=DTHCK

Where 
ROW  is the row number of the pile cap element
COL  is the column number of the pile cap element.
THICK  is the thickness to use for the stiffness calculations for this element
SELTHK  is the thickness to use for the self-weight calculations.
DTHCK is the drawing thickness used to draw the pile cap thickness in the 3D Edit win-
dow and 3D Bridge Window. This thickness does not affect the analysis.
17.3.16 Removed Pier Cap Element

Pier cap elements can be removed (similar to pile cap elements). The elements can be
removed to create separate pier structures. The following data is required:

RMBEAM
NSPAN, NELEM

Where
NSPAN  is the span number in which the element is to be removed
NELEM  is the element number in the span to remove
17.3.17 Bearing Connection

The following information is used by with multiple pier generation. The information
under the PADBC header describes the bearing location to superstructure connectivity.
This information is provided per pier.

PADBC
L=LEFTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET T=CAP_NODE_
COINCIDENCE_TOL
Or
R=RIGHTPAD S= FX, FY, FZ, FRX, FRY, FRZ O=OFFSET

where
LEFTPAD is the bearing location index number in left row of bearing locations
RIGHTPAD is the bearing location index number in right row of bearing locations
FX is the fixity for the local x-direction
FY is the fixity for the local y-direction
FZ is the fixity for the local z-direction
FRX is the fixity for rotation about the local x-axis
FRY is the fixity for rotation about the local y-axis
FRZ is the fixity for rotation about the local z-axis
 For all six directions: 0 for released (free), 1 for constrained
 Values greater than 1 indicate the custom connection material property number. This
custom connection is described by a load-displacement relationship. See PADPROP
header.
OFFSET is the bearing offset (measured from the centerline of the pier cap to the center
of the bearing). This value must be greater than zero when two rows of bearings are
used.
CAP_NODE_COINCIDENCE_TOL is the nodal coincidence tolerance to use for pier cap
node generation when one or more rows of bearing pads are present. Note that this
parameter is only defined for the first line beneath the PADBC header.
This section must end with a blank line.

For a single row, the left and right bearing parameters should be the same.

Figure: 17.3.ab Bearing Connection Layout for One and Two Rows

17.3.18 Point Mass

This section allows the addition of point masses to a structure.

MASS
The next line specifies the mass to be added to a node for each of the six global dir-
ections. There is one header per pier.

NS,NF,NI M=MX,MY,MZ,MRX,MRY,MRZ

Where
NS is the starting node to add the discrete mass.
NF is the ending node to add the discrete mass (not written by UI).
NI is the increment to generate additional node numbers between NS and NF at which
to add mass (not written by UI).
MX mass coefficient in the X translation DOF.
MY mass coefficient in the Y translation DOF.
MZ mass coefficient in the Z translation DOF.
MRX mass coefficient in the X rotation DOF.
MRY mass coefficient in the Y rotation DOF.
MRZ mass coefficient in the Z rotation DOF.

This section must end with a blank line.

17.3.19 Point Dampers

This section allows the addition of point dampers to a structure. Point dampers are not
allowed for modal analysis.

DAMP
The next line specifies the dampers to be added to a node for each of the six global dir-
ections. There is one header per pier.

NS,NF,NI C=DAMPX,DAMPY,DAMPZ,DAMPRX,DAMPRY,DAMPRZ

Where
NS is the starting node to add the dampers to.
NF is the final node to add the dampers to.
NI is the increment to generate additional node numbers between NS and NF at which
to add dampers.
DAMPTX damping coefficient for X translation.
DAMPTY damping coefficient for Y translation.    
DAMPTZ damping coefficient for Z translation.
DAMPRX damping coefficient for rotation about X.
DAMPRY damping coefficient for rotation about Y.
DAMPRZ damping coefficient for rotation about Z.

This section must end with a blank line.

17.3.20 Dynamic Load Function Application

LOADYN
The next lines specify the load function and its point of application. There is one header
per pier. There can be as many of these lines as required to specify all loaded nodes and
DOF for this load function. There are two possible means of assigning dynamic loads to
nodal DOF, as detailed below.

Method 1: The first method consists of specifying one load function per node, where the
individual load function can be applied to one or more DOF at the selected node. In this
context, the DOF flags (L1 through L6) can be set to N (not loaded), or L (loaded).

NF,NL,NI L=LCN F=L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6 D=FUNC N=LDTYPE

Where
NF is the first node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NL is the last node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NI is the increment for generating node numbers between NF and NL for which the
DOF specification is used. NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
LCN is the load case number (defaulted to 1).
Li is the state at which the ith DOF can have, either loaded or NO load. Therefore, Li can
have ONLY the two following values;
Li = L is for loaded.
Li = N is for NO load.
FUNC is the load function number to apply (default is 1)
LDTYPE is the method being used to define the dynamic loads (0 = Method 1; 1 =
Method 2).

Method 2: The second method is the default method used by the UI, and allows for
application of a unique load function for each loaded DOF. In this context, the DOF flags
(FCN1 through FCN6) can be set to 0 (not loaded), or some integer value, where the
integer value corresponds to a load function. This method permits up to six load func-
tions to be assigned across the DOFs of a given node.

NF,NL,NI L=LCN F=FCN1,FCN2,FCN3,FCN4,FCN5,FCN6 N=LDTYPE

Where
NF is the first node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NL is the last node in a generation sequence for which the DOF specification is used.
NI is the increment for generating node numbers between NF and NL for which the
DOF specification is used. NL and NI can be left blank if no generation is desired.
LCN is the load case number (defaulted to 1).
FCNi is the load function assigned to the ith DOF, either unloaded (zero) or loaded
(non-zero).
LDTYPE is the method being used to define the dynamic loads (0 = Method 1; 1 =
Method 2).
17.3.21 Surcharge in Retaining Wall Model

This header RETAIN_SUR would only be written for retaining walls that have some
form of surcharge (line, strip, uniform) applied.

RETAIN_SUR
L= 1 R= 0
L= 2 R= 0
…
:
where
The line is repeated for each load case.
L is load case
R = 0 corresponds to off
R = 1 corresponds to on
18 Post Processing File Formats

FB-MultiPier writes many results files that are used by the post processing plotting pro-
gram to display the results. The following is a list of the files and their contents.

NOTE: Each list constitutes a sequential record in the file. Unless otherwise noted, the
FORTRAN convention of variables I-N are four byte integers while (A-H, O-Z) are double
precision. Numbers appended to the file extensions indicate the substructure (e.g.,
*.PLF2 is the Geometry and Control Information for Substructure #2).

1. *.ANL Applied Nodal Loads

2. *.ASH Load Combination Results
3. *.AXL Axial Forces for Beam Element
4. *.BPF Bearing Pad Forces Due to Span Self Weight
5. *.CMB Load Combinations
6. *.DFO Element Forces (Dynamic Analysis)
7. *.EIG Mode Shape and Frequency Information
8. *.EXM Extra Member End-Fixity
9. *.MOM Maximum Moments in Beam Element
10. *.MPR Multiple Pier Generation
11. *.NCV Analysis Convergence Information
12. *.PCM  Pile Cap Element Stresses
13. *.PEL Pile Embedment Length Data
14. *.PIL Pile Data
15. *.PLF Geometry and Control Information
16. *.PLS Pier to Superstructure Connectivity
17. *.RPE Rigid Pile Elements
18. *.SLI Capacity Information
19. *.SOI  Soil Spring Forces
20. *.SPE Bridge Span Eigen Results (Without Bearing Coordinates)
21. *.SPN Bridge Span Eigen Results (With Bearing Coordinates)
22. *.STA  Pushover Analysis Data
23. *.STR Stresses of Pile Cap
24. *.VES Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis Results
25. *.VMD Shear and Moment Results
26. *.XML XML Model Data Results

18.1 Applied Nodal Loads

File: name.ANL
This file contains a listing of all applied nodal loads.

The file format consists of the following:

__PIER#N

where
N is the substructure number to which the following substructure-specific load data per-
tain. Note that no spaces exist between __PIER# and N.

LOAD
LOAD_CONTENT
:

where
LOAD_CONTENT is the content (per line) contained immediately beneath the LOAD
header in the input file. If the LOAD header is not found, or if no nodal loads are defined
beneath the LOAD header, then no lines will be printed.
LOADBP
LOADBP_CONTENT
:

where
LOADBP_CONTENT is the content (per line) contained immediately beneath the
LOADBP header in the input file. If the LOADBP header is not found, or if no nodal
loads are defined beneath the LOADBP header, then no lines will be printed.

LOADYN
LOADYN_CONTENT
:

where
LOADYN_CONTENT is the content (per line) contained immediately beneath the
LOADYN header in the input file. If the LOADYN header is not found, or if no nodal
loads are defined beneath the LOADYN header, then no lines will be printed.

The above collection of lines are printed once per substructure (when headers and loads
are present). The content below is printed once per model (when the header exists and
loads are present).

SPANLOAD
SPANLOAD_CONTENT
:

where
SPANLOAD_CONTENT is the content (per line) contained immediately beneath the
SPANLOAD header in the input file. If the SPANLOAD header is not found, or if no
nodal loads are defined beneath the SPANLOAD header, then no lines will be printed.
18.2 Load Combination Results

File: name.ASH
This file contains design code and limit state information when the program Design Spe-
cifications features are utilized.

nCodeType

Where
nCodeType is the design code used for generating load combinations
(0 – for LRFD, 1 – for LFD, 2 – for AREMA)

For LRFD,
nGroup1, nGroup2, …, nGroup13
(CritPl(J),J=1,13)
(CritCol(J),J=1,13)
(CritPierCap (J),J=1,13)

Where
nGroup1… are the limit states that were analyzed
(0 – for analyzed, 1 – for not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pile demand/capacity ratio for
each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier column demand/capacity
ratio for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier cap demand/capacity ratio
for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)

For LFD,
nGroup1, nGroup2, …, nGroup11
(CritPl(J),J=1,11)
(CritCol(J),J=1,11)
(CritPierCap (J),J=1,11)

Where
nGroup1… are the limit states that were analyzed
(0 – for analyzed, 1 – for not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pile demand/capacity ratio for
each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier column demand/capacity
ratio for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)
CritPl is load combination number with the maximum pier cap demand/capacity ratio
for each analyzed limit state (0 – if not analyzed)

18.3 Axial Forces for Beam Elements

File: name.AXL

This file contains the axial forces for each beam type element (structure and pile).

Numtrs, numfrm
where
Numtrs  is the number of truss type members (=0)
Numfrm  is the number of bending type members.

The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each
load case.

Mtype, nume
where
Mtype  is the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Nume  is the number of elements

Axial
where
Axial  is the axial force for the member for the appropriate load case.

18.4 Bearing Reactions Data (Due to Span Self Weight)

File: name.BPF

This file is only generated by (or read by) the engine for the purposes of ensuring uni-
form bearing pad reactions in bridge/OPTS models due to span self weight. Generation
(or reading) of the file is dictated by the value of a flag within the PREPLDS header. Fur-
ther, this file is only generated in association with bridge models and OPTS models that
do not make use of the MPTE feature.

LOAD_PER_BEARING_LEFT_ROW, LOAD_PER_BEARING_RIGHT_ROW

The above line is issued once for each substructure.

18.5 Load Combinations

File: name.CMB

This file contains the limit state equations for each load combination (e.g., AASHTO 
(LRFD), AASHTO (LFD), AREMA).

[Comb. INC ] (line1)

+ Fact1 LC1 + Fact2 LC2 + Fact3 LC3 +... + FactN LCN (line2)

INC  is the load combination number.

Fact1, Fact2, Fact3 ... , FactN  are the load factors.
LC1, LC2, LC3 ... , LCN  are the load cases.

line1 and line2 are repeated per load combination.

18.6 Element Forces (Dynamic Analysis)

File: name.DFO

This file contains the element forces at a pile node for dynamic analysis. The file contains
the following lines:

# FLPIER_DYN (line 1)
# FORCES FOR PILE # PileNo ELEMENT #ElementNo NODE # NodeNo (line 2)
# IN GLOBAL COORDINATES (line 3)
# UNITS ARE : (line 4)
# Forces in kips - Moments in kip-in (line 5)
# TIME STEP AXIAL F22 F33 TORQUE M22 M33 (line 6)
Timestep Axial ShearF22 ShearF33 Torque MomentM22 MomentM33 (line 7)

where
PileNo is the pile number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
ElementNo is the element number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
NodeNo is the node number where the forces are calculated (on line 2).
line7 gives element force values calculated at "NodeNo" located on pile "PileNo", ele-
ment "ElementNo" .
Timestep is the time step when time-history analysis is considered.
Axial is the axial force.
ShearF22 is the shear force value in local direction 2.
ShearF33 is the shear force value in local direction 3.
Torque is the torque value.
MomentM22 is the moment force value around local direction 2.
MomentM33 is the moment force around local direction 3.

For time-history analysis, line 7 is repeated for each time step whereas for modal ana-
lysis the line 7 is written once.

18.7 Mode Shape and Frequency Information

File: name.EIG

This file contains eigenvalues (frequencies) and eigenvectors (mode shapes) used in the
response spectrum analysis.

NVEC
where
NVEC is the number of number of eigenvectors

NNODE
where
NNODE is the number of nodes in the model

FREQ1, FREQ2, FREQ3, ….. FREQN

where
FREQx  is the vibration period for mode x.

Loop over the number of eigenvectors and over each node in the model
NODE, PHIXX, PHIYY, PHIZZ, PHIRX, PHIRY, PHIRZ
where
NODE is the model node number (integer)
PHIXX is the eigenvector in the x-direction (double)
PHIYY is the eigenvector in the y-direction (double)
PHIZZ is the eigenvector in the z-direction (double)
PHIRX is the eigenvector about the x-axis (double)
PHIRY is the eigenvector about the y-axis (double)
PHIRZ is the eigenvector about the z-axis (double)

Eigenvector data read example:

Do I=1,NVEC
Do j=1,NNODE 
Read() NODE, (PHI(k), k=1, 6) 
Enddo 
Enddo

18.8 Extra Member End-Fixity

File: name.EXM

This file is printed once per substructure. The file printed for the first substructure does
not end in a number. However, all subsequent files do end with a number. For example,
for a two-substructure model, two files would be generated: name.EXM and name.EXM2.
Each file contains ASCII (formatted) content, constituting a listing of extra member
elements defined for each substructure. For each element listing, the end fixity of the
extra member is also listed, as detailed below.

Note:
1.If no extra members are available for a given model type, then no .EXM file will be prin-
ted.
2. If no extra members are defined for a given substructure, then the associated .EXM file
will only contain a single line with ‘0’.

NEXM

where
NEXM is the number of extra members for the substructure.

ELEMNO EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4 EF5 EF6

where
ELEMNO is the extra member element number within the substructure
EF1 through EF3 are the end-fixity conditions for rotation about the I-end 1, 2, and 3 (ele-
ment-local axes)
EF4 through EF6 are the end-fixity conditions for rotation about the J-end 1, 2, and 3
(element-local axes)

18.9 Maximum Moments in Beam Elements

File: name.MOM

This file contains the maximum moment forces for each beam type element (structure
and pile).
numfrm
where
Numfrm  is the number of bending type members.

The next two sections are repeated twice and both are repeated NUMLC times, for each
load case.

Mtype, nume
where
Mtype  is the element type (=3 for structure, =2 for piles)
Nume  is the number of elements

Rmom
where
Rmom  is the maximum moment in the member for the appropriate load case.

18.10 Multiple Pier Generation

File: name.MPR

This file contains information for generating multiple piers and bridge spans.

numPiers nsdof

where
numPiers is the number of bridge piers
nsdof is the number of soil stresses written per node in the soil

pierCoordX, pierCoordY, pierRot

where
pierCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the pile cap origin (for that pier)
pierRot  is the rotation angle about global z-axis (for that pier)

18.11 Analysis Convergence Information

File: name.NCV

This file contains analysis parameters and convergence information.

Nconv
where
Nconv is the number of converged load cases (for static analysis)
is the number of converged load combinations (for static analysis)
is the number of converged time steps (for dynamic analysis)

PhiovrFlex
where
PhiovrFlex is the user-defined strength reduction "phi" factor to use when factoring the
flexural portions of interaction diagrams.

PhiovrAxial
where
PhiovrAxial is the user-defined strength reduction "phi" factor to use when factoring
the axial portions of interaction diagrams.

iInteractionApproach
where
iInteractionApproach is flag indicating the type of interaction diagram to form
(0=AASHTO; 1=AREMA; 2=user-defined).

NPlt
where
NPlt is the results version number (currently version 1)

Ndynam
where
Ndynam is the type of analysis (0 – for static, 1 – for dynamic, 2 – for response spectrum
analysis)

NTimeStep
where
NTimeStep is the time step used (for time domain dynamic analysis, otherwise 0)

NVEC
where
NVEC  is the number of eigenvectors (for response spectrum analysis, otherwise 0)

LC,FLAG
where
LC is the load case or load combination number.
FLAG is an indicator if the load case/combination converged (-1 = not applicable; 0 =
converged; 1 = did not converge)

The line is repeated once for each load case/combination. Note that this array will only
be populated with non-zero values for static models with more than 1 load case-
/combination.
18.12 Pile Cap Element Stresses

File: name.PCM

This file contains nodal stresses on the pile cap.

ZSTRESS1 ZSTRESS2 ZSTRESS3 ZSTRESS4 ZSTRESS5 ZSTRESS6 ZSTRESS7 NOD
lcnum

where
ZSTRESS1 - is the pile cap element stress m2
ZSTRESS2 - is the pile cap element stress m1
ZSTRESS3 - is the pile cap element stress m12
ZSTRESS4 - is the pile cap element stress s23
ZSTRESS5 - is the pile cap element stress s13
ZSTRESS6 - is the pile cap element stress s1
ZSTRESS7 - is the pile cap element stress s2
NOD - is the pile cap node number
lcnum - is the load case number, load combination number, or time step number

The pile cap element stresses are printed for corner nodes first followed by midside
nodes.

18.13 Pile Embedment Length Data

File: name.PEL

This file is only generated when the minimum pile embedment analysis mode is selec-
ted.
NUMINCR,INCREMENT_INDEX,NUMLC,EMBED_LENGTH

NUMINCR is the number of increments to attempt between the starting and final
embedment lengths.
INCREMENT_INDEX is an integer-based index of the pile embedment increment num-
ber, indicating a unique realization of a candidate pile embedment length. Index “0”
indicates the base file, or starting point embedment length. Index values greater than 0
signify models configured with candidate pile embedment lengths between the starting-
point embedment and (inclusively) the ending embedment length.
The UI makes use of this index to determine if the MPTE feature should be enabled in
the “Design Tables” windows upon loading of analysis results (0=yes; >0=no). The
engine prints this index to the *.PEL file anytime the *.PEL file is generated
NUMLC is the total number of load cases/combinations.
EMBED_LENGTH is pile embedment length. Note this assumes a single pile type and
single soil set.

The above line is printed once.

LC,MAX_X,MAX_X_PILE,MAX_Y,MAX_Y_PILE,MAX_T,MAX_T_PILE,MAX_C,MAX_C_
PILE,

LC is the load case/combination number.

MAX_X is the max pile head displacement in the X direction.
MAX_X_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile head displacement in the X dir-
ection.
MAX_Y is the max pile head displacement in the Y direction.
MAX_Y_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile head displacement in the Y dir-
ection.
MAX_T is the max pile axial tension force.
MAX_T_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile axial tension force.
MAX_C is the max pile axial compression force.
MAX_C_PILE is the pile corresponding to the max pile axial compression force.
The above line is repeated once for each load case/combination. For load case-
s/combinations that do not converge, only the load case/combination number and zero-
valued entries are printed.

EOF

EOF is a string indicator of "end of file".

The above line consists of the string "EOF" and is printed once.

18.14 Pile Data

File: name.PIL

This file contains the pile information data.

NUMPN, NUMLC
where
Numpn  is the total number of pile nodes
Numlc  is the number of load cases or combinations written to results file.

NPX, NPY, nmpil, npil, kfix, nplnod

where
Npx  is the grid in the X direction
Npy  is the grid in the Y direction
Nmpil  is the number of missing piles.
Npil  is the number of actual piles
Kfix  is the flag for pile head fixity (0=pinned, 1=fixed)
Nplnod  is the number of nodes in a pile (including the top)

Mpilx, mpily (There are nmpil records)

Mpilx  is the x index for the missing pile
Mpily  is the y index for the missing pile.

Dxsp1, dxsp2, dxsp3,… (npx-1 values)

These are the pile spacings for the X direction.

Dysp1, dysp2, dysp3,… (npy-1 values)

These are the pile spacings for the y direction.

The following line is written ONCE FOR EACH PILE in the system (NPIL times)

(ipp(i), i=1, nplnod-1)

This index tells which cross section to use for each segment of pile.

(numpset(I), I=1, npil)

This index tells which pile set number to use for each pile in the system.

Ndfrln

This is the number of nodes in the free length (above the ground surface). This matches
nsub in the input file.

The next line is written for EACH PILE. (npil times).

TPL, GSE
where
Tpl  is the total pile length.
Gse  is the height above the ground of the pile cap

Batx, baty, batl (There are npil records)

where
Batx  is the slope in the x direction for a battered element.
Baty  is the slope in the y direction for a battered element.
Batl  is the actual element segment length.

DZ, DX, DY, RZ, RX, RY (There are nplnod*npil records)

There are numpn records. These are the displacements in the X, Y, and Z and the rota-
tions in the X, Y, and Z directions for the pile nodes.

18.15 Geometry and Control Information

File: name.PLF

This is the main structure geometry and control information file. The contents are as fol-
lows:

Npset
Is the number of pile sets for the piles.
nseg1, nseg2, nseg3, ….. nsegN

Where
nsegi is the number of cross section properties per pile set. There are npset numbers
written.

Ktype, Dia, Width, Depth

There is one record for each segment. (nseg records)
where
Ktype  is the shape of the section (1=round, 2=square/rectangular, 3=Hpile)
Dia  is the effective diameter of the cross section
Width  is the width of the section
Depth  is the depth of the section

Name

Is the problem file name (character*256)

Numnp, Nstr, kbent

where
Numnp is the number of nodes in the structure, including pile cap and the tops of the
piles.
Nstr  is not used.
kbent is the model type
kbent = -1: For "Pile and Cap" & "Single Pile" models
kbent = 1: For "General Pier" model
kbent = 3: For "High Mast / Lighting Sign" model
kbent = 4: For "Retaining Wall" model
kbent = 5: For "Sound Wall" model
kbent = 6: For "Stiffness Formulation" model
kbent = 7: For "Pile Bent" model
kbent = 8: For "Column Analysis" model

ncol, nclv, ncantn, nadmem, nadprp, nclnod, nbmnod, nbpad, kmetr

where
ncol  is the number of columns in the structure
nclv  is the number of cantilevers (1 for mast; 2 for pier, bent)
ncantn  is the number of cantilever nodes
nadmem is the number of additional members
nadprp  is the number of additional properties
nclnod  is the number of node in the columns
nbmnod  is the number of nodes in the pier cap
nbpad is the number of bearing locations
kmetr  is the metric flag (0=english,1=meters/KN, 2=mm,KN)

Space, Height, Offset, Cantil, Padoff

These are double precision.

where
Space  is the spacing between columns
Height  is the height of the columns
Offset  is the distance from x=0 to start the structure.
Cantil  is the length of the cantilevers
Padoff  is the offset from the left column where the first bearing location starts.

X, Y, Z

There are numnp records. These are the X, Y and Z coordinates of the structure nodes
(Not including the piles below the pile cap).

Idx, idy, idz, idrx, idry, idrz

There are numnp records. There are the structural DOF for the problem. They are for
the x, y, z and then rotation x, y and z.

There are three sets of the following. For the beam type elements (mtype=3), for the
shell elements (mtype=6) and for the spring elements (mtype=8).

Mtype, nume
Mtype  is the element type.
Nume  is the number of elements of this type.

NELM, NND, (LT(J), J=1, NND) (this line is repeated nume times)

Nelm  is the element number

Nnd  is the number of nodes saved for this element
Lt()  is the list of node numbers for this element.

DX, DY, DZ, RX, RY, RZ

There are numnp records. These are the displacements in the X, Y and Z and the rota-
tions in the X, Y and Z directions for the structure nodes (Not including the piles below
the pile cap).

MAXIMUMS

lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp ,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy

lmsh2  is the load case with the max pile shear-2

lpsh2  is the pile number with the max pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the max pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the max pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the max pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the max pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the max pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the max pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the max axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the max axial force
lmtor  is the load case with the max torsion
lptor is the pile number with the max torsion
lmsax  is the load case with the max soil axial force
lpsax  is the pile number with the max soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the max soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the max soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the max soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the max soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the max soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the max soil torsion
lmdiz  is the load case with the max pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the max pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the max pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the max pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the max pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the max pile y-displacement

MINIMUMS

lmsh2,lpsh2,lmsp,lpsp,lmrm2,lprm2,lmrm3,lprm3,
lmaxl,lpaxl,lmtor,lptor,lmsax,lpsax,lmsdx,lpsdx,
lmsdy,lpsdy,lmsto,lpsto,lmdiz,lpdiz,lmdix,lpdix,
lmdiy,lpdiy

lmsh2  is the load case with the min pile shear-2

lpsh2  is the pile number with the min pile shear-2
lmsp is the load case with the min pile shear-3
lpsp is the pile number with the min pile shear3
lmrm2 is the load case with the min pile moment-2
lprm2 is the pile number with the min pile moment-2
lmrm3 is the load case with the min pile moment-3
lprm3 is the pile number with the min pile moment-3
lmaxl is the load case with the min axial force
lpaxl is the pile number with the min axial force
lmtor  is the load case with the min torsion
lptor is the pile number with the min torsion
lmsax  is the load case with the min soil axial force
lpsax  is the pile number with the min soil axial force
lmsdx is the load case with the min soil lateral-x force
lpsdx is the pile number with the min soil lateral-x force
lmsdy is the load case with the min soil lateral-y force
lpsdy is the pile number with the min soil lateral-y force
lmsto is the load case with the min soil torsion
lpsto is the pile number with the min soil torsion
lmdiz  is the load case with the min pile axial-displacement
lpdiz is the pile number with the min pile axial-displacement
lmdix is the load case with the min pile x-displacement
lpdix is the pile number with the min pile x-displacement
lmdiy is the load case with the min pile y-displacement
lpdiy is the pile number with the min pile y-displacement

18.16 Pier to Superstructure Connectivity

File: name.PLS

This file contains information for the bearing row to bridge span connectivity (per pier).

nodesLeft, nodesRight, spanNodeLeft, spanNodeRight, spanNodeLeftHeight,

spanNodeRightHeight, bearingRotationLRow, bearingRotationRRow
Where
nodesLeft is the number of connection nodes for the left bearing row
nodesRight is the number of connection nodes for the right bearing row
spanNodeLeft is the connector node number for the begin of bridge span
spanNodeRight is the connector node number for the end of bridge span
spanNodeLeftHeight is the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the begin of bridge
span
spanNodeRightHeight is the elevation above the pier cap (c.g.) for the end of bridge
span
bearingRotationLeftRow is the rotation of the left-row bearings (in radians)
bearingRotationRightRow is the rotation of the right-row bearings (in radians)

(If there is a left row of bearings – i.e. nodesLeft > 0)

(nodesLeft number of lines)
padLeftCoordX, padLeftCoordY, padLeftCoordZ

Where
padLeftCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padLeftCoordZ is the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node

(If there is a right row of bearings – i.e. nodesRight > 0)

(nodesRight number of lines)
padRightCoordX, padRightCoordY, padRightCoordZ

Where
padRightCoordX is the nodal x-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordY is the nodal y-coordinate for the bearing connection node
padRightCoordZ is the nodal z-coordinate for the bearing connection node

(If there is a left row of bearings – i.e. nodesLeft > 0)

(one line per connector element)
nElem, padLeftConnI, padLeftConnJ

Where
nElem is the connector element number
padLeftConnI is node number at the I-end of the connector element
padLeftConnJ is node number at the J-end of the connector element

(If there is a right row of bearings – i.e. nodesRight > 0)

(one line per connector element)
nElem, padRightConnI, padRightConnJ

Where
nElem is the connector element number
padRightConnI is node number at the I-end of the connector element
padRightConnJ is node number at the J-end of the connector element

Nodal displacement information (per load case)

Nodal modeshape information (per eigenvector). Response Spectrum Analysis only.

(If there is a left row of bearings – i.e. nodesLeft > 0)

(nodesLeft number of lines)
PHIX_L, PHIY_L, PHIZ_L, PHIRX_L, PHIRY_L, PHIRZ_L

Where
PHIX_L is the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_L is the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_L is the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_L is the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_L is the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_L is the connector node rotation about the z-axis
(If there is a right row of bearings – i.e. nodesRight > 0)
(nodesRight number of lines)
PHIX_R, PHIY_R, PHIZ_R, PHIRX_R, PHIRY_R, PHIRZ_R

Where
PHIX_R is the connector node displacement in the x-direction
PHIY_R is the connector node displacement in the y-direction
PHIZ_R is the connector node displacement in the z-direction
PHIRX_R is the connector node rotation about the x-axis
PHIRY_R is the connector node rotation about the y-axis
PHIRZ_R is the connector node rotation about the z-axis

18.17 Rigid Pile Elements

File: name.RPE
This file contains the listing of pile elements that have been rigidized (one file per sub-
structure).

The following line is printed once, and indicates the number of lines to read beyond the
current line.
nPiles

where
nPiles is the total number of piles for the substructure. If the rigidized pile length is
zero, then this line will contain "0".

When nPiles is non-zero, the following line is printed once per pile in the substructure.
nPile, elem1, elem2, ..., elemN

where
nPile is the pile number
elem# is the element position(s) in the current pile that is (are) rigidized, relative to the
topmost element in the pile. For example, if the top three elements of pile "6" are rigid-
ized, then the corresponding line would be:
6, 1, 2, 3
Note that if the pile rigidized element length is non-zero, but no piles are rigidized, then
the line will only contain the pile number and no other content.

18.18 Capacity Information

File: name.SLI

This file contains the capacity information for each cross section used in the structure.

Nxpile, nxstruc
where
Nxpile  is the number of cross section in the piles
Nxstruc  is the number of cross sections in the structure.

idflg is the flag to tell if cross section capacity information (for interaction diagrams)
exists in the file. One flag is written for each cross section.
=1, information is not present
=0, information is present

The next set of records is repeated for each cross section for which capacity information
exists.

Nlcv  is the number of contour slices for this cross section

PTUV, YPC, ZPC, YPT. ZPT

where
Ptuv  is the ultimate axial tension strength
Ypc  is the y shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Zpc  is the z shift for the plastic centroid (compression)
Ypt is the y shift for the plastic centroid (tension)
Zpt is the z shift for the plastic centroid (tension)

(PNC(J)J=1, 13) (repeated nlcv times)

where
pnc  is the table of capacity results. Where the values are:
pnc(1) = φ* Compression capacity
pnc(2) = φ* moment capacity about local 3 axis (M1)
pnc(3) = φ* moment capacity about negative local 2 axis (M2)
pnc(4) = φ* moment capacity about negative local 3 axis (M3)
pnc(5) = φ* moment capacity about local 2 axis (M4)
pnc(6) = α1
pnc(7) = β1
pnc(8) = α2
pnc(9) = β2
pnc(10)=α3
pnc(11)=β3
pnc(12)=α4
pnc(13)=β4

The α and β’s are used as a pair for the following capacity equation:

If the compression is in the 1st quadrant (+2,+3) then use M1, M2, α1, β1
If the compression is in the 2nd quadrant (-2,+3) then use M3, M2, α2, β2
If the compression is in the 3rd quadrant (-2,-3) then use M3, M4, α3, β3
If the compression is in the 4th quadrant (+2,-3) then use M1, M4, α4, β4

18.19 Soil Spring Forces

File: name.SOI

This file contains soil spring forces for pile nodes embedded in soil.

do i = 1,npile -----! loop each pile

do j = is,ie -----! loop over pile nodes that are actually in the soil
write(nt9) (pileNdSoilFrcArr(j),j=1,nplnod*nsdof)
enddo
enddo

where
pileNdSoilFrcArr(j) is the array containing the soil spring forces
nsdof is the number of soil stresses written per node; this value will be either 4 or 6, as
dictated by the number of soil stresses written in the .MPR file.

The above function is repeated for each load case, load combination, or time step

18.20 Bridge Span Eigen Results (without Bearing Coordinates)

File: name.SPE

The file contains analysis results in the following format for models containing super-
structure spans.
nCurRNodes (line 1)
nCurLNodes (line 2)
nSpanElemNo (line 3)
nCurNodes (line 4)
modeShp (line 5)

where,
nCurRNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the right row of bearings on
left pier.
nCurLNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the left row of bearings on
right pier.
nSpanElemNo - represents the number of deck elements on the current bridge span.
nCurNodes - represents the total number of nodes on the current bridge span (right
row of bearings of left pier + left row of bearings of right pier + span nodes).
modeShp - is the mode shape data per span node (6 degrees of freedom).

line 1, line 2, line 3, and line 4 are written once per bridge span.
line 5 is repeated for each bridge span node.

The above process is repeated for each bridge span.

18.21 Bridge Span Results (with Bearing Coordinates)

File: name.SPN

The file contains analysis results in the following format for models containing super-
structure spans.

nCurRNodes (line 1)
coordR1,coordR2,coordR3 (line 2)
nCurLNodes (line 3)
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 (line 4)
nSpanElem (line 5)
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 (line 6)
nCurNodes (line 7)
disp1,disp2,disp3,disp4,disp5,disp6 (line 8)

where
nCurRNodes - represents the total nodes on the right row of bearings on left pier.
coordR1,coordR2,coordR3 - represents coordinates of each node on the right row of
bearings on left pier.
nCurLNodes - represents the total nodes on the left row of bearings on right pier.
coordL1,coordL2,coordL3 - represents coordinates of each node on the left row of
bearings on right pier.
nSpanElemNo - represents the number of deck elements on the current bridge span.
nCurNodes - represents the total number of node on the current bridge span (for
Bridge models, this is the right row of bearings of left pier + left row of bearings of right
pier + span nodes; for Span 1 of OPTS models, this is the left row of bearings + span
nodes; for Span 2 of OPTS models, this is the right row of bearings + span nodes).
disp1,disp2,disp3,disp4,disp5,disp6 - nodal displacements

line 1, line 3, line 5, and line 7 are written once per bridge span.
line 2 is repeated for each node on the right row of bearings on left pier.
line 4, and line 6 are repeated for each node on the left row of bearings on right pier.
line 8 is repeated for each span node.

The following lines are subsequently printed:

nSpanElem (line 9)
vXL,v2i,v3i,v2j,v3j,m3i,m2i,m3j,m2j,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,Pi,Pj,tori,torj (line 10)
The above process is repeated for each bridge span and once for each load case, load
combination, or time step

18.22 Pushover Analysis Data

File: name.STA

This file contains data used in pushover analysis.

The following line is printed, if pushover analysis is performed and a convergence is not
achieved for all the load cases.
NPSTEP ,0
where
NPSTEP is the number of converged load cases

The following line is printed, if dynamic time-history analysis is performed

NPSTEP,NPMAX

where
NPSTEP is defaulted to zero.
NPMAX is the number of total number of time steps specified

The above line is repeated per time step.

18.23 Stresses of Pile Cap

File: name.STR
This file contains the shell element stresses for the pile cap. There are eight records per
load case. Each record contains eight values per element times the number of cap ele-
ments. The eight records represent:
Mxx, Myy, Mxy, Sxz, Syz, Sy, Sx, Sxy

Therefore, the loops are:

Do I=1,numlc
Do j=1,8 (the eight sets of results) 
Read() (stress(k), k=1, 8* #elements)
Enddo 
Enddo

18.24 Coupled Vessel Impact Analysis Results

File: name.VES

This file contains the coupled vessel impact analysis (CVIA) results, particularly impact-
ing vessel characteristics and impact force history.
 Figure: 18.24.a .VES file example

The "Impacting Vessel Characteristics" header contains information regarding the

impacting vessel, namely, the vessel weight, X velocity, and Y velocity.
The "Impact Force History" header contains the impact load and crush depth through
time.

18.25 Shear and Moment Results

File: name.VMD

This file contains the bending element shears, moments and capacities for the pile and
structure elements. This is a direct access file (A fixed record size) of 56 bytes. There is
one set of records for all elements in the piles and structure. The number of elements
(records per set) is:

number of records per load case = NPEL + NUMFRM

where NPEL=NPIL*(nplnod-1).

Note that the numbers NPIL and NPLNOD can be found in the name.PIL file and
NUMFRM can be found in the name.AXL file. The set of results is repeated for each
load case. Each record contains fourteen values per element. The fifteen values rep-
resent:

W, V2I, V3I, V2J, V3J, XMI2, XMI3, XMJ2, XMJ3, XMMAX, XML, FRATI, FRATJ,
AXLI, AXLJ,TORI,TORJ

Where
W  is the uniform load on the element.
V2I  is the shear on the I end in the local 2 direction.
V3I  is the shear on the I end in the local 3 direction.
V2J  is the shear on the J end in the local 2 direction.
V3J  is the shear on the J end in the local 3 direction.
XMI2  is the moment on the I end about the local 2 axis.
XMI3  is the moment on the I end about the local 3 axis.
XMJ2  is the moment on the J end about the local 2 axis.
XMJ3  is the moment on the J end about the local 3 axis.
XMMAX  is the maximum midspan moment if uniform loads exist.
XML  is the distance from the I end where the maximum midspan moment exists.
FRATI  is the capacity ratio at the I end.
FRATJ  is the capacity ratio at the J end.
AXLI  is the axial force at the I end of the member.
AXLJ  is the axial force at the J end of the member.
TORI  is the torisonal moment at the I end of the member.
TORJ  is the torisonal moment at the J end of the member.

NOTE: All values are single precision real numbers (4 bytes). Also, the pile elements
come first, then the structure elements.
18.26 XML Model Data Results

This document describes the contents of the XML model data file for the FB-MultiPier
program. The data file is divided into the following three categories:

1. Project Information
2. Control Information
3. Model Information
1. Substructure [Pier(s)]
1. Pile geometry
2. Pile group information
3. Soil curve data
4. Pier geometry
5. Load case data
6. Load case results
7. Interaction diagram data
8. Output summary
2. Superstructure [Bridge Spans]

The root of the data file is FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA.

The format for the data markup is as follows:

Name: The name of the XML node.
Description: A human readable description of what the data in the node represents.
Attribute: Any attributes which are assosciated with the nodes.

The following attributes are used consistently throughout the document.

l number - indicates a local ID number for a particular piece of data

l node_number - indicates the node number used in the finite element (FE) model
 l elem_number - indicates the element number used in the finite element model
l units - specifies the units associated with a data element

There can be more than attribute associated with an element.

Notes: Make sure to turn on all output printing to see the complete XML output. The
output printing options are found under the PRINT header. Also, the XML file size can
vary, depending on the number of model elements and the number of load cases (or
combinations) considered. Consider turning off the unnecessary print options for these
types of problems.

0 Root Node
Name Description XPath
FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA The root of the data file /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA

1 Project Information
Name Description XPath
PROJECT_ Project description inform- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_
INFO ation INFO

Name Description XPath

VERSION_ Version num- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_
NUMBER ber INFO/VERSION_NUMBER

Description
Name XPath

PROJECT_ Project cli- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_INFO/PROJECT_

CLIENT ent CLIENT

Description
Name XPath

PROJECT_ Project /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_INFO/PROJECT_

NAME name NAME
Name Description XPath
PROJECT_ Project man- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_
MANAGER ager INFO/PROJECT_MANAGER

Name Description XPath

COMPUTED_ Person doing the com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_
BY putation INFO/COMPUTED_BY

Name Description XPath

PROJECT_ Description of the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_
DESCRIPTION project INFO/PROJECT_DESCRIPTION

Description
Name XPath

PROJECT_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_INFO/PROJECT_
Project date
DATE DATE

2 Control Information
Name Description XPath
CONTROL_ Control variables for the ana- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
INFO lysis INFO

Name
Description XPath

System of units (English or /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_

UNITS
SI) INFO/UNITS

Name Description XPath

MAX_
Maximum number of iter- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
ITERATIONS
ations for analysis INFO/MAX_ITERATIONS

Name Description Attributes XPath

TOLERANCE Iteration force tol- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
units
erance INFO/TOLERANCE

Name Description XPath

SOIL_ Options for p-y mul- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
BEHAVIOR tiplier use INFO/SOIL_BEHAVIOR

Name Description XPath

TIP_SPRING_ Options for pile tip /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
OPTION springs INFO/TIP_SPRING_OPTION

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
PILE_TIP_ Tip stiffness used to
units DATA/CONTROL_INFO/PILE_TIP_
STIFFNESS restrain the piles
STIFFNESS

Name Description XPath

STIFFNESS Stiffness formulation (Secant or /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
Tangent) INFO/STIFFNESS

Name
Description XPath

Number of piers (default is /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_

PIERS
1) INFO/PIERS

Name Description XPath

ANALYSIS Analysis type (Static or /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
Dynamic) INFO/ANALYSIS

Name Description XPath

DESIGN_ "Load combination code (AASHTO- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
CODE LRFD, AASHTO-LFD, or None)" DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DESIGN_CODE
Name Description Comments XPath
ANALYSIS Analysis type (Static Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
or Dynamic) dynamic analysis DATA/CONTROL_INFO/ANALYSIS

Name Description Comments XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
DYNAMICS_ Information for Reserved for
DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DYNAMICS_
INFO dynamic analysis dynamic analysis
INFO

Name Description Comments XPath

" Time step integ- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
SOLUTION_
ration, Modal ana- dynamic ana- DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DYNAMICS_
TYPE
lysis" lysis INFO/SOLUTION_TYPE

Name Description Comments XPath

"Average acceleration, Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
SOLUTION_
Linear acceleration, or dynamic ana-DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DYNAMICS_
METHOD
Wilson-theta" lysis INFO/SOLUTION_METHOD

Name Description Comments XPath

TIME_ Time step incre- Reserved for
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
STEP_ ment for integ- dynamic ana-
INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/TIME_STEP_INCR
INCR ration lysis

Name Description Comments XPath

TIME_ Number of Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
STEPS time steps dynamic analysis INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/TIME_STEPS

Name Description Comments XPath

LOAD_ Number of Reserved for
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
FUNCTIONS load func- dynamic ana-
INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/LOAD_FUNCTIONS
tions lysis
Name Description Comments XPath
LOAD_ "0 for force, 1 Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
FUNCTION_ for accel- dynamic ana- INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/LOAD_FUNCTION_
TYPE eration" lysis TYPE

Name Description Comments XPath

Multiplies the accel- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
GRAVITY_
eration of load func- dynamic ana- DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DYNAMICS_
FACTOR
tion lysis INFO/GRAVITY_FACTOR

Attributes
Name Description Comments XPath

Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_

"Include damp-
DAMPING include dynamic ana- DATA/CONTROL_INFO/DYNAMICS_
ing, yes or no"
lysis INFO/DAMPING

Name Description Comments XPath

Mass pro- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
ALPHA_
portional factor dynamic ana- INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/ALPHA_
PIER
for pier lysis PIER

Name
Description Comments XPath

Stiffness pro- Reserved for

BETA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
portional factor for dynamic ana-
PIER INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/BETA_PIER
pier lysis

Name Description Comments XPath

Mass pro- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
ALPHA_
portional factor dynamic ana- INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/ALPHA_
PILES
for piles lysis PILES

Name Description Comments XPath

 Stiffness pro- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
BETA_
portional factor for dynamic ana- INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/BETA_
PILES
piles lysis PILES

Name Description Comments XPath

Mass pro- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
ALPHA_
portional factor dynamic ana- INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/ALPHA_
SOIL
for soil lysis SOIL

Name
Description Comments XPath

Stiffness pro- Reserved for

BETA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
portional factor dynamic ana-
SOIL INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/DAMPING/BETA_SOIL
for soil lysis

Description
Name Comments XPath

PILE_
Consistent Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
CAP_
or Lumped dynamic analysis INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/PILE_CAP_MASS
MASS

Description
Name Comments XPath

PILE_
Consistent Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_
PIER_
or Lumped dynamic analysis INFO/DYNAMICS_INFO/PILE_PIER_MASS
MASS

3 Model Information
Name Description XPath
MODEL_ Describes the substructure (pier) and super- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
INFO structure (bridge) models DATA/MODEL_INFO
3.1 Substructure Model
Attributes
Name Description XPath

Contains all of the modeling /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_

SUBSTRUCTURE
information for a particular sub- number DATA/MODEL_
structure INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE

3.1.1 Pile Geometry

Name Description XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
PILE_ Describes the geometry of the piles (cross-sec-
DATA/MODEL_
GEOMETRY tions). Some information may be missing if a
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
full cross-section is not specified.
GEOMETRY

Attributes
Name Description XPath

"Pile cross-section /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SEGMENT number
number, pileset num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
pileset
ber" GEOMETRY/SEGMENT

Attributes
Name Description XPath

"Section type (Circular, /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_

type
DIMENSIONS Rectangular, H-Pile, DATA/MODEL_
embed_
Oblong), embedded H-Pile INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
hpile
option" GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
WIDTH Section
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
width
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/WIDTH
Name Description Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DEPTH Section
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
depth
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/DEPTH

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Web thickness
TW units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
(H-Piles only)
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/TW

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Flange thick- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TF ness (H-Piles units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
only) GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/TF

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"H-Pile or oblong ori-
ORIENTATION INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
entation (2 or 3), 0
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/ORIENTATION
otherwise"

Name
Description XPath

"Circular, Rect- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

VOID_
angular, or INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
TYPE
Oblong" GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_TYPE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

VOID_ Section void diameter /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

units
DIA (circular and oblong INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
 voids) GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_DIA

Name Attributes
Description XPath

VOID_ Section void /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

WIDTH width (rect- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
angular voids) GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_WIDTH

Name Attributes
Description XPath

VOID_ Section void /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

DEPTH depth (rect- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
angular voids) GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_DEPTH

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Embedded /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HWIDTH
H-Pile width units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HWIDTH

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Embedded /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HDEPTH
H-Pile depth units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HDEPTH

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Embedded H- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HTW Pile web thick- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
ness GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HTW

Name Attributes
Description XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Embedded H-Pile
HTF units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
flange thickness
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HTF

Name Description XPath

Embedded H- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HORIENTATION
Pile orientation INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
(2 or 3) GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HORIENTATION

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Thickness of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHELL_
outer steel cas- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
THICK
ing GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/SHELL_THICK

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHEAR_ Type of steel
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STEEL (spiral or tie)
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/SHEAR_STEEL

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LENGTH Section
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
length
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/LENGTH

Name Description XPath

Pile cross-section /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MATERIAL_
material properties INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
PROPS
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

FPC Concrete com- units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 pressive INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
strength GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FPC

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
E_ Concrete
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
CONCRETE elastic mod- units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_
ulus
CONCRETE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Mild steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FY_
yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
MILD
strength GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_MILD

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Mild steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E_
elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STEEL
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_STEEL

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Prestressing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FY_PS steel yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
strength GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_PS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Prestressing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
E_PS steel elastic mod-units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_PS

Name Description Attributes XPath

 H-Pile steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FY_
yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
HPILE
strength GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_HPILE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

H-Pile steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E_
elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
HPILE
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_HPILE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

FY_ Steel casing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHELL yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
strength GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_SHELL

Name Attributes
Description XPath

E_ Steel casing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHELL elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_SHELL

Name Description XPath

GROSS_ Pile gross cross- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SECTION_ section prop- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
PROPS erties GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
AREA Area units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS/AREA

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
EMODULUS Elastic mod- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
units
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/EMODULUS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment of iner-
INERTIA2 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
tia about local 2 units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
axis
PROPS/INERTIA2

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment of iner-
INERTIA3 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
tia about local 3 units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
axis
PROPS/INERTIA3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHEAR_
Shear mod- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
MODULUS units
ulus GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/SHEAR_MODULUS

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TORSIONAL_ Torsional INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
units
INERTIA inertia GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/TORSIONAL_INERTIA

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
UNIT_
Material unit INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
WEIGHT units
weight GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS/UNIT_
WEIGHT

Name Description XPath

STEEL_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of steel
GROUPS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_
bar groups
GROUPS

Description Attributes
Name XPath

BAR_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Bar group
GROUP number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
number
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_GROUP

Name
Description XPath

Number of
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
BARS bars in group
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_GROUP/BARS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Steel group dia-
LAYER_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
meter (circular units
DIA GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
sections only)
GROUP/LAYER_DIA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Starting /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COORD_
local 2 units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
2
coordinate GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
 GROUP/COORD_2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Starting
COORD_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
local 3 units
3 GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
coordinate
GROUP/COORD_3

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BAR_ Individual INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
units
AREA bar area GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
GROUP/BAR_AREA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PRESTRESS Prestress INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
units
after losses GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
GROUP/PRESTRESS

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Bar group ori-
ORIENTATION INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
entation (2
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
horiz, 3 vert)"
GROUP/ORIENTATION

Name XPath
STRESS-
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES
CURVES
Name Description XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of concrete
CONCRETE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
stress strain curve
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
points
CURVES/CONCRETE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
point num- number
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
ber
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
Stress value units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN
Strain value GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT/STRAIN

Name
Description XPath

Number of mild /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MILD_
steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-
STEEL
points STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

POINT Stress-strain number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
point num-
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
ber
STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
Stress value units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN
Strain value GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name Description XPath

Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PRESTRESSING_ prestressing steel INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STEEL stress strain points GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
point num- number
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
ber
CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS
Stress value units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
 CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN
Strain value GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/PRESTRESSING_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name
Description XPath

H- Number of H-Pile /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

PILE_ steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-
STEEL points STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
point num- number
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
ber
STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
Stress value units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN
Strain value GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name Description XPath

 Number of shell /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHELL_
steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-
STEEL
points STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
point num- number
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
ber
STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
Stress value units
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
STRAIN
Strain value GEOMETRY/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

3.1.2 Pile Group Information

Name Description XPath
PILE_ Describes the geometry of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
GROUP the pile group INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP

Name Description XPath

BEARING_ Bearing capacity /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CAPACITY option for pile cap INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/BEARING_
 CAPACITY

Name Description XPath

PILE_TO_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pile to pile cap fixity
CAP_FIXITY INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_TO_CAP_
option (pinned or fixed)
FIXITY

Name XPath
AXIAL_
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
EFFICIENCY_SKIN
GROUP/AXIAL_EFFICIENCY_SKIN

Name XPath
AXIAL_EFFICIENCY_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
SKIN_UPLIFT GROUP/AXIAL_EFFICIENCY_SKIN_UPLIFT

Name XPath
AXIAL_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
EFFICIENCY_TIP GROUP/AXIAL_EFFICIENCY_TIP

Name Description XPath

X_GRID_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of pile cap grid
SPACINGS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/X_GRID_
spacings in the x-direction
SPACINGS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

X_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Grid space value number
SPACE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/X_GRID_
in the x-direction units
SPACINGS/X_SPACE

Name Description XPath

Y_GRID_ Number of pile cap grid /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SPACINGS spacings in the y-direction INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/Y_GRID_
 SPACINGS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Y_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Grid space value number
SPACE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/Y_GRID_
in the y-direction units
SPACINGS/Y_SPACE

Name Description XPath

MISSING_ Number of miss-/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILES ing piles INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/MISSING_PILES

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MISSING_
Missing pile number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/MISSING_
PILE
PILES/MISSING_PILE

Name Description
XPath

X-grid pos- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_

X-ID
ition GROUP/MISSING_PILES/MISSING_PILE/X-ID

Name Description
XPath

Y-grid pos- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_

Y-ID
ition GROUP/MISSING_PILES/MISSING_PILE/Y-ID

Name
Description XPath

Number of non-missing piles /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

PILES
in the pile group INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILES

Name Description XPath

PILE_ Pile cap prop- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CAP erties INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_CAP

Attributes
Name Description XPath

E_ Pile cap /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MODULUS elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_CAP/E_
ulus MODULUS

Description
Name XPath

POISSONS Poisson's /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

Ratio INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_CAP/POISSONS

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
UNIT_
Unit weight units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_CAP/UNIT_
WEIGHT
WEIGHT

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
THICKNESS Cap thick-
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_CAP/t-
ness
dICKNESS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

PILE_ "Pile set info, num- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

number
SETS ber of pile sets" INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_SETS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

number
PILE Pile number and cor- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
set
 responding pile set num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/PILE_
ber SETS/PILE

Name Description XPath

SOIL_
Soil data provided /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INPUT_
by the user INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA
DATA

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LATERAL Lateral soil
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/LATERAL
model data

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Soil layer number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LAYER number
and soil set num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
soilset
ber DATA/LATERAL/LAYER

Name Description XPath

"Lateral soil model /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MODEL
(LSM, one of the fol- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
lowing)" DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/MODEL

Name Description
XPath

Top layer /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_

TOP
properties GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Internal fric-
PHI units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
tion angle
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/PHI
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Modulus of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RK subgrade reac- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
tion DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/RK

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
GAMMA Total unit
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
weight
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/GAMMA

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Undrained /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CU shear streng units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/CU

Name
Description XPath

Major strain @ 50% /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E50 maximum deviator INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
stress DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/E50

Name
Description XPath

Major strain @ 100% /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E100 maximum deviator INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
stress DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/E100

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Rock unconfined /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
QU units
compressive INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
 streng DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/QU

Name
Description Comments XPath

Number of
Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
cycles to
N50 dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
degrade soil by
lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/N50
50%

Name
Description Comments XPath

Rate of loading Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SLR for slow cyclic dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
loading lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/SLR

Name Description
Comments XPath

Soil shear Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SWVS wave velo- dynamic ana- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
city lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/SWVS

Name Description
Comments XPath

Fully Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SFDF degraded dynamic ana- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
soil factor lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/SFDF

Comments
Name Description XPath

"Soil gap model Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NSMOD
(0 for no gap, 1 for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
for gap)" analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/NSMOD

Comments
Name Description XPath
 Force pro-
Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RSDAMP portional soil
for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
damping factor
analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/TOP/RSDAMP

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BOTTOM Bottom layer
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
properties
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Internal fric-
PHI units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
tion angle
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/PHI

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Modulus of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RK subgrade reac-units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
tion DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/RK

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
GAMMA Total unit
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
weight
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/GAMMA

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Undrained /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CU shear streng units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/CU
Name
Description XPath

Major strain @ 50% /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E50 maximum deviator INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
stress DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/E50

Name
Description XPath

Major strain @ 100% /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E100 maximum deviator INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
stress DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/E100

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Rock unconfined /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
QU compressive units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
streng DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/QU

Name Comments
Description XPath

Number of
Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
cycles to
N50 for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
degrade soil by
analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/N50
50%

Name
Description Comments XPath

Rate of loading Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SLR for slow cyclic dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
loading analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/SLR

Name Description
Comments XPath

Soil shear Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SWVS
wave velo- dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
 city lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/SWVS

Name Description
Comments XPath

Fully Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SFDF degraded dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
soil factor lysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/SFDF

Comments
Name Description XPath

"Soil gap model Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NSMOD
(0 for no gap, 1 for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
for gap)" analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/NSMOD

Comments
Name Description XPath

Force pro-
Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RSDAMP portional soil
for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
damping
analysis DATA/LATERAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/RSDAMP
factor

Name
Description XPath

Axial soil /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

AXIAL
model data INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/AXIAL

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Soil layer number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

number
Layer and soil set num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
soilset
ber DATA/AXIAL/LAYER

Name Description XPath

MODEL
"Axial soil model /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
 (ASM, one of the fol- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
lowing)" DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/MODEL

Name Description
XPath

Top layer /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_

TOP
properties GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
G units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ulus
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP/G

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
POISSON Poisson's
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ratio
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP/POISSON

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Vertical fail- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TAU_
ure shear units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
MAX
stress DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP/TAU_MAX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Top soil elev-
ELEV units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ation
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP/ELEV

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 Top water /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEV_
table elev- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
PIEZO
ation DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/TOP/ELEV_PIEZO

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BOTTOM Bottom layer
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
properties
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
G units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ulus
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/G

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
POISSON Poisson's
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ratio
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/POISSON

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Vertical fail- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TAU_
ure shear units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
MAX
stress DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/TAU_MAX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Top soil elev-
ELEV units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ation
DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/ELEV

Name Description Attributes XPath

 Top water /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEV_
table elev- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
PIEZO
ation DATA/AXIAL/LAYER/BOTTOM/ELEV_PIEZO

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TORSION Torsion soil
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
model data
DATA/TORSION

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Soil layer number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LAYER number
and soil set num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
soilset
ber DATA/TORSION/LAYER

Name Description XPath

Soil layer number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MODEL
and soil set num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ber DATA/TORSION/LAYER/MODEL

Name Description
XPath

Top layer /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_

TOP
properties GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
G units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ulus
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP/G

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TAU_ Vertical fail-
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
MAX ure stress
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP/TAU_MAX

Description Attributes
Name XPath

USER_ User- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

CURVE_ defined number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
POINT curve DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP/USER_CURVE_POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
THETA
Rotation units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP/USER_CURVE_POINT/tdETA

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Load (pres-
T units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
sure)
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/TOP/USER_CURVE_POINT/T

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BOTTOM Bottom layer
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
properties
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
G units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ulus
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM/G

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TAU_ Vertical fail-
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
MAX ure stress
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM/TAU_MAX

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
USER_ User-
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
CURVE_ defined number
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM/USER_CURVE_POINT
POINT curve

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
THETA INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
Rotation units
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM/USER_CURVE_POINT/t-
dETA

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Load (pres-
T units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
sure)
DATA/TORSION/LAYER/BOTTOM/USER_CURVE_POINT/T

Name
Description XPath

Pile tip soil /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TIP
model data INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/TIP

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Soil set number and tip /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SOIL_ number
model (one of the fol- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_
SET model
lowing) INPUT_DATA/TIP/SOIL_SET
Name Description Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
G units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
ulus
DATA/TIP/SOIL_SET/G

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
POISSON Poisson's
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_DATA/TIP/SOIL_
ratio
SET/POISSON

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Ultimate /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Q_ULT
bearing units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_GROUP/SOIL_INPUT_
force DATA/TIP/SOIL_SET/Q_ULT

3.1.3 Soil Curve Data

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Soil data applied to the pile node. Data is /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_

SOIL_
the same for all piles (if only one soil DATA/MODEL_
CURVE_ number
set). The tags will vary depending on the INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
DATA
soil type and model. CURVE_DATA

Name XPath
P-Y_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
CURVES DATA/P-Y_CURVES

Name Attributes
XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_CURVES/PILE

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEVATION units value
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_DATA/P-Y_
depth
CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION

Attributes
Name XPath

CURVE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
POINT CURVE_DATA/P-Y_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
P units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/P

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
Y units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/Y

Name XPath
P-Y_DATA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PER_NODE CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE

Name Attributes XPath

NODE /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
CU units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/CU

Name
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
E100
DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/E100

Name
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
E50
DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/E50

Attributes
Name XPath

GAMMA /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/GAMMA

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PHI units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/PHI

Name XPath
PY_
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
MODEL
DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/PY_MODEL
Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
QU units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/QU

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
RK units
CURVE_DATA/P-Y_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/RK

Name XPath
CUSTOM_Q-Z_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DATA_PER_SOIL_SET INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_DATA/CUSTOM_Q-Z_DATA_
PER_SOIL_SET

Name Attributes
XPath

SOIL_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
SET CURVE_DATA/CUSTOM_Q-Z_DATA_PER_SOIL_SET/SOIL_SET

Name XPath
Q-Z_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
CURVES DATA/Q-Z_CURVES

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/Q-Z_CURVES/PILE

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CURVE_
number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_DATA/Q-Z_
POINT
CURVES/PILE/CURVE_POINT
Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
Q units
CURVE_DATA/Q-Z_CURVES/PILE/CURVE_POINT/Q

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
Z units
CURVE_DATA/Q-Z_CURVES/PILE/CURVE_POINT/Z

Name XPath
T-THETA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
CURVES CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_CURVES

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_CURVES/PILE

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEVATION units value
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_
depth
CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION

Attributes
Name XPath

CURVE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
POINT CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT

Name Attributes
XPath

T units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
 CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/T

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
THETA
units CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/t-
dETA

Name XPath
T-THETA_DATA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PER_NODE CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE

Name Attributes
XPath

NODE /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
G units
CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/G

Name Attributes
XPath

TAU_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
units
MAX CURVE_DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/TAU_MAX

Name XPath
TZ_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
MODEL
DATA/T-THETA_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/TZ_MODEL

Name XPath
T-Z_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
CURVES DATA/T-Z_CURVES

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_CURVES/PILE

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEVATION units value
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_DATA/T-Z_
depth
CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION

Attributes
Name XPath

CURVE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
POINT CURVE_DATA/T-Z_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
T units
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/T

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
Z units
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_CURVES/PILE/ELEVATION/CURVE_POINT/Z

Name XPath
T-Z_DATA_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PER_NODE CURVE_DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
PILE number
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE

Name Attributes
XPath

NODE /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
number
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
G units
CURVE_DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/G

Name XPath
POISSON /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/POISSON

Name Attributes
XPath

TAU_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_
units
MAX CURVE_DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/TAU_MAX

Name XPath
TZ_
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/SOIL_CURVE_
MODEL
DATA/T-Z_DATA_PER_NODE/PILE/NODE/TZ_MODEL

3.1.4 Pier Geometry

Name Description XPath
PIER_ Pile cap and pier /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
GEOMETRY geometry INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY

Name Description XPath

CROSS- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Structure cross-sec-
SECTIONS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
tion descriptions
SECTIONS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Structure cross- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SEGMENT
section number number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
SECTIONS/SEGMENT

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
"Section type (Circular,
type DATA/MODEL_
DIMENSIONS Rectangular, H-Pile,
embed_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
Oblong, Linear), embed-
hpile GEOMETRY/CROSS-
ded H-Pile option)"
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
WIDTH Section
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
width
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/WIDTH

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DEPTH Section
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
depth
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/DEPTH
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Web thick- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TW ness (H-Piles units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
only) SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/TW

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Flange thick- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TF ness (H-Piles units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
only) SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/TF

Name Description XPath

"H-Pile or Oblong /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ORIENTATION
orientation (2 or 3), INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
0 otherwise" SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/ORIENTATION

Name
Description XPath

"Circular, Rect- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

VOID_
angular, or INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
TYPE
Oblong" SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_TYPE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Section void dia- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

VOID_
meter (circular and units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
DIA
oblong voids) SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_DIA

Name Description Attributes

XPath

VOID_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Section void
WIDTH units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
width
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_WIDTH
Name Description Attributes
XPath

VOID_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Section void
DEPTH units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
depth
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/VOID_DEPTH

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Embedded /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HWIDTH
H-Pile width units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HWIDTH

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Embedded /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HDEPTH
H-Pile depth units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HDEPTH

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Embedded H- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HTW Pile web thick- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
ness SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HTW

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Embedded H- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HTF Pile flange units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
thickness SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HTF

Name Description XPath

Embedded H-
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HORIENTATION Pile ori-
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
entation (2 or
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/HORIENTATION
3)
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Thickness of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHELL_
outer steel units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
THICK
casing SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/SHELL_THICK

Description
Name XPath

Type of steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHEAR_
(spiral or tie) INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/DIMENSIONS/SHEAR_STEEL

Name Description XPath

GROSS_ Structure gross /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SECTION_ cross-section INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
PROPS properties SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
AREA Area units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS/AREA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
EMODULUS Elastic mod- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
units
ulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/EMODULUS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

INERTIA2 Moment of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

units
inertia about INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
 SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
local 2 axis
PROPS/INERTIA2

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment of
INERTIA3 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
inertia about units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
local 3 axis
PROPS/INERTIA3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHEAR_
Shear mod- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
MODULUS units
ulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/SHEAR_MODULUS

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TORSIONAL_ Torsional INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
units
INERTIA inertia SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_
PROPS/TORSIONAL_INERTIA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
UNIT_
Material unit INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
WEIGHT units
weight SECTIONS/SEGMENT/GROSS_SECTION_PROPS/UNIT_
WEIGHT

Name Description XPath

Structure cross-sec-/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MATERIAL_
tion material prop- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
PROPS
erties SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Concrete com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FPC pressive units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
strength SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FPC

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
E_ Concrete
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
CONCRETE elastic mod- units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_
ulus
CONCRETE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Mild steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FY_
yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
MILD
strength SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_MILD

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Mild steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E_
elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL
ulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_STEEL

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Prestressing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FY_PS steel yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
strength SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_PS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

E_PS Prestressing units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 steel elastic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
modulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_PS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

H-Pile steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FY_
yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
HPILE
strength SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_HPILE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

H-Pile steel /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

E_
elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
HPILE
ulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_HPILE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

FY_ Steel casing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHELL yield units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
strength SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/FY_SHELL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

E_ Steel casing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHELL elastic mod- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
ulus SECTIONS/SEGMENT/MATERIAL_PROPS/E_SHELL

Name Description XPath

STEEL_ Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
GROUPS steel bar INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
groups SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS

Description Attributes
Name XPath
BAR_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Bar group
GROUP number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
number
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_GROUP

Name Description
XPath

Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
BARS bars in GEOMETRY/CROSS-SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
group GROUP/BARS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Steel group dia-
LAYER_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
meter (circular units
DIA SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
sections only)
GROUP/LAYER_DIA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Starting
COORD_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
local 2 units
2 SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
coordinate
GROUP/COORD_2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Starting
COORD_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
local 3 units
3 SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
coordinate
GROUP/COORD_3

Name Description Attributes

XPath

BAR_ Individual /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

units
AREA bar area INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
 SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_GROUP/BAR_
AREA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PRESTRESS Prestress INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
units
after losses SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
GROUP/PRESTRESS

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Bar group ori-
ORIENTATION INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
entation (2
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STEEL_GROUPS/BAR_
horiz, 3 vert)"
GROUP/ORIENTATION

Name XPath
STRESS-
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
STRAIN_
GEOMETRY/CROSS-SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES
CURVES

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of con-
CONCRETE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
crete stress strain
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/CONCRETE
curve points

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
point num- number
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
ber
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Stress value units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAIN INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Strain value
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/CONCRETE/POINT/STRAIN

Name
Description XPath

Number of mild /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MILD_
steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL
points SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
point num- number
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
ber
STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Stress value units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAIN INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Strain value
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/MILD_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name Description XPath

Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PRESTRESSING_ prestressing INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL steel stress SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
strain points CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
point num- number
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
ber
CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Stress value units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_
CURVES/PRESTRESSING_STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAIN INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Strain value
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/PRESTRESSING_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name
Description XPath

H- Number of H-Pile /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

PILE_ steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL points SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Stress-strain
POINT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
point num- number
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
ber
STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Stress value units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAIN INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Strain value
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/H-PILE_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name
Description XPath

Number of shell /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SHELL_
steel stress strain INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
STEEL
points SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_STEEL

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Stress-strain /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
POINT
point num- number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
ber SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
 STEEL/POINT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Stress value units
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
STEEL/POINT/STRESS

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAIN INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/CROSS-
Strain value
SECTIONS/SEGMENT/STRESS-STRAIN_CURVES/SHELL_
STEEL/POINT/STRAIN

Name Description XPath

MODELING Structure modeling /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
parameters INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/MODELING

Name Description XPath

"Structure type /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_
(pier, wall, pile bent, INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
TYPE
etc.)" GEOMETRY/MODELING/STRUCTURE_TYPE

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NUM_ Number of nodes
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/MODELING/NUM_
NODES in the structure
NODES

Description
Name XPath

NUM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of
COLUMNS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/MODELING/NUM_
columns
COLUMNS
Name Description XPath
NUM_ Number of ele- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEMENTS_ ments per INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
PER_COLUMN column GEOMETRY/MODELING/NUM_ELEMENTS_PER_COLUMN

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Column spacing /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

COLUMN_ number
number (ncol -1 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
SPACING units
spacings) GEOMETRY/MODELING/COLUMN_SPACING

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COLUMN_ Column
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
HEIGHT height
GEOMETRY/MODELING/COLUMN_HEIGHT

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FIRST_ First column off-
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
COLUMN_ set from edge of units
GEOMETRY/MODELING/FIRST_COLUMN_
OFFSET pile cap
OFFSET

Name Description XPath

NUM_ Number of beam /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ELEMENTS_ elements between INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
PER_SPAN columns GEOMETRY/MODELING/NUM_ELEMENTS_PER_SPAN

Name Description XPath

PIER_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pier cap slope
CAP_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/MODELING/PIER_
(superelevation)
SLOPE CAP_SLOPE
 Description Attributes
Name XPath

Length of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CANTILEVER_
cantilever units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
LENGTH
ends GEOMETRY/MODELING/CANTILEVER_LENGTH

Name Description XPath

NUM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Number of ele-
ELEMENTS_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
ments per can-
PER_ GEOMETRY/MODELING/NUM_ELEMENTS_PER_
tilever end
CANTILEVER CANTILEVER

Name Description XPath

BEARING_ Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LOCATIONS bearing loc- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
ations GEOMETRY/MODELING/BEARING_LOCATIONS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEARING_ Bearing num- number
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
LOCATION ber and node node_num-
GEOMETRY/MODELING/BEARING_
number ber
LOCATIONS/BEARING_LOCATION

Name Description XPath

Pier column /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COLUMN_
taper (yes or INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
TAPER
no) GEOMETRY/MODELING/COLUMN_TAPER

Name Description XPath

Pier cap can- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CANTILEVER_
tilever taper (yes INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
TAPER
or no) GEOMETRY/MODELING/CANTILEVER_TAPER
Name Description XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEAM_ Pier cap beam
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/MODELING/BEAM_
TAPER taper (yes or no)
TAPER

Name Description XPath

NODAL_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Structure nodal
COORDINATES INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
coordinates
COORDINATES

Name Attributes
Description XPath

"FE node number, node_num-/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NODE
location (Pier, Pile ber loc- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
Cap)" ation COORDINATES/NODE

Description
Name XPath

BOUNDARY_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Boundary
CONDITIONS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
conditions
COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS

Name
Description XPath

X DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

X fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/X

Name
Description XPath

X DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

XX fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/XX

Name Description XPath

 Y DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Y fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/Y

Name
Description XPath

RY DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

YY fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/YY

Name
Description XPath

Z DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

Z fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/Z

Name
Description XPath

RZ DOF (F for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

ZZ fixed or R for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
released) COORDINATES/NODE/BOUNDARY_CONDITIONS/ZZ

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COORDINATES Global nodal
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
coordinates
COORDINATES/NODE/COORDINATES

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
X-coordin-
X units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
ate
COORDINATES/NODE/COORDINATES/X
Name Description Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Y-coordin-
Y units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
ate
COORDINATES/NODE/COORDINATES/Y

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Z-coordin-
Z units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/NODAL_
ate
COORDINATES/NODE/COORDINATES/Z

Name Description XPath

PIER_
Structure (beam) /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MEMBER_
element con- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PIER_
CONNECTIVITY
nectivity MEMBER_CONNECTIVITY

Description Attributes
Name XPath

BEAM_ FE beam ele- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

elem_num-
ELEMENT ment num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PIER_
ber
ber MEMBER_CONNECTIVITY/BEAM_ELEMENT

Description
Name XPath

Cross-sec- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MATERIAL
tion number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PIER_MEMBER_
CONNECTIVITY/BEAM_ELEMENT/MATERIAL

Name
Description XPath

FE node-I /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NODE_
(beginning INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PIER_MEMBER_
I
node) CONNECTIVITY/BEAM_ELEMENT/NODE_I
Name Description
XPath

FE node-J /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
NODE_
(ending GEOMETRY/PIER_MEMBER_CONNECTIVITY/BEAM_
J
node) ELEMENT/NODE_J

Name
Description XPath

FE node-K /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NODE_
(used for ori- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PIER_MEMBER_
K
entation) CONNECTIVITY/BEAM_ELEMENT/NODE_K

Name Description XPath

PILE_CAP_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pile cap (shell) ele-
CONNECTIVITY INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_
ment connectivity
CONNECTIVITY

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SHELL_ FE shell ele- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

elem_num-
ELEMENT ment num- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_
ber
ber CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT

Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MATERIAL Material
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_
number
CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/MATERIAL

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N1 FE node 1
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N1
Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N2 FE node 2
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N2

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N3 FE node 3
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N3

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N4 FE node 4
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N4

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N5 FE node 5
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N5

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N6 FE node 6
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N6

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N7 FE node 7
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N7

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N8 FE node 8
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N8
Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_
N9 FE node 9
GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/N9

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
THICKNESS Element
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_
thickness
CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/tdICKNESS

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
THICKNESS_
units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/PILE_CAP_
SW
CONNECTIVITY/SHELL_ELEMENT/tdICKNESS_SW

Description
Name XPath

SPRING_ Bridge /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

VALUES springs INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_VALUES

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SPRING_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FE node node_num-
STIFFNESS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
number ber
VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KX global x-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
ection VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KX
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KXX about global units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
x-axis VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KXX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KY global y-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
ection VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KYY about global units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
y-axis VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KYY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KZ global z-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
ection VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KZ

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Stiffness /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
KZZ about global units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PIER_GEOMETRY/SPRING_
z-axis VALUES/SPRING_STIFFNESS/KZZ

3.1.5 Load Case Data

Name Description XPath
LOAD_ Nodal loads applied /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CASE_DATA to the model INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA
Name XPath
BEARING_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
LOAD_VALUES CASE_DATA/BEARING_LOAD_VALUES

Name Attributes XPath

case AASHTO_load_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEARING_
type bearing_number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
LOAD
bearing_side LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FX global x-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
ection LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/FX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FY global y-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
ection LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/FY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FZ global z-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
ection LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/FZ

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MX the global x- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
axis LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/MX
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MY the global y- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
axis LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/MY

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MZ the global z- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/BEARING_
axis LOAD_VALUES/BEARING_LOAD/MZ

Description
Name XPath

LOAD_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Nodal loads
VALUES INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_VALUES

Description
Name Attributes XPath

"Load case, case AASHTO_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NODAL_
FE node load_type node_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
LOAD
number" number VALUES/NODAL_LOAD

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FX global x-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
ection VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/FX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FY global y-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
ection VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/FY
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load in the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FZ global z-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
ection VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/FZ

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MX the global x- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
axis VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/MX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MY the global y- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
axis VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/MY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Load about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MZ the global z- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_DATA/LOAD_
axis VALUES/NODAL_LOAD/MZ

Name
Description Comments XPath

"N not applied, L Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

Z applied in the global dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
z direction" lysis DATA/DYN_LOAD/NODAL_DIR/Z

Name
Description Comments XPath

"N not applied, L Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RX applied in the global dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
rx direction" lysis DATA/DYN_LOAD/NODAL_DIR/RX
Name
Description Comments XPath

"N not applied, L Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RY applied in the global dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
ry direction" lysis DATA/DYN_LOAD/NODAL_DIR/RY

Name
Description Comments XPath

"N not applied, L Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RZ applied in the global dynamic ana-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
rz direction" lysis DATA/DYN_LOAD/NODAL_DIR/RZ

Description
Name Comments XPath

Nodal
Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CONCENTRATED_ masses
dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MASS applied to
analysis DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS
pier

Description Attributes Comments

Name XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NODAL_ FE node node_num-for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MASS number ber dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
analysis MASS

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass in the
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MX global x-dir- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
ection
analysis MASS/MX

Name Description Attributes Comments XPath

 Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass in the
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MY global y-dir- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
ection
analysis MASS/MY

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass in the
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MZ global z-dir- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
ection
analysis MASS/MZ

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass about
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MRX the global x- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
axis
analysis MASS/MRX

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass about
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MRY the global y- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
axis
analysis MASS/MRY

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mass about
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
MRZ the global z- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_MASS/NODAL_
axis
analysis MASS/MRZ

Name Description Comments XPath

 Nodal
Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CONCENTRATED_ dampers
for dynamic INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
DAMPER applied to
analysis DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER
pier

Description Attributes Comments

Name XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NODAL_
FE node node_num-for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
DAMPER
number ber dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
analysis DAMPER

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Damping in
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CX the global x- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
direction
analysis DAMPER/CX

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Damping in
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CY the global y- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
direction
analysis DAMPER/CY

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Damping in
for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CZ the global z- units
dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
direction
analysis DAMPER/CZ

Name Description Attributes Comments XPath

 Damping Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
about the for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CRX units
global x-axis dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
analysis DAMPER/CRX

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Damping Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

about the for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CRY units
global y-axis dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
analysis DAMPER/CRY

Name Description Attributes Comments

XPath

Damping Reserved /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

about the for INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CRZ units
global z-axis dynamic DATA/CONCENTRATED_DAMPER/NODAL_
analysis DAMPER/CRZ

3.1.6 Load Combination Data

Attributes
Name Description XPath

LOAD_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
Load factors used in number
COMBINATION DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
load combinations limitstate
COMBINATION

Name
Description XPath

BR1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

BR1
factor COMBINATION/BR1

Name
Description XPath

CE1 CE1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

 factor COMBINATION/CE1

Name
Description XPath

CR load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
CR
factor COMBINATION/CR

Name
Description XPath

CV load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
CV
factor COMBINATION/CV

Name
Description XPath

DC load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
DC
factor COMBINATION/DC

Name
Description XPath

FR load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
FR
factor COMBINATION/FR

Name
Description XPath

IM1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

IM1
factor COMBINATION/IM1

Name
Description XPath

LL1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

LL1
factor COMBINATION/LL1

Name
Description XPath
 LS load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
LS
factor COMBINATION/LS

Name
Description XPath

VP load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
VP
factor COMBINATION/VP

Name
Description XPath

WA load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_
WA
factor COMBINATION/WA

Name
Description XPath

WL1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

WL1
factor COMBINATION/WL1

Name
Description XPath

WS1 load /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/LOAD_

WS1
factor COMBINATION/WS1

3.1.7 Dynamic Load Functions

Name Description Comments XPath
DYN_LOAD_ Load func- Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FUNCTION tion number dynamic analysis INFO/DYN_LOAD_FUNCTION

Name
Description Comments XPath

POINT Point number in Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

load function dynamic analysis INFO/DYN_LOAD_FUNCTION/POINT

Name Description Comments XPath

 Reserved for /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TIME Time
dynamic analysis INFO/DYN_LOAD_FUNCTION/POINT/TIME

Name
Description Comments XPath

Value at time Reserved for

VALUE /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
(force or accel- dynamic ana-
INFO/DYN_LOAD_FUNCTION/POINT/VALUE
eration) lysis

3.1.8 Load Case Results

Name Description XPath
LOAD_CASE_ Force and dis- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RESULTS placement results INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS

Name
Description Attributes XPath

"Load case, com- number com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
bination number, limit bination lim- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
CASE
state name" itstate RESULTS/LOAD_CASE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Time step number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TIME_
(Only one for static number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
STEP
analysis) RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP

Description
Name XPath

BEARING_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Bearing reac-
REACTIONS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
tion forces
CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS

Name Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEARING
number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/BEARING

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/FX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/FY

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FZ units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/FZ

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/MX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/MY
Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MZ units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_
REACTIONS/BEARING/MZ

Attributes
Name XPath

LEFT_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEARING number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_BEARING

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/FX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/FY

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FZ units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/FZ

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/MX
Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/MY

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MZ units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/LEFT_
BEARING/MZ

Attributes
Name XPath

RIGHT_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEARING number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_BEARING

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
BEARING/FX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
BEARING/FY

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
FZ units
CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
 BEARING/FZ

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
BEARING/MX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
BEARING/MY

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MZ units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/BEARING_REACTIONS/RIGHT_
BEARING/MZ

Description
Name XPath

BRIDGE_ Bridge /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SPRING_ spring INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FORCES forces CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FE node num-
SPRING_ node_num-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
ber for spring
FORCE ber CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
application
FORCE

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FX global x-dir- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
ection
FORCE/FX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FY global y-dir- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
ection
FORCE/FY

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FZ global z-dir- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
ection
FORCE/FZ

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MX about global units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
x-axis
FORCE/MX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MY about global units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
y-axis
FORCE/MY

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MZ about global units
CASE/TIME_STEP/BRIDGE_SPRING_FORCES/SPRING_
z-axis
FORCE/MZ

Name Description XPath

P_ P multipliers /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MULTIPLIERS used for the INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
load case CASE/TIME_STEP/P_MULTIPLIERS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE Pile number number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
CASE/TIME_STEP/P_MULTIPLIERS/PILE

Name
Description XPath

P multiplier in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
X-PM the x-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ection STEP/P_MULTIPLIERS/PILE/X-PM

Name
Description XPath

P multiplier in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Y-PM the y-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ection STEP/P_MULTIPLIERS/PILE/Y-PM

Name Description XPath

PILE_
Number of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CAP_
pile cap INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
STRESSES
stresses STEP/PILE_CAP_STRESSES

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Local shell ele- number
ELEMENT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
ment number, elem_num-
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
FE number" ber
STRESSES/ELEMENT

Description
Name XPath

Stresses at /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRESSES
each corner INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
node STEP/PILE_CAP_STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Flexural
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
M1 stress about units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
1-axis
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/M1

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Coupled flex- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
M12 units
ural stress CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/M12

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Flexural
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
M2 stress about units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
2-axis
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/M2

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Normal
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
S1 stress in 1- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
direction
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/S1

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear stress
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
S12 on 1-2 plane units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/S12

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear stress INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
S13 units
In 1-3 plane CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/S13

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Normal
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
S2 stress in 2- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
direction
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/S2

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear stress INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
S23 units
In 2-3 plane CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_CAP_
STRESSES/ELEMENT/STRESSES/S23

Name Description XPath

PILE_ Pile nodal dis- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DISPLACEMENTS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
placements
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_DISPLACEMENTS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE Pile number number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_DISPLACEMENTS/PILE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Local node num- number
NODE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
ber along pile, FE node_num-
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_
node number" ber
DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
DX in the global x- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_
direction
DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/DX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
DY in the global y- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_
direction
DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/DY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Displacement /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DZ in the global z- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
direction CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_
 DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/DZ

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Rotation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RX about the units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
global x-axis CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/RX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Rotation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RY about the units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
global y-axis CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/RY

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Rotation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
RZ about the units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
global z-axis CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_DISPLACEMENTS/PILE/NODE/RZ

Description
Name XPath

PILE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pile internal
INTERNAL_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
forces
FORCES CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_FORCES

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE Pile number number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PILE

Attributes
Name Description XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Local element number
ELEMENT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
number, FE ele- elem_num-
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
ment number" ber
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE_
I-End of Ele- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
ELEMENT_ node_i
ment CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
I_END
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_END

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
RATIO ratio
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_END/FAILURE-
RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_
END/MOMENT-2

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_
END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 2-dir- units
2 CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
ection
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 3-dir- units
3 CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
ection
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_I_
END/TORQUE

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE_
J-End of Ele- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
ELEMENT_ node_j
ment CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
J_END
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_END
Name Description Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
RATIO ratio
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_END/FAILURE-
RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_
END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_
END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SHEAR- Shear in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

units
2 local 2-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
 CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
ection
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 3-dir- units
3 CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
ection
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PILE/ELEMENT/PILE_ELEMENT_J_
END/TORQUE

Description
Name XPath

PILE_OUT-OF- Pile out of /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

BALANCE_ balance INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FORCES forces CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE Pile number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/PILE

Name
Description XPath

"Local node num- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NODE
ber along pile, FE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
node number" CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/NODE
Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in x-
FXX INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
direction
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/FXX

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in y-
FYY INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
direction
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/FYY

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force in z-
FZZ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
direction
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/FZZ

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force about
MXX INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
x-axis
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/MXX

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Force about
MYY INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
y-axis
STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/MYY

Name Description
XPath

Force about /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MZZ
z-axis INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
 STEP/PILE_OUT-OF-BALANCE_FORCES/MZZ

Name XPath
PILE_
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
STRAINS
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS

Name Attributes
XPath

MAX_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
item
ITEM CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM

Name Attributes
XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
VALUE units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS/MAX_
ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
PILE
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/PILE

Name XPath
SEGMENT /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/SEGMENT

Name
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
TYPE
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/PILE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/TYPE

Description
Name XPath
SOIL_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Soil reaction
REACTION_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
forces
FORCES CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_FORCES

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE Pile number number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_FORCES/PILE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Local node num- number
NODE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
ber along pile, FE node_num-
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
node number" ber
FORCES/PILE/NODE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Lateral-x
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FX reaction units
CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
force
FORCES/PILE/NODE/FX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Lateral-y
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FY reaction units
CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
force
FORCES/PILE/NODE/FY

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Axial-z reac- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

FZ units
tion force INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
 CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
FORCES/PILE/NODE/FZ

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MX units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
FORCES/PILE/NODE/MX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MY units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
FORCES/PILE/NODE/MY

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Torsion reac-
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MZ tion units
CASE/TIME_STEP/SOIL_REACTION_
moment
FORCES/PILE/NODE/MZ

Name Description XPath

STRUCTURE_ Structure /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DISPLACEMENTS nodal dis- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
placements CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_DISPLACEMENTS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

FE node num- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

NODE node_num-
ber in the INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
ber
structure CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_DISPLACEMENTS/NODE

Name Attributes
Description XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
DX in the global x- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
DY in the global y- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
DZ in the global z- units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DZ

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
RX about the units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
global x-axis
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RX

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
RY about the units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
global y-axis
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RY

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
RZ about the units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
global z-axis
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RZ

Description
Name XPath

STRUCTURE_ Structure /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

INTERNAL_ internal INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FORCES forces CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COLUMN Column INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
number
number CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN

Attributes
Name Description XPath

"Local element /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

number
ELEMENT number, FE ele- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
elem_num-
ment number" CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
ber
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
STRUCTURE_
I-End of Ele- RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_ node_i
ment INTERNAL_
END
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
RATIO ratio
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/FAILURE-RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
I_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
I_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Shear in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHEAR-
local 2-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
2
ection CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
 FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
SHEAR-
local 3-dir- units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
ection FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/TORQUE

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
STRUCTURE_
J-End of Ele- RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_ node_j
ment INTERNAL_
END
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/AXIAL
Name Description XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
RATIO ratio
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/FAILURE-RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
J_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
J_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
SHEAR-
local 2-dir- units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
ection FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SHEAR- Shear in units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 3-dir- CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
ection FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/TORQUE

Description
Name XPath

EXTRA_ Extra mem- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MEMBER ber com- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ponent STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER

Attributes
Name Description XPath

"Local ele- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

number
ELEMENT ment number, INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
elem_num-
FE element CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
ber
number" FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
I-End of Ele-
ELEMENT_I_ node_i RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ment
END INTERNAL_FORCES/EXTRA_
MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END

Name Description Attributes XPath

 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/EXTRA_
RATIO ratio
MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END/FAILURE-
RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

Shear in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHEAR-
local 2-dir- units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
2
ection CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
 FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
SHEAR-
local 3-dir- units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
ection FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/TORQUE

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
J-End of Ele-
ELEMENT_J_ node_j RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ment
END INTERNAL_FORCES/EXTRA_
MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/AXIAL
Name Description XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/EXTRA_
RATIO ratio
MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END/FAILURE-
RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
SHEAR-
local 2-dir- units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
ection FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SHEAR- Shear in /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

units
3 local 3-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
 CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
ection FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/EXTRA_MEMBER/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_J_END/TORQUE

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PIER_ Pier cap
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
CAP component
STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_CAP

Attributes
Name Description XPath

"Local element /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

number
ELEMENT number, FE ele- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
elem_num-
ment number" CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
ber
FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
I-End of Ele-
ELEMENT_I_ node_i RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ment
END INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END

Name Description Attributes

XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
RATIO ratio
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END/FAILURE-RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
I_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
I_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 2-dir- units
2 CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
ection
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-2
 Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 3-dir- units
3 CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
ection
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
TORQUE
Torque units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_I_
END/TORQUE

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
J-End of Ele-
ELEMENT_J_ node_j RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_
ment
END INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
AXIAL Axial force units
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END/AXIAL

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FAILURE- Demand/capacity INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
RATIO ratio CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END/FAILURE-
 RATIO

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
2
2-axis FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
J_END/MOMENT-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
MOMENT-
about local units CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
3
3-axis FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_
J_END/MOMENT-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 2-dir- units
2 CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
ection
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-2

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear in
SHEAR- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
local 3-dir- units
3 CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_FORCES/PIER_
ection
CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_END/SHEAR-3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

TORQUE Torque units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/PIER_CAP/ELEMENT/STRUCTURE_ELEMENT_J_
END/TORQUE

Name XPath
STRUCTURE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
STRAINS CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_STRAINS

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
MAX_
item CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_STRAINS/MAX_
ITEM
ITEM

Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Local element
ELEMENT INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
number, FE ele-
CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/ELEMENT
ment number"

Name Attributes
XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_
VALUE units CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_STRAINS/MAX_
ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name XPath
SECTION /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/SECTION

Name Description XPath

Bridge /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FREQUENCY_
response spec- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
RESULTS
trum results CASE/TIME_STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS
 Description
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FREQUENCIES Frequency
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
results
CASE/TIME_STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/FREQUENCIES

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
FREQUENCY Frequency "number, INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
value units" RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_STEP/FREQUENCY_
RESULTS/FREQUENCIES/FREQUENCY

Description
Name XPath

MODE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Mode shape
SHAPES INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
results
STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SHAPE Mode shape INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
number
CASE/TIME_STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_
SHAPES/SHAPE

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
NODE node_num-INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_
Node
ber CASE/TIME_STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_
SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE

Name Description XPath

 Translation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DX in x-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ection STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/DX

Name Description
XPath

Translation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DY in y-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ection STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/DY

Name Description
XPath

Translation /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DZ in Z-dir- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
ection STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/DZ

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
RX INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
about x-axis
STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/RX

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
RY INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
about y-axis
STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/RY

Name Description
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Rotation
RZ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_RESULTS/LOAD_CASE/TIME_
about z-axis
STEP/FREQUENCY_RESULTS/MODE_SHAPES/SHAPE/NODE/RZ
3.1.9 Interaction Diagram Data
Name Description XPath
INTERACTION_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction data for
DIAGRAM_DATA INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
each cross-section
DATA

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Interaction diagram /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

DIAGRAM
number (one per number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_
cross-section) DIAGRAM_DATA/DIAGRAM

Description Attributes
Name XPath

MAX_ Maximum /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

TENSION_ tension units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
FORCE force DATA/DIAGRAM/MAX_TENSION_FORCE

Attributes
Name Description XPath

LOCAL_ Local 2-axis /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

2_AXIS_ shift for plastic units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
SHIFT centroid DATA/DIAGRAM/LOCAL_2_AXIS_SHIFT

Attributes
Name Description XPath

LOCAL_ Local 3-axis /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

3_AXIS_ shift for plastic units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
SHIFT centroid DATA/DIAGRAM/LOCAL_3_AXIS_SHIFT

Name Description XPath

Number of inter-/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
INTERACTION_
action diagram INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
POINTS
points DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS
Name Description Attributes
XPath

Interaction /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
POINT
point num- number INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
ber DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
ALPHA1 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
ting factor
POINTS/POINT/ALPHA1

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
ALPHA2 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
ting factor
POINTS/POINT/ALPHA2

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
ALPHA3 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
ting factor
POINTS/POINT/ALPHA3

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
ALPHA4 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
ting factor
POINTS/POINT/ALPHA4
Name Description Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
AXIAL Axial force units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT/AXIAL

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
BETA1 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT/BETA1
ting factor

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
BETA2 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT/BETA2
ting factor

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
BETA3 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT/BETA3
ting factor

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Interaction dia-
BETA4 INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
gram curve fit- units
DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_POINTS/POINT/BETA4
ting factor

Name Description Attributes XPath

 Negative /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MOMENT_ moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
units
2_NEG about the DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
local 2-axis POINTS/POINT/MOMENT_2_NEG

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Positive /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MOMENT_ moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
units
2_POS about the DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
local 2-axis POINTS/POINT/MOMENT_2_POS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Negative /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MOMENT_ moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
units
3_NEG about the DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
local 3-axis POINTS/POINT/MOMENT_3_NEG

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Positive /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MOMENT_ moment INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/INTERACTION_DIAGRAM_
units
3_POS about the DATA/DIAGRAM/INTERACTION_
local 3-axis POINTS/POINT/MOMENT_3_POS

3.1.10 Output Summary

Name Description XPath
OUTPUT_ Final maximum forces and /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
SUMMARY displacements for pier INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY

Name XPath
PIER_COLUMN_AND_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
CAP_MAX_MIN_ INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PIER_COLUMN_
STRAINS AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PIER_COLUMN_AND_
ITEM
CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION bination where INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PIER_
maximum COLUMN_AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_
occurred ITEM/COMBINATION

Name XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
ELEMENT
SUMMARY/PIER_COLUMN_AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_
ITEM/ELEMENT

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
ITEM_
Maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PIER_
VALUE units
value COLUMN_AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_
ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LOAD_ where max-
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PIER_COLUMN_
CASE imum occurred
AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
SECTION
SUMMARY/PIER_COLUMN_AND_CAP_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/SECTION

Name
Description XPath

PILE_ Maximum pile /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MAX internal forces INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_ "Pile item, item
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_
ITEM description"
MAX/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load combination /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION
where maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_
occurred MAX/MAX_ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_
value
MAX/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX/MAX_
CASE
occurred ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name
Description XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pile number
PILE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX/MAX_
with maximum
ITEM/PILE

Name Description XPath

PILE_MAX_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum pile
DISPLACEMENTS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
displacement
DISPLACEMENTS

Name Attributes
Description XPath

"Maximum pile dis- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MAX_
placement, item item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_
ITEM
description" MAX_DISPLACEMENTS/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load com-
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION bination where
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
maximum
DISPLACEMENTS/MAX_ITEM/COMBINATION
occurred

Name Description Attributes

XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
value
DISPLACEMENTS/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
CASE
occurred DISPLACEMENTS/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name
Description XPath
 Pile number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
PILE with max- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
imum DISPLACEMENTS/MAX_ITEM/PILE

Name XPath
PILE_MAX_MIN_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRAINS INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_STRAINS

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_
ITEM
STRAINS/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load combination /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION
where maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_
occurred MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_
value
MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_
CASE
occurred STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name
Description XPath

PILE Pile number /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

 with max- INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_
imum STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/PILE

Name XPath
SEGMENT /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/SEGMENT

Name
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
TYPE
SUMMARY/PILE_MAX_MIN_STRAINS/MAX_ITEM/TYPE

Name
Description XPath

SOIL_ Maximum soil reac- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

MAX tion forces INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_MAX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_ "Soil item, item
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_
ITEM description"
MAX/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load combination /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION
where maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_
occurred MAX/MAX_ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_
value
MAX/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE
Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_MAX/MAX_
CASE
occurred ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Pile number
PILE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/SOIL_MAX/MAX_
with maximum
ITEM/PILE

Name XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_BEARING_
BEARING_MAX
MAX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_BEARING_
ITEM
MAX/MAX_ITEM

Name XPath
BEARING /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_BEARING_MAX/MAX_ITEM/BEARING

Name Description XPath

Load com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION bination where INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
maximum SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_BEARING_MAX/MAX_
occurred ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath
ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_
value
BEARING_MAX/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_
CASE
occurred BEARING_MAX/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_COLUMNS_
COLUMNS_MAX
MAX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_COLUMNS_
ITEM
MAX/MAX_ITEM

Name XPath
COLUMN /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_COLUMNS_MAX/MAX_ITEM/COLUMN

Name Description XPath

Load com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION bination where INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
maximum SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_COLUMNS_MAX/MAX_
occurred ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath

Maximum
ITEM_ units /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
value
VALUE INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_
COLUMNS_MAX/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath

Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_
CASE
occurred COLUMNS_MAX/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name XPath
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
STRUCTURE_
INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_PIER_CAP_
PIER_CAP_MAX
MAX

Name Attributes
XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
MAX_
item INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_PIER_CAP_
ITEM
MAX/MAX_ITEM

Name Description XPath

Load com- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
COMBINATION bination where INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_
maximum SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_PIER_CAP_MAX/MAX_
occurred ITEM/COMBINATION

Name Description Attributes

XPath

ITEM_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Maximum
VALUE units INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_
value
PIER_CAP_MAX/MAX_ITEM/ITEM_VALUE

Name
Description XPath
 Load case where /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LOAD_
maximum INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/OUTPUT_SUMMARY/STRUCTURE_PIER_
CASE
occurred CAP_MAX/MAX_ITEM/LOAD_CASE

Name Description XPath

BRIDGE_SPAN_ Bridge span dis- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
DISPLACEMENTS placements INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_DISPLACEMENTS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

NODE FE node node_num-/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/BRIDGE_

number ber SPAN_DISPLACEMENTS/NODE

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement in the
DX units INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_
global x-direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DX

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement in the
DY units INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_
global y-direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Displacement in the
DZ units INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_
global z-direction
DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/DZ

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Rotation about the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RX units
global x-axis INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RX
Name Attributes
Description XPath

Rotation about the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RY units
global y-axis INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RY

Name Attributes
Description XPath

Rotation about the /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

RZ units
gobal z-axis INFO/BRIDGE_SPAN_DISPLACEMENTS/NODE/RZ

3.2 Superstructure Model

Attributes
Name Description XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_
SUPERSTRUCTURE Bridge super-
number DATA/MODEL_
structure definition
INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE

Attributes
Name Description XPath

SPAN_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
"Bridge span, properties
GEOMETRY properties INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
('constant' or 'variable')"
GEOMETRY

Attributes
Name Description XPath

GROSS_ Span element gross /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

SECTIONS_ cross-section prop- number INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
PROPS erties GEOMETRY/GROSS_SECTIONS_PROPS

Name Description Attributes

XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
AREA Area units
INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/GROSS_
 SECTIONS_PROPS/AREA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
EMODULUS Elastic mod-
units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
ulus
GEOMETRY/GROSS_SECTIONS_PROPS/EMODULUS

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Moment of iner- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

INERTIA2
tia about local 2 units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
axis GEOMETRY/GROSS_SECTIONS_PROPS/INERTIA2

Attributes
Name Description XPath

Moment of iner- /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_

INERTIA3
tia about local 3 units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
axis GEOMETRY/GROSS_SECTIONS_PROPS/INERTIA3

Description Attributes
Name XPath

SHEAR_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Shear mod-
MODULUS units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/GROSS_
ulus
SECTIONS_PROPS/SHEAR_MODULUS

Description Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TORSIONAL_ Torsional INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_
units
INERTIA inertia GEOMETRY/GROSS_SECTIONS_
PROPS/TORSIONAL_INERTIA

Attributes
Name XPath
 /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
TRANSVERSE_
units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/GROSS_
AREA
SECTIONS_PROPS/TRANSVERSE_AREA

Description Attributes
Name XPath

UNIT_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
Material unit
WEIGHT units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/GROSS_
weight
SECTIONS_PROPS/UNIT_WEIGHT

Attributes
Name XPath

SPAN_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
span_num-
PROFILE_ INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/SPAN_PROFILE_
ber
PROPS PROPS

Attributes
Name XPath

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
BEGIN_
units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/SPAN_PROFILE_
HEIGHT
PROPS/BEGIN_HEIGHT

Attributes
Name XPath

END_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
HEIGHT units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/SPAN_PROFILE_
PROPS/END_HEIGHT

Attributes
Name XPath

LIVE_ /FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_
LOAD_ units INFO/SUPERSTRUCTURE/SPAN_GEOMETRY/SPAN_PROFILE_
HEIGHT PROPS/LIVE_LOAD_HEIGHT
XPath Specification
The XPath Specification was developed by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The
complete documentation is available at http://www.w3.org/TR/xpath. The specification
defines a search path to locate items in an XML file. The search path looks very much
like a file path in a directory structure. Examples of most common searches are given
below. Each example is used in the context of the FB-MultiPier XML data file. This is by
no means a thorough demonstration of the XPath Specification.
Notes:
1. The XPath query is case sensitive (elements are in caps and attributes are lower case).
The Mathcad pre-defined functions do allow you to type the path in lower or upper case.
2. The XPath query is typed as one continuous line. The examples below show the query
broken up into multiple lines for formatting purposes only.
3. Double check for typos. It is very easy to type one letter of the path incorrectly.

Extracting element data

Element data is extracted by specifying the path to the data item. The path ends with the
name of the element to extract the data from. All elements are shown enclosed in < > in
the FB-MultiPier XML Model Data File Definition.
XPath query for the project name:
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/PROJECT_INFO/PROJECT_NAME

XPath query for the system of units:

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_INFO/UNITS

Extracting attribute data

Attribute data is extracted by specifying the path to the data item. The path ends with
the name of the attribute to extract the data from. Note that attributes are typed in lower-
case.
XPath query for the units of the out-of-balance force tolerance:
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/CONTROL_INFO/TOLERANCE/@units

The most common use for extracting attribute data is to obtain the units for an element
value. Advanced searches involving elements and attributes
The query should be specific enough to match a single item in the XML file. Sometimes
attributes need to be specified to obtain an exact match. Attribute values are enclosed in
brackets [ ] immediately following the element name. The specific attribute value to
match is enclosed in double quotes. The attributes can be omitted if there is only one
instance of an element.
XPath query for the WIDTH dimension of the first pile segment:
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/PILE_
GEOMETRY/SEGMENT[@number="1"]/DIMENSIONS/WIDTH

XPath query for the SHEAR-2 force at the beginning of the first element of the first pier
column in the second load case:
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE[@number="2"]/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN[@number="1"]/ELEMENT[@number="1"]/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-2

XPath query for the SHEAR-2 force units would be:

/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
RESULTS/LOAD_CASE[@number="2"]/TIME_STEP/STRUCTURE_INTERNAL_
FORCES/COLUMN[@number="1"]/ELEMENT[@number="1"]/STRUCTURE_
ELEMENT_I_END/SHEAR-2/@units

XPath query for the force in the x-direction for load case 1, node 5:
/FB-MULTIPIER_MODEL_DATA/MODEL_INFO/SUBSTRUCTURE/LOAD_CASE_
DATA/LOAD_VALUES/NODAL_LOAD[@case="1" and @node_number="5"]/FX

Notice the use of two attributes in the search path. Multiple attributes can be combined.
References

American Petroleum Institute (2014). “Geotechincal and Foundation Design Con-

siderations.” API RP 2 GEO 1, 1st Ed.

American Petroleum Institute (2002). “Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing,

and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms – Load and Resistance Factor Design.” API
RP 2A-LRFD, 21st Ed.

Andrade, P. (1994), "Materially and Geometrically Non-Linear Analysis of Laterally

Loaded Piles Using a Discrete Element Technique," Masters Report, University of Florida,
Gainesville.

Aurora, R., and Reese, L. C. (1977). "Field Tests of Drilled Shafts in Clay-Shales." Ninth
International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Tokyo, Japan,
371-376.

Bamford, W. E. (1969). “Anisotropy, and the natural variability of rock properties," Proc.
Symp. Rock Mech., Sydney, 1-10.

Berger, E., Mahi, S. A., and Pyke, R. (1977). "Simplified Method For Evaluating Soil-Pile-
Structure Interaction Effects." Offshore Technology Conference.

Bjerkeli, L., Tomaszewicz, A., and Jensen, J.J. (1990). "Deformation properties and ductil-
ity of high-strength concrete." High-Strength Concrete: Second International Sym-
posium, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI., 215-238.

Boulanger, R. W., Kutter, B. L., Wilson, D. W. (1998), "The response of piles during earth-
quakes : dynamic soil-pile-superstructure interaction," Center for Geotechnical Model-
ing, Dept. of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of California, Davis, Report
(University of California, Davis. Center for Geotechnical Modeling), no. UCD/CGM-
98/01.
Bowles, J. E. (1987). “Elastic Foundation Settlement on Sand Deposits,” Journal of Geo-
technical Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 113, No. 8, pp. 846-860.

Bowles, J. E., "Foundation Analysis and Design", McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977.

Brown, D., Morrison, C., and Reese, L. (1988), "Lateral Load Behavior of a Pile Group in
Sand," ASCE Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 114, No. 11, pp. 1261-1276.

Brown, D., O’Neill, M. W., Hoit, M., McVay, M., and El Naggar, M. (2001). "Static and
Dynamic Lateral Loading of Pile Groups." NCHRP Report 461, National Cooperative
Highway Research Program.

Brown, E. T. (1970). “Strength of models of rocks with intermittent joints," J. Soil Mech.
Fdn. Eng., ASCE, 96, 1935-9.

California Department of Transportation (CALTRANS), Bridge Design Practice Manual,

Sacrament, CA, 1981.

Castello, R. R. (1980). "Bearing Capacity of Driven Piles in Sand", Ph.D. Thesis, Texas AM
University, College Station, Texas.

Chai, Y., H., Preistly, M., J., N., and Seible, F. (1991), "Flexural Retrofit of Circular Rein-
forced Bridge Columns by Steel Jacketing,", University of California, San Diego, La Jolla.

Consolazio et. al. (2006), "Barge Impact Testing of the St. George Island Causeway
Bridge, Phase III", University of Florida, Final report, FDOT Contract No. BC-354 RPWO
76.

Coyle, H. M., and Reese, L. C. (1966). "Load transfer for axially loaded piles in clay,"
Journal Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, Proceedings Paper 4702, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Vol 93(SM6).
Das, B. M. (1980). “A Procedure for estimation of Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations
in Clay,” Soils and Foundations, Vol . 20, No. 1 pp. 77-82.

Das, B. M., and Jones, A. D. (1982). “Uplift Capacity of Rectangular Foundations in Sand,”
Transportation Research Record 884, National Research Council, Washington, D. C., pp.
54-58.

Davidson, M. T., Consolazio, G. R., Getter, D. J., and Shah, F. D. (2013). “Probability of col-
lapse expression for bridges subject to barge collision.” J. Bridge Eng., 18(4), 287-296.

De Beer, E. E. (1970). “Experimental Determination of the Shape Factors and Bearing

Capacity Factors of Sand,” Geotechnique, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp. 387-411.

Donahue, R. L., Miller, R. W., Shickluna, J. C. (1977). “Soils: An Introduction to Soils and
Plant Growth.” 4th edition, Prentice Hall.

Dunnavant, T. W., and O’Neill, M. W. (1985). “Performance, Analysis, and Interpretation

of a Lateral Load Test of a 72-Inch-Diameter Bored Pile in Over-consolidated Clay.”
Department of Civil Engineering, University of Houston-University Park, Houston, Texas,
Report No. UHCE 85-4, September, 57 pages.

FDOT SFH (2017) Soils & Foundations Handbook, Florida Department of Transportation,
Tallahassee, Florida.

Fernandes Jr., C. (1999). "Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis of Bridge Piers." Doctor of Philo-
sophy, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL.

FHWA. (2006). A Laboratory and Field Study of Composite Piles for Bridge Sub-
structures, FHWA-HRT-04-043, Washington, D.C.

FHWA (1993) COM624P User's Manual for Laterally Loaded Pile Analysis Program for
the Microcomputer v2.0, Washington, D.C.
FHWA (1988). PCSTABLS-Users Manual, Federal Highway Administration, Springfield,
VA.

Filippou, F. C., Popov, E. P., Bertero, V. V. (1983). "Effects of Bond Deterioration on

Hysteretic Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Joints". Report EERC 83-19, Earthquake
Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley.

Franke, K. W., and Rollins, K. M. (2013). "Simplified Hybrid p-y Spring Model for Lique-
fied Soils." Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 139(4), 564-
576.

Gazetas, G., and Dobry, R. (1984). "Simple Radiation Damping Model for Piles and Foot-
ings." Journal of Engineering Mechanics, 110(6), 937-956.

Gazioglu, S. M., and O’Neill, M. W. "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohesive Soils,"

from Analysis and Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a symposium sponsored
by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE National Convention, San Fran-
cisco, CA, pp. 192-213.

Georgiadis, M. (1983). "Development of P-Y curves for Layered Soils," Proceedings, Geo-
technical Practice in Offshore Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, pp. 536-
545.

Getter, D. J., and Consolazio, G. R., (2011). “Relationships of barge bow force-deform-
ation for bridge design: Probabilistic consideration of oblique impact scenarios.” Trans-
portation Research Record 2251, Transportation Research Board, Washington, DC, 3-15,
2011.

Hanna, A. M., and Meyerhof, G. G. (1981). “Experimental Evaluation of Bearing Capacity

of Footings Subjected to Inclined Loads,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 18, No. 4,
pp. 599-603.

Hannigan, P. J., Goble, G. G., Likins, G. E., and Rausche, F., (2006). "Design and Con-
struction of Driven Pile Foundations – Volume I and II," FHWA Publication No. FHWA-
NHI-05-042. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Wash-
ington D.C.

Hoek, E., (1990). “Estimating Mohr-Coulomb Friction and Cohesion Values from the
Hoek-Brown Failure Criterion,” International Journal of Rock Mechanics, Mining
Sciences, and Geomechanics Abstracts, 27(3), 227-229.

Hoek, E., and Brown, E. T. (1980). “Empirical Strength Criterion for Rock Masses,” Journal
of Geotechnical Engineering, 106, 1013-1035.

Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1988). “The Hoek-Brown failure criterion – a 1988 update ,”
Rock Engineering for Underground Excavations, Proc. 15th Canadian Rock Mech. Symp.
J. C. Curran, Ed. Toronto: Dept. Civil Engineering, University of Toronto, p. 31-38.

Hoek, E. and Brown, E. T. (1997). “Practical estimates or rock mass strength ,” Int. J. Rock
Mech. & Mining Sci. & Geomechanics Abstracts. 34(8), p. 1165-1186.

Ishihara, K. (1996). Soil Behaviour in Earthquake Geotechnics, Oxford University Press

New York, NY.

Ismael, N. F. (1990). "Behavior of Laterally Loaded Bored Piles in Cemented Sands."

Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, 116(11), 1678-1699.

Itani, A. M. "Future Use of Composite Steel-Concrete Columns in Highway Bridges.",

AISC Engineering Journal,33, No.3 pp. 110-115 1996.

Janbu, N., Bjerrum, L., and Kjaernsli, B. (1956). “Veiledning vedlosning av fun-
damenteringsoppgaver,” Publication No. 18, Norwegian Geotechnical Institute, pp. 30-
32.

Johnson, R. M., Parsons, R. L., Dapp, S. D., and Brown, D. A. (2006). "Soil Characterization
and p-y Curve Development for Loess." Kansas Department of Transportation, Bureau of
Materials and Research.
Kramer, S. L. (1996). Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle
River, New Jersey.

Kim, Myoung-Ho, "Analysis of Osterburg and Stanamic Axial Load Testing and Con-
ventional Lateral Load Testing", Master’s Thesis, University of Florida, Gainesville, Flor-
ida, 2001.

Kulhawy, F. and Mayne, P. "Manual for Estimating Soil Properties for Foundation
Design." Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) Report. EPRI EL-6800. Project 1493-6.
Aug. 1990, pp. 5-17.

Kumbhojkar, A. S. (1993). “Numerical Evaluation of Terzaghi’s Ny, “Journal of Geo-

technical Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 119, No. 3, pp. 598-607.

Liang, R., Yang, K., and Nusairat, J. (2009). "p-y Criterion for Rock Mass." Journal of Geo-
technical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 135(1), 26-36.

Mandel, J., and Salencon, J. (1972). “Force protante d’un sol sur une assise rigide (étude
théorique),” Geotechnique, Vol. 22, No. 1, pp. 79-93.

Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R. (1988), "Theoretical Stress Strain Model for Con-
fined Concrete" ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1804-1826.

Mander, J. B., Priestley, M. J. N.,Park R. (1988), "Observed Stress-Strain Behavior of Con-

fined Concrete" ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering 114,pp. 1827-1849.

MacGregor, J. G., and Wight, J. K. (2005). Reinforced Concrete: Mechanics and Design
4th Edition, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.

Marinos, P., and Hoek, E., (2000). “GSI – A Geologically Friendly Tool for Rock Mass
Strength Estimation,” Proceedings, GeoEngineering 2000 Conference, Melbourne, 1422-
1442.
Matlock, H. (1970). "Correlations for Design of Laterally-loaded Piles in Soft Clay." Paper
No. OTC 1204, Second Annual Offshore Technology Conference, OTC, Houston, TX, 577-
594.

Mayne, P. W., Brown, D., Vinson, J., Schneider, J. A., and Finke, K. A. (2000). "Site Char-
acterization of Piedmont Residual Soils at the NGES, Opelika, Alabama." National Geo-
technical Experimentation Sites, GSP 93.

Mayoral, J., Pestana, J., Seed, R. (2005). Determination of Multidirectional p-y Curves for
Soft Clays, ASTM Geotechnical Testing Journal, 28(3).

McVay, M. C., O'Brien, M., Townsend, F. C., Bloomquist, D. G., and Caliendo, J. A. (1989).
"Numerical Analysis of Vertically Loaded Pile Groups," ASCE, Foundation Engineering
Congress, Northwestern University, Illinois, July, pp. 675-690.

McVay, M. C., M., Niraula, L., (2004). "Development of Modified T-Z Curves for Large Dia-
meter Piles/Drilled Shafts in Limestone for FB-Pier," Florida Department of Trans-
portation, 4910-4504-878-12, National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA.

McVay, M., Townsend, F., Bloomquist, D., O'Brien, M. O., and Caliendo, J. A. (1989).
"Numerical Analysis of Vertically Loaded Pile Groups." Foundation Engineering: Current
Principles and Practices, F. H. Kulhawy, ed., ASCE, Evanston, Illinois, United States.

McVay, M., Townsend, F., and Williams, R. (1992). "Design of Socketed Drilled Shafts in
Limestone." Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, 118(10), 1626-1637.

Meyerhoff, G. G. (1953). “The Bearing Capacity of Foundations Under Eccentric and

Inclined Loads,” Proceedings, Third International Conference on Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering, Zürich, Vol. 1, pp. 440-445.

Meyerhoff, G. G. (1963). “Some Recent Research on the Bearing Capacity of Found-

ations,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 16-26.
Meyerhoff, G. G. (1974). “Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Footings on Sand Layer Overlying
Clay,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 224-229.

Meyerhoff, G. G. and Adams, J. I. (1968). “The Ultimate Uplift Capacity of Foundations,”

Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 5, No. 4, pp. 225-244.

Meyerhoff, G. G. and Chaplin, T. K. (1953). “The Compression and Bearing Capacity of

Cohesive Soils,” British Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 4, pp. 20-26.

Meyerhoff, G. G. and Hanna, A. M. (1978). “Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Foundations on

Layered Soil under Inclined Load,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, pp.
565-572.

Meyerhoff, G. G. (1965). “Shallow Foundations,” Journal of Soil Mechanics and Found-

ations Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 91, No. SM2, pp. 21-31

Mitchell, J. S., "A Nonlinear Analysis of Bi-Axially Loaded Beam-Columns Using a Dis-
crete Element Model," Ph. D. Dissertation, The University of Texas at Austin, August,
1973.

Mirza, S., A., and MacGregor, J., G., "Variability of mechanical properties of reinforcing
bars,", ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering, 105(ST5):921-937, May 1979.

Morgenstern, N. R., and Eigenbrod, K. D. (1974). "Classification of Argillaceous Soils and

Rocks" Journal of the Geotechnical Engineering Division, 100(10), 1137-1156.

Mosher, R. L. (1984). "Load Transfer Criteria for Numerical Analysis of Axially Loaded
Piles in Sand." Technical Report K-84-1, U. S. Army Waterways Experiment Station, Auto-
matic Data Processing Center, Vicksburg, Mississippi.

Murchison, J. M. and O’Neill, M. W. (1984). "Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Cohe-

sionless Soils," from Analysis and Design of Pile Foundations, proceedings of a sym-
posium sponsored by the ASCE Geotechnical Engineering Division, ASCE National
Convention, San Francisco, CA, pp. 174-191.
NCHRP (2018). Contribution of Steel Casing to Single Shaft Foundation Structural Resist-
ance, Transportation Research Board, Washington, D.C.

NCHRP (2006). Synthesis 360, Rock – Socketed Shafts for Highway Structures Found-
ations, Transportation Research Board, Washington, D.C.

NCHRP (2001). Static and dynamic lateral loading of pile groups, NCHRP Report 461,
Washington, D.C

El Naggar, and Bentley (2000), "Dynamic analysis for laterally loaded piles and dynamic
p-y curves", Can. Geotech. J. 37: 1166–1183.

O’Neill, M. W., Brown, D., Anderson, D. G., El Naggar, M., Townsend, F. C., and McVay, M.
C. (1997). "Static and Dynamic Lateral Loading of Pile Groups." NCHRP 24-9, Highway
Research Program, Harbert Engineering Center, Auburn University, Auburn, AL.

O’Neill, M. W., and Dunnavant, T. W. (1984). “A Study of the Effects of Scale, Velocity, and
Cyclic Degradability on Laterally Loaded Single Piles in Overconsolidated Clay,” Report
No. UHCE 84-7, Department of Civil Engineering, University of Houston-University Park,
Houston, 368 p.

O’Neill, M. W., and Gazioglu, S. M. (1984). “An Evaluation of p-y Relationships in Clays,”
Report to the American Petroleum Institute, PRAC 82-41-2, The University of Houston-
University Park, Houston.

O’Neill M.W., and Murchison J. (1983). An Evaluation of P-Y Relationships in Sands,

University of Houston.

O’Neill, M. W., Townsend, F. C., Hassan, K. M., Buller, A., and Chan, P. S. (1996). "Load
Transfer for Drilled Shafts in Intermediate Geomaterials." FHWA-RD-95-172.

Peck, R. B., W. E. Hanson, and T. H. Thornburn (1953). Foundation Engineering, John

Wiley and Sons, New York.
Peck, R.B., Hanson, W. E. and Thornburn, T. H., "Foundation Engineering", John Wiley &
Sons, 1974.

Pinder, Terrence, "A Model for Concrete Under The Effect of Transverse Confinement",
Report presented to the graduate committee of the Department of Civil Engineering,
University of Florida, Summer 1997.

Precast Conrete Institute, PCI Design Handbook, 4th Ed., Chicago IL, 1992.

Priestley, M. J. N., Seible, F., and Calvi, G. M. (1996). Seismic Design and Retrofit of
Bridges, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Randolph, M. F., "Piles Subjected to Torsion," Journal of the Geotechnical Division, ASCE,
Vol. 107, No. GT8, August, 1981, pp. 1095-1111.

Reese, L.C. (1997)., “Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in Weak Rock,” Journal of Geo-
technical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 123, No. 11, pp. 1010–1017.

Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R., and Koop, F. D. (1974). "Analysis of Laterally Loaded Piles in
Sand." Sixth Annual Offshore Technology Conference, OTC, Houston, TX, OTC-2080-MS.

Reese, L. C., Cox, W. R., and Koop, F. D. (1975). "Field Testing and Analysis of Laterally
Loaded Piles in Stiff Clay." Seventh Offshore Technology Conference, OTC, Houston, TX,
OTC-2312-MS.

Reese, L. C., Isenhower, W. M., Wang, S. (2006). Analysis and Design of Shallow and Deep
Foundations, Wiley, ISBN: 978-0-471-43159-6.

Reese, L. C., and O'Neill, M. W. (1988). "Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and
Design Methods." Publication No. HI-88-042, Federal Highway Administration, McLean,
Virginia, 564.
Reese, L. C., and van Impe, W. F. (2011). Single piles and pile groups under lateral load-
ing, CRC Press/Balkema, London, UK.

Reese, L. C., and Welch, R. C. (1975). "Lateral Loading of Deep Foundations in Stiff Clay."
Journal of the Geotechnical Engineering Division, 101(GT7), 633-649.

Rollins, K. M., Gerber, T. M., Lane, D., and Ashford, S. A. (2005a). "Lateral Resistance of a
Full-Scale Pile Group in Liquefied Sand." Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering, 131(1), 115-125.

Rollins, K. M., Hales, L. J., Ashford, S. A., and Camp III, W. M. (2005b). "P-Y Curves for
Large Diameter Shafts in Liquefied Sand from Blast Liquefaction Tests." Seismic Per-
formance and Simulation of Pile Foundations in Liquefied and Laterally Spreading
Ground.

Sayed, S. M. and Bakeer, R. M. "Efficiency Formula For Pile Groups," Journal of the Geo-
technical Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 118, No. 2, Paper No.
26553, 1992, pp. 278-299.

Schnabel, P. B., Lysmer, J., and Seed, H. B. (1972). "SHAKE: A Computer Program for Earth-
quake Response Analysis of Horizontally Layered Sites." University of California, Berke-
ley, Earthquake Engineering Research Center.

Scott, B., D., Park R., and Priestley, M., J., N., "Stress-strain Behavior of concrete confined
by overlapping hoops at low and high strain rates,", ACI Journal , 79(1): 13-27, Jan./Feb
1982.

Seed, R. B. and Harder, L. F., (1990). “SPT-Based Analysis of Cyclic Pore Pressure Gen-
eration and Undrained Residual Strength,” H. Bolton Seed, Memorial Symposium, BiTech
Publishers Ltd., 2, 351-376

Simpson, M., and Brown, D. A. (2003). "Development of P-Y Curves for Piedmont Resid-
ual Soils." Highway Research Center, Harbert Engineering Center, Auburn University.
Skempton, A. W. (1951). "The Bearing Capacity of Clays." Proceedings, Building Research
Congress, Vol I, Part IIV, 180-189.

Stoll, U.W., "Torque Shear Test of Cylindrical Friction Piles," Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol.
42, No. 4, April., 1972, pp.63-64.

Stone, W., C. and Cheok, G., S., "Inelastic Behavior of Full-Scale Bridge Columns Subjected
to Cyclic Loading". Report No. NIST/BSS-166, National Institute of Standards and Tech-
nology, U.S. Department of Commerce, Gaithersberg, MD 20899, Jan. 1989.

Sudip Basack, (2007) "Experimental Investigation of Pile Group under Lateral Cyclic Load
in Layered Soil", Dept. of Applied Mechanics, Bengal Engineering and Science University

Taghavi, A., McVay, M. C., Niraula, L., Davidson, M. T., and Patil, A. H., (forthcoming),
“Axial and Lateral Resistance Coupling in the Analysis of Large-Diameter Drilled Shafts,”
Canadian Geotechnical Journal (under second review).

Taghavi, A., Muraleetharan, K. K., and Miller, G. A. (2017). "Nonlinear seismic behavior of
pile groups in cement-improved soft clay." Soil Dyn Earthq Eng, 99, 189-202.

Tedesco, J. W., McDougal, W. G., and Ross, C. A. (1999). Structural Dynamics: Theory and
Applications, Addison Wesley-Longman, Menlo Park, CA.

Terzaghi, K. (1943). Theoretical Soil Mechanics, Wiley, New York.

Vesic, A. S. (1963) “Bearing Capacity of Deep Foundation in Sand.” Highway Research

Record Mo. 39, National Academy of Sciences, pp. 112-153.

Vesic, A. S. (1973) “Analysis of Ultimate Loads of Shallow Foundations.” Journal of Soil

Mechanics and Foundations Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 99, No.
SM1, pp. 45-73.
Vijayvergiya, V. N. (1977). "Load-movement characteristics of piles," Proceedings, Ports
77, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol II, 269-286.

Wang, S., Kutter, B. L., Chacko, M. J., Wilson, D. W., Boulanger, R. W., and Abghari, A.
(1998). "Nonlinear Seismic Soil-Pile Structure Interaction." Earthq Spectra, 14(2), 377-
396.

Wang, S. T., and Reese, L. C., (1993) "COM624P – Laterally loaded pile analysis for the
microcomputer, ver. 2.0" FHWA-SA-91-048, Springfield, VA,.

Wang, S. T., and Reese, L. C., (1998). “Design of Piles Foundations in Liquefied Soils,” Geo-
technical Earthquake Engineering and Soil Dynamics III, Geotechnical Special Publication
No. 75, 1331-1343.

Welch, R.C. and Reese L.C. (1972). "Laterally loaded behavior of drilled shafts." Research
Report 3-5-65-89. Center for Highway Research. University of Texas, Austin.

Wolf, J. P. (1985). Dynamic soil–structure interaction, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Upper Saddle

River, NJ.

Yassin, M., "Nonlinear analysis of prestressed concrete structures under monotonic and
cyclic loads", PhD. dissertation, University of California, Berkeley, 1994.

Yates, K., Fenton, C. H., and Bell, D. H. (2018). "A review of the geotechnical char-
acteristics of loess and loess-derived soils from Canterbury, South Island, New Zealand."
Engeering Geology, 236, 11-21.
Tutorials

Tutorials can be found on BSI website at https://b-

si.ce.ufl.edu/products/Tutorials.aspx?software=7.

Also, a program feature showcase can be found at https://b-

si.ce.ufl.edu/support/featuresshowcase.aspx?software=7.